Home

Manual TextMaker 2016

1. esssseesseeeeseseeeseseeeseeressereresesrenresee 450 Locatie comments sssrinin a A E Sete 451 Settings TOL COMMENIS gasae e a E R eter saes 451 Tracking changes in a document ssssssssssesseseseeesssssesesesrenesreseseseenesenenseresee 453 Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function ee ee ceeeeteceseceseeneee 454 Step 2 Making the desired changes 00 0 0 cece ceecseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseenseenaes 454 Step 3 Accepting rejecting Changes 0 00 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceseceseenseenaes 455 Settings for the Track changes function 0 0 cece cect ceseeseneeeeesseteseseens 456 Internet functions 459 Opening HTML documents cece ceeescseesesseeeseecsesecsesesessesesssessneseenees 459 Editing HTML documents 20 00 eee eceecceescesecesecesecnsecsaecaeecaeeeseseeeeeeeenens 460 Page formatin eos tices cc iss nee e ea e ode EEEE EEE EE S AEE Si 460 Pictures in HTML documents ssesesseessseeesseeeeresesreereseeerrsrerensesrreresrreresre 460 Tables in HTML documents sssesesseessseeeeeeerrssesreeesreersseeressesrreresreeresee 461 Horizontal lines eee aneen erei oes iaer eea EOE EEE EES 461 Manual TextMaker 2016 Contents e xi Creating Eia ANE desi ees evans tation Maresh ads 462 Saving HTML documents eee isens heess iane esve einierde 464 Outputting documents 465 Print preViews i4e G 0 4 Sean EA Rais Ate A ae 466 Printing a document aansien e Ee a e E S 467 Printing a form letter orae a es e Ea p
2. 4 w r Whenever you want to fill out a prepared form you should activate Forms mode In this mode only forms objects can be filled out access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMaker s functions is blocked This prevents users from chang ing those parts of the form that shouldn t be changed In this chapter you will learn how to work with forms E Filling out forms The first section explains how a prepared form is filled out Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 295 Creating forms In the following section you will learn everything you need to know to be able to create your own forms To create a form you insert forms objects at all the places where something is to be filled in later for example text fields and text frames for text entries checkboxes for items to be checked off and dropdown lists for selections from among several given options Forms objects in detail In this section the available types of forms objects are described in detail Forms advanced functions In the last section you will get acquainted with some functions for advanced users functions for changing the tab order for protecting forms from being changed and for performing calculations Filling out forms First we will apply ourselves to the filling out of prepared forms The creation of forms will be described thereafter in the section Creating forms beginning on page 299 Forms differ from other documen
3. Next center both footer lines select them first with the icon in the Format ting toolbar so that the footer lines appear on the screen something like this 52 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 T Tour3tmd a Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Athnta G4 30008 Telephone 595 555 4242 Fax 5555554243 E SunTrump Bank Atenta Account No 123 456 78 Routing Code STBB 543 To get back to the normal text after setting up the footer lines simply click on any position in the text with the mouse Later if you want to edit the footer lines again all you have to do is click again with the mouse on one of the footer lines Give it a try click on the line under Bring your family along in the text and you are back in the text This gives us an opportunity to place the complementary close under the last line of the text Enter a blank line there with and type With best regards Ca Escher Escher amp Sons Architects With this our letter is essentially finished In this next and last lesson segment all we want to do is place a line above the footer to emphasize it better Lines and borders Note You will find detailed information about this topic in section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 In a letter a line is often drawn between the footer and the body text This is very easily accomplished in TextMaker with the command Format
4. Cancel E m H A E Z New window 4 L gt gt J Description The dialog box for File gt New 32 e Basics Manual TextMaker 2016 A dialog window appears in which you can select the document template for the new document If you simply want to begin a new document and don t want to concern yourself further at the moment with document templates just choose the standard template NORMAL TMV As soon as you confirm with OK the new document will be set up Using document templates Apart from the standard template NORMAL TMV you will also see some folders that can be opened with a double click These folders contain prepared document templates for letters faxes etc All you have to do is fill them in Hint In the right half of the dialog a preview of the currently selected template is presented The preview can be turned on off with the gt gt button and the lt lt button anytime you wish For detailed information on working with document templates see the section Document templates beginning on page 139 New window option The New window checkbox in this dialog has the following meaning If it is turned on the new document will appear in a new document window If not the document already in the active window will be closed and the new document will be opened in its stead Opening documents To open an existing document invoke the command File
5. 4 Enter the read and or write password at least 4 and no more than 15 charac ters Important If you forget a password you can no longer open or save the document Therefore it is advisable to write down the password paying at tention to the cases of letters 5 Confirm with OK 6 A dialog appears and requires you to verify the read and or write password by reentering it 7 Confirm with OK 8 Exit the dialog box with OK 9 Save the document to make the changes effective From now on anyone who attempts to open this document will be asked automati cally for the password If the correct password is entered the protection will be lifted for the duration of the edit session Using the above described dialog you can select any of the following types of protection No protection The document is not protected This is the default setting 502 o Document protection Manual TextMaker 2016 m Write protection When the document is opened the user is given the opportunity to enter the write password The document can be saved only when the correct write pass word has been entered If the user enters a false password or no password at all the document is opened write protected and cannot be saved not even under another name Read protection When the user tries to open the document he is prompted to enter the read password If he enters a false password or no password at all the document is not open
6. Comments group box Highlight comments in text When this option is enabled all text segments to which comments are attached are highlighted in color m Print comments When this option is enabled comments appear not only on the screen but also on the printed page Note Regular text will be reduced in size to make room on the printed page for the comments Thus its measurements will not correspond to the meas urements specified for the document Color Specifies the color to be used to highlight commented text and to display comments in the comments pane Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions e 451 If you use the default setting By Author a different color is selected automati cally for each user who edits the document When the first user adds comments these appear in red When a second user subsequently opens the document and adds comments those appear in blue etc Note For this to work correctly all users who edit the document must have entered their names in the preferences To enter your name invoke Tools gt Options switch to the General tab activate either the User Home button or the User Business button and type your name or at least your initials in the appropriate edit boxes Comments pane group box m Show automatically This check box corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Comments gt Automatically Show Comments Pane The comments pane is an area in the right margin that disp
7. Show close button on inactive tabs If enabled an X button is displayed on the right of each tab You can click this button to close the corresponding window If you deactivate this option the X button is displayed in the tab for the current window only Show warning when loading OLE objects Android and Linux only When this option is enabled the program displays a warning that OLE objects cannot be displayed when you open a document contain ing such objects OLE objects can be displayed only under Windows Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 529 Preferences Edit tab The Edit tab in the Tools gt Options dialog allows you to set preferences for editing text Capitalize first letter of sentences When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically capitalizes the first letter of every sentence you type even if you accidentally enter a lowercase letter For example if you typed the sentence this is a new sentence it would be corrected automatically to This is a new sentence Correct first two uppercase letters When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically corrects the case of words such as proper names whose first two letters have been capitalized inadvertently For example if you typed the word HEnry it would be corrected automatically to Henry Select whole words when selecting Windows and Linux only When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically extend
8. To close it click on the Close button in the toolbar or press the key Using the print preview toolbar The print preview provides a toolbar with the following controls from left to right qi Use these controls to jump from page to page The two arrow buttons jump to the previous next page The edit field in the middle lets you jump to a specific page Type in the desired page number and press the Enter key tees The next three buttons have the following functions m The left button invokes the File gt Page Setup command to modify the page format paper size orientation margins headers and footers etc See also sec tion Page formatting page 99 E The middle button invokes the File gt Print command which prints the docu ment See also section Printing a document page 467 466 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 m The right button invokes the File gt Export as PDF file command which generates a PDF file from the document See also section Exporting a docu ment to a PDF file page 477 Sli Qh These controls can be used to change the zoom level Either type in a zoom level in the edit field and press the Enter key or click one of the buttons at the left to choose the zoom level m Actual document size zoom level 100 E Fit margins in window m Display one full page Display two full pages Activate magnifying glass when this tool is active use your mou
9. with TextMaker When this option is enabled your SmartText entries can be expanded right in the text All you have to do is type the abbreviation for the SmartText entry e g sd and then press the space bar Enter key or a punctuation key in order to signal TextMaker to replace the abbreviation with the content of the SmartText entry If this option is disabled SmartText entries can be called out only with the Insert gt SmartText command Smart quotes TextMaker can automatically transform double quotes and single quotes as they are typed so that they are typographically correct based on the selected language You can specify the relevant language or you can specify None if you Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 537 want TextMaker to leave your quote marks as you typed them and make no chang es For example if you type Text or Text the result will depend on this setting as follows Setting Text Text None Text Text no change German Text Text Swiss German Text gt Text lt English Text Text French Text lt Text gt Auto see below The Auto option presents a special case If you select this option TextMaker detects the language automatically using either the default language set in the preferences or the language assigned with Format gt Character and transforms the quote marks accordingly Preferences Files tab The Files t
10. 3 Choose the desired style Hint In the right half of the dialog a preview of the currently selected style is presented The preview can be turned on off with the gt gt button and the lt lt button anytime you wish 4 Click on Apply The formatting of the selected text changes to correspond to the specifications for the character style Tip 1 You can also select character styles from the font list in the Formatting toolbar Tip 2 If you have assigned a keyboard shortcut to the format style you can apply the style even more quickly Select the text to which you want to apply it and press the assigned key combination Tip 3 Additionally you can use the sidebar to apply styles and even modify them see section Character styles and the sidebar page 127 To remove a style apply the Normal character style to the text Keep in mind that text to which a character style has been applied can always be given additional formatting with Format gt Character Modifying character styles It goes without saying that you can modify character styles whenever you want Important When a character style is changed the formatting of all text seg ments to which this style has been applied is automatically changed accordingly However this automatic reformatting is limited for any such text segments to which manual character formatting has also been applied see next section To edit a character style proceed as
11. 4 Make sure that the Apply to option in the formatting dialog box is set to Cur rent section 5 Check the Restart auto numbers option 6 Confirm with OK Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 185 It should not surprise you that most of the options in the Format gt Section dialog have to do with text columns Sections exist not merely to allow auto numbers to be reset but also to facilitate multi column layouts Adding line numbers Apart from the various kinds of numbering functions described in the preceding sections TextMaker provides a function that displays line numbers alongside a document s text The line numbers appear in the left margin both on the display and on the printed page To instruct TextMaker to show line numbers proceed as follows 1 Select as necessary the text segment for which line numbers are to be shown 2 Invoke the Format gt Section command 3 Switch to the Line numbers tab 4 Check the Show line numbers option 5 As necessary make the required settings for the numbering see below 6 Confirm with OK The line numbers are now displayed Deactivating or skipping line numbers In order to turn the display of line numbers off again follow the above described procedure unchecking the Show line numbers option at step 4 In case you just want to skip the numbering for certain paragraphs select those paragraphs invoke Format gt Paragraph switch to the Text Flow
12. Here you can either type the recipient s name or select the field from the attached database that contains names This information will then appear in the transmission report generated by your fax software After your OK the document is routed to your fax software and the fax transmis sion begins If this dialog box does not appear If the dialog described above does not ap pear and a dialog box produced by your fax software appears instead you have either disabled the Extended fax support option in the File gt Send gt Fax dialog or you are using fax software that TextMaker does not recognize Naturally you can still fax the document But you cannot use the procedure described in this section instead you must specify the recipient you want in your fax software s dialog box see your fax software manual Faxing a form letter Note Fax functions are available only in the Windows version of TextMaker Its ability to handle the fax transmission of form letters to multiple recipients is another benefit of TextMaker for Windows extended fax support described earlier in this manual Important To be able to send form faxes you must have installed fax software on your computer that is supported by TextMaker see section Requirements for extended fax support beginning on page 472 If you have not done this you should not use the form fax command To send a form letter by fax proceed as follows Manual TextMake
13. To delete a style in the current document select it in the dialog and then click on the Delete button To give a style a new name click on Rename and type the new name Note The Delete button is not available for predefined styles To delete or rename styles in a document template open the document template make the changes there and save the template The scope of character styles You changed a character style but the formatting of some of the text segments to which this style had been applied didn t change accordingly This happens when those segments had been reformatted manually An example Let s assume that you define a style with the Arial font and apply it If you subse quently change the style s font to Times New Roman all the text segments that are formatted in this style are reformatted accordingly But If you had selected a completely different font for one of these text segments with Format gt Character or the Formatting toolbar any changes you make to the character style thereafter will no longer be applicable to this text segment That is to say manually applied character formats take precedence over styles If you want to free such a text segment of its manual formatting invoke Format gt Standard The formatting specified for the applied character style will then be restored to the segment The character style Normal A character style named Normal is present by default in every docume
14. USA Phone USA 1 562 432 2920 for international customers 1 800 827 0685 for customers within the USA and Canada Fax USA 1 562 432 2857 E mail English sales dessci com Internet www dessci com 246 e OLE objects Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings In the preceding chapters you learned how to insert pictures and other objects directly into the body text There is an alternative way to insert such objects They can be inserted in the form of frames pictures for example as picture frames The difference Frames occupy fixed positions on the page You can adjust their positions of course but unless you do so deliberately they remain at their fixed positions on the page This means that a frame does not move when you add or delete text above it Thus frames are useful whenever you want to include text boxes pictures or similar objects in your document and you want those objects to remain at specified positions on their pages A frame can be inserted right on top of existing body text The existing text is then automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the frame In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know to become familiar with frames and drawings The chapter covers the following topics E Frames basic functions page 248 Here you will get acquainted with basic operations such as inserting selecting and editing frames and other objects m Frames
15. When you are working on a document it is good practice to save it frequently You can use the Save command in the File menu to save the file or you can use the key combination ctriJ S Using either method saves the document in the active window under the current filename If the document does not yet have a name TextMaker automatically asks you to supply a name by opening the Save as dialog box Saving under a different name or in a different place To save a document under a new name or location on your computer use the command File gt Save as This saves your document too but you can first give it another name or select another folder in which to save it Saving in a different file format With File gt Save as you can also save a document in another file format To do so simply choose the desired format from the Save as type list before clicking the Save button See also chapter Working with other file formats beginning on page 505 Saving all open documents If you have several document windows open at the same time you can use the command File gt Save all to save all documents open in all the windows TextMak er checks which of the documents have been altered since the last save and saves only those that have been changed Exiting the application To exit TextMaker use the File gt Exit command If any of the open documents have been altered since they were last saved Text Maker automatically asks w
16. 182 e Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 4 5 Select the desired numbered list Click on Apply The paragraphs are now formatted with the numbering specified in the selected list Note When you apply a hierarchical list in which the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option is checked numberings will appear only on headings Normal text paragraphs with outline level zero will have no numberings Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are given below with their func tions List level Here you can specify the list level for the paragraph to which a hierarchical numbered list is to be applied For example if you set this option to 1 the para graph will formatted as a list item at level 1 and will have a number of the form 1 while if you set the option to 3 the paragraph will have a number of the form 1 1 1 etc Note The list level can not be specified if you have checked the Use para graph s outline level as list level option because in that case automatically uses the paragraph s outline level as the list level Restart numbering Starts a new number sequence at the selected paragraph in other words resets the numbering of paragraphs at the current level to 1 Note If multiple paragraphs are selected when the command is invoked the first selected paragraph becomes the basis for resetting the numbering Changing list levels with the Formatting too
17. 5 Exit the application 6 When closing the application might ask you whether you want to update the object in the TextMaker document If it does answer Yes 7 The OLE object frame is inserted If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners The OLE object created in the other application is now embedded in the TextMaker document Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 283 No special action is required to insert the frame on top of existing body text the text is automatically reformatted so that it flows around the frame Instead of creating a new object for insertion into the frame you can use an object that already exists in a file You do this at step 3 in the above described procedure by selecting the Create from File option and then specifying the file to be linked in rather than by selecting an object type You will find additional information about working with OLE objects in the chapter OLE objects beginning on page 239 Changing the properties of OLE object frames To modify the properties of an OLE object frame first select the frame with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modif
18. 6 In the new dialog box that appears specify the format s for which you want to search Then confirm with OK 7 Now you can start the search with the Search button To search for formatting and replace it with other formatting proceed as follows 1 Invoke Edit gt Replace 2 Using the Format button specify the formatting for which you want to search see above and confirm with OK 3 Click in the Replace with field 4 Again use the Format button to specify the formatting that is to replace the formatting specified above as the search term Again confirm with OK 5 Now you can start the search with the Search button When TextMaker finds an occurrence of the search term it displays the occurrence in the document window Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 155 To continue searching click on the Search again button Alternatively if you want to replace the present occurrence of the formatting click on the Replace button If you click on Replace all TextMaker replaces the occurrence of the formatting it has just found and all subsequent occurrences that it finds in the text with the new formatting Tip You can use this function to replace for example one font with another wherever the former occurs in the document However experts would use styles to do this see chapter Styles beginning on page 119 since they provide a much more elegant means of accomplishing this task If you change the f
19. Adding line numbers page 186 98 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting This chapter covers everything related to the formatting of pages in TextMaker It includes the following sections Inserting manual page breaks If you want to begin a new page before the text has reached the end of the current page you can always insert a manual page break Read this section for more details m Page setup You can specify the page format of a document with the File gt Page Setup command Here you can set such things as paper size page orientation portrait or landscape and page margins m Headers and footers Headers and footers are lines of text that are always printed the same way at the top and bottom respectively on every page of the document This section de scribes how to create and edit them m Master pages Headers and footers are parts of the so called master page On the master page you can insert all types of object frames for example an image frame contain ing a watermark Objects added on the master page appear on every page of the document Dividing a document into chapters Changes to any of the above options always affect the entire document unless you divide the document into chapters Each chapter can have its own page formatting You should divide the document into chapters when for example you need to change the headers and footers or the paper format in the midd
20. Ctrl letter letter are allowed Removing a keyboard shortcut Any time after assigning a shortcut to a command you can undo your actions and remove the assignment To do this proceed as follows 572 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 1 Invoke as described above the Edit Keyboard Mapping dialog 2 Select the command category from the Group list and then select the desired command from the Command list 3 All the shortcuts currently assigned to this command appear in the Current shortcut keys field Select the shortcut you want to remove and click on the Remove button 4 Confirm with OK and exit the main dialog box with Close The shortcut is now removed and the command cannot be invoked with this shortcut anymore Resetting the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping If you click on the Reset button in the dialog box of the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command all the shortcuts of the selected keyboard map ping will be reset to their default settings Note During this process all modifications that you have made to the shortcuts in this keyboard mapping are lost This function is applicable only to the pre defined keyboard mappings Standard and Classic Using the grid The grid is a positioning aid for object frames and drawings When it is enabled objects cannot be shifted to arbitrary positions instead they snap from one grid point to the next Activating the Snap to g
21. Manual TextMaker 2016 1987 2015 SoftMaker Software GmbH Contents Welcome Technical SUpport nennir es About this manual sesseeseseeeseeesssreerssrerresrrrreresrees System requireMents ee ee eee eeceseceseceeeseeeeees Installation and program startup Installing under Windows eeccecsseceeeeenteceenees Installing under Linux eeeceeeecsseceeeeeeeeeeenees Installing on an Android device ceeeeeeteceeeeee The application screen Standard toolbar cccccesescccccecsesessscececeeeesenteaeees Formatting toolbar 0 ceceececsseceececeteceeneecnaeeeenees Document WindOW cccceesessecececeesesseceeeeeeeeeenses Status Dar Se EEEE E E E EEE Basics Enten text edn enai Moving the text CUrSOT eeseseseseeesssereserssressressreeeee Deletina tekto eheee E en ip inii Undoing changes 000 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseceeesseenaes Insert OF OVELWIite 2 ee eee eee eeeceseeetecesecsseenees Beginning a new document eeeeseceeeeeesteceenees Opening document 0 eee eee eeeeeceeeceseceeenseenaes Printing documents 0 00 0 eeeceesseceeeeecnseceeeeeesaecesnees Saving documents 0 eee eee eeeeeeeceseceeceseenseesaes Exiting the application eesceececsseceeeecsneceenees The TextMaker Tour A practice letter neieiet i Saving the practice letter 0 eee eee eeee eres Simple formatting 00 eee cece cess ceseceeesaeenaes When something goes Wr
22. Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 159 Option Result Headings Bookmarks Tables Pictures Objects Footnotes Footnote references Comments Captions Sidebar displays all headings in the document Displays all bookmarks Displays all tables Displays all pictures Displays all objects pictures drawings tables etc Displays all footnotes Displays all footnote references the footnote numbers in the text Displays all comments Displays all captions for images etc The list displayed in the sidebar changes its contents accordingly If you click on any list entry TextMaker jumps right to the corresponding place in the document 160 o Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 Fields You can insert various kinds of fields in the text using the Insert gt Field com mand Fields are symbolic representations for the specific values or contents that are assigned to them depending on their types and placement in the text The Print date field for example stands for the current date the Page number field stands for the current page number etc The available fields even encompass fields from a database that are needed for form letters Whenever a document is opened or printed the contents of all its fields are updated automatically Thus if a document containing the Print date field were reprinted tomorrow tomorrow s date would appear automatically in the docume
23. Note The names of variables may contain only letters numbers and under scores Special characters are not allowed The name must always begin with a letter A maximum of 16 characters is allowed The cases of letters are ignored To use variables in calculations do the following 1 Invoke Insert gt Calculation 2 Type the variable s name followed by an equal sign and then a value or formula for example VOLUME 23 13 7 Important When you confirm with OK two things happen m The calculation is performed and the result is displayed in the text m At the same time the result is saved in the variable VOLUME Now the variable VOLUME can be used in other calculations for example the formula VOLUME 10 would produce the result 2093 10 that is 2103 You can also just call out the content of the variable VOLUME at another place in the text Simply move the text cursor to the desired position invoke Insert gt Calculation and type just the variable name VOLUME in the Formula box When you confirm with OK the content of the variable will appear in the text If you look at the Insert gt Calculation dialog box a little more closely you will discover that every variable that is currently valid is displayed in the Varia Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 381 ble Field list box Any of them can easily be inserted into the formula by double clicking on them Important A variable is valid only from the p
24. Search button Invokes a search dialog with which you can search for specific data more precisely than you can with a filter see above You will find information about this dialog in section Searching a database beginning on page 345 Find next button Displays the next record containing the search term Append button Adds a new record to the database List Form With the options List and Form you can switch between list view several data records in sequence and form view one complete record in detail Lists and labels With the Insert gt List Label command you can easily prepare list and labels of all kinds In most cases this command is used to create address labels filled with addresses stored in a database For general information on working with data bases see the first sections of the chapter Database beginning on page 339 354 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Ganente tev iacel Times New Roman 1110 ov Auto KA B ka w u 2 fzx ze m FIRSTNAME NAME1 STREET CITY STATE ZIP Output as Database Database field Y Label i Database List Table C Docs tmw dbf Records Format a All m Selected 1 Range From To Options Herma Laser print 4614 463 Full page with the current label 38 Copies Start row Start column Print New document Manage Apart from la
25. TextMaker now inserts a superscripted footnote marker an automatically generated number for the footnote It then creates an area for the footnote at the bottom of the page inserts a copy of the footnote marker in this area and positions the text cursor behind that marker You can now enter the text of the footnote To return from the footnote area back to the body text simply click anywhere in the text Alternatively you can use the Insert gt Footnote gt Go To Footnote Refer ence command which takes you back to the position in the text at which the footnote was inserted Changing footnote text after it has been entered You can edit the footnote texts at the bottom page margin any time you wish All you have to do is position the text cursor in the footnote area You can use one of the following procedures E Scroll to the page containing the footnote you want to change and click with the mouse in the footnote area in the bottom page margin Note This works only in normal view If you are working in some other view ing mode you must first switch to normal view with View gt Standard m You can also command TextMaker to find the next footnote in the text with Insert gt Footnote gt Go to Footnote When found the text cursor is positioned within the footnote area at the beginning of the corresponding footnote text Now you can edit the footnote text You already know how to return to the normal text simply click
26. This button opens a dialog with the following additional options Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 281 When you activate the Mix with color option and choose a color below the picture will be colorized accordingly The options in the Cropping group box can be used to crop the picture This is useful when you need only a segment of the picture For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the picture enter 25 percent at Top m Transparency group box Lets you modify the transparency settings of the image Options available Detect automatically Reads the transparency settings stored in the picture file and displays the image accordingly Note Only files in GIF or PNG format can contain transparency settings No transparency Ignores the transparency settings stored in the picture file Even pictures containing transparent areas will not be displayed transparently Color Lets you choose the color to be displayed transparently For example if you select white all white areas of the picture will become transparent File button To use a different picture file click this button and choose a new file Export button Available only for pictures that are saved in the document You can use this button to export the picture that is to save a copy of it on your hard disk If you check the Create link to file option in the Export dialog TextMaker first copies the picture from the document to a file
27. Tip You can also use keyboard shortcuts to jump into a comment and back When you position the text cursor somewhere inside a text segment that has a comment and press Ctri Ait 1J TextMaker jumps into the corresponding comment and you can edit it To get back to the body text press ee Deleting comments To delete a comment do the following 1 Position the text cursor anywhere within the text whose comment you want to delete 2 Invoke the command Tools gt Comments gt Delete Comment Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions e 449 Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the L amp icon in the Reviewing toolbar The comment is now removed Displaying and printing comments There are two ways of viewing comments m In the comments pane always visible When you insert a comment into a document for the first time or when you open a document that already contains comments a comments pane automati cally appears in the right margin of the document It displays all comments for the current page To indicate the relationships between comments and text each comment is connected by a line to the text segment to which it refers You can turn the comments pane on or off as needed by invoking the command Tools gt Comments gt Automatically Show Comments Pane Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the icon in the Reviewing toolbar Note Even with this option enabled the comments pane w
28. You can set bookmarks in a document with Insert gt Bookmark see section Bookmarks beginning on page 156 Normally these text markers are invisible However if you enable Show book marks they are displayed in the text surrounded by angle brackets This option is disabled by default Shade fields When you enable this option all fields inserted into the document with Insert gt Field date page number etc are indicated with a gray background so that their positions in the document can be easily recognized This option is disabled by default Show merge record This option is available only when you have attached a database to the current document with Tools gt Set Database When you enable this option the field names that normally represent database fields inserted into a document are replaced on the screen with the contents of the field from a specified record of the database You can enter the number of the record whose contents are to be displayed in the edit box to the right of Show merge record If you enter 10 for example the content of the field from the tenth record will be displayed This option is useful for checking the final appearance of a form letter before printing it see also chapter Form letters and form faxes beginning on page 367 By default this option is disabled Objects group box As described in the section Hiding objects page 272 you can make inserted
29. advanced functions page 271 This section is for advanced users Here you will learn for example how to hide and group frames and other objects After each of these topics is discussed the individual types of frames are intro duced in detail Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 247 m Text frames page 275 contain boxed text Picture frames page 279 contain pictures OLE object frames page 282 contain OLE objects E Drawings page 286 are frames that contain drawing objects including lines rectangles and other shapes Frames basic functions In this section you will find basic information about working with frames draw ings and other objects Inserting frames Selecting objects Object mode Changing the position size and margins of objects Rotating and flipping objects Aligning and distributing frames Duplicating objects Changing the properties of objects Functions for advanced users are described in the next section Frames ad vanced functions Inserting frames As you learned in the introduction to this chapter pictures and other objects don t have to be inserted directly into the body text they can be inserted in the form of frames Thus for example instead of inserting a picture directly into the text you can insert a picture frame The difference A frame occupies a fixed area on the page As long as you don t deliberately move it it remains always at a fi
30. sseesssessesesrseressseeerssterrerestreresreersseerrssesresresreet 518 Maximizing a document Window sessesesssseesestesssterresrsereresreersseerresesreeresreet 518 Minimizing a document Window 0 ec eceesceeceseceseceecssecesecaeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeens 518 Arranging document WindOWS eeeeseescesscesecesecesecesecsaecseecaeeeseseneeeeeeaeens 519 Using document tabs scsci s csseessesesesdes csveassgeaviseeecsecsscesveeso cs En orae eres iss 520 Customizing TextMaker 523 PLOLETEN CES pispis meee eneee peee Ei e aeS aes ae See Sae eS ea S 524 Preferences View aD a eaa ene aea eno arer enosn as 524 Preferences General tab ics esnan eee enpotan e kaeaea espessas 527 Preferences Edit taD a r eaa era aaa a esaeas A enosis 530 Preferences Appearance tab oo eeeeeeeseeeeeeesceeeeesecesecsecssecsaecnaesaeeens 532 Preferences Language tabin snoeit erdee Ea i enhan Epeen 535 Preferences l ERA ASE ES EEEE E AEE EEEE SE 538 Preferences System tab s ic csccssccissssceatsesssasesssssesscodassssevesevesestanscesbesonebecs 541 Preferences Fonts tab DORER E E AEE SE 545 Doctiment properties sisikii i reer iore ci sandsscsvsees sk thes tetbesevatas hedsesssseestees 546 Document properties Summary tab eee eeeeeeceseceecesecnneeeeeneeens 546 Document properties View taboo cece eeceeeeceeeceeecesecesecnsecaecsaeeneeeas 546 Document properties Colors tab eee eee eeceesceeecesecesecesecsaeceeeneeens 550 Document properties Fax
31. 1 5 9 When the option is not checked the numbering will not include the numbers of any higher level items Thus the above example will not be numbered with 1 5 9 but just with 9 Don t restart the level Available only for list levels of 2 and above in hierarchical lists When this option is checked the numbering of list items at the selected list level is not reset to 1 whenever a list item at this level follows an item at a higher level item For example if you check this option for level 2 the result will be as illustrated below Option unchecked Option checked 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 As you can see in the last item of the above example the 2nd level is continued with 2 3 instead of being reset to 2 1 when this option is checked Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 179 Reset button If you should ever make a big mistake or completely change your mind while editing a numbered list you can press the Reset button to make a fresh start The Reset function returns all the options for all list levels to their original settings The remaining options in this dialog allow you the change the way the numbered list will look as described on the next pages Note As mentioned above each level of a hierarchical list can have its own settings So before setting any of these options be sure to first select the level that you want to modify in the Level field Options for bul
32. 126 Format gt Drop Caps 90 Format gt Link 462 463 Format gt Manage Styles 137 Format gt Page Background 115 Format gt Paragraph 75 Borders tab 92 Drop Caps tab 90 Paragraph tab 76 77 78 79 80 81 Shading tab 91 Tabs tab 82 84 Text flow tab 96 98 328 329 Format gt Paragraph Style 129 132 133 135 Format gt Remove Link 462 464 Manual TextMaker 2016 Format gt Section line numbers 186 multi column page layouts 143 147 resetting auto numbers 185 Format gt Shading 91 Format gt Standard 72 125 Format gt Tabs 82 84 Format gt Transfer Formatting 69 Format URLs as hyperlinks 530 531 Format view for 546 549 Formatting toolbar 25 64 65 66 80 81 Forms 295 creating 299 example 302 filling out 296 protecting contents of forms objects 314 protecting forms 314 Forms Mode View menu 296 298 314 315 Forms objects protecting contents 314 use 305 Forms toolbar 301 Formulas 391 Frame guidelines 524 525 Frames 247 248 aligning and distributing 255 converting 271 272 distributing 255 grouping 273 inserting 248 margins 253 order 272 position 252 256 selecting 249 size 253 262 Freeforms drawing 286 287 properties 290 Full Page View menu 558 Full Screen View menu 559 Full screen view 559 Functions in calculations 396 G Generate Table of Contents Tools menu 418 419 432 Generate Table of Figures Tools menu 424 432 German spelling reform 324 I
33. 2 3 4 gives 14 The order of operations can be modified by using parentheses 2 3 4 gives 20 In addition there are comparative and logical operators that are needed for exam ple for the IF function Operator Function Is equal lt gt Is not equal gt Is greater than gt Is greater than or equal to lt Is less than lt Is less than or equal to amp Logical and Logical or Negation Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 395 Some notes on comparisons m When two text strings are compared with the result is true only when the strings are exactly the same and have the same length The cases of letters are taken into account in this comparison Henry Henry is true Henry henry is false Henry Henry s is false If you construct a complex comparison that has several ands and ors you should always enclose the individual conditions in parentheses Computational functions In TextMaker you can use the computational functions described below The arguments required by the functions are always given in parentheses n represents a number t represents a text string d represents a date So for example INT n is a function requiring a numeric argument It can be a numeric constant or the numeric result of a calculation for example INT 3 14 or INT SQRT 2 Important When several arguments are required they must be separate
34. 3 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 4 Select the style to be changed from the list 5 Click on Update from text Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 133 The style will forget its previous settings and adopt the formatting options of the specified text Of course you can still change the style s formatting options when ever you like independently from the text Deleting or renaming styles To delete a style in the current document select it in the dialog and then click on the Delete button To give a style a new name click on Rename and type the new name Note The Delete button is not available for predefined styles To delete or rename styles in a document template open the document template make the changes there and save the template The scope of paragraph styles You changed a paragraph style but the formatting of some of the paragraphs to which this style had been applied didn t change accordingly This happens when those paragraphs had been reformatted manually An example Let s assume that you define a style specifying the paragraph alignment to be centered If you subsequently change the style s alignment to flush right all the paragraphs to which this style is applied are reformatted accordingly But If you had selected a different alignment for one of these paragraphs with Format gt Paragraph or the Formatting toolbar any changes you make to the paragraph style thereafter will no longer be ap
35. Changing the outline levels of paragraphs To give a document an outline or to edit an existing outline switch to Outline view and there simply change the outline levels of the paragraphs that contain headings By default when you enter text into a document the text paragraphs are assigned to outline level 0 If you subsequently assign a specific paragraph for example to outline level 1 you promote it to a level one heading Thus you specify the document s major headings by assigning the corresponding paragraphs to outline level 1 If you want to add subheadings under the major headings you assign the corresponding paragraphs to outline levels 2 etc To change the outline level of a paragraph do the following 1 Invoke the Outline view with the View gt Outline command 2 Position the text cursor in the paragraph of interest 3 Click on one of the following icons in the Outline toolbar or use one of the following keyboard shortcuts Icon Function a Raises the paragraph s outline level by 1 Keyboard shortcut gt Lowers the paragraph s outline level by 1 Keyboard shortcut DD Lowers the paragraph s outline level to 0 normal text Keyboard shortcut 404 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Tip Additionally keyboard shortcuts through are defined for outline levels 1 through 3 The keyboard shortcut 0 is defined for level 0 normal text Thus you can use these key combinations to very
36. Document protection beginning on page 501 Document properties Forms tab The Forms tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to enable or disable Forms mode and optionally require a password to disable this mode When Forms mode is enabled only forms objects text fields checkboxes dropdown lists etc can be filled out Access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMaker s functions is blocked Note When you save a document in Forms mode Forms mode will still be active when you reopen the document You can enable or disable Forms mode with the Forms mode activated option Tip You can also use the View gt Forms Mode command to do this When you enable Forms mode and in addition enter a Password to deactivate anyone who subsequently attempts to disable this mode will be prompted for the password The mode will be disabled only if the user supplies the correct password Important If you save a document with Forms mode enabled and a password set and then forget the password you will never again be able to disable this mode So be sure to make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place You will find detailed information about working with forms in chapter Forms beginning on page 295 Shade forms objects Also available on this tab is an option called Shade forms objects If you check it all forms objects text fields checkboxes lists etc are displayed with a light gray background
37. Export tracked changes Using the Tools gt Track Changes command you can achieve that all changes made to a document will be displayed in color and underlined as described in section Tracking changes in a document page 453 When this option is enabled the text in the PDF file will be highlighted the same way as in the original document Preferences tab This tab contains options for modifying the output quality including the following m AutoShape options Sets the quality resolution in which AutoShapes and all other types of draw ings are exported The higher the setting the larger the resulting file will be Image options Lets you choose if images should be stored using a lossless compression method or the lossy JPEG compression method If you choose the latter op tion the JPEG quality option becomes available and lets you modify the quali ty level of the compression Hint Lossless compression provides perfect image quality However if your document contains a large number of images especially photographs the re sulting file can become rather large If this is the case you may want to switch to JPEG compression which provides a much higher compression rate for photographic images The option Use alpha channel for transparencies determines whether an alpha channel should be used when rendering transparencies in images or drawings Usually these look best when this option is enabled However some
38. If you also set the Background to some color other than white the shade will be a mixture of the foreground and background colors Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 91 mw Adding a pattern To add a pattern click on one of the patterns in the Pattern group box You can also select Foreground and Background colors for the pattern m Removing a shade or pattern If you want to remove an existing shade or pattern select None as the Type Then confirm with OK Borders and lines The command Format gt Borders allows you to add border lines to paragraphs and certain objects You can add lines at their left right top and or bottom When you invoke this command a dialog like the following is opened Cell Properties Borders Line style Single lines r Es vee None Outline Inside fre Double lines x a Thickness 1 pt Ne ro Color Black z A ll J l NJ en The dialog for border lines here for table cells A similar dialog box appears for all types of objects that allow you to add border lines e g table cells Essentially you operate this dialog as follows 92 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 1 First you specify what kind of border lines you want by selecting a line style thickness and color Then you pick where to apply the specified border lines by clicking on the respective lines in the preview box displayed in t
39. No language If you format a segment of text with No language it will be ignored by the spell checker In addition no hyphenation will be applied Application examples Some application examples in summary When you write documents exclusively in your native language Simply set the desired standard language with Tools gt Options Language tab done Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 319 When you occasionally write documents in a foreign language In this case it is not advisable to change the standard language setting to the foreign language This would lead to the desired result but it would not be very effective You would have to switch to the appropriate language every time you open a foreign language document and switch it back to your native language afterwards Instead it makes more sense to select the entire document invoke Format gt Character and change Language from Default to the desired foreign language there This way TextMaker will know the document s language both now and in the future When you occasionally write documents with foreign language citations Simply select the part that is in the foreign language invoke Format gt Character and set Language to the desired language Note You can change the language in a document as often as you like and even mix several languages Spell checking The spell checker examines the text in your document for spelling mistakes When
40. Page height With this setting the column height is set equal to the page height independently of text length Fixed height When you select this setting you can specify a fixed column height m Page break If this option is checked TextMaker inserts a page break at the beginning of the multi column section Restart auto numbers This option is does not affect the column layout but auto numbers If it is checked the Auto number field is reset to one in the current section You will find information about the use of auto numbers in section Numbering with Au to numbers beginning on page 185 m Text direction For text in Arabic script you can change the writing direction of a multi column text section with this option When you set the direction to right to left the column on the very right becomes the first column instead of the column at the very left See also chapter Working with Arabic text page 509 Manual TextMaker 2016 Multi column page layouts 145 Margins button Here you can specify the margins of the section allowing you to change for example the amount of blank space TextMaker should insert above and below the section Gutter line button With the help of the Gutter line button you can direct TextMaker to display vertical lines between the columns of multi column text When you click it a dialog appears allowing you to select the desired line style thickness etc
41. Review All Changes 455 456 Show Changes 455 456 Track Changes 454 455 Chapter Format menu 104 105 107 112 Chapter break 110 111 Chapter number 112 114 161 163 Chapters formatting 111 112 use 110 Character Format menu 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 73 Character count 554 Character field database 363 364 Character formatting modifying for an entire paragraph 81 searching and replacing 155 Character pitch 68 Character Style Format menu 121 123 124 126 Character styles 120 137 Chart Object menu Edit Data 225 226 228 Chart toolbar 227 Charts 223 chart elements 230 editing 227 entering editing data 228 inserting 223 properties 232 233 Check for updates 541 542 Check Spelling Tools Menu 321 Checkbox frames 299 309 Checkboxes 299 307 CHR function 396 397 588 e Index Circles drawing 286 288 properties 290 Classic keyboard mapping 569 Clearance for borders 92 95 Close File menu 518 Close All Window menu 518 Color of objects 263 of text 66 of the workspace 532 534 Color gradient for objects 263 264 Color palette modifying 550 Column break 96 143 Comments 447 Comments Tools menu 447 Automatically Show Comments Pane 450 451 452 Delete Comment 449 Edit Comment 449 Insert Comment 448 Next Comment 451 Options 451 Previous Comment 451 Compatibility document properties 546 550 Complex scripts 527 528 Compress pictures in memory 541 Computational functions 39
42. The paragraph style for entries in the bibliography Thus if you want to change the formatting of a table of references you can change one or more of these styles For example if you want to increase the font size for the major headings in the table of contents all you have to do is change the TOC 1 style accordingly 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the TOC 1 style from the list and click on Edit 3 A dialog appears to enable you to change the formatting Switch to the Para graph tab 4 Click on the Character button 5 Set the desired font size in the Size field 6 Exit the dialogs by clicking in succession on OK OK and Close Now the major headings in the table of contents are rendered in the new font size This formatting will remain in effect after you update the table and even if you remove and reinsert it If necessary you can go to chapter Styles beginning on page 119 to review general information about the use of styles Cross references With the Insert gt Cross reference command you can insert a reference to a specific text element for example a bookmark or an object into the text This command inserts a field that displays for example the page number of the targeted text element Thus if you have inserted a picture on page 3 of the docu ment you can introduce a cross reference to this picture for example see picture on page 3 at some other place in the
43. Undo ctrl Z Edit gt Redo ctr ji Edit gt Cut ctri x Edit gt Copy Ctr j C Edit gt Paste ctr WV Edit gt Paste Special Ctrl j Shifts Manual TextMaker 2016 Keyboard shortcuts e 581 Command Keyboard shortcut Edit gt Select All ctr Edit gt Search ctr Edit gt Replace ctr Edit gt Search Again F3 or Replace Again Edit gt Go To F5 or Edit gt Evaluate View gt Full Screen Format gt Standard Character formattings Select font in the Formatting toolbar Boldface on off Italics on off Underlining on off Superscript Subscript Remove super or subscript Paragraph formattings Increase left indent Decrease left indent Increase hanging indent Decrease hanging indent 582 o Keyboard shortcuts LFS E6 Ctr Ctr D Gtr B Ctr 1 CER uJ Ctrl Shifts Num Plus key on the numeric pad Ctrl Shifte Num Ctrl Shifts Num Manual TextMaker 2016 Command Keyboard shortcut Automatic single line spacing 1 line ctr1J 2 Automatic one and a half line spacing 1 5 lines Ctrljls Automatic double line spacing 2 lines ctr1 2 Alignment Left ctr 1 Alignment Right ctri R Alignment Centered Ctrl jl Alignment Justified ctrl J Par
44. Working with Arabic text In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know about composing and editing text in Arabic script The following topics are covered Activating extended support for Arabic text m Changing the text direction of paragraphs m Changing the direction of tables m Changing the direction of multi column text m Changing the font of Arabic text Inserting dates in Arabic See the next pages for details Important The features described in this chapter are only available when you have activated the Extended support for Arabic text option in the program settings see next section Activating extended support for Arabic text TextMaker includes an Extended Support for Arabic Text option that provides some additional features for editing Arabic text To activate this option proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Tools gt Options command 2 Switch to the General tab 3 Activate the Extended support for Arabic text option Important The features described in this chapter are only available when this option is activated Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with Arabic text e 509 Problems with the display of Arabic script If Arabic script is not displayed correctly when you open an Arabic document this usually indicates that your operating system does not have the required Arabic fonts installed In Windows XP you can resolve this by choosing Install files for complex script and right
45. as a number DAY 09 25 15 gives 25 Converts the date d to a date serial number needed to calculate the difference in days between two dates DTON 11 12 15 DTON 10 20 15 gives 23 days IF condition value1 value2 returns value when the condition is true otherwise value2 Example IF GENDER F Dear Madam Dear Sir Value2 can also be omitted see the section Conditional text beginning on page 390 Valuel and value2 can be of any type also for example numeric Returns the number n truncated to integer form without round ing so that the fractional value after the decimal point is suppressed the formula INT 3 90 would give the result 3 Returns the first n characters in the text LEFT TextMaker 4 gives Text string t Returns the length of text string t LEN fish gives 4 Converts the text string t to lowercase LOWER James gives james Returns text string with all leading space characters removed LTRIM Text gives Text Returns the maximum value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n1 upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example MAX B2 CS5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Calculations in the text e 397 MIN n1 n2 MONTH d NTOD n POW n1 n2 PROD n n2 RIGHT
46. but also for editing it You can use the Outline toolbar for this purpose too with the help of the arrow buttons you can raise or lower the outline levels of headings or promote paragraphs of normal text to headings Numbering headings Headings are often numbered TextMaker can take care of this numbering for you automatically You can read about this in section Numbering headings beginning on page 410 For detailed information on working with outlines see the pages that follow The following topics will be covered m Using the Outline view Formatting headings E Expert tip Managing headings with paragraph styles Practical outlining Numbering headings Outlined documents and chapters Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 403 Using the Outline view As mentioned in the introduction TextMaker puts at your disposal a special display mode for editing a document s outline the Outline view To switch to Outline view invoke the View gt Outline command You can return from Outline view to the normal view any time you wish with View gt Standard In Outline view you see the document as a structure whose parts are organized according to major and minor headings First level headings major headings are aligned flush left Each lower level heading is indented to the right by an amount corresponding to its level In the following sections you will learn all about what you can do in Outline view
47. command Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 273 Changing the names of objects Every object in a document must have a unique name This is necessary so that you can for example perform calculations on the contents of table cells or text fields Normally you don t need to concern yourself with these names since TextMaker assigns them automatically If you insert a rectangle in an empty document the rectangle is automatically named Rectanglel If you insert a picture it is named Picturel A second picture would be named Picture2 etc However you can change the names of objects whenever you wish For example if you have created a form that contains a text field where an address can be entered the name Address would naturally suggest itself for this field To change its name select the field invoke the Object gt Properties command switch to the Properties tab and change the entry in the Name field Remember that names must be unique If you attempt to assign a name to an object that is already in use for another object TextMaker will reject it and present an error message The purpose of names But what is the sense in giving all objects in a document unique names In the first place these names are necessary for calculations on the contents of objects For example to multiply the content of cell C3 in table Tablel by two you must reference the table by its name in your calculation e
48. ence between the first two items needs some clarification m The number of characters counts the visible characters only m The number of keystrokes also counts white spaces created with the space bar tab key etc Accordingly the sentence This is a test has 11 characters and 14 keystrokes since it contains three space characters Hint Using the Statistics toolbar If you need statistical functions frequently you may want to activate the Statistics toolbar which displays this information permanently Statistics x 3 640 keystrokes v To display or hide this toolbar right click on any toolbar to display a menu of all toolbars available There select the entry Statistics Then open the dropdown list in the Statistics toolbar and select which information to display characters words sentences etc Note The statistics toolbar is not updated automatically while you type text To update it click the icon with the red arrows Document properties Protection tab The Protection tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to apply document protection to the current document 554 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Opening and or saving a protected document is possible only following the entry of a correct password Documents with read protection are also encrypted so that they cannot be examined with programs other than TextMaker You will find information about this topic in chapter
49. followed by the address of the page for example http www softmaker com index htm 4 Below in the Bookmark field you can specify if desired a position in the target document to be opened see below However this field is normally left empty 5 Confirm with OK The link is now created You recognize this by a change in the color of the text which indicates the presence of a link Specifying a target position The dialog described above gives you the option of specifying a position in the target document To do this enter at Bookmark either the address of an anchor for HTML documents or a bookmark for TextMaker documents Example If you enter Report tmd at URL or file name and the name of a bookmark in this document at Bookmark and then follow the link you have created the file REPORT TMD will be opened and the text cursor will be positioned at the specified bookmark Manual TextMaker 2016 Internet functions e 463 Following links To follow a link position the text cursor at any character within the link text Then invoke the command Edit gt Go to link TextMaker responds by opening the linked document Tip You can also follow links by clicking on the link text with the mouse Editing or removing a link To edit an existing hyperlink first select the link text Then invoke the command Format gt Link A dialog box like the one described above then appears Here you can edit the target of the
50. gt Properties command you can make settings that apply only to the current document and are saved with it These settings are called document proper ties The settable document properties are grouped by topic and each group is presented on one of several tabs For example if you click on the Summary tab you can enter summary information about the document On the next pages you will find detailed information on each of the individual document properties available Document properties Summary tab The Summary tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to enter summary information about the current document The summary information can include descriptive entries about the document subject author keywords etc that the file manager can use in searches For more information see section Document summary beginning on page 491 Document properties View tab The View tab in the File gt Properties dialog contains settings that affect the way the current document appears on the screen Display field names Controls whether fields like date page number etc are displayed as they would appear when printed or symbolically in the form of the field name surrounded by braces Normally you want to see the printed rendition so leave this option disa bled see also chapter Fields beginning on page 161 By default this option is disabled 546 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Show bookmarks
51. heading in the document in accordance with its level and your specifications For example level 1 headings might be numbered 1 2 3 etc while level 2 headings would be numbered 1 2 1 3 and so forth The procedure for accomplishing this is given in detail in the following steps 410 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Step 1 Creating and outlining the document First you must of course create the document and outline it It makes no differ ence whether you begin constructing the outline as you begin the document or do your outlining only after you have entered the entire text You will find information about outlining documents in section Outlines begin ning on page 402 Step 2 Creating an appropriate numbered list The next step is to create a numbered list appropriate for headings To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 2 Switch to the Numbered lists tab 3 Click on the New button 4 Give the new numbered list whatever name you like for example Headings and confirm with OK 5 Important Select the Hierarchical list option in the Numbered list group box 6 Important Check the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option 7 You can change other settings to suite your wishes or simply retain the default settings You will find information about the individual options in section Creating numbered lists beginning on pa
52. ment in plain text format to remind you that all objects and formattings will be lost in the resulting file Opening group box Here you can make settings related to opening documents Return to the last editing position when a document has been opened When you open a document and this option is enabled TextMaker automatical ly positions the text cursor at the place where it was located the last time you saved the document Note This works only with documents in the following file formats TextMaker tmd Word 6 0 or later doc and Word 2007 or later docx m Recently used files TextMaker displays a list of the files most recently opened in it in the File menu If you select an item on the list the corresponding file will be opened immediately Using the Recently used files option you can specify the number of files to be displayed in the list Backup group box Windows and Linux only Here you can specify if the program should whenever you save a document automatically create a backup copy containing its previous version The dropdown list in this section offers the following options No backup When you choose this option no backup copy is created when you save a document Not recommended 540 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 m Simple backup Here exactly one backup copy is created when you save a document This copy contains the previous i e last saved version of the document It is sav
53. on the contrary If you try to enter a telephone number like 001 555 55555 in a nu meric field TextMaker will not allow the since only numerals are allowed also the leading zeros will be automatically removed 364 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Notes on the supported database formats Databases that you create with TextMaker are stored in dBase format a widespread database format supported by many database applications The dBase format comes in different variants When you invoke the Tools gt Create Database command you can choose the desired variant by selecting it in the Files of Type list The following variants are supported File format Description dBase DOS Database with DOS character set This is the default format see note below dBase Windows Database with Windows character set dBase Unicode Database with Unicode character set Please note that this format is not dBase compatible see below Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs utilize the DOS format instead of the Windows format Note on the dBase Unicode format Besides the common dBase DOS and dBase Windows format TextMaker also supports databases in dBase Unicode format This is a special dBase format developed by SoftMaker that supports complex scripts Asian scripts for example Thus you can store e g Chinese text in this format which is not possible with dBase DOS and
54. own toolbars For more information see the section Customizing toolbars beginning on page 560 Formatting toolbar Beneath the Standard toolbar you find the Formatting toolbar With it you can both examine and modify the most often used formats font bold italic etc for the current text fe a a e HESE R Normal y TimesNewRoman 10 iy s U If you select a section of text beforehand formatting changes affect only the selected text Otherwise the text that you subsequently type in is affected To choose for example a different font click on the little arrow to the right of the font name to open a list and then select a font Other icons in the Formatting toolbar are switches that you can turn and off by clicking for example the B for bold Manual TextMaker 2016 The application screen e 25 Document window The document window used for editing documents occupies the largest part of the screen Every document that you open or create is displayed in its own document window This feature provides you with the capability to edit several documents at the same time and move data back and forth between them To learn more about working with document windows see chapter Document windows beginning on page 517 A document window consists of the following components Horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler is found at the top of the document window The margins and tab stops for
55. s SmartText feature you can have your favorite typing errors corrected automatically and create short cuts for frequently needed phrases for example sd for sales department Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 317 Setting the language If you have installed more than one language you can change the language for the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus whenever required To change the language you have the following two options E Setting the default language On the one hand with Tools gt Options you can set the default language The spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus normally use the default language Formatting text in another language On the other hand with the command Format gt Character you can format any segment of text in another language as needed In simple terms Normally the whole document is formatted in the default lan guage and the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus use the default language set in the Tools gt Options dialog However if you format a segment of text in another language the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus refer to that language in stead For detailed instructions see the following pages Setting the default language By setting the default language you specify which language the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus will use by default So you should set your native lan guage here To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Too
56. the document if it is rejected it is removed This function is especially useful when several users in succession will edit a document An example A co worker composes a document and gives it to you to correct You enable the Track changes function and make the desired changes Then you return the document to the author He can now accept or reject separately each of your changes with the press of a button Thus revising a document with the help of the Track changes function involves three steps E Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function m Step 2 Making the desired changes m Step 3 Accepting rejecting the individual changes Read the following sections to learn more Tip Using the Reviewing toolbar The easiest way to revise documents is to use the Reviewing toolbar Reviewing R PR a BAY YY geL BID The Reviewing toolbar This toolbar appears automatically whenever the document contains changes that were made with the Track changes function enabled Should it not appear it is Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions e 453 most likely because it has been disabled To re enable it invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the check box next to Reviewing in the list of toolbars The icons in this toolbar represent the following functions from left to right The first six buttons are not for tracking changes but for working with com ments You will find information about
57. the following options are available Layout tab On the Layout tab you can set the outside margins of a chart For chart frames you can additionally modify the position and the text wrapping For details see section Object properties Layout tab page 256 Format tab Use this tab to change the size of the chart For details see section Object properties Format tab page 262 Properties tab Here you can modify common object settings For details see section Object properties Properties tab page 269 Chart Type tab Here you can change the chart type First select a chart type on the left Then choose a sub type on the right For details on chart types see the manual for the spreadsheet application PlanMak er keyword chart type Series tab Data series are the most important chart elements They represent the data to be displayed in a chart For example in a column chart the height of each column stands for the size of the corresponding value Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 233 The Series tab allows you to modify settings related to the data series of a chart You can even enter or change the values contained in a data series using the Edit button Before making any changes make sure you have selected the desired data series in the Series list Options available E Series The Series list contains a list of all data series defined in the current chart The arrow buttons change the
58. thus TextMaker displays headings of all levels Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 405 Expanding collapsing single headings As just described in Outline view you can use the buttons 1 through 9 to hide details of the outline s structure and view only headings of specified levels But what if you want to examine what is contained at lower levels under a single heading The following alternative methods are available to you E and buttons in the Outline toolbar You can position the text cursor in the desired heading and then click on one of the following icons in the Outline toolbar or use one of the following keyboard shortcuts Icon Function dh Expands the view to include the next lower level Keyboard shortcut A1t Shifte Num Plus key on the numeric pad Collapses the view to exclude all lower levels Keyboard shortcut Alt Snifte Num Minus key on the numeric pad E and symbols left of the text paragraphs Alternatively you can make use of the plus or minus symbol that is displayed immediately to the left of each heading in Outline view A indicates that the heading contains subordinate headings or normal text paragraphs that are currently hidden A gt on the other hand indicates that whatever is immediately subordinate to the heading is already visible A double click on a makes the conte
59. to change the properties of several cells at once Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 199 Cell Properties Format Borders J Shading Size Width Percent Y 33 3 Vertical Alignment Margins Top Left 0 0 in Centered Bottom Right 0 0 in Justified Top 0 0 in Rotate by Bottom 0 0 in p 20 Options a F Text locked The dialog box for this command offers the following options Size Here you can change the Width of the selected cells by choosing among the following options E Fixed When you select this option you can specify the width exactly by entering the desired value in the field to the right of the Width list m Percent When you select this option you can specify the width you want as a percentage of the overall table width By default the cells in a table are of equal width and the width is set to 100 divided by the number of cells in a row For example each cell in a table of three columns has a default width of 33 3 If you wanted the first column to be twice as wide as the other two columns you would set the widths of all the cells in this column to 50 and the widths of all the cells in the second and third column to 25 200 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 E Auto When you select this option TextMaker automatically determines an appropri ate width In this case the cell widths will be automatically distributed over the space available Any of
60. your system s default character set is used Setting the character set manually Alternatively you can specify the character set manually when you open or save a text file Proceed as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with other file formats e 507 3 4 Invoke the File gt Open command or the File gt Save as command respective ly Important Open the list of file types and choose the entry Text file with additional options Pick a file or specify the file name of the text file Confirm with OK An additional dialog will open where you can choose the desired character set The dialog provides the following options m Character set Here you can specify which character set to use when the text file is opened saved Note TextMaker suggests a suitable character set automatically Usually there is no need to change this setting Encoding of newlines Only when saving Here you can specify the control characters that are added at the end of lines in order to indicate the beginning of a new line Note TextMaker suggests suitable control characters automatically Usually there is no need to change this setting Available options CR LF This is the recommended setting for Windows LF This is the recommended setting for Linux and Unix CR This control character was used on older Apple Mac systems prior to Mac OS X 508 o Working with other file formats Manual TextMaker 2016
61. 414 415 Edit Index Entries 416 Generate Index 417 432 Tools gt Options 524 Appearance tab 532 Edit tab 530 Files tab 538 Fonts tab 545 General tab 527 Language tab 535 System tab 541 View tab 524 Tools gt Run Script 515 Tools gt Set Database 368 369 Tools gt Thesaurus 331 Tools gt Update Fields 161 165 389 Tooltips 532 533 Tracking changes 453 Transfer Formatting Format menu 69 Transparency of pictures 219 221 280 282 TRIM function 396 399 TRUNC function 396 399 Two Full Pages View menu 558 Typeface 64 U Underline 65 Underline old German spelling in blue 325 535 536 Undo Edit menu 31 Ungroup Object menu 273 Unicode databases 340 363 365 Manual TextMaker 2016 Units of measure 75 76 532 534 Update Fields Tools menu 161 165 389 Updates 541 542 UPPER function 396 399 Use large icons 532 533 Use placeholders for graphics 546 548 Use SHM extensions 541 543 Use system file dialogs 532 533 Use XIM 541 544 Use XRender 541 544 User Business 161 164 527 528 User Home 161 164 527 528 USER function 396 399 User interface size 532 534 Vv VAL function 396 399 VBA 515 Vertical alignment of pages 112 114 of text fields 305 306 of text frames 276 277 of text in AutoShapes 291 292 Vertical position of objects 256 258 Vertical ruler 524 526 View gt Actual Size 558 View gt Continuous 556 View gt Fit Margins to Window 558
62. Activate Forms mode by checking the Forms mode activated option Then enter a Password to deactivate Forms mode and confirm with OK Finally save the document When a user subsequently opens the document and attempts to deactivate Forms mode he or she will be prompted for the password Thus the user will be able to deactivate Forms mode only if he or she has the correct password Tip Saving forms as document templates It is generally recommended that you save forms as document templates This will always guarantee that the original file cannot be changed When you have saved a form as a document template you can use File gt New to create new documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 315 based on the content of this template without opening the template itself for edit ing You will find additional information about using document templates in the section Document templates beginning on page 139 Calculating with forms objects You can reference the contents of forms objects and perform calculations on these contents using the Insert gt Calculation command For example the formula Textbox1 Value 2 references the current numeric value in the text field named Textbox1 and multiplies it by two You will find additional information about this topic in the section Objects in calculations beginning on page 386 316 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools TextMaker offers a spell check feature a
63. BE z Ee The font size of the selected text is displayed to the right of the font type at present 10 point is set Click with the mouse on the little arrow to the right of the 10 to open a list of the most commonly used font sizes Choose 8 from the list Now choose also a different font type To do this click on the arrow to the right of the font and choose the MicroSquare font from the list If you have not installed this font you can choose any other font you like After these modifications the Formatting toolbar will look like this LS Normal v MicroSquare ys vy Er B U The MicroSquare font in 8 point size was set Next we would like to emphasize addressee s city and zip code with bold type Select the line with the city and zip code in the receiver s address and then click on the B in the Formatting toolbar or press the keyboard shortcut for bold B The line will immediately be formatted bold By the way you can apply an italic format to text just as easily with the Z icon or by pressing CtriJ 1 likewise you can underline with the U icon or with ctri U And to reverse this sort of formatting simply apply it once more to the same text In the end the sender s and receiver s addresses should look something like this 42 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 Letter trnd S Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atnta G4 30009 Fred Backfish 5 7 Shepar
64. Fish only records with fields containing just Fish are found records with fields containing Fisher are not Adding and editing data records Important Data records can be changed only in the database module s form view To switch between list and form views invoke the command View gt Form If form view is active a little check appears in front of this menu item other wise list view 1s active To edit a data record simply position the text cursor in the desired data field and make your changes You can move to the next field with the key to the previous field with Tab Note To save changes to a data record you do not have to invoke any special command because changes to the active data record are saved automatically when you page to another record or exit the database Adding a new data record If you want to expand your database to include an additional entry invoke the database module command Edit gt Append record or press the keyboard shortcut for this command ctr1 N This command can also be invoked with the oP icon in the Database toolbar TextMaker adds an empty data record to the database and positions the text cursor in the first field of the record You can immediately begin filling in the record New records are always added after already existing records Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 347 Duplicating a data record With the command Edit gt Duplicate record you can create the du
65. Format gt Character Note You will find detailed information about this dialog box in chapter Character formatting beginning on page 63 Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 45 The settings in this dialog box are distributed over several index cards You can switch between them by clicking on one of the tabs along the top of the dialog As you can see this dialog has tabs for Font Spacing and Hyperlink Since we only want to modify the font we can stay on the Font tab Open the dropdown list Typeface by clicking on the little arrow to its right and choose the MicroSquare font Then choose the 12 point font size from the Size list to the right of the Typeface list Turn on italic by opening the dropdown list Style and selecting the entry Italic Confirm the settings by clicking the OK button Then save your document Paragraph alignment The way TextMaker arranges text between the margins is called paragraph align ment You change the paragraph alignment with the command Format gt Paragraph When you invoke this command a dialog box appears Open the dialog s Align ment list on the Paragraph tab Then choose the desired paragraph alignment from the list By the way this can be done faster with the Formatting toolbar which contains four icons that you can click on with the mouse to change the alignment Flush left Flush right Centered Justified We ll now center the company name To do
66. Frame command to create a chart from them Detailed instructions on this can be found in the PlanMaker manual chapter Charts Or alternatively open a document that already contains the desired chart 3 Incase the chart isn t already selected select it by clicking on it 4 Use the Edit gt Copy command to copy the chart to the clipboard 5 Switch to TextMaker 6 Move the text cursor to the position where you want the chart to be inserted 7 Use the Edit gt Paste command to place the chart The chart now appears in your document Note A chart inserted this way will not be converted into an image it will remain a chart with all its functionalities meaning that you can e g change its chart type edit its data or modify other chart properties anytime later 224 e Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 Inserting as a chart frame The procedure just described inserts the chart right into the text Alternatively you can insert the chart into a freely movable chart frame To do this simply switch to Object mode using the View gt Object Mode command before you issue the Edit gt Paste command The difference Chart frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for documents in newspaper style For more information on frames see chapter Frames and drawings page 247 Inserting as an OLE object Wh
67. Full Screen command To exit it choose the View gt Full Screen command again or press the key Using the toolbar of the full screen view When you activate the full screen view mode an additional toolbar appears on the screen EP m close The Fullscreen toolbar The icons in this toolbar have the following functions from left to right E Show hide menu bar m Show hide side bar Enter exit Drag sheet mode When Drag sheet mode is activated you can scroll your document using the mouse Simply click into the document and drag the mouse pointer into the de sired direction with the mouse button still held down Note Selecting text or objects is not possible in this mode Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 559 To exit Drag sheet mode click this button once again E A click on the Close button leaves full screen mode Customizing toolbars TextMaker provides toolbars for quick access to the program s functions Each icon on a toolbar represents a particular command When you click on an icon the corresponding command is executed ASCESA 9 C AMSBERQAQARVaRDa Te A toolbar This section describes how you can adapt these useful aids to your personal work ing style Using the View gt Toolbars command you can take the following actions to configure the toolbars E Displaying and hiding toolbars Positioning toolbars on the screen m Managing toolbar
68. If you want to remove gutter lines simply select None as the Line style m Apply to Determines what parts of the document will be affected by the settings you make in this dialog Whole document the entire document This point forward that part of the document beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the document Selected text the text segment currently selected in the document Current section the current section A section is a segment of text with a uniform number of columns see also the next section Selected sections all sections included in the current selection To end of section the segment of text beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the current section Line numbers tab The options on the Line numbers tab do not affect the column layout Rather they allow you to direct TextMaker to number the lines of your text and add the line numbers in the left margin You will find additional information about this in section Adding line numbers beginning on page 186 146 o Multi column page layouts Manual TextMaker 2016 What are sections The term section has been used several times in this chapter But what are sections Simply put a section is a segment of text that has a uniform columnar layout An example You have selected a segment of text in the middle of a single column document and formatted it as double column te
69. Now we will open the example file TOUR1 TMD that is provided with the program It contains our practice document as it should look at this stage of our work To open a document invoke the command File gt Open from the menu or by using the keyboard shortcut 0 First change to the folder containing the example documents To locate this folder proceed as follows m Under Windows 7 or later navigate to your user folder There go to the folder My DOCUMENTS SOFTMAKER SAMPLES m Under Windows XP navigate to the folder My DOCUMENTS SOFTMAKER S AM PLES m Under Linux navigate to your home folder There go to the folder SOFT MAKER SAMPLES m On an Android device go to the folder SOFTMAKER S AMPLES on your SD card In this folder locate the file TOUR1 TMD and double click on this file to open it Setting up a letterhead Naturally our letter needs a distinguished looking letterhead with the company name in a larger font and perhaps a line that explains what our company has to offer Let s get to work With move the text cursor to the beginning of the document TOUR1 TMD you just opened Now type Escher amp Sons Architects Design and Planning of Construction Projects of all Sizes The company name might safely be somewhat larger Select the first line and with aid of the Formatting toolbar format it in the MicroSquare font choose a font size of 32 points and turn on bold 44 o The TextMaker Tour Ma
70. OK a dialog will appear and allows additional settings for the fax transmission to be made see the next section Settings for fax transmissions When you exit the File gt Send gt Fax dialog box with OK another dialog box appears It allows you to specify the recipient s fax number and name By the way instead of entering the required settings in this dialog box you can enter them ahead of time in the Fax tab in the dialog box for the File gt Properties command Tip When you use a suitable document template for faxing as recommended in section A fax in five minutes beginning on page 471 this dialog box has al ready been filled out for you Several such document templates are included in the TextMaker distribution Simply invoke File gt New and choose one of the templates in the Fax folder If you don t want to use any of the templates supplied you can still fill out the fields Fax number and Name of recipient manually 474 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Important for form letters For form letters you must not enter fixed values here rather select the appropriate database fields Read more about this in the next section Faxing a form letter The following settings should be made in this dialog m Fax number Here type the recipient s fax number Alternatively click on the button and select the field from the attached database that contains fax numbers Name of recipient
71. PDF viewers are unable to render alpha channels flawlessly so we included an option to deactivate this feature Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 479 Other options Include TextMaker document Stores a copy of your TextMaker document inside the PDF file This enables users to open the resulting PDF file directly in TextMaker The program will then extract the original TextMaker document from the PDF file and display it Open file in PDF viewer after exporting Launches your PDF viewer and displays the PDF file after it has been exported provided that you have a PDF viewer installed on your computer Use relative paths for file links Automatically converts any hyperlink to a file into a relative path instead of an absolute path For example when you have inserted a link to the file c Documents Lists test txt and export the PDF docu ment to the folder c Documents the file path for this link will be changed to Lists text txt Font options The Font embedding options let you choose if the fonts used in the document should be included in the PDF file If font embedding is enabled the resulting PDF file can be viewed in its origi nal fonts on any computer even if this computer does not have the fonts in stalled If it is disabled text will be rendered using some replacement fonts se lected automatically by the system If the Embed only used characters option is enabled only those characters of a font
72. Perhaps while using the menu you may have noticed that Ctrl S is displayed to the right of the Save command This is the keyboard shortcut for this command This means you can also press to invoke this command and save your document There is also a shortcut for mouse users In the Standard toolbar you will find icons for the most frequently needed commands RBCGlS6tb 4 G8 9 AMARANTA th o a Te To save your document click on the diskette icon in the Standard toolbar the third icon from the left Tip If you point the mouse cursor at a toolbar icon without clicking a text box appears giving the icon s function If the Standard toolbar is not displayed it is probably deactivated To reactivate it invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the checkbox in front of Standard The Save dialog box If the letter has no name the program automatically displays a dialog box that asks you to specify the filename when you invoke the File gt Save command There type a name for the document in the Filename box or if you would like to over write an existing file choose a name from the list of files We are going to name the document LETTER So enter Letter in the Filename box and click on OK or press the Enter key to confirm your entry TextMaker saves the file under the specified name and automatically appends the extension TMD for TextMaker document Thus the full filename reads LETTER
73. Preview option is activated a little box displaying a preview of the currently selected document is displayed alongside the dialog Using Quick Paths With the Quick Path button you can create quick paths in order to quickly move to a specified folder when opening or saving files This allows you to create a list of your most frequently used folders permitting much faster navigation You will find more information about this in section Quick paths beginning on page 489 Using the File Manager The File Manager button opens the integrated file manager This shows a list of your documents and allows you to open print view or delete them as well as perform searches You will find more information about this in section The file manager beginning on page 492 Using the list of recently opened files Tip At the bottom of the File menu you will find a list of recently opened files Simply click on one of these files to open it again Printing documents To print the active document choose the File gt Print command or use the key board shortcut for this command eJ A dialog box appears in which you can specify the pages and the number of copies to be printed By default one copy of the entire document is printed For more information on outputting documents printing e mailing etc see the chapter Outputting documents beginning on page 465 Manual TextMaker 2016 Basics e 35 Saving documents
74. River Oregon 77123 w Jule a4 4 m We could now put our With best regards at the bottom of the letter and send it off without further ado But there are no doubt still a few things in this letterhead that could be made more attractive So let s begin with some refinements Tabs Before going further you can open the document TOUR2 TMD and compare it with your results so far This document contains our example document as it should look at this stage of our work Many business letters include a line with information like Your reference Your letter of etc We want to insert such a line now and in the course of doing so get acquainted with the application of tabs Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 47 Note You insert tabs by pressing the Tab key Although this key is labeled S on most keyboards the designator is used in this manual to better distin guish this key from the arrow keys Now move the text cursor to the beginning of the 17th line and type the following line Your reference Tab Your letter of Tab Our reference TabJOur letter of Tab Date Next format this line in the MicroSquare font 8 point You have now inserted tabs into the text but you have not yet determined their exact positions To do this set the tab stops By default TextMaker automatically puts a tab stop every 0 5 inch but in general you should not adopt this convention which or
75. Semicolon User defined Manual TextMaker 2016 Here a new paragraph is started for each separate cell in the table A new paragraph is started at the end of every row in the table The contents of the cells in each row are separated by tabs A new paragraph is started at the end of every row The contents of the cells in each row are separated by semicolons 6 Here you can specify the separator yourself To do this enter the desired character in the edit box You can enter more than one character if desired For example if you enter a comma followed by a space as the separator the cell contents of every line will be separated by a comma and a space accordingly Tables e 205 It is also possible to proceed in the opposite way you can convert text in tabular form into a table see the next section Converting text into a table The previous section described how to convert a table into paragraphs of text It is also possible to proceed in the opposite direction with the Table gt Convert Text to Table command you can convert text in tabular form into a table To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of text that you want to convert into a table 2 Invoke the Table gt Convert Text to Table command 3 First select the Separator that is used to delimit the entries in the text see below 4 Next specify the number of rows and columns the table should have Text Maker automatically attempts
76. Simple calculations with the press of a button There is an alternative to the command Insert gt Calculation described in the previous sections the command Edit gt Evaluate The difference The command Insert gt Calculation is suitable for calculations of any complexity using variables etc The command Edit gt Evaluate is suitable only for more simple calculations but it is much easier to handle You enter and select a formula directly in the text invoke Edit gt Evaluate and immediately see the result in the text An example 1 Type The total is 90 55 220 2 Select 90 55 220 3 Invoke the command Edit gt Evaluate or press the key 4 The formula 90 55 220 is calculated and the result is inserted in the text It doesn t get any easier or faster select a calculation and simply press to have it calculated 390 o Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 Important In contrast to calculations with Insert gt Calculation here the result is not entered as a field but inserted into the document as plain text Associative rule Multiplication and division operators have precedence over addi tion and subtraction operators so that multiplication and division are always performed before addition and subtraction Accordingly 2 3 4 gives 14 You can influence the way operations are performed with parentheses 2 3 4 gives 20 Using functions Not only basic operators but also functions are a
77. SoftMaker Equation Editor from the Object Type list 4 Confirm with OK to start the Equation Editor 5 Create the desired formula 6 When you have finished building the formula simply exit the Equation Editor The formula is now embedded in the TextMaker document as an OLE object You can edit objects created with the Equation Editor by double clicking on them Following a double click the Equation Editor is restarted and the formula object is opened in it After you made the desired changes simply close the Equation Editor again Moreover you can change the properties of an Equation Editor object by selecting the object with a single mouse click and then invoking the Object gt Properties command Information from the creators of the Equation Editor The SoftMaker Equation Editor is a special version of the MathType program from Design Science If you make frequent use of formulas in your documents you might find that MathType itself is even better suited to your needs than the SoftMaker Equation Editor While just as easy to use as the Equa tion Editor MathType has a number of additional functions that can help you be more productive and create more complex formulas MathType is available in English French German and other languages You can obtain information about the purchase of MathType from your software distributor or directly from Design Science Design Science Inc 140 Pine Avenue 4th Floor Long Beach CA 90802
78. Superscripts and subscripts eee eee eseceeceeecaeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseceseeaeenaeenaes 67 Letter spacing and character pitch eee eeceeceescesecesecesecesecsecseeceeeneeeaeeees 68 Kernin e cite occa A es Se eae in ean a ese a ee ace 68 Transferring formatting eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecesecaecsaecsaecsaecaaeeneseaeeees 69 Hiding text x ioeo ee gii cena tia Signa ee ese eoe 70 PHOTECUN SERB se sect cesta eli choed chinks EE A RE EE o EE opbene ch svonmecbunte eres 71 Removing character formatting cc cesceceseceesceceseeeenceceeeeeeseeceeeeeneecesreeeneeens 72 Changing the default character format e eee cee ese cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenaes 73 Paragraph formatting 75 Inl nts esc E E dais othe Land ed een tis 76 Line sp ciN giens a a a a E E a E a ARST 77 Spacing above below a paragraph 0 0 0 0 eee ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenseeaeenaes 79 Paragraph alignment esineen oieee sree teen vkon ideeateb seu o tiiir ireset 80 Character format for entire paragraphs seesseeesseeeeseseseeerrseeresreresserrreserreee 81 piel E E ae ete See rl E S oy 82 Using el o E E ETT 82 Deleting and moving tab Stops sesssseessseeesesreeresrsrrsresreerssrerrssrrrrsserresreseeet 84 Using the horizontal ruler 0 eee eee ceseceseceseceecaeecaeeeaeseeeseeeeereeeeees 85 Bulleted ists 2 40 sectiiee ate oh ee eA ee A eee A 86 iv e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Shading pace hewitt een E on dana edna 91 Border
79. Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering tab 4 In the Type group box select Numbering 172 Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Bullets and Numbering Bullets amp Simple Numbering Numbered Lists Type None Bullet Numbering Before Format After TZ Dii Z Numbering starts with 1 Skip numbering Character Horizontal position 0 25 in vertical position Opt 5 As required set the desired options in the Numbering group box see the Options section below 6 Confirm with OK The selected paragraphs are now enumerated Note You can start as many enumerations as you wish within a document The numbering is automatically reset at the beginning of every new group of numbered paragraphs More precisely whenever a numbered paragraph is preceded by a paragraph that is not numbered the numbered paragraph s number is automatically set to 1 Skipping paragraphs in an enumeration You can interrupt an enumeration at a given paragraph and then continue the enumeration at a following paragraph Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 173 To do this position the text cursor in the numbered paragraph that you want to exclude from the enumeration invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering tab and check the Skip numbering option The selected paragraph s number is removed and only its indentation is retained The en
80. TMD The next time you invoke File gt Save this dialog box will not appear since the document now has a name Hereafter it will be saved immediately under its name By the way you could have exited the dialog box without executing the Save command You could have done that by clicking Cancel instead of OK on the 40 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 control panel or by pressing Esc This escape route is available to you in all dialog boxes Simple formatting Now we come to the more interesting functions for example to text formatting and thus to the application of fonts text emphasis bold italic etc indentation etc First we will insert a line with our return address above the address as is custom ary for letters that are to be sent in windowed envelopes So let s position the text cursor two lines above the address line 5 and type the address of our firm Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 30009 Of course this line is much too wide for a windowed envelope s view window and so we would like to decrease the font size a bit In this way we come to an im portant topic selecting First select then format Note You will find detailed information about selecting in chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 To format a section of text after it has been entered you must first select it so that TextMaker knows what area should be mo
81. Text Field com mand Text fields are used frequently in forms They allow the entry of unrestricted text accordingly they are suitable for entries of names addresses etc Usage of text fields To fill out a text field you simply click in the field to position the text cursor there and enter the text Changing the properties of text fields After positioning the text cursor in a text field or selecting the text field with a mouse click in Object mode you can invoke Object gt Properties to modify the properties of this field The properties of a text field include its size margins and a number of other settings The following options are available Format tab On this tab you can change the format of the text field Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 305 E Size group box Here you can change the Size of the text field You can either specify the width and height exactly or allow the text field to expand automatically as necessary to accommodate text as it is entered To do the latter select the Growing option for Width and Height and enter the de sired minima and maxima E Vertical alignment group box Lets you change the vertical alignment of the text inside the field as follows Option Meaning Top Align inner text at the top of the text field Centered Vertically center text between top and bottom of the text field Bottom Align inner text at the bottom of the text field Justified Vertically justify text so tha
82. The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the objects it flows around the drawing In this section you will find detailed information on working with drawings The following topics are covered Inserting drawings m Adding text to AutoShapes m Changing the properties of drawings See the next pages for details Inserting drawings To insert a drawing for example a rectangle proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Object gt New Drawing command A sub menu opens From the sub menu select a drawing tool in this case the Rectangle tool If you have activated Object mode you have the alternative of clicking on the corresponding icon in the Object toolbar BIB RIE EIZvVe2ZfFf SOBGOPA AI a 2 With some of the drawing tools additional action is required see below However this is not the case with rectangles 286 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 3 The drawing is inserted If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners The method of producing a drawing object varies according to the drawing tool used Accordingly all the available types of drawing objects are listed below together with tips for manipulating them Lines The Line tool allows you to draw a straight line To use this tool simply press down the mouse button and draw a line in th
83. Then headers and footers can be set up for each separate chapter see section Dividing a document into chapters begin ning on page 110 Tip Using the header and footer toolbar TextMaker provides a useful aid for editing headers and footers the Header and Footer toolbar Header and Footer xl X DAEA AaoA ADB The Header and Footer toolbar This toolbar appears automatically when you position the text cursor in a header or footer unless it has been disabled If it is not displayed invoke the View gt Toolbars command and click in the check box for Header and Footer to re enable it The icons in this toolbar represent the following functions from left to right E Change the properties of the current header or footer see section Changing the properties of headers and footers beginning on page 105 Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 103 m Change the page format invokes the File gt Page Setup command E Insert a header or go to the existing header Insert a footer or go to the existing footer Delete the current header or footer Insert the page number as a field Insert the page count as a field Insert the date the document was last printed as a field Insert the time the document was last printed as a field Insert other fields invokes the Insert gt Field command Go to the previous header or footer Go to the next header or footer Switch between header and footer Exit header
84. Windows version of SoftMaker Office you can install additional SoftMaker dictionaries using the main setup program Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Android Android only The Android version allows you to download and install dic tionaries directly from our web servers free of charge Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Linux Linux only In the Linux version all available SoftMaker dictionaries are installed already so there is no need to install additional dictionaries later Installing Hunspell dictionaries Windows and Linux only Apart from SoftMaker dictionaries the Win dows Linux version additionally supports the use of Hunspell dictionaries which can be downloaded at www softmaker com Choosing a different dictionary for a language Windows and Linux only In case you have installed more than one dictionary for a certain language e g a SoftMaker dictionary and a Hunspell dictionary you can switch between these dictionaries anytime For detailed information see the pages that follow Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 577 Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Windows Note This section applies to the Windows version only SoftMaker Office is shipped with elaborate dictionaries for numerous languages To install any of these dictionaries after the main installation proceed as follows 1 Launch the setup program that you have used to install SoftMaker Off
85. a cap tion for a picture or Table to insert a caption for a table Apart from that you can create an individual table of figures for each label see the next section Position The Position option is only available when you had selected the object e g picture of interest before you invoked this command If this is the case you can use this option to choose if the caption should be added above or below the object TextMaker will automatically insert an empty paragraph to make room for the caption If you have selected an object that is in a frame e g a picture frame TextMaker will automatically insert a text frame above or below the object and place the caption there 422 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 E Format Use this option to choose the desired representation of the sequential number e g Arabic numbers 1 2 3 Roman numbers I II IMI or letters A B Cai mw Exclude label If you enable this option TextMaker omits the label in the caption and inserts only the sequential number For example instead of Figure 1 just 1 will be inserted E New button The New button allows you to create a new label A dialog where can enter the name of the new label appears As a name enter exactly the text that should appear in the caption For example when you create a label named Illustration the text Illustration 1 appears when you insert a ca
86. ample the address database TMW DBF that was supplied with the program E Database field button For adding database fields Clicking this button opens a list of all database fields available in the selected database When you click on one of these fields it is inserted into the large edit field located in the upper part of the dialog E Database section In this section the name and path of the currently selected database is displayed see Database button above Below you can select which database records to appear in the result All only the Selected records see section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 or a Range of records that you specify with the record numbers for the first and last records in the range 358 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 E Options section This section changes depending on the chosen Output as option Label With labels this section contains options related to outputting the labels including Full page with the current label When you activated this option a whole sheet of labels will be output for each individual label containing identical copies of the label This is useful for simple labels with fixed text not using a database when you want to print whole sheets of one label at once Copies Determines how many copies of each individual label to generate Start row column Here you can specify in which row column on the first sheet of labels the output shoul
87. anywhere within it Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 441 Tip You can also use keyboard shortcuts to jump into the footnote text of a footnote and back When you position the text cursor on a footnote number and press at J TextMaker jumps into the corresponding footnote text To get back to the footnote in the body text press Gal Reinserting footnote markers If you should accidentally delete the footnote number in a footnote text you can command TextMaker to reinsert it with Insert gt Foot note gt Footnote Mark Moving copying and deleting footnotes You can move copy or delete text segments containing footnotes in the usual manner TextMaker automatically reorders the footnote texts and adjusts the numbering without any special action on your part However you should observe the following rule when performing these functions Important When you copy move or delete footnotes you should always do it in the text not in the footnote area at the bottom page margin For example if you delete the footnote text for a footnote in the footnote area the footnote itself remains in place as before what is gone is merely its footnote text If on the other hand you select and delete the footnote marker in the text the whole footnote marker and text is removed and all the remaining footnotes are renumbered Modifying the numbering of footnotes As mentioned above footnotes are numbered auto
88. arrows to the right of the list to move the item up or down E Lines max Available only for dropdown list frames Determines the maximum number of lines to be displayed when the list is opened 310 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 Use additional inner margins Available only for dropdown lists By default the size of a dropdown list is calculated in a way that their text content exactly fits in If you check this op tion some small inner margins are added making the object slightly larger 3D effect If you check this option the borders of the list are drawn with a 3D effect With dropdown list frames you can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the list items Dropdown list frames You insert a dropdown list frame with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown Frame command The usage and behavior of a dropdown list frame correspond to those for a dropdown list see the previous section The difference A dropdown list frame like all types of frames has a fixed posi tion on the page Thus it does not move when you insert or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame Labels and groupboxes Besides the forms objects described above there are two additional types of forms objects that are intended not to be filled in but to be used merely for captions L
89. at the desired position in the text This action will deselect the object Object mode Object mode provides the simplest way to work with frames drawings and all other objects Normally you work with TextMaker in Edit mode In this mode you can enter edit format etc text When you switch to Object mode you can no longer edit text However this mode provides many functions that ease working with objects Thus in Object mode you can for example select any type of object with a simple mouse click Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 249 Important While in Object mode only commands related to inserting and modi fying objects are available This means you cannot enter text and menu com mands not related to objects are grayed out Android A hint for Android users When you want to scroll through the document in Object mode swipe over the screen with two fingers not just one Switching between Edit mode and Object mode There are several ways to switch between Edit mode and Object mode E Invoke the View gt Object Mode command to enter Object mode Invoke the command again to return to Edit mode m Click on the icon in the Formatting toolbar to switch to Object mode Click on the icon again to return to Edit mode You can also click anywhere in the document window with the right mouse button to open a context menu from which you can select Object Mode or Ex it Object Mode depending on the current
90. become available See the chapter Working with Arabic text page 509 for details Display of digits Allows you to specify which type of numerals to use for the display of numbers in your documents Arabic Display Arabic numerals 1234567890 as used e g in English This is the default setting 528 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 m Hindi Display Hindi numerals YY 1VA4 as used e g in Arabic Context Adapt automatically from the context If the number is surrounded by Arabic text display Hindi numerals else display Arabic numerals Document tabs When you open two or more documents a bar with document tabs will appear below the toolbars One tab is displayed for each open document window You can use document tabs to switch between the currently opened documents with a single mouse click See section Using document tabs page 520 for details The following settings can be made m Use the dropdown list below Document tabs to choose if the document tabs bar should be displayed Available options Off Disables the document tabs bar For two or more documents Automatically displays the document tabs bar when you have two or more documents opened Always visible Always displays the document tabs bar even if just one document is opened Show document icon If enabled an icon indicating the file type of the corre sponding document is displayed on the left of each tab
91. beginning of the paragraph of interest or select the desired paragraphs Then press to increase the indent or press Backspace to decrease it Insert frames and drawings immediately Here you can specify what should happen when you insert a frame text frame picture frame etc or a drawing into a document for example using the com mand Object gt New Text Frame m On The corresponding object is inserted immediately Its position and size are chosen automatically if required you can of course always change the object s position by dragging it to a different place with the mouse You can also adjust its size by dragging one of the object s corner handles m Off Before the object is actually inserted the mouse cursor changes to a cross hair To proceed draw a rectangle in the document with your mouse in order to determine the exact position and size of the object After that the object will be inserted accordingly Preferences Appearance tab The Appearance tab in the Tools gt Options dialog allows you to customize the appearance of the program s user interface Dialog style Sets the general style of TextMaker s dialog boxes and toolbars This does not change the way you use the software only the way it appears 532 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Dialog language Lets you select the language to be used in menus and dialog boxes The selections available here depend on what alternativ
92. by its record number Searching a database Adding and editing data records Deleting and restoring data records Sorting a database Closing a database See the next pages for details The database module s main window Let s assume that you open the database TMW DBF format dBase DOS that was supplied with the program Under Windows this file can be found in the SOFT MAKER folder under your documents folder You are presented with a database window that looks something like this Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 341 EB File Edit View Goto Select Window Help ax Iidy 4 D by Di amp A CG aa 4h oe KM SL SALUT_ADDR nn SALUT_BODY Dear Mr Backfisch NAME1 Backis NAME2 Cashflow Consulting Corp FIRSTNAME meee STREET 25 main Street STATE _ZIP ZE GITY Anytown a PHONE 555 555 5555 FAX 555 555 5556 4 Record 1 of 2 Selected Character field m The example database tmw dbf in form view If a tabular list of data records appears instead of a form like the one pictured above you can invoke View gt Form to switch to the form view If you like you can use the example database TMW DBF as your personal address database right away It includes all the database fields needed to store addresses SALUT_ADDR Form of address e g Mr SALUT_BODY Salutation in a letter e g Dear Mr Smith NAME First line for names e g the last name NAME2 Second line for names e
93. change because you have typed addi tional text the table of references continues to show the now outdated page num bers And when for example you add new headings the table of contents does not expand automatically To make a document s tables of references reflect the current state of the docu ment you must update them You do this as follows 1 To update the index invoke Tools gt Index gt Generate Index To update the table of contents invoke Tools gt Generate Table of Contents To update a table of figures invoke Tools gt Generate Table of Figures To update the bibliography invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliog raphy 2 Important Make sure that the Placement option in the dialog box is set to Replace existing table 3 Confirm with OK TextMaker now removes the existing table of references and replaces it with an updated version 432 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Note Before printing a document containing tables of references always re member to update the tables so that they reflect the document s current state Editing and formatting tables of references In theory tables of references tables of contents indices tables of figures bibliog raphies can be edited just like normal text However you should take note of the following Important If you manually change the content or formatting of a table of refer ences your changes will be lost whenever
94. change the display order of these objects which of the objects to display in the foreground which in the back ground etc This can be accomplished as follows 272 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 1 Select the desired object 2 Open the Object gt Order menu option to choose one of the following com mands Bring to Front Brings the object in front of all other objects Send to Back Sends the object behind all other objects Bring Forward One Level Brings the object forward by one level Send Backward One Level Sends the object back by one level Grouping frames When you group several frames or drawings you connect them together to form a unit that can be selected and manipulated as if it were a single object For example when you select an object that is part of a group of objects the whole group will be selected When you move this object the whole group will move To group objects you do the following 1 Select the frames or drawings to be grouped To do this click on each of them in turn while holding down the Shift key or switch to Object mode and draw a rectangle around all the objects to be grouped 2 Click the 4 icon in the Object toolbar or invoke the Object gt Group com mand Ungrouping objects To ungroup objects do the following 1 Select the group by clicking on one of the objects in it 2 Click the H icon in the Object toolbar again or invoke the Object gt Ungroup
95. changes to the character format the bullet will automatically use the character format of the paragraph at its right Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the bullet m Vertical position Allows you to specify the vertical position of the bullet Negative values cause the bullet to be lowered positive values cause it to be raised Additional indent You can use this option to indent the entire list item including the bullet to the right Options for numbering If you have selected the Numbering option in the Type group box the following options appear in the dialog Numbering text With this and the following options you can change the format of the number ing as required The Numbering text edit box is filled in automatically by the program How ever you can always make changes 1 for example represents the list level 1 component of the number in the specified format see the next option If for example 1 is entered in this box and the 1 2 3 format is selected level 1 list items will have numbering in the form 1 2 3 etc However if 1 is en tered dashes added before and after the placeholder the level 1 list items will have numbering in the form 1 2 3 etc If the number has several level components the edit box will contain a place holder for each of the components for example 1 2 3 for leve
96. combination that is already assigned the current as signment is displayed below the Shortcut key edit box In that case you should press the Backspace key to delete this key combination and then enter another one Otherwise you will overwrite the assignment for another style or even for one of TextMaker s commands We recommend using key combinations that include the keys Ctr1 and Shift since these are normally not assigned Applying paragraph styles To apply a paragraph style do the following 1 Place the text cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple paragraphs to be modified 2 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 3 Select the desired style Hint In the right half of the dialog a preview of the currently selected style is presented The preview can be turned on off with the gt gt button and the lt lt button anytime you wish 4 Click on Apply The formatting of the selected paragraphs changes to the formatting specified for the paragraph style Tip 1 You can also select paragraph styles from the list box displayed at the far left in the Formatting toolbar Tip 2 If you assigned a keyboard shortcut to the format style you can apply styles even faster simply press the assigned key combination Tip 3 Additionally you can use the sidebar to apply styles and even modify them see section Paragraph styles and the sidebar page 136 Modifying paragraph styles Naturall
97. command and switch to the Language tab 2 Click on the Hunspell dictionaries button 3 A dialog showing a list of all languages dictionaries installed appears First select the language of interest in that list 4 Then select the dictionary to use for the chosen language in the Dictionary dropdown list The list can have the following entries SoftMaker The SoftMaker dictionary shipped with SoftMaker Office This is the default setting Hunspell A Hunspell dictionary free dictionary see previous section 5 Confirm with OK From now on the spell checker will use the selected dictionary for the specified language 580 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Keyboard shortcuts The following pages provide tables for the most frequently used keyboard shortcuts in TextMaker Keyboard shortcuts for menu commands E Keyboard shortcuts for editing text Hint If you want to customize TextMaker s keyboard shortcuts use the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard Mappings command see section Customizing key board shortcuts beginning on page 568 Keyboard shortcuts for menu commands Command Keyboard shortcut File gt New ctrl N File gt Open Ctr1 0 File gt Close Ctrl F4 or ctri w File gt Save ctr1 S File gt File Manager F12 File gt Print ctrl P File gt Exit Alt 4 or Ctr1 a Edit gt
98. default toolbars by select ing it in the View gt Toolbars dialog box and clicking Reset Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 563 Now the toolbar contains the standard icons as it did before you changed it In addition the default settings for Visible in mode and Position are restored Note This command is applicable only to the default toolbars Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar etc and not to user created toolbars Resetting all toolbars To reset all toolbars at once click on the Reset All button Note This command only resets the default toolbars User created toolbars will not be touched Customizing toolbar icons You can edit the icons on a toolbar as you wish Specifically you can add remove and reposition the icons and you can also insert and remove separator lines This can be accomplished as follows 1 Make sure that the toolbar to be edited is enabled If it is not invoke View gt Toolbars and enable it 2 Invoke the command Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars Alternatively you can invoke this command by clicking the Customize button in the View gt Toolbars dialog box 3 Use one of the procedures described below to add remove or reposition an icon 4 Exit the dialog by clicking on Close Tip The Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars command can also be invoked from the context menu for toolbars or by double clicking on an empty area in any of the toolbars When you invoke thi
99. devices depends on where you purchased the software Purchased in Google Play Store When you purchase an app using the Google Play Store on your Android device there is nothing you have to do The app will be downloaded and installed automat ically right after you bought it 20 o Installation and program startup Manual TextMaker 2016 Purchased in Amazon App Shop The same applies when you purchase an app in the Amazon App Shop on your device The app will be downloaded and installed automatically right afterwards Note In case the installation aborts with an error message saying that apps from unknown sources cannot be installed please read the section Allowing the installation of apps from unknown sources below Purchased on our website www softmaker com If you have purchased SoftMaker Office directly on our website www soft maker com proceed as follows to install the software 1 Immediately after your purchase you will receive an e mail containing down load links for each of the individual components of SoftMaker Office Click on each of these links to download the respective installation archives APK files 2 If you are downloading these files on your Android device the installation might start automatically as soon as the download is finished this depends on the device If the installation does not start automatically you can always start it manually Launch any file manager of your choice and open t
100. drop cap 2 Invoke the command Format gt Drop Caps 3 From the Drop Caps options select the type of drop cap you want 4 Select the desired Font size If you want the drop cap to be rendered in a font different from the paragraph font click on the Character button and set the de sired character formatting 5 Change the Margins for the drop cap as required As soon as you have confirmed with OK TextMaker renders the drop cap of the paragraph as you have specified The content of the paragraph can still be edited as usual 90 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Removing drop caps To remove drop caps again invoke the command Format gt Drop Caps and set the Drop Caps option to None Shading With the Format gt Shading command you can add a colored and or patterned background to designated paragraphs in the text Shading Ee Shading Shades Sample lhl Bee Pattern m E Pattern Shading Foreground AN BS MSHA ma Y W g Cancel To do this select the paragraphs of interest invoke Format gt Shading and then continue as follows E Adding a shade To add a shade click on one of the shades presented in the Shades group box or enter the desired saturation for the shade in percent in the Shading edit box Values between 0 invisible and 100 fully saturated are allowed If desired you can set the color for the shade with the Foreground option
101. facilisis at ver ers luptatum zzril delenit augue 4 w r L6col5 Section 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 1 English United 402 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 The Outline view is nothing more than a different form of representation for the document Let s take a closer look at what it contains First notice that the document s text segments are indented to different degrees Major headings are displayed flush left Headings immediately subordinate to them those whose outline level is one lower are displayed a little further to the right etc In addition the Formatting toolbar has disappeared and has been replaced by the Outline toolbar As its name implies this toolbar provides access to functions useful for outlining documents When you invoke the Outline view for the first time the entire document will always be visible You will obtain a better view of the document s structure when you hide the normal text and allow only the headings to be displayed provided the document contains headings To do this use the Text button in the Outline toolbar Beyond that you can specify which levels of headings should be displayed with buttons 1 through 9 Clicking on button 3 for example results in the display only of headings with outline levels one through three The All button provides a means of making all the levels visible again The Outline view is suitable not only for viewing the document s structure
102. features at an affordable price With TextMaker you will be able to complete your writing tasks quickly and comfortably Some features of TextMaker m Available for Windows Linux and Android m Practical document templates pre designed letterheads fax forms etc for creating new documents in no time m Extensive paragraph formatting capabilities including automatic number ing bullets borders shadows fill patterns E Paragraph and character styles that allow you to apply frequently needed formats to text with the press of a button Desktop publishing DTP features like master pages drop caps small caps automatic paragraph control adjustable character spacing and pitch m Graphics support in numerous file formats extensive drawing functions TextArt module for fancy text effects Powerful table functions including arithmetic functions m File and document manager with search capabilities m Table of contents and indexes footnotes outline view Reliable spell checking hyphenation and synonym dictionaries m Integrated address book database and much more TextMaker is in continuing development and we welcome comments and sugges tions from our users If in the course of your work you encounter a need for a feature that isn t present or you have other suggestions write to us we want TextMaker to measure up to the users wishes Manual TextMaker 2016 Welcome e 15 Additional features in
103. file after its generation these fields should be filled out as well The UUID universally unique identifier is a unique number that can be used to identify an individual document The New button creates a new random UUID Technically spoken randomly created UUIDs are not really unique however due to their sheer length the chance to produce a UUID that is al ready taken is almost zero Please note that the UUID of a document should not be changed anymore once it is published unless you want to release a new revision of the document The ISBN optional is another unique identifier number for a publication and this one actually is unique ISBNs are required by the book trade You usually obtain an ISBN from your publisher m Cover When you activate the option Create cover page an image file for the creation of a cover page is added to the EPUB file EPUB readers usually not only dis play this image file as a title page in your document but also use it to generate a thumbnail image for the document displayed e g in the user s library To choose an image for the cover page click on the three dots next to the text field below this option This will open a file dialog allowing you to browse your device for the file Additionally you can choose the background color for the cover page Table of contents When the option Create table of contents is checked TextMaker will store a bookmark in the EPUB fi
104. follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 123 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Select the style to be changed from the list 3 Click on Edit 4 Make the desired changes in the style 5 Click on OK 6 Exit the dialog box with Close Your modifications to the style are now effective Choosing which styles to show in the list By default the dialog mentioned above lists only styles that are in use or have been modified by the user If you want it to display all styles available choose All styles in the Show option This will display all predefined styles as well Updating a style to match existing text The Update from text button in the dialog can be used to update a style to match the currently selected text As a result the chosen style will be changed in a way that it uses exactly the same formatting options as that text Proceed as follows 1 Set up the character format font face font size etc of any text segment to your liking 2 Place the text cursor inside that text or select it either will do 3 Invoke Format gt Character Style 4 Select the style to be changed from the list 5 Click on Update from text The style will forget its previous settings and adopt the formatting options of the specified text Of course you can still change the style s formatting options when ever you like independently from the text 124 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Deleting or renaming styles
105. for example the folder C LETTERS TAXES Manual TextMaker 2016 Document management e 489 When you want to open a file in this folder all you need to do is click on the Quick path button in the File gt Open dialog and select its quick path The dialog changes immediately to the C LETTERS TAXES folder Quick paths are available not only in the File gt Open dialog but also in all other dialog boxes that have to do with opening or saving files For detailed information on quick paths see the pages that follow Defining quick paths To define a new quick path complete the following steps 1 Open any type of file dialog for example the File gt Open dialog 2 Click the Quick path button 3 A menu opens below the button Select the Create new quick path command from it 4 At Name of quick path enter a meaningful name for the quick path for example Letters to the tax office 5 At Path enter the desired folder for example c letters taxes 6 Confirm with OK From now on TextMaker will change to the folder C LETTERS TAXES when the quick path Letters to the tax office is invoked Quick paths with search patterns Quick paths can also include search patterns for file names For example you can define a quick path as c letters taxes 2015 which tells TextMaker to change to the folder C LETTERS TAXES and display only those files whose names begin with 2015 Keyboard shortcut The amp s
106. gt Open or press the keyboard shortcut for this command 0 A dialog box appears that can look for example as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Basics e 33 Open x Look in B Samples J e e Ely a TW Invoice trnd a TS Tourltmd Recent Places Tour tmd mal TlTour3 tmd TlTour4 tmd Desktop Libraries A Computer Ty Network File name Files of type M New window Preview Quick path v File manager The most recently accessed folder will display with all existing documents listed based on the listed file types To choose the file to be opened type its name in manually or simply select a file from the list Then click the Open button New window In order to open the document in a new window check the New window checkbox Otherwise the current document will be closed and the new file will be opened in the same window Opening other file formats In addition to opening files created in TextMaker s default file format you can also open files created within other software such as Microsoft Word To open a file from another application choose the format of the file you want to open from the Files of type list This will display all matches to that software s file extensions in the dialog You will find more information about this in chapter Working with other file formats beginning on page 505 34 e Basics Manual TextMaker 2016 Previewing a document When the
107. hidden text invoke Format gt Character and uncheck the Hidden option on the Font tab The text is now without the Hidden property Protecting text You can protect a segment of text to prevent it from being changed or deleted Protecting text To protect text do the following 1 Select the text you want to protect 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font tab 4 Check the Protected option Text that is protected in this manner cannot be edited If you position the text cursor in such text and attempt to insert or delete something your attempts will have no effect Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 71 Important note If you select a range of text that includes some protected text and delete the entire range the protected text included in the range will be delet ed along with the other text Protection only prevents editing or deleting within the protected segment itself Removing the Protected property To remove the Protected property select the segment of protected text invoke the command Format gt Character and uncheck the Protected option on the Font tab The text segment is no longer protected and can be edited as normal Removing character formatting In case you need to remove character formatting TextMaker lets you do this easily Proceed as follows 1 Select the text segment of interest 2 Invoke Format gt Standard or press the corresponding
108. if the data points are arranged clockwise or counterclockwise m Round chart If this option is checked circle segments are drawn between the axes instead of lines m Polar coordinates If this option is checked polar coordinates are used instead of Cartesian coor dinates Only available if Round chart is checked If Angle between axes is set to x an axis is plotted every x degrees If Angle between axis descriptions is set to x an axis label is plotted every x degrees Limit plot area to radar If this option is checked only the area inside the radar will be filled If it is not checked the rectangle surrounding the radar will be filled as well Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 237 OLE objects Note The use of OLE objects is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker With TextMaker for Windows you can embed objects created with other applica tions drawings pictures etc in your document An example From TextMaker you can use Object gt New OLE Object to start Windows Paint program and then draw something When you exit Paint the drawing appears in the TextMaker document It is now embedded in the document Advantage To edit the drawing in the TextMaker document all you have to do is double click on it Paint is then restarted automatically When you have finished editing and closed Paint your changes are imported by TextMaker For this to work the application invoked from TextMaker mu
109. is centered horizontally on the page If the offset is 2 in the center of the object is positioned 2 in to the right of the center of the page etc Right The object is positioned from the right For example the right edge of the object would appear 2 in from the right page edge Inside The object is positioned from the left if it falls on a right hand page odd page number or from the right if it falls on a left hand page Outside The object is positioned from the right if it falls on a right hand page odd page number or from the left if it falls on a left hand page These two options work as described above only when the Different left and right pages option has been checked in the Format gt Chapter dialog Otherwise TextMaker treats all pages as right hand pages Relative to With the Relative to options you specify the document element that should serve as a reference for the Offset Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 257 Option Effect Page The offset is relative to the page more precisely to the page edges The page margins are not taken into account Page borders The offset is relative to the page margins If you in crease or decrease the margins the object moves accordingly Paragraph The offset is relative to the position of the paragraph to which the object is anchored The indentation of this paragraph is not taken into account Note If this paragraph falls for example in the
110. is not always a good idea to hyphenate at every point possible and this is where the other two options come in handy For example text that is in narrow columns could lead to a broken word at the end of almost every line and consequently to a reduction of the document s legibility Therefore instead you may want to use the Every 2 Lines or Every 3 Lines option to direct TextMaker to attempt hyphenation only in every second or third line Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 329 Deactivating hyphenation for an entire document Apart from the options mentioned above you can activate or deactivate hyphena tion for the current document completely This can be achieved via the Tools gt Automatic Hyphenation command By default automatic hyphenation is enabled This is indicated by a checkmark displayed in front of the Automatic Hyphenation command in the Tools menu If you invoke this command the hyphenator will be turned off and the checkmark disappears Automatic hyphenation is now completely disabled for the current document Hyphens will no longer be inserted automatically and the existing ones are removed If you invoke this command once more automatic hyphenation will be enabled again Note This setting is a document option This means that it affects only the cur rent document and its state is saved in the document Thus you can decide sepa rately for each document if automatic hyphenations should be performed in it
111. it did before the word was added With this function you can delete only those words that you yourself have supplied to TextMaker Words in the dictionaries that come with the program cannot be removed Note Every language has its own user dictionary You can select the user dic tionary to be edited from the Language dropdown list Hyphenation The purpose of hyphenation is to regularize the right margin of text by breaking up long words that occur at the ends of lines Hyphenation is performed completely automatic and takes effect as you type So ordinarily you do not need to concern yourself with it at all However you do need to make sure that you have set the language correctly Naturally the hyphenator will not produce correct results if you let it separate for example Spanish words according to English hyphenation rules Setting the language Detailed instructions on setting the language for spell checker and hyphenation were given at the beginning of this chapter section Setting the language page 318 Here s a brief summary Setting the default language By setting the default language you specify which language the spell checker and hyphenator will use by default So you should set your native language here To do this invoke Tools gt Options switch to the Language tab and choose the desired language from the Standard language list 328 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 E Formatting t
112. link To remove a link proceed as follows m Removing a link by deleting the link text When you delete text that has been formatted as a link the link is removed with the text Removing only the link If you want to remove only the link and leave the text in place select the text and invoke Format gt Remove Link Saving HTML documents To save the current document in HTML format proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command File gt Save as 2 Choose the HTML format from the Save as Type list 3 Enter the filename under which the file is to be saved and confirm with OK The document is now saved in HTML format Tip After saving the document open it with your web browser to check its appearance 464 e Internet functions Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents In this chapter you will find detailed information about outputting documents printing faxing e mailing etc The following topics are covered E Print preview The first section covers the use of the File gt Print Preview command which displays a preview of the printed document on the screen Printing a document The next section introduces the File gt Print command which actually prints a document Printing a form letter You can print form letters which are documents that are to be sent to several addressees with the command File gt Print Merge m Faxing a document Windows only If you have installed fax hardware a
113. m Removing a separator line or space If you drag the icon that is to the immediate right of the separator line or space a little to the left the separator or space will be removed Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 565 Resetting a toolbar If you should happen to make a mistake while editing one of the default toolbars you can always reset the toolbar To do this invoke the View gt Toolbars command select the toolbar to be reset with a mouse click and click the Reset button All the changes you have made to the toolbar will be undone and it will again contain the default icons Creating user defined toolbar icons You can also create user defined icons and then add them to a toolbar Such icons can be used to start other programs of your choosing To set up a user defined icon for example an icon for starting the Windows Notepad proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars 2 Select the User category from the Group list 3 Select one of the icons from the Command list The first three icons are al ready assigned to the Windows Calculator the Windows Character Map and the Windows Control Panel to serve as examples Select the fourth icon for this exercise 4 Click the Edit button A dialog box appears 5 Enter a short description of the program to be started in the Description field In this example you could enter Windows Notepad 6 Enter the complete path and fi
114. mode The following is the fastest method Point the mouse at any free position within the document window and double click with the right mouse button to switch between Edit and Object mode The Object toolbar When you enable Object mode the Formatting toolbar is replaced by the Object toolbar RE RIE EI AwveZfl SOOOPA E S 9 j The Object toolbar This toolbar provides icons for inserting and editing objects From left to right the icons are associated with the following functions E Toggle between Object mode and Edit mode E Insert text frame E Insert picture frame E Insert OLE object frame available only under Windows E Insert OLE object frame with the SoftMaker Equation Editor available only under Windows E Insert line 250 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Insert freeform curve Insert Bezier curve Insert arrow Insert straight connector Insert elbow connector Insert curved connector Insert rectangle Insert rounded rectangle Insert ellipse or circle Insert AutoShape Insert TextArt object Group selected objects Link selected text frames Modify object properties Object list a dropdown list of all objects in the document as described below Not all versions of TextMaker have this feature Object list At the very right of the object toolbar a dropdown list with the names of all objects existing in the current document is displayed Open this list and when you click on the name of an o
115. more text you enter the larger the frame becomes The edit box to the right allows you to enter a minimum height if desired Fixed If you select this option you can specify the exact height of the frame yourself Note With this setting TextMaker will display a red bar at the bottom edge of the frame whenever the header or footer text grows too large to be fit ted completely in the frame If this bar appears you should enter a greater value for the fixed height select the Growing option or reduce the amount of text in the frame Note The width of header and footer frames is adjusted by TextMaker au tomatically to match the left and right page margin However you can al ways add paragraph indents to the text in headers footers in order to make them wider or narrower m Distance to edge Here you can specify the amount of space TextMaker should leave between the frame and the top or bottom edge of the page E Distance to text Here you can specify the amount of space TextMaker should leave between the frame and the normal body text Borders tab Here you can specify border lines for the frame The options on this tab correspond to those for the Format gt Borders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Shades tab Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the frame The options on this tab correspond to those for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading begi
116. moved nor resized when the document is edited in normal view They can be modified only in Master Page view Note This setting affects only the current document Dividing a document into chapters By default the page formatting options described in this chapter always apply to the whole document Thus all pages will have the same header and footer the paper format will remain constant throughout the document etc Chapters provide a way around this limitation With the Insert gt Break gt Chapter break command you can divide a document into as many chapters as you wish This has the following effects on the page formatting of the document m Paper format orientation and margins can be set separately for each chapter m Each chapter can have its own master page and thus its own headers and footers m The page numbering can be reset as needed to any beginning value whatever in each individual chapter m If you check the Different left and right pages option in the chapter format ting dialog you can set up different headers footers and master pages for the chapter s left and right facing pages m You can specify that a chapter should always begin on a left or right page If you specify for example a right page TextMaker will automatically insert an empty page into the document as required to prevent the first page of the chap ter from falling on a left page To the extent that it provides these possibilities
117. named Head ings choosing for it a larger bold type a centered alignment etc Now whenever you want to make a paragraph into a heading all you have to do is select this style for it and it will be formatted accordingly You can define different styles for each document they are saved in the docu ment In this chapter you will find detailed information on using styles The following topics are covered m Character styles In a character style you can save a frequently needed character format type face size emphasis etc and apply it repeatedly to any characters you like Use the Format gt Character Style command for this m Paragraph styles In a paragraph style you can save a frequently needed paragraph format indentation tab stops alignment etc and apply it repeatedly to any paragraph you like Use the Format gt Paragraph Style command for this m Managing styles TextMaker s integrated style manager allows you to manage the styles of your documents For example you can copy styles from one document to another Use the Format gt Manage Styles command for this Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 119 Document templates Styles that you want to use frequently can be stored in a document template Whenever you create a new document TextMaker lets you select the document template to be used as the basis for the document All styles stored in the doc ument will also be available in your new d
118. of decimal places only its representation is rounded see below Actually rounding variables It is essential to note that the option for setting the number of decimal places just described changes only the way the results of a calculation are displayed In reality the variable retains its original precision 388 o Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 In practice this means that if you assign a value of 2 5 to variable A and set the number of decimal places to 0 it will be shown as 3 but if you multiply A by 2 the result shown will be 5 not 6 Therefore TextMaker also comes with a function called ROUND for real round ing It can be applied as in the following example A ROUND 2 5 0 The function s arguments are the value to be rounded and the number of decimal places to which it is to be rounded separated by a semicolon In the example above the value of 3 is assigned to the variable A You will find detailed information about all TextMaker s computational functions in section Formulas and functions beginning on page 391 Updating calculations When you enter or edit a calculation with Insert gt Calculation and then confirm with OK TextMaker automatically updates all the calculations in the document However in certain situations the results of calculations can appear outdated For example if you paste from another document a segment of text containing varia bles that are also used in
119. of forms fields emphasizes all text fields check boxes and dropdown lists in the text with gray shading m Activate deactivate Forms mode corresponds to the menu command View gt Forms Mode Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 301 Tip When you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons without clicking a text box appears indicating the function of the icon Editing forms objects Like all other types of objects forms objects can be edited after being selected with a mouse click You can delete move and copy them change their properties with the Object gt Properties command etc Tip In addition using the Object gt Tab Order command you can change the order of the forms objects which is applied when the user jumps from one object to another in Forms mode using the key see the section Changing the tab order beginning on page 313 Note General information about working with objects can be found in the section Frames and drawings beginning on page 247 Preparing an example form We come now to a practical example we will prepare a form for gathering client data The form should contain some text fields for the entry of the client s address beyond those a dropdown list for recording the client s gender and a checkbox that is to be checked in case the client is new T Formitmd ka a Bs Name Address City 2 Gender female 7 3 New client O yes Jae 4 302 Forms Manual
120. of page numbers in section Inserting the page number date etc beginning on page 104 m Page Setup tab The other tab in this dialog can be used to change the page format paper size orientation margins etc More information on each option is available in the section Page setup beginning on page 100 Don t forget that you can specify a different page format for each separate chapter So if you have divided a document into several chapters and you want to change the page formatting for the whole document you must first select the entire document Navigating among chapters You can page to a specific chapter with the Edit gt Go to command To do this invoke the command choose the Chapter option in the Go to list and then select the desired chapter Changing the page background As mentioned in the section Chapter formatting you can change the page back ground of your document s pages using the Format gt Chapter command This allows you to add some background color to the pages for example There s another command that does the same but offers far more options to choose from the Format gt Page Background command In this section you will learn how these two commands work and what differences there are Format gt Page Background You can use the Format gt Page Background command to change the page back ground for the entire document Proceed as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 P
121. on page 268 m Properties For modifying common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 For certain types of drawings additional tabs will appear on the dialog giving you access to more options as described on the following pages AutoShapes tab available only for AutoShapes Note This tab appears only for AutoShapes The AutoShapes tab allows you to change the shape of an AutoShape For exam ple you can turn a rectangle into a speech balloon or any other shape you like To change the shape simply click on the desired AutoShape in the list Inner Text tab available only for AutoShapes with text added Note This tab appears only for text frames and AutoShapes containing text see the section Adding text to AutoShapes beginning on page 289 Use the Inner Text tab to change settings affecting the text inside the AutoShape Options available Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 291 Inner margins group box Lets you modify the margins between AutoShape and inner text If you check the Automatic option TextMaker will calculate suitable settings automatically m Overlapping objects group box These settings determine what happens when the object overlaps another object With the default setting Ignore object TextMaker does nothing Thus in the region of overlap the contents of both objects are rendered on top of one an other If on the other h
122. on the following pages Indices An index is an alphabetized list of important keywords that occur in a document giving the pages on which these words are found On the next pages you will learn how to set up an index Preparing an index Before TextMaker can create an index you must specify the terms that should appear in it To do this you add them to the document s keyword list 414 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Adding terms to the keyword list To add a term to the keyword list do the following 1 Select the term that should appear in the index This can be a word a part of a word or a phrase 2 Invoke Tools gt Index gt Add Index Entry 3 By default TextMaker records only the position of the occurrence of the term that is currently selected If you want TextMaker to record the positions of all occurrences of the term in the text check the Index all occurrences option see below for additional information 4 Click on OK Now you have added the selected term to the list of keywords TextMaker records in this list not only the term itself but also the position of its occurrence in the text Later when the index is created this term will appear in it and the number of the page on which the term was selected as a keyword will appear to the right of the term For the index to fulfill its function it is important to select the position at which a term is added to the keyword list with
123. one with Tools gt Create Database The database can be organized any way you like except that it must always include a field for a shortcut abbreviation that can serve as a unique refer ence for each source and also fields for the author and title of each source m Step 2 Next invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings and click on the File button to assign your database to the document as a bibliography database Then select those fields of your database that are to serve respectively as the Reference Field Author Field and Title Field for the creation of the bibliography m Step 3 Now you can invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Insert Bibliography Field to insert references to the sources contained in the bibliography database into the text for example As mentioned in DNA1979 426 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 m Step 4 Finally at the end of the document invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography to have TextMaker create a bibliography The biblio graphy represents a list of all sources to which you have inserted references in the text see step 3 Each source listing will be based on the corresponding record in the bibliography database You will find detailed information about this on the following pages Step 1 The bibliography database In order to be able to make use of TextMaker s bibliography functions you first need a bibliography databas
124. operate the style manager use the provided controls as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 137 Left list In the left list all paragraph styles and character styles of the current document are displayed Select one or more styles in the list and click on one of the buttons described below to perform the desired action To select multiple styles press and hold the key and click each entry that you want to select If you would like to open a different document in the list click the Open button and select the desired file Right list The right list can be used to open a second document allowing you to copy styles between two documents To open a second document use the Open button located below the right list gt gt and lt lt buttons The two buttons labeled with gt gt and lt lt can be used to copy styles between the two documents opened in the dialog First select one or more styles in either list Then click on the gt gt button to copy styles from the left list to the right list or click the lt lt button to copy from the right list to the left If you try to copy a style that already exists in the target document TextMaker first asks you for permission to overwrite it Rename button To rename a style select it click the Rename button and enter the new name Note The default style named Normal cannot be renamed Delete button To delete styles select them and click the Delete button No
125. or not By the way the same option is also available in the Tools gt Options dialog on the Language tab Activating or deactivating the Use automatic hyphenation option there is identical to invoking the Tools gt Automatic Hyphenation menu com mand Deactivating hyphenation for a word or any other text segment You can also deactivate hyphenation for a specific text segment for example a certain word To do so select the desired text segment invoke the Format gt Character com mand switch to the Font tab and set the Language option to No language Hint Please note that this will also deactivate the spell checker in the selected text segment Inserting soft hyphens TextMaker s hyphenation module performs incorrect hyphenations only in very rare cases If the hyphenator should actually fail to hyphenate a word at the desired position you can always correct it by inserting a soft hyphen 330 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 To do this place the text cursor at the position where you want the word to be hyphenated and press the key combination C From now on TextMaker will hyphenate the word only at this position Note If a word contains multiple syllables you can insert more than just one soft hyphen for example one after each syllable whenever needed Tip By default soft hyphens are not displayed in the document If you want them to become visible choose Tools gt Options switch to the Vi
126. or footer position the text cursor back in the text Tip If you point with the mouse to one of the icons without clicking a text box appears giving the icon s function Inserting the page number date etc Headers and footers often contain the page number date etc With TextMaker you can insert this sort of information using what are called fields To do this move the text cursor to the desired position in the header or footer invoke the Insert gt Field command and select the desired field for example Page number or Print date You will find information about the various kinds of fields in chapter Fields beginning on page 161 Tip There are some buttons in the Header and Footer toolbar for inserting the most frequently used fields page number date etc See the previous section Example inserting the page number in a footer For example to insert the page number in a footer proceed as follows 1 Click in the footer to position the text cursor there 2 Invoke the Insert gt Field command 3 Select Page number from the Field type list 104 e Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 4 Choose the desired representation of the number from the Format list e g Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I II II 5 Confirm with OK TextMaker now inserts a page number field in the footer Controlling page numbering By default the first page of every document is assigned the numb
127. order of data series The Add and Delete buttons add delete a series The Edit button can be used to enter edit the values contained in the select ed data series See also section Entering editing the data of a chart page 228 Data sources group box Allows you to specify which values are used to build up the selected data series The fields in this section are filled in automatically and there is usually no need to change them Note It is not recommended to modify these fields by hand Use the Edit button instead located below the Series listbox It opens a dialog where you can enter edit these values in a more comfortable way More information on this dialog can be found in the section Entering editing the data of a chart page 228 Fields in this section Name The name of the data series If you leave this field empty the data series will be assigned an automatically generated name Series 1 Series 2 etc Y values The y values of the data series To modify them do not enter values directly but use the Edit button located below the Series listbox Annotation With most chart types the y values represent the data to be displayed in the chart For example in a column chart the y values deter mine the height of the columns 234 e Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 X values The x values of the data series To modify them do not enter values directly but use the Edit button located below the Series l
128. original colors of the image Reduce the colors to shades of gray Reduce the colors to black and white Increase brightness Decrease brightness Increase contrast Decrease contrast Increase gamma Decrease gamma Rotate 90 degrees clockwise Rotate 90 degrees counter clockwise Revert all changes made with this toolbar Enter exit Crop mode In this mode additional handles are displayed on the borders of the picture Drag these handles around to crop the picture Note These settings can also be changed using the dialog of the Object gt Proper ties command See section Changing the properties of pictures page 219 222 e Pictures Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts TextMaker s integrated charting module allows you to present numbers vividly in charts In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know about charts Topics covered Inserting charts The first section is about inserting charts There are two ways to do this a creating a chart inside the spreadsheet application PlanMaker and then copying it into your TextMaker document or b simply creating an empty chart and filling in its data by hand Editing charts In this section you will learn how to enter edit the data that is presented in a chart how to work with the different chart elements data rows axes legends etc and how to modify the overall chart properties See the next pages for details Hint Basic information on ch
129. right column of a double columned document the object anchored to this paragraph is also moved to the right column Indent Like Paragraph except that the paragraph s indentation is taken into account Thus if Position is set to Left for example and you increase the left indent of the paragraph by 0 5 in the object will move to the right by 0 5 in Left margin The offset is relative to the respective page margin For Right margin example if you set Offset to 0 Position to Left and etc choose Right margin here the object s left edge would appear where the right page margin begins If necessary you can review the description of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 252 Offset Finally you can set the desired spacing in the Offset field Example If Position is set to Left Relative to Page borders and Offset to 2 in the left edge of the object will appear 2 in from the left page margin If this margin is 1 in wide the left edge of the object will be 3 in from the left page edge m Vertical Position group box This option is available only for frames and drawings The same goes for setting the vertical positioning as for setting the horizontal You can use the default settings and simply enter the distance from the top of the page at which you want the object to be positioned in the Offset field 258 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Alternatively
130. rows to be sorted 2 Invoke the Table gt Sort Table command 3 In the dialog box choose the column whose contents are to be used as the basis of the sort If desired you can specify multiple columns as sort criteria see be low 4 Confirm with OK The table rows are now sorted according to the contents of the selected column s The dialog box for this command presents the following options Sort by Here you specify the column whose contents are to be the basis of the sort In addition you can specify the sort order Ascending A Z or Descending Z A Type Normally you can keep the default setting Text for this option However if the column contains numbers you should switch to Number If it contains dates choose Date Note When a column contains for example dates and you choose the Date option the program will automatically extract day month and year to determine the correct sort order 208 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Then sort by You can specify more than one sort criterion as required For example if the first column contains last names and the second column contains first names you can select the first column for Sort by and the second column for Then sort by As a result the rows of the table will be sorted by last name and those rows containing the same last name will then be sorted by first name First row contains headings If the first row of your table contains headings you sh
131. section Preferences General tab page 527 for details Manual TextMaker 2016 Document windows e 521 Customizing TextMaker TextMaker gives you control over numerous program settings allowing you to adapt the program to your personal working style This chapter covers all the details It is divided into the following sections m Preferences To modify TextMaker s global preferences use the Tools gt Options command These settings apply to the program as a whole and thus to all documents Document properties To modify the properties of a document use the File gt Properties command These settings affect the current document only Customizing the document display This section describes how to adjust the way a document is displayed on the screen Most of the necessary commands are found in the View menu m Full screen view When you invoke the View gt Full Screen command TextMaker maximizes its program window and hides all toolbars in order to display as much of the doc ument content as possible Customizing toolbars To customize the program s toolbars Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar etc use the View gt Toolbars command m Customizing keyboard shortcuts To customize keyboard shortcuts for menu commands use the Tools gt Cus tomize gt Keyboard Mappings command m Using the grid and Using guides Guides and the grid are aids for positioning objects such as frames and draw
132. so that they can be more easily distinguished from normal text Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 555 Document properties Reviewing tab The Reviewing tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to make settings that control the way comments and document revisions are handled You will find information about these settings in the following sections m Settings for comments beginning on page 451 m Settings for the Track changes function beginning on page 456 General information about comments and document revisions is available in chapter Document revisions beginning on page 447 Document properties Fonts tab The Fonts tab in the File gt Properties dialog box displays a list of all fonts used in the current document The list is divided into fonts that are available on the current device and fonts that are not available 1 e not installed Customizing the document display You can adjust the way the document appears on the screen and either hide or bring into view various components of the program window with the commands in the View menu The commands and their associated functions are listed as follows Command Function Standard Switches the document view to standard view This is the view that you normally use when working with TextMaker often referenced as normal view in the manual Continuous Switches to the continuous view which displays the docu ment in a simplified way i
133. spacing for it all the paragraph styles based on it are changed as well except for those styles where you have explicitly specified a different line spacing So By default all paragraph styles are linked to the Normal style However when you create a new style you can specify another paragraph style as the basis for it in Based on To create a paragraph style and base it on a specific style other than Normal do the following 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Click on the New button 3 Give the style a name 4 Switch to the Style tab 5 Now comes the distinctive step In Based on select the style to which the new style is to be linked 6 Now you can enter the desired formatting etc The print version of this manual serves as example of the use of linked paragraph styles Here the paragraph styles for all heading levels are based on a single paragraph style that specifies among other things an increased spacing from the preceding paragraph When we reviewed the printed proofs we determined that the spacing we had chosen was too small To correct the problem all we had to do was increase it in that one underlying style immediately the spacing of all the headings grew Had we based the header styles on Normal we would have had to change each of these styles separately Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 135 Paragraph styles and the sidebar On the previous pages you have learned how to c
134. style on another you can if you wish specify the font size in a relative manner For example you can specify that the font size for style X should always be 80 of the font size for style Y You can do this as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Select a style and click on Edit 3 Switch to the Style tab 4 Enable the Scale option 5 Enter the desired factor as a percentage for example 80 6 Confirm with OK The font size for a style edited in this manner will always be 80 of the size specified for the style on which it is based Character styles and the sidebar On the previous pages you have learned how to create apply and modify charac ter styles Alternatively you can perform these tasks with the help of another very useful tool in TextMaker the sidebar The sidebar can amongst other things display a list of all character styles availa ble To format text in a specific style simply select the text and then double click on the character style in the sidebar Apart from that you can also use the sidebar for editing and managing character styles All you have to do is enable the sidebar and activate its character styles function This can be achieved as follows 1 If the sidebar is not displayed enable it e g by invoking the command View gt Sidebar gt Show at Right Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 127 2 In the little toolbar displayed at the top of the sidebar click on the 4M ico
135. summary information when saving When you enable this option a dialog box will appear automatically the first time you save a new document to enable you to enter some additional infor mation about it for more information see the section Document summary beginning on page 491 Auto recovery Save state every minutes When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically makes a temporary backup copy of every open document on a periodic basis You can enter a peri od of 1 to 100 minutes Note These temporary backup copies are totally independent of the regular backup copies that you can set up in the Backup section on this tab see be low When you exit TextMaker in the normal manner these temporary backup copies are automatically deleted However if TextMaker is abruptly shut down by a power failure for example while you are working on open documents these copies become available when the program is restarted TextMaker rec ognizes that there has been a failure and offers to open the automatic backup copies of all documents that had been modified but not saved just prior to the failure Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 539 You can then check each of the restored documents to determine if any of the most recently made changes have actually been lost and then save them Display warning when saving documents in text format If this option is enabled a warning will be issued whenever you save a docu
136. t n ROUND n1 n2 RTRIM 2 SQRT n STR n STRING t n SUBSTR n n2 SUM n n2 TODAY 398 e Calculations in the text Returns the minimum value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left comer and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example MIN B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Returns the month part of date d as a number MONTH 09 25 15 gives 9 The opposite of DTON which returns a date serial number NTOD converts such a date serial number n back to a date Returns the result of raising the number n1 to the power of n2 POW 2 8 gives 256 Returns the product of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example PROD B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Returns the last n characters of the text string t RIGHT TextMaker 5 gives Maker Returns the number n rounded to n2 decimal places ROUND 2 44 1 gives 2 4 and ROUND 2 45 1 gives 2 5 Returns text string with any trailing space characters removed RTRIM Text gives Text Returns the square root of the number n SQRT A4 gives 2 Converts the number n to a text s
137. tab and acti vate the option Suppress line numbers there Dialog options In the dialog box for the Format gt Section command you can make settings that control the line numbering as follows 186 o Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Show line numbers Turns the display of line numbers on off m Options group box Here you can set the following options First line number is the number with which the line numbering should begin Increment is the interval between numbered lines For example if you enter 5 line numbers will appear only at lines 5 10 15 20 etc Distance to text is the amount of blank space TextMaker should leave between the line number and the left margin Position determines where the numbers are shown in the left or right page margin or in the inner or outer page margin for documents with facing pages like books Numbering group box Allows you to specify whether and when the numbering should be reset Restart at the beginning of this section The numbering is reset to 1 only at the beginning of the current section Tip You can define new sections with the Insert gt Break gt Section break command Restart on every page The numbering is reset to at the beginning of every page of the document Continuous The numbering is not reset to 1 The additional Skip empty paragraphs option has the following meaning If it is checked the numbering will skip all paragraphs that are empty
138. text frames and to AutoShapes contain ing text Changing the properties of drawings To modify the properties of a drawing first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the drawing The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modify the following settings 290 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Layout On this tab you can change the position and outside margins of the drawing and specify how the body text should flow around it See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format For changing the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 E Filling For changing the filling of the object See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For modifying the lines used to draw the object See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 m Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 m 3D For adding a 3D effect See section Object properties 3D tab beginning on page 267 m Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning
139. the preview box 54 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 Alternatively you can click on the buttons displayed to the left and below the preview Each button represents one border indicated by the symbol displayed on the icon In our example add a border line above the paragraph by clicking on the top line in the preview or on the respective button We could add additional border lines by clicking on some of the other borders in the preview however all we currently want is a line at the top 3 Confirm with OK The paragraph should now be displayed with a thin black line above it Normal text paragraphs can be furnished with lines using the same method as for footers The same even goes for some types of objects for example table cells Printing the practice letter If you want you can now print your first composition for proofing To do this invoke the command File gt Print or press the keyboard shortcut e Print A Print device Printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer on XPSPort z Pages Options All Copies 1 Current page z Collate copies Pages 1 1 Print to File Pages to print Pieron pict ses Reverse orde All selected pages i E Pages per sheet The dialog box for File gt Print In the Print dialog box you can determine how many copies and which pages are to be printed By default one copy of all pages is printed So confirm with OK Manual TextMaker 20
140. the following buttons Create new document Creates a new document containing the envelope Append to document Appends the envelope to the end of the current docu ment Print envelope Just prints the envelope and discards it afterwards 6 If you have inserted database fields TextMaker now displays the address database Browse to the desired recipient and click the Insert button The envelope will now be created and filled out Note that the above settings have to be specified just once From now on Text Maker remembers the paper format and the placement of the database fields Of course you can change these settings whenever you like In detail the following options are available in the Envelope dialog Sender Use this field to enter the sender s address The la icon displayed above the field can be used to change the font that will be used to print the address Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 361 Recipient Use this field to enter the recipient s address Hint It is recommended to use database fields from your address database for this To insert a database field click the Database field button to open a field list and then choose the field to insert If you have not yet selected the database to use you first have to click the Data base button and select the desired database The A icon displayed above the field can be used to change the font that will be used to print the address Sender positi
141. the format to your needs To do this invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command again switch to the Numbered lists tab select the list click on Edit and make the desired changes These changes will affect all the headings in the document including those already numbered Note for users of older versions of TextMaker In older versions of TextMaker headings could not be numbered automatically based on a numbered list and had to be numbered by means of manual insertions of Auto number fields If you have old documents in which the headings are still numbered using the old method you can of course continue to use them without restriction TextMaker continues to support the auto number field However use of the new method is recommended when composing new docu ments because numbered lists have several advantages E You no longer have to manually insert an Auto Number field at the beginning of each heading m Numbered lists are more flexible they provide more kinds of numberings and more formatting possibilities 412 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 m Numbered lists can be conveniently modified even after they have been ap plied For example if you want to change the formatting of all the numberings all you have to do is edit the formatting of the numbered list the numberings of all the headings will immediately change accordingly Outlined documents and chapters Outlined do
142. the text You can insert pictures directly into the body text with the Object gt New Picture command TextMaker treats a picture that has been inserted with this command as if it were a character within the text It becomes part of the body text Thus if you type something just before the picture the picture will be shifted to accommo date it just as a character would Inserting picture frames Alternatively pictures can be inserted in the form of picture frames using the Object gt New Picture Frame command Picture frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for documents in newspaper style This chapter covers only the insertion of pictures directly into the text You will find information about picture frames in chapter Frames and drawings beginning on page 247 The following topics are covered in this chapter Inserting a picture into the text Scanning in pictures Inserting pictures from the gallery Android Changing position and size of a picture Changing the properties of pictures Using the Picture toolbar See the next pages for details Manual TextMaker 2016 Pictures e 215 Inserting a picture into the text To insert a picture directly into the body text do the following 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke Object gt New Picture 3 A dialog box appea
143. thesaurus To choose your setting open the dropdown list and select the desired language from the available options Tip If you want to employ more than one language in a document you can use the Format gt Character command to format any particular segment of text in a different language You can read more about this in the section Setting the lan guage page 318 Spell checking Here you can configure the spell checker Settings available Use background spell checking If you activate this option the entire document will be continuously scanned for spelling errors in the background Incorrectly spelled words are indicated with wavy red underlines and can be corrected at any time See section Background spell checking page 322 Note When this option is turned off you can still check the spelling in a document using the manual spell checker To launch it use the Tools gt Check Spelling command See section Manual spell checking page 321 Underline old German spelling in blue new German spelling only When this option is enabled the background spell checker additionally under lines in blue all German words that are correct according to the old German spellings but should be spelled differently to conform to the new reformed spellings See section Conversion to new German spelling beginning on page 324 Note This option affects only text in the language German Germany or German Swi
144. to left languages in the Regional and language options of Windows control panel For other operating systems please check its online help to find out if support for Arabic script is available and how it can be installed Changing the text direction of paragraphs When the Extended support for Arabic text option is enabled you can change the text direction of any given paragraph in your document whenever needed To do so proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Paragraph command 2 Switch to the Paragraph tab 3 Under Text direction activate the option Right to left to change the text direction to right to left To set the text direction to left to right deactivate the option Tipp Using the keyboard A much quicker way to change the text direction of a paragraph is provided with the following keyboard shortcuts m When you press and the left Shift key e simultaneously the text direction changes to left to right m When you press and the right Shift key e simultaneously the text direction changes to right to left Note On some systems e g Ubuntu Linux these keyboard shortcuts are reserved for other functions In this case you can alternatively use the keyboard shortcuts for left to right and 0 for right to left 510 o Working with Arabic text Manual TextMaker 2016 Changing the direction of tables When the Extended support for Arabic text option is enabled you can change th
145. to position the relevant database fields in your form letter you can insert them in the text with Insert gt Field When the letter is printed or faxed these fields will be replaced with the actual contents of the fields from the database record by record Specifically you proceed as follows to insert a database field 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke Insert gt Field 3 In the list box Field type select the item Database field 4 Now you can select the field to be inserted from the list box Field name 5 When you click on Insert TextMaker inserts the field into the text and displays the field name in curly braces NAME for example Proceed in exactly the same way to insert additional database fields at other places in the text until the form letter has the desired appearance Database fields can be formatted like normal text so you can give them different fonts sizes etc any time you like When the form letter is later printed TextMaker will automatically wrap lines with database fields correctly taking into account that the actual text of the field varies from record to record Viewing test records in the text Normally TextMaker displays database fields that have been inserted into the text in the form of a field name enclosed by curly braces for example NAME To see how the form letter will really look when it is printed you can instruct TextMaker to display the conte
146. to suggest appropriate values 5 Confirm with OK The text is now transformed into a table Each line of text becomes a row in the table An example You want to turn the following list of addresses into a table Peter Miller 24 Main Street 12345 Whitneyville AK Thomas Meyer 1733 University Drive 54321 Knoxville TN When you invoke Table gt Convert Text to Table select semicolon as the Separa tor you will get the following result 24 Main Street 12345 Whitneyville AK 1733 University Drive 54321 Knoxville TN Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows 206 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Rows and Columns Normally you don t have to worry about these settings Provided you specify the separator correctly TextMaker can determine the number of rows and col umns the resulting table should have automatically and fill in these fields with the appropriate values However you can enter your own values m Separator This is the most important setting Here you specify the character TextMaker is to use to recognize the separate entries in each line of text You can choose among the following Paragraph break Each entry is in its own paragraph Tabs The entries are separated by tabs Semicolon The entries are separated by semicolons Besides one of these you can choose any other character for the separator by entering it in the User defined field You should u
147. toolbar and hover over the fonts with your mouse While you do that the selected text is updated live to give you an impression how it would look like in the corresponding font To actually apply the font simply click on it To discard the change click any where outside the list or press the key Smooth edges of screen fonts When this option is enabled TextMaker uses a technology called anti aliasing to smooth the edges of fonts and improve their appearance on the screen The options available vary according to the operating system Workspace color This option allows you to change the background color of document windows User interface size Android only This option enables you to change the size of the application s user interface For example if you have a device with a large display you may want to try setting this option to Small instead of Normal This will reduce the size of all user interface elements freeing some space for the display of your documents Note On some devices the user interface might be too small or too large after changing this setting This depends on the device s resolution Measurement Android and Linux only Here you can specify the units of measure TextMaker should use by default Metric centimeter or U S inch 534 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Under Windows this option is not necessary since the program automatically uses the settin
148. will be applied all the other formatting options remain untouched Title bars section Allows you to specify if the table should contain e g headers or footers for matted in a different way You can see the effect of these options right in the Sample field For example when you deactivate the Footer option the last row in the table looses its spe cial formatting It will be formatted like any other ordinary table cells Converting a table to text With the Table gt Convert Table to Text command you can transform a table into text 204 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 An example You want to turn a table with 2x2 cells into a list in which the contents of the cells will be separated by semicolons To do this proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor in any cell of the table 2 Invoke the Table gt Convert Table to Text command 3 Select the desired Separator character in this case the Semicolon 4 Confirm with OK The contents of the table are now converted into normal text from left to right and top to bottom So if you convert a table like this one Celll Cell2 Cell3 Cell4 you will get text like this Celll Cell2 Cell3 Cell4 Each row becomes a separate paragraph The Separator is inserted between the contents of each cell in every row Depending on the separator you select you will get the following results Separator Result Paragraph break Tabs
149. will be embedded that actually occur in the document Advantage The resulting PDF file is smaller in size View tab This tab contains advanced options for the display of the PDF file in a PDF viewer including the following E Navigation pane Use this option to specify what to display in the navigation pane of the PDF viewer The navigation pane is a panel displayed left of the PDF document Options available Default Use the PDF viewer s default setting Empty Do not display anything in the navigation pane 480 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Bookmarks Display the document s bookmarks in the navigation pane Page thumbnails Display miniatures of the document s pages in the naviga tion pane E Zoom Use this option to set the default zoom level of the PDF file as follows Default Use the PDF viewer s default setting Full page Select the zoom level at which the entire page fits in the window Fit width Select the zoom level at which the page width fits in the window Fit height Select the zoom level at which the page height fits in the window Custom Set the zoom level to a custom value in percent E Page layout Use this option to specify the page layout to display as follows Default Use the PDF viewer s default setting Single pages Display as single pages Two pages odd pages left Display as two facing pages odd pages on the left Two pages odd pages right Display as two
150. window L37 Col8 Section 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 2 English United Ins Hint When you move the mouse pointer over a toolbar icon or menu command a short explanation of its function is displayed in the status bar Apart from that the following information is displayed in the status bar from left to right Example Explanation L37 Col 8 The text cursor is positioned at line 37 and column 8 on the current page Section 1 The text cursor is positioned in section 1 of the document see chapter Multi column page layouts page 143 Chapter 1 The text cursor is positioned in chapter 1 of the document see section Dividing a document into chapters page 110 Page 1 of 2 The text cursor is positioned on page 1 of a document with a total of 2 pages English The text at the current position of the text cursor or the currently selected text respectively is formatted in English language see also section Setting the language page 318 Ins Shows whether Insert Mode Ins or Overwrite Mode Ovr is active Manual TextMaker 2016 The application screen e 27 Ins Insert mode is active newly entered text will be inserted into existing text Ovr Overwrite mode is active newly entered text will be written over existing text The standard setting is Ins You can switch between these two modes with the key 28 o The application screen Manual TextMaker 2016 Basics This chapter gives you a brief desc
151. word and then press the word is deleted If the text cursor is positioned in the middle of the word this key combination deletes only the letters following the cursor to the end of the word Deleting a carriage return You can remove a carriage return inserted by mistake Test it Type a multi line paragraph and then insert a carriage return in the middle of the paragraph by pressing the Enter key The following text leaps to the next line and the paragraph is divided In certain cases as when a paragraph is too long and must be divided into two paragraphs this can be done intentionally Here however it was a mistake so press the Backspace key to remove the carriage return Deleting large sections of text The above mentioned delete keys are well suited for removing short sections of text but too time consuming for removing larger parts of text For this reason there is yet another method of deleting that involves first selecting text and then e g pressing the key to delete it all at once There is more about this in chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 Undoing changes TextMaker is very forgiving as it allows you to reverse the most recently complet ed changes with the Edit gt Undo command For example if you delete some text and then realize you want the text back all you need to do is invoke Edit gt Undo to reverse the deletion This works not only with text deletions but also with pract
152. you have TextMaker update it be cause the updating process involves the removal and reinsertion of the table It follows that manual changes to text or formatting in a table of references make sense only when your document is 100 ready for printing and the table will not have to be updated again Normally it is not necessary to change the text in tables of references anyway and there are much more elegant ways to change their formatting Tip Tables of references are automatically formatted using paragraph styles and their formatting can be conveniently modified with the help of these styles When you create a table of references TextMaker creates the following styles m TOC 1 through TOC 9 Paragraph styles for entries in the table of contents according to outline level Entries for the first outline level i e for major headings are formatted with the TOC 1 style entries for the second level are formatted with the TOC 2 style etc m Index The paragraph style for entries in the index m Index Heading The paragraph style for the large letters that are used as headings for sections of the index when the First letter option has been selected prior to the creation of the index m Caption The paragraph style for captions Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 433 E Table of Figures The paragraph style for entries in a table of figures Bibliography
153. you select some text and open the context menu it will offer commands for cutting copying or formatting that text Tex Cut Ctrl X ES Copy Ctrl C 73 Paste Ctrl y To open the context menu you usually first select something in your document and then click on that selection with the right mouse button Android In the Android version you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second 24 e The application screen Manual TextMaker 2016 Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is shown underneath the menu bar It contains icons for most commonly used commands RCE StzB 4 SR 9 C A SORQQAR Vie a TH Toolbars such as the Standard toolbar allow fast access to a program s functions Each icon represents a specific command If you click on it the corresponding command is invoked Tip If you point the mouse cursor at an icon without clicking and hold it there a text box called a tooltip is shown The tooltip describes the icon s function There are additional toolbars in TextMaker that you can turn on and off as you choose To do this either invoke the menu command View gt Toolbars or click with the right mouse button on one of the displayed toolbars A menu appears from which you can select toolbars that you would like displayed Customizing toolbars You can change the default toolbars at will and create your
154. 0 30000 20000 10000 category 0 4 axis value axis Series 1 Series 2 etc represent the chart s data series Three dimensional charts types contain some additional chart elements walls floor etc Each of these chart elements can be selected and modified Selecting chart elements To select a chart element first click on the chart itself to select it if it isn t already selected Then click on the desired chart element For example to select a data series click on any value in this series Note To select a single value within a data series first click on the data series to select the entire series and then click on the desired value Hint Alternatively open the chart elements drop down list in the middle of the Chart toolbar and select the desired element Hd My Chart Area BR Hd m s Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 231 Changing position and size of chart elements Some chart elements can be moved or resized for example the legend To move an element select it and drag it to the desired position To change its size drag one of the corner handles Modifying chart elements properties As described in the section Changing common chart properties later on charts have common properties that you can modify whenever needed Apart from those common properties you can also change the properties of single chart elements For example to change the properties of the legend dis
155. 16 The TextMaker Tour e 55 Hint Before actually printing a document you can preview the printout using the File gt Print Preview command Finished Our TextMaker Tour ends here You will find the final example document for the completed TextMaker Tour in the file TOUR4 TMD You now know many of the program s basic functions and you ought to take some time at this point to investigate them further It would be a good exercise for example to format the letter differently to give it a more attractive font etc Next you can delve into the rest of the manual It has been intentionally put together in such a way that you can read a single chapter at a time as it becomes necessary in the course of your work So step by step you can familiarize yourself with the functions as you want to use them Have fun with TextMaker 56 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with selections This chapter marks the beginning of the reference section of the manual This part of the manual provides detailed descriptions of all TextMaker s functions orga nized into chapters by subject matter as is customary in a reference book The first chapter in the reference section is about working with selections When you want to delete copy or move a part of a document you must first select it This is the case for objects pictures drawings etc as well as for text In addition you must select a text segment before you can a
156. 18 Changing position and size Of a picture eee ee eee cee cree cee eeeteeeeeeeeeeeeerens 218 Changing the properties Of pictures 0 0 lee cece cee esse cree caeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeerens 219 Using the Picture toolbar 0 eee eceeceeeceseceeceseceseceecseecaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeereeseens 221 Charts 223 Inserting charts s22 sscssseseiv ss a sssesbegiaeises cayabeeistna eee pai ra E EEE rE e Ees iS 223 Inserting charts via PlanMaker eesseeeeeeeeeseseseseeeserssrrssrssresseeesesereseesee 224 Inserting charts manually seeeseeeseseeessseeesesererssesreereseeerssreresserrreresrreresee 225 Editing charts aroe aE haven paves caveat boas ec E T E Eat 227 Entering editing the data of a chart eee eee eeceeecesecesecesecnseceeeeneeens 228 Working with chart element 0 cece eeeeeeeceeseeeeceecesecesecaecaecseeeneeens 230 Changing common chart properties 0 0 0 ee eceeceeeceeecesecesecnsecnseceeeaeeens 232 Manual TextMaker 2016 Contents o vii OLE objects 239 Inserting OLE ObJECtS enteses isseire rekrei pao er an coe Eor eenn eSis 239 Editing OLE Object siniese nesteen reee ain aeoea iao veer Eisi 241 Editing links to OLE objects 0 0 eee eceecceesceseceecesecesecaecseecseeeseseneseeeeeens 242 Changing position and size of an OLE object 0 eee eee cseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 Changing the properties of OLE objects eee eecesecseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 243 Using the SoftMaker Equation Editor 0 eee cee cse cree ceeeee
157. 2 Invoke the Object gt Properties command 3 Adjust the settings to your liking For example to change the default setting for the line width switch to the Lines tab and simply choose the desired value in the Thickness field 4 Now comes the distinctive step Instead of clicking on OK click on the De fault button 5 Another dialog pops up allowing you to control exactly which settings to adopt as new default settings Normally there is no need to change anything in this dialog 6 When you confirm with OK the settings you just specified in the properties dialog will from now on be used as the default settings for new drawings 7 To exit the dialog click on OK once more When you insert a new drawing now it will be painted in the given line width Note The default settings for objects are stored inside the document allowing you to specify different settings for each individual document Frames advanced functions The next pages present some less commonly needed functions for working with frames and other objects The following topics are covered E Converting between frame and embedded object E Hiding objects m Changing the order of frames m Grouping frames E Changing the names of objects Converting between frame and embedded object You can convert an object that is in a frame e g a picture frame into an embedded object e g a picture whenever needed Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings
158. 27 Drop down list of all chart elements open the list and click on an element to select it Edit properties of the current chart element Edit common chart properties Add trend line Legend on off Vertical gridlines on off Horizontal gridlines on off Entering editing the data of a chart When you insert a new chart it is filled with the values 1 2 3 4 by default These values are just sample values making sure that the chart isn t displayed completely empty You should of course replace these numbers with your own values using the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command Proceed as follows 1 Select the chart with a mouse click 2 Invoke the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command 3 A dialog box appears In the Y values column enter the numbers to be present ed in the chart Don t worry about the other columns and options they are irrelevant for most chart types For detailed information on this dialog see below 4 Confirm with OK The chart now updates and presents the values you have entered Note You can also open this dialog by selecting the chart invoking the Object gt Properties command switching to the Series tab and clicking on the Edit button Dialog options The dialog box mentioned above has the following options 228 o Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 E Series For charts with more than one data series this list allows you can choose which series to display in the dialog Hi
159. 3 365 dBase Windows file format database 340 363 365 Decimal separator 546 549 Decimal tab 82 84 Default character format changing 73 125 Default file format 538 Manual TextMaker 2016 Default font 73 125 Default language 318 535 536 Default paragraph format changing 134 Delete 30 Delete Edit menu 60 Delete Cells Table menu 193 Design Science 245 246 Dialog language 532 533 Dialog style 532 Dictionaries installing for spell checking 577 Different first page 112 113 Different left and right pages 107 112 113 Display field names 161 165 546 Display of digits 527 528 Display warning when saving documents in text format 538 540 Document Insert menu 62 Document properties 546 Colors tab 550 Fax tab 552 Fonts tab 556 Forms tab 555 Internet tab 553 Protection tab 554 Reviewing tab 451 456 556 Statistics tab 554 Summary tab 546 View tab 546 Document protection 501 Document statistics 554 Document summary entering 491 inserting as fields 161 164 Document tabs 520 527 529 Document Tabs Window menu 520 Document templates 139 applying 140 creating 140 editing 141 importing addresses 139 140 141 350 Normal tmv template 142 Document window 26 517 DOCX file format 505 506 Drag and drop 60 61 Drawings 247 248 286 grouping 273 inserting 286 properties 290 Index e 589 rotating 254 Drop Caps Format menu 90 Dropdown list frames 299 300 311 Dropdown lists 299 300 309 DTON funct
160. 35 467 File gt Print Merge 470 File gt Print Preview 466 File gt Properties 546 Colors tab 550 Fax tab 552 Fonts tab 556 Forms tab 555 Internet tab 553 Protection tab 502 554 Reviewing tab 451 456 556 Statistics tab 554 Summary tab 491 546 View tab 546 File gt Revert to Previous Version 496 498 File gt Save 36 File gt Save all 36 File gt Save as 36 140 505 506 File gt Select Source 217 File gt Send E Mail 486 Fax 471 Fax merge 475 476 File format 505 506 File Manager File menu 492 File name 161 164 Manual TextMaker 2016 Filling of objects 263 First line indent 76 Fit Margins to Window View menu 558 Flipping drawings 254 pictures 254 Flush left paragraph alignment 80 Flush right paragraph alignment 80 Font size 64 Footer Insert menu 103 Footers 102 Footnote Insert menu Edit Footnote 440 442 Footnote Mark 440 442 Go to Footnote 440 441 Go To Footnote Reference 440 441 Options 444 Footnote separator line 444 445 446 Footnotes 440 Form fax 367 Form letter 367 assigning a database 368 faxing 475 inserting database fields 370 practice letter 371 printing 470 selecting records 373 suppression of white spaces 377 viewing test records 370 Format gt Borders 92 Format gt Bullets and Numbering 86 172 174 177 182 184 410 411 Format gt Chapter 104 105 107 112 Format gt Character 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 73 Format gt Character Style 121 123 124
161. 42 for example the first footnote will be numbered 42 the second 43 etc E Mode Here you can specify whether the footnote numbering should be reset to 1 e g on every page or every chapter Continuous numbering The numbering is never reset This is the default setting Restart on each page The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every page of the document Restart on each section The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every section For more information on sections see the section What are sections beginning on page 147 Restart on each chapter The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every chapter For more information on chapters see the section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 Separator line margins group box Here you can set the margins for the separator line that is inserted automatically above the footnote area The Top margin determines the minimum spacing between the text and the separa tor line while the Bottom margin determines the spacing from the line to the footnote texts As you increase the Left margin the separator line starts further to the right as you increase the Right margin the separator line ends earlier Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 445 Separator line tab When you want to change the appearance of the footnote separator line switch to this tab To change for e
162. 6 Conditional text IF function 390 Connectors drawing 286 288 properties 290 Context menu 24 Continuous View menu 556 Contour for frames 256 260 Convert Table to Text Table menu 204 Convert Text to Table Table menu 206 Convert to embedded object 271 272 Convert to object frame 271 272 Converting text to a table 206 Copy Edit menu 60 Copy to document s folder pictures 216 279 280 Correct first two uppercase letters 530 COUNT function 396 397 Create Database Tools menu 363 Creation date 161 162 Creation time 161 162 Manual TextMaker 2016 Cropping of pictures 219 221 222 280 282 Cross reference Insert menu 434 435 Cross references 434 Curves drawing 286 287 properties 290 Customize Tools menu Keyboard Mappings 568 Toolbars 564 Cut Edit menu 60 Data record number 341 343 Database 339 adding records 347 assigning to a document 368 calling up records by their number 344 closing 350 creating 363 deleting records 348 editing records 347 form letters 367 form view 343 importing addresses 139 140 141 350 list view 343 opening 340 restoring records 348 searching 345 selecting 373 sorting 349 use 341 Database field 161 163 Database info 161 163 Date 161 see Print date Date field database 363 364 Date last changed 161 163 Date Time Insert menu 167 DAY function 396 397 dBase DOS file format database 340 363 365 dBase Unicode file format database 340 36
163. 7 SUBSTR function 396 398 SUM function 384 385 396 398 Summary 491 Superscript 67 Superscript ordinal numbers 530 531 Support 16 Symbol Insert menu 169 Index e 597 Synonym dictionary thesaurus 331 System requirements 18 T Tab alignment 82 83 Tab leader 82 84 Tab Order Object menu 313 Tab stops 82 Table gt AutoFormat 204 Table gt Cell Properties 199 Table gt Convert Table to Text 204 Table gt Convert Text to Table 206 Table gt Delete Cells 193 Table gt Insert Cells 193 Table gt Join Cells 196 Table gt New Table 190 Table gt Row Properties 197 Table gt Select 191 Table gt Sort Table 208 Table gt Split Cells 195 Table gt Split Table 196 Table gt Table Properties 203 Table guidelines 524 Table of contents 418 Table Properties Table menu 203 Tables converting text into a table 206 converting to text 204 deleting cells 193 deleting copying moving cell contents 192 editing 190 formatting 197 199 203 inserting cells 193 inserting tables 190 joining cells 196 joining tables 196 properties 203 sorting 208 splitting cells 195 splitting tables 196 Tabs 82 524 526 Tabs Format menu 82 84 Technical support 16 Template folder 538 Text color 66 Text cursor 29 Text direction 510 511 Text fields 299 305 598 e Index Text file format 505 507 Text file format database 368 369 Text frames 247 248 275 299 inserting 275 linking 278 properties 276 Text styles 65 Te
164. Berlitz translation dictionaries allow you to translate words between five languages English French German Italian and Spanish with the push of a button Using the Berlitz translation dictionaries To obtain the translations of a word first place the text cursor on it The word s language doesn t matter it is recognized automatically by TextMaker Then invoke the Tools gt Berlitz command keyboard shortcut F7 TextMaker now searches for the word in the Berlitz translation dictionaries If the word is not found a list of words with similar spellings is displayed Other wise its translations are presented The buttons in the dialog box displayed have the following functions Button Function Languages Lets you choose the target languages For example if you need translations between English and Spanish only you can turn all other languages off Look up Looks up another word in the translation dictionaries Enter the word of interest in the Word input field beforehand Close Closes the dialog box SmartText TextMaker s SmartText feature can save you a lot of work you can define Smart Text entries for frequently needed phrases and then call them out in your text quickly and easily For example define a SmartText entry named sd containing sales department Now you can call out this SmartText entry at any time Simply type sd and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuat
165. Deleting and inserting table Cells eee eee eecesecesecesecnseceeecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 192 Deleting cells from tables iieri tisores nirso asenet 193 Inserting cells in a tablero nan arip e eR s aie es 193 Splitting and joining table cells ssseeeseeeseseeesseeesssereresesresrsrrrrrsrrrresesreeresre 194 Splitting table cells sisien eo iaee En E ERO E case ebeesecsneres 195 Joming tablecell Soes a o EE Seles rA TEA EIER IE AE 196 Splitting tables iieaeoe reae R eE rE E ect hehe eee 196 Joining tables an a A E S rA il ee dee eS 196 Formatting tables ecien eree ea SER EEA ARE SEa SE Ere LE ens 197 ROW properties ae aa A este E ei deed esate 197 Cell properties cis si ies etl T Wu die aol eee neediness 199 Changing the overall properties of tables eee eee esse cseecneeeneeeeeeees 203 AUtOFOrMat nen dee ied eee dubecten ecdie mel edie 204 Converting a table to text eee eeceeecesscesecesecesecnaecsaecseecseesseseeeeseeeeens 204 Converting text into a table ee eeceeeceeecesecesecaeceaecaeecaeeeseseneeeeeeeens 206 Sorne 6 10 ot cee ee 208 SOLD G LEXE oriee wives Miaeeigia ha Mies nae E E hu seem te tence 210 Tip Using the Table toolbar 0 0 eeceecesecesecesecssecesecaeecaeeeseseeeseeeeeens 212 Pictures 215 Inserting a picture into the text 0 ee ee ceecsseceecssecseecaeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 216 SCANNING iN piette S eee ee eee E r EEr E EN A r EES 217 Inserting pictures from the gallery Android eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeerees 2
166. Edit gt Copy this information is saved there in several formats For example if you cut or copy text the text is saved both in formatted form and in unformatted form Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with selections e 61 Normally you don t need to be concerned about this because TextMaker automat ically selects the most appropriate format when it inserts the content of the clip board into your document in response to an Edit gt Paste command However if you need to you can select the format in which the content is to be inserted your self You use the Edit gt Paste Special command to do this When you invoke this command a dialog box appears and presents you with a list of all the formats in which the information currently residing in the clipboard is saved When you select a format and then confirm with OK the content of the clipboard is inserted in the selected format Inserting a document With the Insert gt Document command you can insert a complete TextMaker document into the current document Note Objects in frames e g text frames picture frames etc will not be im ported Proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the current document at which the other document is to be inserted 2 Invoke the command Insert gt Document 3 A dialog box opens and allows you to select the document to be inserted 4 After making your selection confirm with OK The selected document is insert
167. For detailed information see the pages that follow Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 149 Searching You can search a document for a specific term using the Edit gt Search command keyboard shortcut Ns It is even possible to search for formatting for example for all passages in bold characters see section Searching replacing formatting beginning on page 155 Search and Replace Search Replace Search for m ai Ees You perform a text search as follows 1 Invoke the Edit gt Search command 2 Under Search for enter the text for which you want to search 3 As necessary check the options for the search see section Expanded search options beginning on page 152 4 Click on the Search button to begin the search When TextMaker finds the search text it scrolls to its position in the document and selects it You can then do either of the following A You can click on Search again to proceed to the next occurrence of the search text B You can click on Close to end the search and close the search dialog You can not only search for a specific text but also replace it with something else You will read about this in the next section 150 o Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 Replacing Sometimes you want to do more than just find a term in the text You want an easy way of exchanging it for another term The command Edit gt Repla
168. Maker 2016 Inserting special characters e 169 To assign a keyboard shortcut to a special character proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Insert gt Symbol 2 Select the character that you want to assign a keyboard shortcut to 3 Click on the Change button next to the Shortcut key option 4 Another dialog opens There press the desired keyboard shortcut in the Please press accelerator input box We recommend using key combinations that include the keys and Shifts since these are normally not assigned Hint If you make a typing mistake you can always press the backspace key to remove the keyboard shortcut you entered 5 Don t forget Click on Add to assign this shortcut to the character 6 Confirm with OK and exit the main dialog box with Close From now on you can insert this special character into the text by pressing the selected key combination Note The keyboard shortcut remembers only the selected character the selected font is not remembered For more information on changing the keyboard layout see the section Customizing keyboard shortcuts starting on page 568 Hint The keyboard shortcuts for special character can be edited by opening the dialog for editing the keyboard mapping and choosing the entry Characters in the left list Inserting special characters via their character code There s yet another method for entering a special character by typing in its hexa decimal character code Unico
169. Manual TextMaker 2016 Basics e 29 and gt for example move the text cursor one character to the left and right respectively Altogether the following direction keys are available for moving the text cursor Key Function Esl One character to the left J One character to the right C One line up ES One line down Home To the beginning of the line LEnd To the end of the line etr T To the beginning of the current paragraph or when pressed again the previous paragraph eter A To the next paragraph ctr1 Home To the beginning of the document ctr1 End To the end of the document Apart from that you also click on the desired place with your mouse to position the text cursor there Android In the Android version you can alternatively tap on the desired position with your finger Deleting text Everyone makes typing mistakes now and then and would like to delete them There are numerous ways to do this in TextMaker Deleting characters To delete a character use the Backspace key situated above the Enter key This key deletes the character to the left of the text cursor The following text moves back automatically You can also delete in the opposite direction The Delete key does this It deletes the character not to the left but to the right of the text cursor 30 o Basics Manual TextMaker 2016 Deleting words If you place the text cursor before the first letter of a
170. Options T Search from beginning Search backwards Case sensitive Search only selected records Accuracy Search term anywhere in the field X When you enter a search term and confirm with OK TextMaker begins searching As soon as the term is found in a data record TextMaker displays the record and terminates the search process Continuing the search To display the next record in which the term is found click the icon in the toolbar or invoke the command Edit gt Search again keyboard shortcut F3 Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 345 Notes on search terms Date fields If you want to search for date entries in data records you must enter them in the format MM DD YYYY so for e g September 25 2015 you must type 09 25 2015 Memo fields Memo fields cannot be searched Wildcard searches with By entering one or more question marks within the search term you can widen the search The question mark represents any character Thus in a search for Meer for example Meier and Meyer will be found Options in the Search dialog You can modify the search with the options in the Search dialog as follows In Field Select the All fields option when all fields in the database are to be searched Alternatively you can select a specific field when only this field is to be searched Search from beginning If this switch is activated TextMaker begins the search at the first data reco
171. Proceed as follows 578 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 1 Launch any of the apps TextMaker PlanMaker or Presentations on your An droid device 2 Invoke the Tools gt Options command and switch to the Language tab 3 Tap on the Get more dictionaries button 4 A dialog with a list of all available languages opens To download and install a language tap on the corresponding download button displayed at its right When the download has finished the dictionary is installed and from now on available in any SoftMaker Office application Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Linux When you have installed the Linux version all available SoftMaker dictionaries are installed already so there is no need to install additional dictionaries later Installing Hunspell dictionaries Note This feature is available only in the Windows and the Linux version Apart from SoftMaker dictionaries the Windows Linux version additionally supports the use of Hunspell dictionaries These dictionaries are available as free downloads Most of them were created by private users or non profit organizations Hunspell dictionaries are available for very many languages In case you don t find a SoftMaker dictionary for a certain language it might be worth checking if a Hunspell dictionary is available for it For a list of all Hunspell dictionaries supported by SoftMaker Office visit the Download area of our website ww
172. SoftMaker Office Professional Available only for Windows The even more powerful SoftMaker Office Professional includes an extended version of TextMaker which offers the following additional features E Integrated Berlitz translation dictionaries enabling you to translate words between five languages English French German Italian and Spanish with the push of a button Android versions TextMaker is also available for Android devices There are two different versions E TextMaker HD for Android This version contains practically all features of the Windows version It is designed to be used on tablets m TextMaker Mobile for Android This version contains only parts of the features of the Windows version It is designed to be used on smart phones All instructions in this manual refer to the HD version The Mobile version comes with its own user manual Technical support If you have any questions our technical support team will be glad to assist you You can reach us as follows Website www softmaker com Our website provides program updates free downloads and much more Visit us at www softmaker com 16 o Welcome Manual TextMaker 2016 Support forums www softmaker com forum Feel free to communicate with our technical support team as well as other users by visiting our support forums at www softmaker com forum E mail Please send your support related e mails to support softmaker com Fax or snail
173. TextMaker 2016 Start a new document with File gt New And we re on our way Text fields for unrestricted text entries The first line of the form should contain a text field for the entry of the client s name The best way to proceed is first to provide a description of what is to be entered in this field for example Name and then to insert the text field itself to the right of this description So do the following 1 Type Name and then insert a tab with the key 2 Insert a text field with Object gt New Forms Object gt Text Field 3 At this point the text cursor is positioned in the text field Press the key to return it to the main text 4 Press the Enter key twice The first line of the form is now complete Use the same procedure to add two additional lines with the labels Address and City Dropdown lists Next a dropdown list is to be inserted below the three text fields Dropdown lists allow users to choose among several alternatives Proceed as follows 1 Type Gender and then press Tab 2 Invoke Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown 3 Now you must enter the items that are to appear in the list Enter male in the New Entry field and click on Add then enter female and again click on Add 4 Exit the dialog with OK 5 Press twice Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 303 Checkboxes for yes no entries Lastly a checkbox is to be inserted Check
174. The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 Insert Field Field type Type Creation date Title mS Creation time Subject amanlo Print date aias Print time Keywords Date last changed Description Time last changed A Database field r Database info Page number Page count Chapter number Sequence number StyleRef File name Summary b The dialog box for Insert gt Field From the Field type list select the field Print date On the right in the Date Formats list you can select the format in which the date is to be inserted Choose the desired format and click on Insert TextMaker now inserts the current date in the text and our letterhead looks some thing like this TD Tour2 tmd Escher amp Sons Architects Design and Planning of Gonstruction Projects of all Sizes Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atknta GA 30009 Fred Backfish 7 Shepard s Way Salmon River Oregon 77123 Your reference Your letter of Our reference Our letter oft Dat MB 10 29 07 HG 10 25 07 11 6 07 ale ia 4 m r Fields are very practical aids First you have already been spared the trouble of typing the current date manually and beyond that the Print date field is not Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 51 merely a fixed value but a symbolic value that stands for the current date It is automatically updated when you print the document So if you print
175. View gt Forms Mode 296 298 314 315 View gt Full Page 558 View gt Full Screen 559 View gt Horizontal Ruler 556 557 View gt Magnifying Glass 558 View gt Master Pages 108 109 556 557 View gt Object Mode 249 250 View gt Outline 404 View gt Sidebar 26 27 127 136 159 View gt Standard 556 View gt Toolbars 560 View gt Two Full Pages 558 View gt Zoom Level 558 Visible object property 269 Visual Basic 515 Ww Warn when loading OLE objects 527 529 Index e 599 Watermark 108 Widows orphans 96 97 Window gt Cascade 519 Window gt Close All 518 Window gt Document Tabs 520 Window gt Tile Horizontally 519 Window gt Tile Vertically 519 Window Manager dialogs 532 535 Window Manager positioning 532 535 Word count 554 Word file format 505 506 538 539 WordStar keyboard mapping 569 Workspace color 532 534 Wrap text to window 524 527 X XIM 541 544 XRender 541 544 Y YEAR function 396 399 Z Zoom level 558 Zoom Level View menu 558 600 e Index Manual TextMaker 2016
176. When you start a new document with File gt New and select such a template TextMaker automatically displays the database Page through it to find the desired recipient and click on Insert The rest happens automatically TextMaker replaces the database fields in the template with the contents of the fields from this record in other words the address is inserted into the text The result is for example a complete letterhead with the recipient s address already filled in On the following pages you will find detailed explanations of these procedures 350 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Preparing a document template Note To compose a letter or fax as quickly as possible you don t have to pre pare a document template from scratch Numerous document templates with letterheads fax forms and memo forms are already supplied with TextMaker Read the section Using document templates on page 351 to learn how you can try them out without further ado To prepare a new document for the insertion of individual addresses proceed as follows 1 Invoke File gt New and select the template NORMAL TMV to start a new docu ment 2 Fill the document with the desired text for example prepare a letterhead a fax form etc 3 Assign the desired database to the document using Tools gt Set Database for example the address database TMW DBF supplied with the program 4 At the desired positions in the document invoke Insert
177. ab Note This tab is available only for certain types of objects On the Effects tab you can add various effects to the object The following effects and settings are available Reflection When you check the Use reflection effect option the object is rendered as if it was standing on a reflecting surface Options Visible part of object Specifies how many percent of the object will be visible in the reflection Starting transparency The reflection is smoothly faded out towards its bottom This value specifies how transparent the reflection will be at its top in percent Y offset Moves the reflection upwards or downwards m Soft edges When you check the Use soft edges effect option the borders of the object will be rendered with a blur effect Options Width Specifies the width of the blur effect Glow When you check the Use glow effect option the borders of the object will be surrounded by a glow effect Options Width Specifies the width of the glow effect 268 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Color Specifies the color of the glow effect Object properties Properties tab The Properties tab can be used to modify common object settings Options available m Name TextMaker automatically assigns a unique name to every object in a document Rectangles for example might be named Rectanglel Rectangle2 Rectangle3 etc If you wish you can give the object a different name by entering it
178. ab in the Tools gt Options dialog contains settings related to opening and saving files Template folder Here you can specify the folder in which the templates for TextMaker documents are stored The dialog that appears when you invoke File gt New presents templates for your selection that are found in this folder Note Normally this setting should not be changed Change it only in the event that you have actually moved the template folder to another place Default file format Here you can select the file format that TextMaker will use by default to save newly created documents 538 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 The available choices include TextMaker MS Word in several versions OpenDocument and RTF Important The latter formats are not able to accommodate features specific to TextMaker For example if you save a TextMaker document in Word format certain formatting options and other features could be lost Accordingly it is recommended to use the default setting TextMaker Saving group box Here you can make settings related to saving documents Create backup files Android only If this option is enabled whenever you save a document the application will first create a backup copy of the last saved version in a file with the name extension BAK Under Windows and Linux more advanced options are available for backup copies see section Backup below Prompt for
179. abels Any caption or legend that should appear in the form can be entered in a label m Groupboxes A groupbox is a rectangle with a caption at its upper left Groupboxes can be used for the visual grouping of related parts of a form To insert a label or a groupbox invoke the Object gt New Forms Object gt Label or the Object gt New Forms Object gt Groupbox command Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 311 The corresponding forms object is inserted in a standard size If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners Usage of labels and groupboxes In contrast to all other types of forms objects labels and groupboxes cannot be filled in They can be used only to add non editable captions or legends to the form Changing the properties of labels and groupboxes To modify the properties of a label or a groupbox first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command A dialog window with the following options will appear Layout tab On this tab you can change the object s position outside margins and other layout related properties See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format tab On this tab you can change the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Properties tab On this tab you can modify common object settings See se
180. above example 2 Enter the value you are seeking in the edit field Content Smith following the above example Note The search is case sensitive If you search for Smith records con taining SMITH or smith will not be found 3 Click on the Add button to complete the definition of the condition It will then be displayed in the Conditions list box Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes e 375 You can now add additional conditions by repeating the three steps above 4 Click on Select to add all the data records that fulfill the condition s you have defined to the selection Or click on Deselect to exclude these records from the selection So if you now click on Select all the data records in which the field NAME1 begins with Smith will be added to the selection With the help of the Delete and Delete all buttons in the dialog box you can delete previously defined selection conditions when you no longer need them Note Be aware that once data records have been selected they remain selected until they are explicitly deselected So if you select records first with NAME 1 Smith and then with NAME1 Jenkins all records with the name Smith or Jenkins will be selected If in fact only the Jenkins are to receive letters you must deselect all data records by invoking the command Select gt Deselect all records before you apply the condition NAME1 Jenkins Operators available Apart fr
181. accordingly E Settings group box Here you can change brightness contrast saturation and gamma color balance with an effect on brightness More button This button opens a dialog with the following additional options When you activate the Mix with color option and choose a color below the object will be colorized accordingly The options in the Cropping group box can be used to crop the object This is useful when you need only a segment of the object For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the object enter 25 percent at Top Export button You can use this button to export a copy of the graphical representation of the object that is to save an image of the object on your hard disk Using the SoftMaker Equation Editor Note The SoftMaker Equation Editor is available only for Windows and is not included in all versions of TextMaker The SoftMaker Equation Editor allows you to display mathematical formulas in graphical form TextMaker communicates with the Equation Editor via OLE as described in the previous sections Thus to add a graphical representation of a formula to your document you insert an OLE object and choose the Equation Editor as the source application To do this proceed as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 OLE objects e 245 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position in the document 2 Invoke TextMaker s Object gt New OLE Object command 3 Select the entry
182. ader to page through the book quickly to find the beginning of any chapter of interest m Chapter number TextMaker automatically numbers chapters incrementally You can always see the number of the current chapter in the status bar When you change the Chapter number setting from Increment the default to Value you can set the chapter number yourself by entering it in the value field For example if you enter 5 as the number for the third chapter the chapters will have the numerical sequence 1 2 5 6 7 etc Tip The chapter number can be inserted into the text for example in a header or footer at any time with the Insert gt Field command m Vertical Alignment Here you can change the vertical alignment of the body text on the page For example when you choose Centered the text is vertically centered on the page When you choose Justified the paragraphs are spaced equally in such a way that the text begins right below the top page margin and ends right above the bottom page margin m Page number Automatic page numbering can be modified as well To modify the page numbering change the Page number setting from Increment to Value and en ter the desired number for the first page of the chapter in the adjacent field 114 e Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 For example if you type 42 the first page of the chapter will be page 42 the second page 43 etc You will find additional information about the use
183. age formatting o 115 1 Invoke the Format gt Page Background command 2 Use the Fill type list to determine the type of fill for the page background You can choose to apply a solid color a pattern a picture tiled or different types of color gradients 3 Make the desired settings and confirm with OK For more information on this dialog see the section Object properties Filling tab page 263 This section describes the Filling dialog for objects which is practical ly identical Printing Please note that this type of page background by default is displayed on the screen only it will not appear in printouts However there is a document option that allows you to change this When you activate the option Print page background in the dialog of the File gt Properties dialog View tab the page background will also appear in printouts Format gt Chapter The Format gt Chapter command works in a slightly different way You can use this command to change the page background for the current chapter more precisely its master page s Proceed as follows 1 If you have divided your document into multiple chapters Position the text cursor anywhere within the chapter of interest 2 Invoke the Format gt Page Background command 3 Next to Borders and shading of master pages click on the Change button and select which type of master page to change 4 Switch to the Shading tab 5 Choose the desired Typ
184. agraph styles Paragraph style Normal Ait 0 Paragraph style Heading 1 Ait Paragraph style Heading 2 Alt Paragraph style Heading 3 Alt Insert gt Date ctrt Insert gt Time ctri Insert gt Calculation E2 Insert gt Footnote gt Insert Footnote ctr1 Alt Insert gt Break gt Page Break cert 4 Insert gt Break gt Column Break Ctrl JlShifts Tools gt Changes gt Track Changes Ctrl JlShifte Tools gt Check Spelling Ez Tools gt Thesaurus Shifte Tools gt Berlitz ctr1 Tools gt Update Fields F9 Manual TextMaker 2016 Keyboard shortcuts e 583 Keyboard shortcuts for editing text Command Keyboard shortcut Move text cursor one character to the left One character to the right gt One line up Lt One line down ES One word to the left Ctr One word to the right Ctrl One page up PgUp One page down PgDn J Delete the character left of the text cursor Backspace Delete the character right of the text cursor Del Delete the word right of the text cursor Ctrl j Del Switch between Insert mode and Overwrite mode Ins Select next forms object F11 Select previous forms object ShifteJ El1 Select next forms object in Forms mode only Tab Select previous forms object in Forms mode only Shift Tab Change case of the selected text from test to Test to Shifts F3 TEST Insert an en dash Insert
185. aker 2016 Working with other file formats Normally TextMaker saves a document in its native file format namely the TextMaker document format TextMaker documents can be recognized easily by the filename extension TMD TextMaker document When you save a document TextMaker automatically appends this extension to the name you give it For example if you save a document under the name Letter its complete filename will be LETTER TMD You can save a file in various other file formats as well which is useful for exam ple when you want to do additional work on a document using another program And you can also open documents in TextMaker that have been created with other word processors In this chapter you will learn how to work with other file formats It covers the following topics m Saving and opening files in other file formats The first section describes how to save or open a document in a different file format You simply invoke the File gt Save as command or the File gt Open command respectively and choose the file format in the Save as type list Working with text files When you open or save a text file its character set is usually determined automatically As needed you can specify the character set manually This sec tion contains information how to do this See the following pages for detailed information Saving and opening files in other file formats This section provides informati
186. al TextMaker 2016 properties 290 AVG function 396 397 Background color of document pages 115 of text 66 of the document 553 of the workspace 532 534 Background image 553 Background spell checking 535 536 Backup copy 496 497 538 540 BAK files 496 497 BasicMaker 515 Beep on errors 532 533 BELOW 384 385 Berlitz Tools menu 332 333 Berlitz translation dictionaries 332 333 Bibliography 426 Bibliography Tools menu Bibliography Settings 428 429 430 Generate Bibliography 431 432 Insert Bibliography Field 429 Bold 65 Bookmark Insert menu 156 Bookmarks 156 434 Borders of master pages 112 114 of objects 265 of paragraphs 92 of table cells 199 202 203 Borders Format menu 92 Break Insert menu Chapter break 110 111 Column break 143 Page break 100 Section break 147 185 186 187 Breaks between words preventing 96 97 Bring Forward One Level 272 273 Bring to Front 272 273 Bullets and Numbering Format menu 86 172 174 177 182 184 410 411 c Calculation Insert menu 380 388 Calculations 379 formatting 388 inserting 380 Index 587 rounding 388 with database fields 385 with objects 386 with table cells 384 with variables 381 Capitalize first letter of sentences 530 Caption Insert menu 421 Cascade Window menu 519 Cell Properties Table menu 199 Centered paragraph alignment 80 Centimeter 75 76 Changes Tools menu Next Change 455 456 Options 456 Previous Change 455
187. all centered paragraphs Click on this button and set the formatting for which you want to search You will find more information about this function in the next section Searching replacing formatting Special button The Special button enables you to search a document for special characters and to use wildcards for such things as any character Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 153 m Any number if you specify for example a search for 200 Text Maker will find occurrences of 2000 through 2009 Any letter if you specify for example a search for TextMaker will find occurrences of a through z and A through Z including letters with accents m Any character searches for any character whatsoever letter number or punctuation sign E Any Smart quote q searches for any kind of Smart quote Neutral quotes like or will not be searched for m Caret searches for caret Non breaking space n searches for non breaking spaces E Tab t searches for tabs m Line break z searches for manual line breaks inserted with 4 m Paragraph break a searches for the paragraph mark that is found at the end of every paragraph m Page break p searches for manual page breaks inserted with Insert gt Break gt Page Break m Section break s searches f
188. alog box appears Here you can select either the date or the time as the basis for the creation of the text and specify the format If none of the predefined formats suits you you can click on the New format button and type in your own format using the abbreviations described in the previous section If you want the date or time to be inserted as a field rather than as fixed text check the Insert as field option TextMaker then creates a field Print date or Print time You will find details about the use of fields in the section above Tip Using keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts for inserting the current date time are available as follows m Insert date E m Insert time CJ When you press one of these key combinations the date time will be inserted immediately without a dialog popping up Manual TextMaker 2016 Fields e 167 Inserting special characters Some characters such as the copyright sign the degree sign and the accented characters used in some languages cannot be entered into text directly with the keyboard Instead TextMaker s built in character table provides a convenient means for inserting symbols and other special characters You insert special characters as follows 1 2 Invoke the command Insert gt Symbol A dialog box appears giving you access to every character that is available in the selected font If you need a character from a different font select it from the Font list at
189. alues 1 2 3 4 by default These values are just sample values to make sure that the chart isn t displayed complete ly empty You should of course replace these numbers with your own values To do so proceed as follows 1 In case the chart isn t still selected select it with a mouse click 2 Invoke the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command 3 A dialog box appears In the Y values column enter the numbers to be present ed in the chart Don t worry about the other columns and options they are irrelevant for most chart types For detailed information on this dialog see the section Entering editing the data of a chart page 228 4 When you have finished entering the values confirm with OK The chart now updates and presents the values that you have entered You can modify these values anytime later by selecting the chart and invoking the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command once more Inserting as a chart frame The procedure just described inserts the chart right into the text Alternatively you can insert the chart into a freely movable chart frame To do this simply use the Object gt New Chart Frame command instead of the New Chart command The difference Chart frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for documents in newspaper style 226 o Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 For mo
190. ample because it was accidentally deleted Even in that case you can still access the backup copies of this document unless they have been deleted as well naturally Simply open the backup copy itself To find out where the backup copies are located have a look at the Tools gt Op tions dialog The folder is listed as the Folder for backup files on the Files tab By default a folder named Backup is used located in the SoftMaker folder in your documents folder 498 o Document management Manual TextMaker 2016 The backup copies in this folder can be opened in TextMaker directly using e g the following procedure 1 5 In Windows Explorer or any other file manager navigate to the Backup folder location see above In this folder search for file names that start with the name of the original document For example a backup copy of the file TEST TMD might be called TEST TMD 135 TMBAK As you can see a running number and the extension tmbak are added to the original file s name Hint The higher the number the more recent the version of the backup copy is With your mouse drag the backup copy of interest onto the title bar of Text Maker not into the document window TextMaker detects that you are trying to open a backup copy and asks you how to proceed Therefore it displays a dialog with the following options Open the backup file Opens the backup copy Invoke the version manager Invokes the command F
191. an em dash 584 e Keyboard shortcuts Manual TextMaker 2016 Command Keyboard shortcut Insert a non breaking space ctr1 Shifts Space Insert a non breaking hyphen E Convert a hexadecimal character code into the respective ctrl Ait shifts x Unicode character For example when you type in 20AC and then press this keyboard shortcut a euro sign will appear since the euro sign s character code is 20AC in the Unicode character set table Manual TextMaker 2016 Keyboard shortcuts e 585 Index 3 3D effects for objects 267 A ABOVE 384 385 ABS function 396 Acquire File menu 217 Actual Size View menu 558 Add or remove spaces when pasting 530 Address 161 164 339 527 528 Address database 339 Address labels 354 Address lists 354 Align or Distribute Object menu 255 Alignment of pages 112 114 of paragraphs 80 of tabs 82 83 of text fields 305 306 of text frames 276 277 of text in AutoShapes 291 292 All caps 65 Anchor of objects 252 256 261 Anti aliasing 532 534 Apply character formatting to entire words 530 531 Arabic script 509 527 528 Arrows drawing 286 288 ASC function 396 Asian scripts 527 528 Associate files types 541 543 AT function 396 Auto number resetting 185 use 185 Auto recovery 538 539 AutoFormat Table menu 204 Automatic Hyphenation Tools menu 328 330 535 537 AutoShapes adding text to 289 drawing 286 289 Manu
192. and you check the Wrap text option TextMaker automatical ly reformats the text in this object so that it flows around the area of overlap E Rotate by group box Lets you rotate the inner text in 90 degrees increments m Vertical alignment group box Lets you change the vertical alignment of the inner text as follows Option Meaning Top Align inner text at the top of the object Centered Vertically center text between top and bottom of the object Bottom Align inner text at the bottom of the object Justified Vertically justify text so that it is evenly distributed be tween top and bottom of the object Text tab available only for TextArt objects Note This tab appears only for TextArt objects Use the Text tab to select the desired TextArt effect and to edit or format the text to be displayed Options available E Text Here you can edit the text to be displayed 292 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Variants Here you can choose which TextArt effect to apply m Font group box Here you can change the font and apply the text styles Bold and Italic If you check the Same height option all letters including lower case letters will be stretched to a uniform height m Spacing group box The Character option affects the spacing between characters Values below 100 produce spacings that are closer together than normal values above 100 produce spacings that are wider apart The Line option affects t
193. and print the letter Then you would put in the next member s address and print it again etc It is precisely this repeated manual entry of the addresses that TextMaker can take over when you create a form letter for the invitation In general you create a form letter as follows you will find detailed information on the following pages 1 If you have not yet recorded the addresses of the recipients in a database create or open a database and enter the addresses in it The database TMW DBF that is included with the program is very well suited for recording addresses however you can use any database you wish 2 Start a new document Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes e 367 3 With Tools gt Set Database assign the address database to the document This is necessary so that TextMaker knows what addresses it should merge in later 4 Compose the text of the letter 5 With Insert gt Field gt Database field insert the name street city etc fields from the database at the places where the address should appear in the printed document 6 If you don t want to write to all the addressees open the database with Tools gt Edit Database and select the addresses you want included 7 Print the letter with File gt Print Merge When it prints TextMaker replaces the database fields with the data from the database record by record Accordingly the data from the first data record are used for the firs
194. and then removes the picture from the document replacing it with a reference to the new file Thus the pic ture is no longer saved in the document OLE object frames Note OLE objects can be used only in the Windows version of TextMaker In the chapter OLE objects page 239 you learned what OLE objects are and how to insert them directly into the text OLE objects can also be inserted in the form of frames 282 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 The difference An OLE object frame like all types of frames occupies a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or delete text above it In this section you will find detailed information on working with picture frames The following topics are covered Inserting OLE object frames m Changing the properties of OLE object frames See the next pages for details Inserting OLE object frames Note OLE objects can be used only in the Windows version of TextMaker To insert an OLE object frame do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New OLE Object Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively click on the icon in the Object toolbar 2 A dialog box appears and presents an Object Type list Select the Object Type corresponding to the application from which TextMaker is to obtain the OLE object 3 Confirm with OK to start the application for the selected object type 4 Create the object in this application
195. annot copy e g a whole table to the clipboard and then paste it as multiple data series Hint You can still achieve this by taking a little detour Paste the table contents into the spreadsheet application PlanMaker as table cells create a chart from them copy and paste the chart into your TextMaker document See also section Inserting charts via PlanMaker page 224 E Incase you want to paste x and y values with the Paste button first disable the Automatic checkbox above the X values column Also make sure that the clip board contains two values per row x and y The two values have to be separat ed either by a tab character or your system s list separator character usually a comma or a semicolon m For bubble charts the clipboard should contain 3 values x y and the bubble size m Text strings in the clipboard normally return the value 0 zero However if a text string contains numbers the first valid number is extracted Examples dollars returns 0 50 dollars returns 50 dollars 50 returns 50 50 dollars 20 cents also returns 50 Only the first number is extracted Working with chart elements Charts consist of various components data series axes legends etc referred to as chart elements The picture below illustrates all chart elements 230 o Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 chart area gridlines 80000 pei rn 60000 50000 4000
196. ans of a condi tion and then manually exclude some data records from the selection The following selection methods are available in the database module Selecting single records manually With Select gt Current record you include the current data record in the selection or exclude it If you invoke this command when the record is not se lected it is selected and vice versa With Select gt Select all records and Select gt Deselect all records all data records can be either selected or deselected at once Selecting by record numbers With Select gt By number you enter a range of record numbers to be selected or deselected Selecting by condition The command Select gt By condition lets you apply selection conditions like select all Smiths or select all recipients living in Houston Detailed information about this selection method is given on the pages immediate ly following Navigating between selected records With the commands Go to gt Previous selected record and Go to gt Next selected record you can jump to the previous or next selected data record Alternatively you can use the icons Y and amp in the toolbar or the keyboard shortcuts ctr A1t Pgup TJ and ctr Alt Padn 4 J to do this Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes 373 Tip Furthermore with View gt Show only selected records you can hide all data records that are not selected Selecting s
197. any time to hide all records that are marked for deletion Restoring deleted data records If you have marked a data record for deletion by mistake simply apply the com mand Edit gt Delete current record to it a second time to remove the deletion marking The disappearance of the word Deleted in the status bar indicates the removal of the marking You can remove the deletion marking on all data records currently marked for deletion with the command Edit gt Restore deleted records Permanently removing deleted data records compressing a database If you want to actually remove all the data records marked for deletion have TextMaker compress the database The command Edit gt Compress database is responsible for this After querying you it permanently removes all the records marked for deletion from the database file Sorting a database If you want to sort a database invoke the command Edit gt Sort database in the database module This function can also be invoked with the Ai icon on the Standard toolbar Sort Database Field 1 Field 2 SALUT_ADDR a a SALUT_BODY SALUT_ADDR Cancel TR SALUT _BoDY 5 NAMEZ NAME1 E FIRSTNAME NAME2 STREET FIRSTNAME Order STATE_ZIP STREET Ascending CITY STATE_ZIP Descending PHONE g city Normally you choose just one field as the basis for the sort however you can also sort on two fields For example to sort the all the records by last name and the r
198. aphy database that you want to use you will have to set up a new database To do this you can use TextMaker s database module or any other dBase compatible database program With TextMaker you create a new bibliography database as follows 1 Invoke the Tools gt Create Database command 2 Give the database whatever name you like and confirm with OK 3 Add the desired fields to the database The database must always contain fields for a unique shortcut abbreviation author and title You will find information about the operation of the field setup dialog in section Creating a new database beginning on page 363 4 When you are finished click on OK 5 TextMaker creates the database and then opens it If you want to enter your sources into the database at this point you can do so Otherwise invoke the File gt Close command to close the database Editing the bibliography database Next you must fill in the bibliography database entering there information about the sources to which you refer in your document Naturally it is up to you if you want to enter all sources at once or add sources only as required To enter sources you can use TextMaker s database module which is invoked with the Tools gt Edit Database command You will find information about the opera tion of the database module in chapter Database beginning on page 339 Step 2 Assigning the bibliography database In the next step y
199. aption it inserts a tab followed by the corresponding page If have typed in explanatory text directly behind a caption it will also appear in the table of figures For example if you have extended the caption Figure 1 to Figure 1 The Larch this entire text will be displayed in the table Dialog options The dialog box for this command offers the following options E Labels As described in the previous section different labels can be used in captions For example you can insert captions with the label Figures as well as cap tions with the label Tables An individual table of figures can be created for each label used To specify for which label the table of figures is to be created choose the corresponding label from the Labels list Note Only labels for which at least one caption has been inserted into the document are available in this list Include label and number As noted before you can type in explanatory text directly behind captions for example to extend the caption Figure 1 to Figure 1 The Larch In case you have done that this option allows you to specify if the label and sequential number of captions should be displayed in the table of figures as well By default this option is enabled This means that in the above example the text Figure 1 The Larch would appear in the table of figures If you turn this option off only The Larch is displayed R
200. ard Before using this command position the text cursor in the desired cell Note Notice that these commands apply only to the contents of the cells So when you select some cells and invoke for example the Edit gt Delete com mand only the contents of the cells are removed the cells themselves remain as they were You will find information about deleting inserting complete table cells including their contents in the next section Deleting and inserting table cells In the previous section you learned how to delete copy or move the contents of table cells This section describes how you can completely remove cells from a table and insert additional cells into a table Topics covered Deleting cells from a table Inserting cells in a table 192 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Deleting cells from a table To completely remove cells including their contents from a table do the follow ing 1 Select the cells to be deleted 2 Invoke the command Table gt Delete Cells Don t just press the key because this only deletes the contents of the table cells not the table cells themselves The cells together with their contents are now removed Deleting a complete table Note To delete a complete table first select the entire table You can use the Table gt Select gt Table command to do this Then invoke the Table gt Delete Cells command Inserting cells in a table Tip You can add a new row of ce
201. are used for changing the width and or height of the symbol Object properties Shadow tab Note This tab is available only for certain types of objects Use the Shadow tab to add a shadow to the object Options available m Shadow variants Offers a variety of pre defined shadow styles to choose from The entries in the list are merely samples If required you can specify the way the shadow will appear more precisely with the options listed below E Scaling Lets you change the size of the shadow relative to the size of the object E Offset Lets you change the position of the shadow relative to the object m Perspective Lets you change the Skew angle of the shadow For certain types of perspective shadows you can also change the distance of the Horizon Note If Horizon is a positive value the shadow will be painted in front of the object and if it is negative the shadow will be painted behind the object 266 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 E Color Lets you change the color of the shadow Blur If you enter a value greater than zero here a blur effect is added to the shadow The larger the value the softer the edges of the shadow are painted m Transparency Allows you to change the Transparency of the shadow You can enter any value between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency For exam ple if you set the Transparency value to 25 the shadow will have 25 trans parency Object prope
202. are set automatically when such a document is opened and normally should not be changed Document properties Colors tab The Colors tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to add and edit custom colors for the current document When you open a color list for example the color list in the Formatting toolbar you see only a small subset of the more than 16 million colors that are available This subset is called the color palette of the document You can modify this color palette at any time You can add new colors and modify colors you have added However the first 24 colors in the palette are default colors than cannot be changed Important Changes in the color palette are saved in the document Thus you can compose a different color palette for every document Adding a color To add a color to the palette of the current document do the following 1 Invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Colors tab Tip Alternatively you can gain access to this dialog from any other dialog box that contains a color list To do this select the Define color entry in the color list the last entry 2 Set the desired color see the section Working with the color controls below 3 Click on the New button 4 Give the new color whatever name you like and confirm with OK 550 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 5 Exit the dialog with OK TextMaker now adds the new color to the docume
203. arts can also be found in the manual for the spreadsheet application PlanMaker chapter Charts Inserting charts There are two ways to insert a chart into a document Inserting charts via PlanMaker The most comfortable way Create or open a chart inside the spreadsheet application PlanMaker and copy it into the clipboard Then switch to Text Maker and paste it there Inserting charts manually Alternatively you can simply create a new empty chart using the Object gt New Chart command in TextMaker After that enter the numbers to be pre sented in the chart using the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts o 223 See the next pages for details Inserting charts via PlanMaker The most comfortable way to insert a chart leads over a little detour Use the spreadsheet application PlanMaker to create the chart When done copy it to the clipboard and paste it into TextMaker The advantage PlanMaker simply suits perfectly for entering data and creating charts It has tools and features for this that only a spreadsheet application can offer Of course you need to have PlanMaker installed to use this method Proceed as follows 1 In PlanMaker not in TextMaker enter the numbers that you want to be presented in the chart Or alternatively open a document that already contains these values 2 Select the cells containing these numbers and invoke the Object gt New Chart
204. asis of outlines Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 95 TextMaker provides an Outline view for setting up and editing a document s outline Here you can assign normal text to headings and promote or demote existing headings to different levels in the outline Note Normally you should not change a paragraph s outline level manually with the Format gt Paragraph command it is preferable to perform this action using the buttons in the Outline view In the rare occasion that you need to change the outline level manually invoke the Format gt Paragraph command switch to the Paragraph tab and specify the desired level using the Outline level control You will find detailed information about working with outlines in section Outlines beginning on page 402 Forcing breaks before paragraphs You can direct TextMaker to always insert a page or column break before the current paragraph To do this invoke Format gt Paragraph switch to the Text flow tab and enable the Page break or Column break option From this point on TextMaker will always break the page or column before this paragraph even if the paragraph is moved to another position in the text Paragraph control The Text flow tab in the dialog box for Format gt Paragraph also provides op tions for limiting the way that automatic pagination is handled in order to ensure that pages have the desired appearance In the Spacing group box the foll
205. ate a new window and at the same time open a file in it use the File gt Open command Both commands are described in the chapter Basics beginning on page 29 Note A new document window is opened only when the New Window option in the File gt New or File gt Open dialog is enabled Otherwise TextMaker replaces the content of the currently active window Activating a document window Keyboard entries and menu commands always affect only the currently active document window To activate a specific window you can do one of the following Mouse Click anywhere within the window you want to activate provided it is visible Keyboard Open the Window menu It contains a list of all open document win dows along with the corresponding document filenames Here you can choose the window you want to activate Android In the Android version you can switch between document windows by tapping on the document name displayed in the top right corner This will open a list of all document windows currently open Manual TextMaker 2016 Document windows e 517 Closing a document window If you want to conclude your work on a document you can close it by invoking the File gt Close command The active document window together with its content is now closed If the document has changed since it was last saved a message box appears first ques tioning whether you want to save the document Tip You can close all currently open
206. ave de fined the tab stops before you typed the line Your reference etc and then typed the text along with the tabs The ruler and text should now look something like this T Tour2 tmd Your reference Your letter of Our refrence Our letterof Date m The tab stops are now set and are displayed in the ruler If the position of a tab stop doesn t suit you you can shift it right there in the ruler First select the paragraphs to be modified as necessary then with your mouse point at the tab stop and drag it to a new position in the ruler Note also that when you drag a tab stop downward out of the ruler it is deleted There is yet another way to proceed when setting tab stops With both paragraphs selected invoke Format gt Tabs A dialog box opens and shows you the exact positions of the tab stops that are currently set This dialog works as follows To Do this Set new tab stops Enter the desired position in the Tabs field and click on Set Delete tab stops Select one of the existing tab stops in the list and click on Clear To remove all tab stops at once click on Clear all Shift tab stops Delete the tab stop and set a new one Change the alignment Click on one of the tab stops given in the list choose a new alignment with Alignment and click on Set Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 49 To confirm your changes click OK Units of measure You can enter values i
207. aved only when the correct write password has been entered at the time the document was opened m Read protection The document can be opened only when the correct read password is entered at the time an attempt is made to open it Furthermore the document will be au tomatically encrypted Protection depending on password Here the protection depends on whether the read or the write password is entered at the time the document is opened If the user enters the read password he is permitted to open the document but not to save it If he enters the write password he has complete access If he en ters a false password or nothing at all access is completely denied Detailed information about enabling and disabling document protection is given on the following pages Manual TextMaker 2016 Document protection e 501 Enabling document protection You can protect your documents from being read or saved by unauthorized persons by applying document protection or to be more precise read and or write protec tion to them For example you can require the entry of a password to open or save a protected document When a document is read protected it is also encrypted so that it cannot be exam ined with the use of programs other than TextMaker To protect a document do the following 1 Invoke the command File gt Properties 2 Switch to the Protection tab 3 Select the kind of document protection desired see below
208. awings e 255 Tip Duplicating an object is even faster with the mouse when you drag an object while holding down the key you obtain a duplicate of the object However this works only with frames and drawings Changing the properties of objects An object s properties include its size fill style line style etc The Object gt Properties command provides one place to access all properties for editing or viewing To modify the properties of an object first select the object with a mouse click text frames can be selected by clicking on the object s border only Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip For most types of objects double clicking on the object or its border provides a quick alternative way to invoke this command The dialog contains several tabs On the next pages you will find detailed infor mation on each tab and the options it contains Object properties Layout tab On the Layout tab you can set the outside margins for any type of object For frames and drawings you can in addition modify the position and the text wrap ping Options available Horizontal Position group box These options are available only for frames and drawings Note You can change the positions of objects e g pictures that have been inserted directly into the text only by cutting them and then pasting them elsewhere With frames and drawings on the other hand you can speci
209. bar can be modified using the View gt Toolbars command Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the View gt Toolbars command 2 Select the toolbar you want to move by clicking on it 3 Select the desired position for the toolbar in the Position list Note If you choose the Floating option the toolbar icons are displayed in a window that can be moved or sized just like an application window Changing the position with the mouse Some toolbars can also be repositioned with the mouse Proceed as follows 1 Position the mouse pointer over an empty area of the toolbar 2 Press the left mouse button and hold it down 3 While holding the mouse button down drag the toolbar to the desired position 4 Release the mouse button to place the toolbar at the new position Note By default most toolbars are locked against moving them with the mouse in order to protect them from being moved accidentally To remove the lock invoke View gt Toolbars select the toolbar of interest and disable the Locked option Hint A positioning aid is active while you are dragging a toolbar so that when you drag the toolbar near one of the edges of the program window it jumps automati cally to that edge If you leave the toolbar at the top edge of the window for example the result is the same as if you selected the Top position in the View gt Toolbars dialog box 562 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Managing toolbars You can create new
210. bels you can also use this command to create lists and tables in order to display the contents of a database The differences E Labels For producing labels for example address labels containing one address from a database per label Lists For producing lists for example address lists containing one address per line e g Thomas Jones 42 Park Avenue Sun City m Tables Similar to lists with the data distributed over the cells of a table one address per cell Working with the Insert gt List Label command is easy To create e g address labels invoke the command In its dialog first specify the database to use i e the database containing the addresses Then add its database fields to the large edit control in the dialog in exactly the way they should later appear in the printout see screenshot above Finally select the label format from a predefined list That s it printing can begin Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 355 Tipp The Manage button in the dialog allows you to save label definitions that is all settings made in the dialog and retrieve them any time later This also works with lists and tables Creating lists labels To create e g labels proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Insert gt List Label command 2 Under Output as choose what to create Label List or Table In our example you would select Label 3 If you would like your labels to contain t
211. bers 186 Line spacing 77 Lines around master pages 112 114 around paragraphs 92 around table cells 199 202 203 drawing 286 287 of objects 265 properties 290 Link Edit menu 242 Link Format menu 462 463 Linking text frames 278 Links in objects 269 270 in the text 462 Manual TextMaker 2016 List bulleted 86 List numbered 171 172 176 List Label Insert menu 354 Lists address lists 354 Live preview 532 534 Locked object property 269 Locking guides 546 549 574 576 objects 254 269 objects on the master page 108 110 546 549 Logical field database 363 364 LOWER function 396 397 LTRIM function 396 397 M Magnifying Glass View menu 558 Mail merge toolbar 370 371 Manage Styles Format menu 137 Manual 17 Margins inner margins of AutoShapes 291 292 inner margins of text frames 276 277 of objects 253 page margins 100 101 Master pages 108 Master Pages View menu 108 109 556 557 MathType 245 246 MAX function 396 397 Maximum number of undo steps 527 Measurement 532 534 Memo field database 363 364 Menu bar 24 Microsoft Word file format 505 506 538 539 Middle mouse button 530 531 MIN function 396 398 Mirror effect for objects 268 MONTH function 396 398 N Names of objects 274 New File menu 32 139 140 350 New Chart Object menu 225 New Chart Frame Object menu 225 226 New Drawing Object menu 286 New Forms Object Object menu 301 Index e 593 Check
212. bject m In Forms mode see below the text cursor can be moved only between forms objects In this mode you can use the keys Tab and Shift Tab to jump back and forth between forms objects Forms mode It is recommended that you always activate Forms mode when you want to fill out a form This will save you a great deal of work Forms mode can be activated and deactivated with the View gt Forms Mode command You will know whether Forms mode is activated or not from the program s title bar If Forms Mode is displayed there after the name of the document the mode is activated In Forms mode TextMaker s behavior changes as follows m You can use the keys Tab and ShifteJ Tab to jump from one forms object to the next Forms objects can be filled out but the normal text is no longer editable Most of the menu commands are grayed out and thus no longer available The purpose of this is to prevent changes to those parts of the form that are not intended to be filled out Thus when using Forms mode you can fill out a form with the same degree of convenience that you experience when you use a database program s input mask Note When you open a document that was in Forms mode when it was last saved Forms mode is reactivated automatically When Forms mode can t be deactivated You will encounter some forms in which the author has blocked the deactivation of Forms mode by protecting it
213. bject the corresponding object will be selected You can refer to the section on Changing the names of objects beginning on page 274 to learn why objects have names and how these names can be changed Selecting objects in Object mode In Object mode you can select any type of object simply by clicking on it with the mouse This is very useful especially for objects with transparent fills e g text frames In Edit mode an object of this type can be selected only by aiming at its border and then clicking In Object mode such an object can be selected simply by clicking anywhere on it In Object mode you can also select multiple objects at once provided they are frames or drawings To do this draw a rectangle around the desired objects with the mouse Alternatively you can click successively on several objects while holding down the Shift key to select them together Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 251 Changing the position size and margins of objects On the next pages you will learn how to change the position size and outside margins of an object Changing the position of objects Objects can be moved as desired Simply select the object with a mouse click and then do the following m With the mouse While holding down the mouse button drag the selected object to the desired position With the keyboard With frames and drawings you can alternatively use the arrow keys to move the currently selected
214. board mappings command is not only for manag ing keyboard mappings The most important function of this command is the modification of the shortcuts contained in a mapping The Edit button handles this function Assigning a shortcut for a command When you find that you are using one of the menu commands frequently you can assign a shortcut for it so that in the future you will be able to execute it quickly with a simple keystroke combination As an example we will assign the shortcut to the Format gt Standard command Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command 2 If necessary select the desired keyboard mapping if you want to modify a keyboard mapping other than the one that is currently activated 3 Click on the Edit button 4 Select a command category from the Group list Then from the Command list select the command whose shortcut you want to modify In our example you would select Format in the Group list and Standard from the Command list 5 Click into the Please press accelerator field and then press the desired shortcut In the example you would press E12 Hint If you make a typing mistake you can always press the backspace key to remove the keyboard shortcut you entered 6 Don t forget Click on Add to assign this shortcut to the command 7 Confirm with OK and exit the main dialog box with Close From now on you can execute the Format gt S
215. box 307 Checkbox Frame 309 Dropdown 309 Dropdown Frame 311 Groupbox 311 Label 311 Text Field 305 New horizontal line Object menu 461 New OLE Object Object menu 239 240 241 New OLE Object Frame Object menu 283 New Picture Object menu 216 New Picture Frame Object menu 279 New Picture from Gallery Object menu 218 New Table Table menu 190 New Text Frame Object menu 275 Non breaking hyphen 328 331 Non breaking spaces 96 97 377 378 Normal tmv 142 NTOD function 396 398 Numbered list 171 172 176 Numbering numbered lists 171 172 176 of headings 410 with auto numbers 185 Numeric field database 363 364 0 Object gt Align or Distribute 255 Object gt Charts Edit Data 225 226 228 Object gt Group 273 Object gt Guides amp Grid 573 574 575 Object gt New Chart 225 Object gt New Chart Frame 225 226 Object gt New Drawing 286 Object gt New Forms Object 301 Checkbox 307 Checkbox Frame 309 Dropdown 309 Dropdown Frame 311 Groupbox 311 Label 311 Text Field 305 Object gt New horizontal line 461 Object gt New OLE Object 239 240 241 Object gt New OLE Object Frame 283 Object gt New Picture 216 594 e Index Object gt New Picture Frame 279 Object gt New Picture from Gallery 218 Object gt New Text Frame 275 Object gt Order 272 273 Object gt Properties changing default settings 270 for charts 232 233 for checkbox frames 308 for check
216. boxes 308 for drawings 290 for dropdown list frames 309 for dropdown lists 309 for footers 105 for groupboxes 312 for headers 105 for horizontal lines 461 for labels 312 for OLE object frames 284 for OLE objects 243 for picture frames 280 for pictures 219 for tables 203 for text fields 305 for text frames 276 general properties 256 Object gt Rotate or Flip 254 255 Object gt Tab Order 313 Object gt Ungroup 273 Object mode 249 Object Mode View menu 249 250 Object toolbar 249 250 Objects 247 248 changing default settings 270 duplicating 255 grouping 273 hiding 269 272 546 547 locking 254 order 272 position 252 256 properties 256 rotating 262 selecting 249 size 253 262 OLE object frames 247 248 282 inserting 283 properties 284 OLE object guidelines 524 525 OLE objects editing 241 inserting 239 position and size 243 properties 243 Manual TextMaker 2016 OLE Objects 239 editing 241 inserting 239 position and size 243 properties 243 Open File menu 33 141 505 506 Open Document file format 538 539 Open Office file format 505 506 OpenDocument file format 505 506 Operators in calculations 395 Options Tools menu 524 Appearance tab 532 Edit tab 530 Files tab 538 Fonts tab 545 General tab 527 Language tab 535 System tab 541 View tab 524 Order Object menu 272 273 Order of objects 272 Orientation of pages 100 101 Outline View menu 404 Outline level 95 402 403 Outline too
217. boxes can be used for yes no entries If the box is checked it means yes If the box is not checked it means no Accordingly we will add a checkbox that should be checked only when the client is new 1 Type New client and then press Tab 2 Invoke Object gt New Forms Object gt Checkbox 3 In the dialog that appears at this point you can if required enter additional text that will appear next to the checkbox For this example type yes 4 Exit the dialog with OK 5 Press the Enter key twice To align the forms objects vertically you should now select all the lines you have entered and then use Format gt Tab to set a tab stop at the appropriate place for example at 1 2 inch T Formitmd e Name Address 3 City 2 Gender female 7 New client O yes ule 4 Our form is now complete You can now save the document and test it see also the section Filling out forms beginning on page 296 The best way to test the form is to use View gt Forms Mode to activate Forms mode 304 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms objects in detail In this section we describe in detail the individual types of forms objects The following objects are covered Text fields Text frames Checkboxes Checkbox frames Dropdown lists Dropdown list frames Labels and groupboxes Text fields You insert a text field with the Object gt New Forms Object gt
218. cache TextMaker uses an internal picture cache to speed up the display of images in a document If this option is enabled the size of this cache is restricted to a maxi mum of 20 of your PC s main memory As a general rule you should leave this option enabled If you frequently work with documents containing many high resolution pictures you may consider deactivating this option Pictures will then usually be displayed faster throughout the document however it can occur that TextMaker consumes a large amount of main memory Smooth edges of pictures When this option is enabled TextMaker uses anti aliasing to smooth edges and lines in images Advantage The display quality of scaled images is improved Disadvantage This of course consumes some CPU time Check for updates Windows only Here you can specify if and how often the software should check for software updates when you launch it Software updates provide bug fixes and feature improvements Whenever an update is available the application will inform you by displaying a message box when you start it Note Checking for updates is possible only when your device has Internet access If you want to disable the automatic update check not recommended choose the Never option from the list In that case you have to check for updates manually by clicking the Check Now button For other versions of SoftMaker Office updates can be obtained as follows Linux versi
219. can set the list level manually with the List level option in the main dialog see also section Applying numbered lists beginning on page 182 E Level Available only when the type of the numbered list has been set to Hierarchical list Here you can select with a mouse click the level of the list you want to modify For example if you click on 3 you can change the settings for the third level Each level of a hierarchical list can have its own settings For example you can set the color for the numbers at level 1 to blue and the colors of the numbers at all the other levels to black 178 o Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 E Preview The Preview field shows how the numbering will look with the current set tings In addition it provides an alternative means of selecting the level you want to edit You can make a selection in the Preview field in exactly the same way you make a selection in the Level field by clicking on the desired level Display higher levels Available only for list levels of 2 and above in hierarchical lists When this option is checked the numbering applied to a list item at the selected level will fully represent the item s hierarchical position This numbering will include the item s number in the sequence of items with which it is coordinate and the numbers of all the items to which it is subordinate Thus an item at list level 3 for example will have a numbering in the form
220. care For example the word print occurs frequently in a word processor manual When indexing this word in makes more sense to add to the keyword list only those occurrences that are found in a section of the document dealing particularly with the topic of printing than to add all occurrences This way the index will not be overloaded with useless references Adding multiple occurrences of a keyword By the way the same term can be added to the keyword list multiple times Such a term appears in the index only once but the entry for it includes multiple page numbers Note The cases of letters in keywords are ignored If both Print and print are added to the keyword list the index will collect references to both terms under the single entry Print Adding all occurrences of a term In some cases it makes sense to create an index entry that refers to all the positions in the text at which the keyword appears Naturally you can do this by selecting Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 415 each separate occurrence of the term and adding it to the list in the manner de scribed above However TextMaker can relieve you of this task To enable TextMaker to do this check the Index all occurrences option when you add the keyword to the list with Tools gt Index gt Add Index Entry TextMaker will then search the entire text for the given term when it creates the index and it will include the
221. ce No problem if your database has fields for quantity and price you can have TextMaker calculate formulas like QUANTITY PRICE and easily print invoices as form letters In addition you can reference the contents of objects in calculations For example the formula Textbox1 Value 2 references the current numeric value in the text field named Textbox1 and multiplies it by two Detailed information about the topic of calculations is given on the next pages The following topics are covered Inserting calculations Formatting and rounding calculations Updating calculations Conditional text Simple calculations with the press of a button mw Formulas and functions Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 379 Inserting calculations Calculations can be inserted into the text with the command Insert gt Calculation or the keyboard shortcut F2 When this command is invoked a dialog box appears and lets you enter the formu la for the calculation The formula may contain up to 255 characters After your OK the result of the calculation maximum 100 characters is placed in the text Options You can specify the format of the result with the options Decimals Thou sands separator and Hide result You can read about this in the section Formatting and rounding calculations beginning on page 388 Inserting calculations A simple example of the use of the calculation command You want to calcu
222. ce keyboard shortcut H is provided to meet this requirement Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Edit gt Replace command 2 Under Search for enter the text for which you want to search 3 Under Replace with enter the text that is to replace the search text 4 As necessary check the options for the search see section Expanded search options beginning on page 152 5 Click on the Search button to begin the search When TextMaker finds the search text it scrolls to its position in the document and selects it You can then do any of the following A You can click on Replace to have TextMaker replace the selected occurrence of the search term with the replacement term and jump to the next occurrence of the search term B You can click on Search again to have TextMaker jump to the next occurrence of the search term without replacing the selected occurrence C You can click on Replace all to have TextMaker replace the selected occur rence of the search term and all subsequent occurrences it finds in the text D You can click on Close to end the search and close the search dialog Repeating a search replace To repeat a search or replace operation or to continue a search or replace operation that was interrupted you can use the command Edit gt Search again or Edit gt Replace again or press the key TextMaker continues the last search it was conducting When it finds another occurrence of the sear
223. ch term it displays that occurrence Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 151 Hint A search operation can also be continued using the following keys to jump to the next occurrence to jump to the previous occurrence Expanded search options When you click on the Enlarge button in the Edit gt Search or Edit gt Replace dialog the dialog expands to offer additional options When you click on Reduce the dialog contracts and the additional options are hidden Thus you can specify the appearance of the dialog according to your preference for having the most options at your disposal or for having as much of the text as possible visible while you are searching The expanded search replace dialog offers the following additional options Options group box Here you can make settings for controlling the search operation as follows m Case sensitive By default the case of letters in the search term is ignored Thus if you search for house not only house but also House HOUSE HouSe etc will be found However if you check this option only those occurrences of the search term will be found in which the cases of the letters correspond exactly to the cases of the letters in the search term Thus if you search for house only house will be found m Whole words only If you check this option only those occurrences of the search term that are sep arate words will be f
224. ch the text cursor is presently positioned The change is then saved permanently in the document Reject current change Rejects the change at which the text cursor is presently positioned Accept all changes Accepts all changes in the entire document Reject all changes Rejects all changes in the entire document Review all changes Opens a dialog box in which all changes are listed To accept or remove a change first click on the change in the list and then click on the Accept or Reject button Corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Changes gt Review All Chang es Show changes on off Turns the Show Changes option on or off When the option is enabled changes are highlighted in color as described in the previous section When it is disabled the document appears as if all changes had been accepted Corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Changes gt Show Changes Settings for the Track changes function With the command Tools gt Changes gt Options you can set various options for the Track changes function Note You can also access this dialog box by invoking the command File gt Prop erties and changing to the Reviewing tab 456 e Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 The following options are available Comments and Comments pane group boxes The options in these two group boxes pertain not to the Track changes function but to the insertion of comments You will find informa
225. cify the vertical position of the numbers Negative values cause the numbers to be lowered positive values cause them to be raised Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 175 m Numbered lists tab This tab provides control over the creation of numbered lists A numbered list has special features that distinguish it from a simple enumeration the layout of a numbered list can be saved and reused In addition a numbered list can have a hierarchical organization 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc Information about numbered lists is presented in the next section Numbered lists Advanced TextMaker users will already appreciate the advantages of paragraph styles which are described in chapter Styles You can save a frequently needed paragraph format in a paragraph style and then apply it over and over again to any paragraphs you wish Something similar is available for enumerations numbered lists These work somewhat like paragraph styles When you want to apply a certain kind of enumeration frequently in a document set up a numbered list When you do so a dialog like the one for simple enumerated and bulleted lists will appear It will allow you to specify precisely the kind of numbering and the number format you want Afterwards you can apply the layout of your numbered list to any paragraphs you like The paragraphs will then be given a numbering exactly as you specified in your numbered list A further advantage If you subs
226. cing that TextMaker should reserve between the end of the current paragraph and the beginning of the next paragraph Suppress for paragraphs with the same paragraph style This option was introduced mainly for compatibility reason with Microsoft Word Enabling it has the following effects m If the current paragraph and the previous paragraph utilize the same paragraph style the spacing Before will not be applied m If the current paragraph and the next paragraph utilize the same paragraph style the spacing After will not be applied By default the option is disabled Paragraph alignment The way TextMaker arranges text paragraphs is called paragraph alignment In TextMaker there are four kinds of paragraph alignment listed as follows with their corresponding keyboard shortcuts m Flush left m Flush right RJ E Centered E Justified 80 o Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 To modify the paragraph alignment select the paragraph s you want to change and press one of the keyboard shortcuts listed above Alternatively you can invoke the command Format gt Paragraph switch to the Paragraph tab and select the desired paragraph alignment from the Alignment dropdown list Using the Formatting toolbar You can also use the Formatting toolbar to change the alignment To do so click on one of the following buttons Flush left Flush right Centered Justified The alignment changes accordingly Changing
227. computational functions will be described to you Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text e 391 Note This section deals with the formulas for computation for performing calculations in the text If you are looking for information about the SoftMaker Equation Editor for graphical representations of mathematical formulas you will find it in the Equation Editor s online help The structure of a formula Formulas may contain up to 255 characters Results are limited to 100 characters You can construct formulas from the following components Constant values A formula presents itself in its simplest form as a constant value as in the follow ing examples Text strings Example Good morning A formula with this content always gives the text string Good morning A text string is a sequence of letters numbers or other characters Text strings may be up to 100 characters long Important When you enter a constant text string e g Good morning direct ly into a formula you must enclose it in double quotation marks Otherwise TextMaker will try to interpret it as the name of a function or variable E Numerical values Example 42 50 Of course a constant value can also be a numerical value i e a number This formula always returns the number 42 5 Date entries Example 04 20 15 This formula represents the date 4 20 2015 Notes on entering dates in formulas When entering dates in a form
228. correct line spacing is Line spacing Font size 1 2 So for a 10 point font a line spacing of about 12 points is suggested E At least Automatic line spacing with a given minimum Just like the Single option this option also provides automatic single line spacing but prevents any reduction below the specified minimum value So if you enter e g 12 points as a minimum value normally automatic single line spacing is applied However if the automatic line spacing becomes smaller than 12 points for example because you used a very small font size a fixed line spacing of 12 points is applied instead By default the line spacing is set to Single There are also keyboard shortcuts for the most common settings E Automatic single line spacing 1 line m Automatic one and a half line spacing 1 5 lines m Automatic double line spacing 2 lines Spacing above below a paragraph Besides the line spacing you can specify the amount of empty space to be added above the first line and below the last line of a paragraph Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 79 To change these settings invoke the Format gt Paragraph command and switch to the Paragraph tab In the Paragraph Spacing group box the following options are available Before Here you can set the amount of spacing to be added between the end of the previ ous paragraph and the beginning of the current paragraph After Here you can set the amount of spa
229. ct also drops down a line The offset is relative to the respective page margin For example if you set Offset to 0 Position to Top and choose Bottom margin here the object s top edge would appear where the bottom page margin begins If necessary you can review the description of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 252 Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 259 Offset Finally you can set the desired spacing in the Offset field Example If Position is set to Top Relative to to Page borders and Offset to 2 in the top of the object will be positioned 2 in below the top page margin If this margin is 1 in wide the top of the object will be positioned 3 in below the top edge of the page m Wrap Margins group box Here you can change the object s outside margins Tip The outside margins can also be changed by dragging the outer dashed lines that appear around the object when it is selected m Text Wrapping group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings With these options you can specify how the body text surrounding the frame or drawing should behave Available options from left to right Option Meaning Line The body text is broken above the frame and continued below it Square The body text flows around the rectangular borders of the frame This is the default setting Contour The body text flows aro
230. cting each word to be in dexed in the text and invoking the Tools gt Index gt Add Index Entry com mand for it Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 413 When all keywords have been set you can tell TextMaker to create the index with Tools gt Index gt Generate Index Tables of contents see page 418 For a table of contents all you have to do is outline your document as described in the section Outlines page 402 The outline already contains all the infor mation TextMaker needs about the hierarchy of the headings to enable it to cre ate the table of contents All you have to do is invoke the Tools gt Generate Table of Contents com mand m Captions and tables of figures see page 420 The Insert gt Caption command can be used to insert automatically numbered captions below pictures for example Figure 1 Figure 2 etc When you have done that you can use the Tools gt Generate Table of Figures command to create a table of figures including page numbers Bibliographies see page 426 For a bibliography you first enter all your sources in a bibliography database Now you can insert references to these sources into the document with the In sert Bibliography Field command At the end of the document invoke the Tools gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography command to generate a list of all the referenced sources Detailed information about these topics is presented
231. ction Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 Forms Object tab On this tab you can make settings for the text that is displayed in the label or groupbox 312 e Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 m Text group box Here you can enter the text to be displayed 3D effect Available only for groupboxes If you check this option the groupbox is drawn with a 3D effect You can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the text Forms advanced functions This concluding section of the chapter on forms describes some forms functions for advanced users as follows m Changing the tab order Protecting contents of forms objects Protecting forms Calculating with forms objects See the next pages for details Changing the tab order As mentioned earlier in the section Filling out forms you can jump back and forth between forms objects with the key takes you to the next forms object and takes you to the previous one In Forms mode you have the alternative of using Tab and Shift Tab to per form these functions The order in which you jump among the forms objects can be specified with the Object gt Tab Order To set the tab order invoke this command and select from the list of Objects the forms object whose position in the tab order you want to change Then click on one of the arrow buttons to the right of the list to raise move the object to a lower or
232. ctures that have transparent areas See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For adding border lines See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 E Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 m Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning on page 268 Properties For modifying common object settings Also displays some infor mation on the picture See section Object properties Properties tab beginning on page 269 For pictures there is an additional tab with further options Picture tab On the Picture tab you can change settings that are specific to pictures Tip Some of these setting can also be modified using the Picture toolbar that appears automatically when you select a picture See section Using the Picture toolbar page 221 Options available on this tab E Variants In this list a number of pre defined variations of the picture are presented for example different color modes grayscaled black amp white etc as well as col orized variants of the image To choose one of these variants simply click on it and the options in the dialog will be adjusted accordingly E Settings group box Here you can change brightness contrast saturation and gamma color balance with an effect on brightness More button
233. cuments often have page headers and footers in which the reader can find information such as the title of the current chapter Naturally TextMaker allows you to create such headers and footers The only requirement is that you divide the document into chapters which are permitted to have their own headers and footers To do this use Insert gt Break gt Chapter break to insert a so called chapter break before each new thematic section of the document normally that means before every major heading Now you can set up headers and footers with different contents for each chapter You can also make other settings relating to page formatting including even the paper format page margins etc on a chapter by chapter basis You will find detailed information about working with chapters in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 Tables of references TOC index etc TextMaker provides functions that authors can use to significantly lighten some of the most time consuming work associated with the preparation of large documents The creation of tables of contents and indices is easy with TextMaker captions and tables of figures can be provided for pictures and even the creation of bibliog raphies for referencing cited literature is supported m Indices see page 414 For an index you merely have to tell TextMaker what words are to be indexed and where they are in the text This is done by sele
234. d the red underscore disappears Is the spell checker working incorrectly If the spell checker frequently underlines words that in fact are correctly spelled it is likely that the text segment in which they occur is formatted in the wrong language In this case select the text segment invoke Format gt Character and set the Language option on the Font tab to Default or to the language in which the segment was composed Tip Jumping to the previous next spelling error When the background spell checker has been activated the three buttons in the lower right corner of the document window can also be used to jump to the previ ous next spelling error z e First click on the button with the red dot to bring up a small menu Select the option Spelling error from it After that you use these buttons as follows E Click on the button with the up arrow to jump to the previous spelling error Click on the button with the down arrow to jump to the next spelling error More information on these three buttons can be found in the section The Go to Command page 158 Conversion to new German spelling Note This whole section applies to text in German language If you never work with documents composed in German you may want to skip it and continue reading in the section Editing user dictionaries beginning on page 327 In 1996 the governments of the German speaking countries Germany Austria Liechtens
235. d after pressing the key The maximum length of the field is displayed after the field type Which century Notice when filling in a date field if you enter the year as two digit number between 0 and 29 TextMaker automatically prefixes 20 For year numbers between 30 and 99 TextMaker prefixes 19 Thus the entry 01 01 29 is interpreted as 1 1 2029 the entry 01 01 30 as 1 1 1930 List and form view The database module can display databases in two different ways E The list view offers the best overview of the database Here you see several data records listed one after another in tabular form E The form view is better suited to the inspection of individual data records Here the fields of a single data record are displayed in a form Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 343 Important In list view no data can be entered This is possible only in form view To switch between list and form view invoke the command View gt Form If the form view is active a check mark appears in front of this menu item Otherwise list view is active Tip You can switch very quickly between these two views with the key Moreover a double click on a data record in list view displays the record in form view Browsing through data records Both keys and icons are available for moving among the data records of a database Key Icon Function Pgup T J q Go to the previous data record in list view to
236. d from one another by semicolons Function Explanation ABS n Returns the absolute value of the numeric argument n i e removes its sign ABS 3 gives 3 ABS 3 gives 3 ASC t Returns the numeric code of the character t in the character table ASC A gives 65 AT t1 12 Returns the position of the first occurrence of text string t2 in text string t as a numeric value AT London on gives 2 396 o Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 AVG nI1 n2 CHR n COUNT n n2 DAY d DTON d IF INT n LEFT t n LEN LOWER LTRIM t MAX nJ n2 Manual TextMaker 2016 Returns the average value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example AVG B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Returns the character at position n in the character table CHR 65 gives A Returns the number of values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner Only numbers are counted empty cells and cells containing text are not counted The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example COUNT B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Returns the day part of date d
237. d s Way lt Salmon River Oregon 77123 t m Now it is time once again to save the document with File gt Save When something goes wrong Note You will find more information about this topic in section Undoing chang es beginning on page 31 As you saw in the last lesson segment you can switch off bold for example by re applying the bold attribute to text that is already formatted bold TextMaker has an additional feature that is very practical You can reverse the most recently completed changes with the Edit gt Undo command For example if you format some text with a different font all you need to do is invoke Edit gt Undo to make it undone This works not only with formatting but also with practically all kinds of changes so you can also for example undo the entry or deletion of text The command Undo can be applied repeatedly as needed For example invoke it five times to cancel the last five changes By the way you can invoke this frequently needed command with the key combi nation Z There is also an opposite to the Undo command the command Edit gt Redo key combination YJ It restores the effect of your most recently canceled action So you can undo the cancellation of a change Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 43 Opening files Note You will find detailed information about this topic in section Opening documents beginning on page 33
238. d start This is useful when reusing label sheets where some labels have already been used List There are no options for lists Table For tables the following options are available Row height Here you can set the height of the table rows Auto determine optimum height automatically Exact specify the exact height or At least specify the minimum height but allow each row to grow automatically if more space is needed Columns Here you can specify the number of columns the table should contain E Print button or Insert button When creating labels a Print button will be available in the dialog Pressing it gets you directly to the print dialog where you can the start printing the labels When creating lists or tables this button is replaced by a button named Insert Pressing it inserts the list label into the current document E New document button Pressing this button will create a new document containing the filled out labels or list table exactly like they would appear in the printout Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 359 Manage button This button allows you to save label definitions i e all settings made in this dialog and retrieve them any time later It will open a dialog with the following buttons Save Saves the label definition i e all settings made in this dialog after asking you to give it a name Load Retrieves the label definition currently selected in the li
239. d then set the Number to 10 ten rows will be inserted instead of only one Tip Quick insertion of complete rows or columns There is a shortcut for inserting new rows or columns Select either an entire row or an entire column of cells before invoking Table gt Insert Cells TextMaker will then immediately insert a new row or column ahead of the selected row or column without first displaying the above described dialog Tip If you select multiple rows or columns before invoking this command the corresponding number of rows columns will be inserted For example if you have selected 3 rows 3 additional rows will be inserted instead of only one Splitting and joining table cells This section describes how to split and join table cells or entire tables Topics covered 194 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 mw Splitting table cells E Joining table cells Splitting tables m Joining tables Splitting table cells You can split table cells any time you wish that is you can break them into multi ple cells You do this as follows 1 Position the text cursor in the cell that you want to split 2 Invoke the Table gt Split Cells command 3 A dialog box appears Enter the number of rows and columns into which the cell should be split in this dialog 4 Confirm with OK The cell is now split according to your specifications Splitting several cells at once Optionally you can select multiple neighboring cells bef
240. dBase Windows format However please note the following limitation of the dBase Unicode format Important Databases in dBase Unicode format are not dBase compatible Apart from TextMaker only very few programs support this format Therefore you should use this format only if you need to create a database that supports the Unicode character set because you want to enter for example Asian characters and intend to use it with TextMaker only Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 365 Form letters and form faxes You find form letters in your mailbox almost every day among them advertise ments from lotteries mail order houses etc TT Form letter tmd mym j THE SOCIETY OF CALLIGRAPHERS FIRSTNAME NAME1 Attn NAME2 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP SALUT_BODY We are pleased to announce that the Society of Calligraphers will no longer have to rely on handveiting for its official communications 3 We have decided to convert everyone in the office to personal computers We are now using Textlvlaker_which has anintesrated datahase allowing 4 m r ue 4 A form letter the addresses will appear in the fields FIRSTNAME NAME1 etc Of course form letters can also be used for other things How would you go about sending written invitations to all the members of your bowling team for example Normally you would type the text of the letter type the first member s address in the letterhead
241. dashes as leaders DOtS sccsesssesseeeseseeees A tab with dots as leaders used frequently in tables of contents and indices Middle dots A tab with middle dots as leaders Hint To provide an existing tab stop with a leader invoke Format gt Tabs Select one of the tab stops that have been set choose the desired leader from the Tab leader list and click on Set Deleting and moving tab stops Tab stops can be modified at any time after they have been defined For this pur pose select the paragraphs whose tab stops are to be edited and invoke Format gt Tabs To remove one of the tab stops select it from the Tabs list and click the Clear button To remove all tab stops use the Clear all button It is not possible to move a tab stop to a new position with the Format gt Tabs command You can only can clear the tab stop and then set a new one at the desired 84 o Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 position However moving tabs is easier with the horizontal ruler as described in the next section Using the horizontal ruler All the tab stops set for the current paragraph are shown in the horizontal ruler as in the following example The horizontal ruler with some flush left tabs set at various positions With the ruler tab stops can be set moved and deleted To set tab stops proceed as follows 1 Place the text cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple paragraphs to be modi
242. de and then pressing the key combination ctr at shifte x For example when you type in 20AC and press this key combination you will receive a euro sign since the euro sign s character code is 20AC in the Unicode character set table 170 o Inserting special characters Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering TextMaker has several functions that generate enumerations automatically This chapter will teach you everything you need to know about them The following topics are covered m Simple enumerations The first section describes the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command This command is helpful for numbering paragraphs A number is inserted to the left of each successive paragraph and each paragraph is indented to accommo date the number Numbered lists You can also create numbered lists with this command The numbering scheme for a numbered list can be saved and reused In addition a numbered list can be organized hierarchically 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc m Numbered headings You can also use numbered lists to apply numbering to the headings in a docu ment automatically You will find information about this in section Numbering headings beginning on page 410 Numbering with Auto numbers Besides the above mentioned methods for numbering paragraphs TextMaker provides a general purpose method for automatic numbering you can insert instances of an Auto number field anywhere in the text S
243. de on or off In Object mode you can no longer edit text However this mode provides many func tions that lighten work with objects like pictures frames etc See the section Object mode beginning on page 249 Turns Forms mode on or off In Forms mode only forms objects text fields checkboxes lists etc can be filled out Access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMak er s functions is blocked See the chapter Forms beginning on page 295 Opens a dialog box where you can show or hide toolbars reposition them or edit them See the section Customizing toolbars beginning on page 560 Enters the full screen view mode where the program maxim izes its program window and hides all toolbars in order to display as much of the document as possible See the section Full screen view beginning on page 559 Turns the horizontal ruler on or off See the section Document window beginning on page 26 Customizing TextMaker e 557 Sidebar Turns the sidebar on or off The sidebar provides a means of navigating in the document and some other useful functions See the section Document window beginning on page 26 Additional settings for customizing the display of documents are available with the following commands Tools gt Options allows you to modify general settings that apply to all docu ments see section Preferences View tab beginning on page 524 m File gt Propertie
244. described below After that confirm with OK 3 Another dialog window appears where you can specify the filename and loca tion of the PDF file to create After that confirm with OK The PDF file will then be created To view it open the PDF file in a PDF viewer of your choice Hint If your device does not have a PDF viewer installed you can find suitable programs in the Internet by performing a search for PDF viewer in your web browser The dialog window mentioned above provides the following options General tab On this tab you can specify which parts of the document to export and change several other settings The options available are mostly identical to the ones pro Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 477 vided in the File gt Print dialog which is described in the section Printing a document beginning on page 467 Apart from that the following additional options are available E Create table of contents If this option is checked TextMaker will store a bookmark in the PDF file for each heading that your document contains Your PDF viewer will then display these bookmarks in a pane left of the docu ment You can utilize this pane as an interactive table of contents just click on a heading to jump to the corresponding section in the document Hint If your PDF viewer does not display a bookmark pane search it for a command to display bookmarks and activate it Note Please note that i
245. dified To select the lines containing the address proceed as follows Mouse While pressing the mouse button drag the mouse cursor from the begin ning to the end of the text you want to select By the way there is an easy way to select complete lines click in the margin to the left of the line The complete line will be immediately selected Keyboard If you prefer to work with the keyboard you can make selections by moving the text cursor while holding down the Shift key Shifts In this case select the address line by positioning the text cursor in front of the first character with the key and then pressing the key combination 1 Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour o 41 Android Please note that in the Android version selecting text is done in a quite different way For details see the section Selecting text and objects page 57 Once you have selected the address line you can modify the font size To do this use the Formatting toolbar which presents all the most frequently needed format ting commands If the Formatting toolbar is not visible invoke View gt Toolbars and click on the little box in front of Formatting to activate it The Formatting toolbar Note You will find detailed information about the Formatting toolbar in the chapters Character formatting beginning on page 63 and Paragraph format ting beginning on page 75 R Normal TimesNewRoman 10 My B U D d l
246. diting tables You can enter edit and format text within tables in the usual manner When you insert a new table TextMaker automatically places the text cursor in the first table cell so that you can begin typing immediately You can type multiple lines of text within a cell the lines will be broken automat ically and begin new paragraphs with the Enter key The heights of all the 190 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 cells in a row will be adjusted automatically to the height of the current cell as its height increases You insert pictures into a table cell in the usual manner using the Object gt New Picture command which is described in chapter Pictures beginning on page 215 Of course you can also insert other types of objects for example OLE objects forms objects etc To move the text cursor from one table cell to another do the following Keyboard Press the key to move to the next cell or to move to the previous cell To move the text cursor from row to row use the arrow keys and T J Mouse Click in the desired cell Note As noted above the key is not available for inserting tab stops within table cells In tables you enter tab stops not with Tab but with the key combi nation Tab Selecting table cells and cell contents Text selection within a table cell works just like normal text selection To select complete table cells including their content click into the first cell to be sel
247. do not select any rows the changes will be applied only to the row in which the text cursor is positioned Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 197 Row Properties Height _ Keep together with next row Cancel Break page at row Allow page break in row The dialog box for this command offers the following options Height Here you can modify the height of the table rows by selecting from among the following options E Auto This is the default setting When it is selected TextMaker determines the optimum height for the rows automatically E Exact When you select this option you can specify exactly the height you want the rows to be However in this case the height of the rows will be fixed it will not be automatically adjusted even when it is not sufficient to accommodate the contents of the cells m At least This option represents a combination of the two options above If you enter 1 in here for example the height of the rows will be set to exactly 1 inch pro vided that this height is sufficient for the contents of the cells However if you enter more text in a cell than can be accommodated in 1 in TextMaker will au tomatically increase the height to accommodate it Keep together with next row When this option is checked the selected rows and the row immediately follow ing are always kept together If TextMaker determines that an automatic page break should fall between any o
248. document Cross references can target text elements of the following kinds 434 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 E bookmarks footnotes E objects pictures drawings etc Cross references to bookmarks are often encountered in large documents For example if you want to insert a cross reference to the index at the end of your document first put a bookmark at the beginning of the index Then return to the place in the document where the reference should appear type something like See also the index beginning on page and insert a cross reference to the bookmark The cross reference now shows the number of the page on which the index begins Cross references are updated automatically when the document is printed They can also be updated manually if desired with the Tools gt Update Fields com mand The following pages contain detailed information about working with cross references Inserting a cross reference To insert a cross reference in the text do the following 1 If you want to insert a cross reference to a bookmark you must first set the bookmark at the target position with the Insert gt Bookmark command see also section Bookmarks beginning on page 156 2 Then move the text cursor to the place in the text where the cross reference is to be inserted 3 Invoke the Insert gt Cross reference command 4 Select the kind of text element that the cross reference should targe
249. document You can read more about this topic in section Numbering headings beginning on page 410 184 e Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Numbering with Auto numbers You can create automatic enumerations not only with the paragraph numbering functions described on the previous pages but also manually by inserting an Auto number field anywhere in the text The auto number is a field that symbolizes a number in a series The first in stance of the auto number in a document always yields the number 1 the next instance yields 2 etc If you insert an additional auto number into the document each successive instance of the auto number will be increased by one If you delete a segment of text that contains an auto number all the following auto numbers will be reduced by one To insert an auto number do the following 1 Invoke the Insert gt Field command 2 Select the Auto number field from the Field type list 3 Click on Insert The auto number now appears in the text Resetting auto numbers If you need to use auto numbers to create several separate enumerations in a single document you can do so by resetting the auto number to one at the appropriate places Proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the place at which the numbering should be reset to begin a new sequence 2 Invoke the Insert gt Break gt Section Break command 3 Invoke the Format gt Section command
250. e You will find more information about this in section Protecting contents of forms objects page 314 E Link Here you can enter a link to a web page in the Internet for example To do this click on the Select button select the type of link desired and type in the desired target Additionally for pictures some information on the picture is displayed in the right half of the dialog resolution color depth etc Additional tabs With some object types the Object gt Properties dialog displays additional tabs containing more options To learn more about these tabs see the sections referring to each particular object type Changing the default settings for objects You can change the default settings for objects drawings images etc anytime For example if you don t like the default setting for the line width of drawings simply set it to a different value You can also alter other default settings e g the default filling for drawings as well as the settings for shadows and 3D effects Note Changes to the default settings solely affect objects that you will insert later on Existing objects remain untouched To modify the default settings for objects use the Default button in the Object gt Properties dialog For example to change the default line width for drawings proceed as follows 1 Insert a new drawing or click on an existing drawing 270 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016
251. e field the current date will be shown in the text List of all field types The following field types are available E Creation date The date on which the current document was created Creation time The time at which the current document was created Print date The current date This field like all field types is updated automatically when you print the document 162 o Fields Manual TextMaker 2016 Print time The current time Automatically updated when the document is printed Date last changed The date on which the current document was last modified that is saved Time last changed The time at which the current document was last modified that is saved Database field The content of a field from a database that has been attached to the document The specific database field to be inserted is selected from the Field name list See also chapter Database beginning on page 339 Database info Any of the following items of information about a database attached to the document Database name only file name of the database Full database name the same with the addition of the path name Database record number the record number of the current database record and Record count number of records in the database E Page number The page number of the current page m Page count The total number of pages in the document m Chapter number The number of the current chapter See also section Div
252. e This is a database in dBase format in which infor mation about all the sources can be entered You can create an individual bibliography database for each document However if you are planning to write multiple documents that will refer to the same sources it might be more useful to set up a single database that will be common to all those documents The structure of a bibliography database A bibliography database must contain at least the following fields E afield for a unique abbreviation for the source see below E afield for the name of the author of the source E afield for the title of the source The abbreviation must be distinct for every source By convention the abbrevia tion consists of author s initials and the year of publication For example if the source were a book the author Harry Smith had published in 1979 HS1979 or HS79 would be used as the abbreviation Apart from the requirement that it must contain the above listed three fields the database can be organized in whatever way is preferred For example it can con tain fields for the date of publication the publisher etc Tip TextMaker s document folder contains a simple example database called BIBLIO DBF that you can examine Under Windows this file can be found in the SOFTMAKER folder under your documents folder Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 427 Setting up a new bibliography database Unless you already have a bibliogr
253. e 167 Insert gt Document 62 Insert gt Envelope 360 Insert gt Field 161 Insert gt Footer 103 Insert gt Footnote Edit Footnote 440 442 Footnote Mark 440 442 Go to Footnote 440 441 Go To Footnote Reference 440 441 Insert Footnote 440 Options 444 Insert gt Header 103 Insert gt List Label 354 Insert gt SmartText 334 335 336 Insert gt Symbol 169 Insert Cells Table menu 193 Insert Footnote Insert menu Footnote 440 Insert frames and drawings immediately 530 532 Insert mode 32 Installation Android 20 Linux 20 Windows 19 INT function 396 397 Internet editing HTML Documents 459 setting document colors 553 Italic 65 J Join Cells Table menu 196 Manual TextMaker 2016 Justified paragraph alignment 80 K Keep aspect ratio 262 Keep scaling 262 Keep together paragraphs 96 97 Keep with next paragraphs 96 Kerning 68 Keyboard shortcuts customizing 568 default keyboard shortcuts 581 584 for character styles 121 123 for paragraph styles 129 130 132 for special characters 169 Keyboard show hide automatically 541 543 Keystroke count 554 L Labels 354 Labels forms object 299 300 311 Landscape format 100 101 Language for spell checking and hyphenation 318 user interface 532 533 Language tools 317 Last edited by 161 164 LEFT 384 385 LEFT function 396 397 Left indent 76 LEN function 396 397 Letter spacing 68 Limit internal picture cache 541 542 Line num
254. e 271 Proceed as follow 1 Select the desired object 2 Right click on the object to open its context menu Android In the Android version you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second 3 In the context menu choose the command Convert to Embedded Object This will convert the picture frame into an ordinary picture embedded into the text Of course the opposite way is possible as well When you select an embedded object e g a picture and choose the context menu command Convert to Object Frame the picture will become a picture frame Hiding objects If necessary you can hide an object so that it will not appear on the screen and or on the printed page To hide an object select it invoke the Object gt Properties command switch to the Properties tab and do the following m Uncheck the Visible option if you don t want the object to be displayed on the screen m Uncheck the Printable option if you don t want the object to appear in the printed document Tip If you should ever make an object invisible by accident you can always invoke File gt Properties and check the Show invisible objects option on the Options tab to make all hidden objects visible again Then you can select the mistakenly hidden object and check its Visible option to make it visible again Changing the order of frames When two or more frames overlap you can
255. e a color double click the triangle representing that color Object properties Lines tab Note This tab is available only for certain types of objects Use the Lines tab to modify the lines that encompass the object or its border lines When applied to drawings these settings affect the lines used to paint the object itself When applied to other types of objects the border lines surrounding the object are affected Options available E Line variants Offers some pre defined line styles to choose from The entries in the list are merely samples If required you can specify the appearance of the lines more precisely with the options listed below Color Lets you change the color of the lines E Dashed Lets you determine if solid or dashed lines will be used m Thickness Lets you change the width of the lines in points Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 265 E Transparency If desired you can also change the Transparency of the lines You can enter any value between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency For ex ample if you set the Transparency value to 25 the lines will have 25 trans parency Begin and End Available only for lines curves and connectors If you select one of the symbols displayed here it will be painted at the starting point or end point of the line For example if you select an arrow symbol for the end point the line will look like an arrow Width and Height settings
256. e addressee and the letterhead is completely filled out and ready Tip TextMaker comes with numerous prepared document templates for letters faxes etc Try them out sometime simply invoke File gt New and select a template from one of the sub folders You will find more information about this topic in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 350 For general information on working with document templates see the next pages Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 139 Creating document templates To create a new document template proceed as follows 1 Start a new document or open a document or document template that you want to use as a basis for the new template 2 If the document template is to contain text enter the desired text 3 Make any desired changes to the character and paragraph styles 4 If you like you can even make changes to options in the File gt Page Setup and the File gt Properties dialog All of these settings will also be stored in the doc ument template 5 Invoke File gt Save as 6 Select the entry Template from the Save as Type list box 7 At this point TextMaker switches automatically to the folder where document templates are kept 8 Type a name for the template in the File name edit box 9 Confirm with OK Organizing templates in several folders You can use the New Folder button at any time to set up a new folder under the Templates folder then switch to the
257. e boldface the entire word will be affected This allows you to format single words quickly without having to select them first Format URLs as hyperlinks When this option is enabled URLs web page addresses will be formatted as hyperlinks automatically right after you enter them For example when you type www softmaker com it will automatically be converted into a clickable hyperlink and displayed accordingly usually blue and underlined Superscript ordinal numbers This option supports only the following languages English French Italian Portu guese and Spanish In these languages parts of abbreviated ordinal numbers are usually superscripted for example 1 2 3 in the English language If this option is enabled the superscripting is done automatically whenever you enter such a number For example when you type 2nd and press the spacebar this will be automatically reformatted to 2 i e the letters nd will be super scripted Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 531 Note This option only works with text in one of the supported languages Infor mation on how to specify the language of text can be found in the section Setting the language page 318 Set left and first line indent with Tab and Backspace keys When this option is enabled you can use the key and the Backspace key to set and change paragraph indents To do this place the text cursor at the
258. e completed steps 1 and 2 you can insert bibliography fields in the text These are references to sources that are recorded in the bibliography database You can insert such a reference whenever you refer to one of the sources in the text for example as mentioned in DNA1979 You insert a reference to a source into the text as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Insert Bibliography Field 3 Choose the desired database entry from the list Tip You can always use the Edit button to edit the contents of the database In this way you can for example add a new entry 4 As needed you can enter additional text in the Additional information field for example page 42 This text will be displayed behind the reference sepa rated by a comma Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 429 5 Confirm with OK The reference is now inserted into the text Depending on the options selected in the Bibliography Settings dialog either the abbreviation or the number of the source will appear in the text see below Proceed as described above each time you want to insert a reference to one of the sources in your database into your document Options for the styles of references The bibliography settings dialog allows you to change the appearance of references whenever necessary For example you can specify whether they should appear as abbreviati
259. e dialog you select the Create from File option With this selection the look of the dialog changes Instead of the Object Type list a File entry field is displayed Here enter the full file name of the document file or click on the Browse button to bring up a dialog box that will enable you to search your hard disk for the file When you have specified a file and confirmed with OK the file is inserted as an OLE object When the OLE object is being inserted Windows checks the file name extension to see if it is associated with a program that can be started If the file name extension is not registered the embedded file is merely represented by a symbol On the other hand if Windows can relate the file name extension to an OLE capable program the content of the embedded file is displayed Creating a link to the original file The dialog box described above provides an additional option that allows you to specify whether the object to be inserted from the file should be embedded in or linked to the document If you leave the Link option unchecked TextMaker inserts a copy of the file into the document as an OLE object and saves this copy in the document thus the object is embedded in the usual way On the other hand if you check the Link option TextMaker inserts the OLE object in the form of a link to the original file In this case if you should ever modify the original file with another application and then reopen the TextMake
260. e direction of a table whenever needed To do so proceed as follows 1 With the text cursor inside the table invoke the Table gt Table Properties command 2 Switch to the Properties tab 3 Under Text direction activate the option Right to left to change the direction to right to left To set the direction to left to right deactivate the option The direction of the table changes accordingly Thus when you change the direction of a table to right to left the column on the very right becomes the first column instead of the column at the very left In other words the horizontal direction of the table is reversed as follows A3 A2 Al B3 B2 Bl C3 C2 Cl Left Table direction set to left to right Right Table direction set to right to left Note Of course you can still change the writing direction of the text in each table cell individually as described in the section Changing the text direction of para graphs above Changing the direction of multi column text When the Extended support for Arabic text option is enabled you can change the direction of a text section that uses multi column layout whenever needed To do so proceed as follows 1 With the text cursor inside the multi column text section invoke the Format gt Section command Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with Arabic text e 511 2 Switch to the Columns tab 3 Under Text direction activate the option Righ
261. e docu ment Tip When you hold down the Shift key while drawing the direction of the line is variable only in increments of 45 degrees Freeforms scribbles The P Freeform tool allows you to draw irregular curves as you would be able to do by hand with a pencil To use this tool move the mouse to the desired starting point press the mouse button and begin drawing just as you would with a pencil You can also create straight lines by releasing the mouse button and clicking at the desired end point When you draw a curve that returns to its starting point the drawing is automati cally ended and converted into a closed curve If you want to obtain an open curve you must end the drawing with a double click at the desired end point Curves The Curve tool allows you to draw Bezier curves To use this tool click on the starting point and then on as many additional points as you wish The curve follows your clicks automatically When you draw a curve that returns to its starting point the drawing is automati cally ended and converted into a closed curve If you want to obtain an open curve you must end the drawing with a double click at the desired end point Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 287 Arrows The Arrow tool allows you to draw arrows To use this tool simply press down the mouse button and draw a line in the docu ment Tip When you hold down the Shift key while drawing the directio
262. e following settings Layout On this tab you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 m Format For changing the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Filling For changing the filling of the object See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For adding border lines See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 m Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 276 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 m 3D For adding a 3D effect See section Object properties 3D tab beginning on page 267 m Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning on page 268 m Properties For modifying common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 For text frames there are additional tabs with further options Inner text tab Use this tab to change settings affecting the text in the text frame Options available Inner margins group box Lets you modify the margins between text frame and inner text If you check the Automatic option TextMaker will calculate suitable settings automatically Overlapping objects grou
263. e normal text Tip TextMaker is distributed with various prepared document templates These contain complete letterheads fax forms etc and are linked with the address database TMW DBF They can lighten your daily writing load considerably read about this in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 350 Modifying document templates Modifying a document template is no different from editing a normal document You open the template make your changes and save the template Important Naturally when you modify a document template your modifica tions will affect all documents that are subsequently created on the basis of this template To modify a document template proceed as follows 1 Invoke File gt Open 2 Select the entry Template from the Files of type list box 3 Find the template to be modified and confirm with OK 4 Make the desired changes in the text or in the character and paragraph styles 5 Invoke File gt Save to save the modified template Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles o 141 Of course you could also save the template under another name using File gt Save as if you did not want to overwrite the original The document template Normal tmv The document template NORMAL TMV has a special significance it is the default template for new documents It contains no text and only the default Normal character and paragraph styles along with some styles for headings According
264. e of filling With this command only color shades and patterns are available 6 Make the desired settings and confirm with OK For more information on this dialog see the section Shading page 91 This section describes the Filling dialog for text paragraphs which is practically identi cal 116 o Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Please note that if your document is divided into multiple chapters changes made with this command affect only the current chapter see also section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 Printing This type of page background always appears in printouts The docu ment option Print page background mentioned above has no effect here Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 117 Styles Styles are very useful aides for advanced word processing users When you need a specific character or paragraph format frequently it pays to create a style for it You can then apply the style to any segment of text you like and this text will be formatted as you have specified in the style definition And Using styles not only saves you time when you have to apply the same formatting repeatedly but also ensures that your document will be formatted consistently The reason if you change the definition of a style the formats of all text segments to which this style has been applied are changed accordingly In practical terms styles work like this You set up a paragraph style
265. e one difference when you reach the end of the first column your text is not continued on a new page instead it is continued in the next column on the same page In other words a column break is automatically inserted A page break is inserted only when you continue typing past the end of the last column Manual column break You can direct TextMaker to break a column above the point at which it would insert a break automatically by manually invoking the Insert gt Break gt Column break command at the desired place TextMaker then breaks the column immediately Detailed information about setting up multi column text is given on the following pages Changing the number of columns To reformat a section of single column text in e g three columns all you have to do is select the text and change the number of columns with the Format gt Section command To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the text you want to reformat 2 Invoke Format gt Section Manual TextMaker 2016 Multi column page layouts e 143 Section Sa Columns Line numbers Presets oa One Two Three Left Right Columns Number Width Spacing 1 6 93in 1 lt 7 Equal column width Margins Height Auto hg Gutter line T Page break Apply to Restart auto numbers Whole document A 3 Important Make sure Selected text is selected in the Apply to list box 4 Enter the desired number of c
266. e or bookmark for example To jump to a specific page do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go to command 2 Select Page from the list of Go to options 3 Enter the desired page number The page is then immediately brought into view 4 Click Close to close the dialog You can perform a number of similar operations with this command by selecting other options from the Go to list including those described in the following table Option Function Page Jump to a given page as described above Chapter Jump to a given chapter Bookmark Jump to a given bookmark Footnote Jump to a given footnote Footnote text Jump to the footnote text for the given footnote Object Jump to the selected object picture table etc Table of contents Jump to the document s table of contents Index Jump to the document s index etc Tip Using the buttons at the bottom of the vertical scrollbar You can also perform Go to operations with the three buttons in the lower right corner of the document window z 158 e Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 You use these buttons as follows E Click on the button with the red dot to bring up a small menu Then select the type of Go to operation you want to perform from the menu m Click on the button with the up arrow to jump to the target prior to the current position For example if Page was selected as the target type clicking on this button will result in a jump to the pr
267. e paragraph For example if you want the num bers surrounded by dashes 1 2 3 etc you should select the Format 1 2 3 and enter in each of the Before and After fields E Format Here you specify the format for the numbering Besides the usual 1 2 3 you can select for example letters A B C or Roman numerals I II HI 2 2 m Numbering starts with By default TextMaker starts every enumeration with 1 If you want to use a different starting value enter it here Skip numbering It is often the case that a numbered list includes an individual item that needs to span more than a single paragraph In such a case only the item s first para graph should be numbered numbering should skip succeeding paragraphs that belong to that item and resume only with the paragraph that constitutes the fol lowing item TextMaker provides the Skip numbering option for such a situation When numbered paragraphs that are to be grouped as one item with a preceding num bered paragraph have been selected you can check this option to cause Text Maker to skip these paragraphs when assigning numbers m Character button You can click on this button to change the character formatting font size emphasis etc for the numbers Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the numbers Vertical position Allows you to spe
268. e relevant customer data address etc at the prop er places in the letterhead 4 Now design the invoice itself according to your tastes Enter fields from your database with Insert gt Field gt Database field for example the QUANTITY field for the order quantity 5 And now the main point You can calculate with the database fields For exam ple the formula QUANTITY PRICE calculates the total for the current data base record So using Insert gt Calculation insert appropriate calculations at the desired positions 6 When everything has been entered you can save the document Next select some database records and print your invoices with File gt Print Merge You will find an example in TextMaker s document folder the files INVOICE TMD and INVOICE DBF Tip If you check the Display field names option on the View tab of the File gt Properties dialog you will see the formulas themselves rather than the results they give and you will then better understand how this self calculating form letter works Objects in calculations Certain types of objects can also be used in calculations So for example you can create a form that contains text fields and use the contents of these text fields in calculations 386 o Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 All the objects in a document have distinctive names as described in section Changing the names of objects beginning on page 274 You can address eac
269. e the object drag here To change the rotation center drag here 254 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Alternatively you can set the angle of rotation manually For this purpose select the object invoke the Object gt Properties command switch to the Format tab and enter the desired angle under the Rotation option You can also rotate and flip objects by using the commands in the Object gt Rotate or Flip menu Aligning and distributing frames Note Only frames and drawings can be aligned and distributed these operations are not possible on objects embedded in the text To align or equally distribute two or more frames or drawings select them and invoke the command Object gt Align or Distribute A sub menu appears from which you can select the desired alignment or distribu tion Align Left Align Center Align Right Align Top Align Middle Align Bottom E Distribute Horizontally E Distribute Vertically The last two commands work only when at least three objects are selected These commands are used to distribute the selected objects evenly within the area they occupy so that the spacings between them are equal Duplicating objects To obtain a duplicate of an object you can copy it to the clipboard the usual way and then reinsert it Alternatively you can use the Edit gt Duplicate command This command imme diately creates a copy of the selected object Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and dr
270. e user interface languages were installed along with the program Show fonts in font list When this option is enabled TextMaker renders the names of fonts that appear in lists such as the font list in the Formatting toolbar using their corresponding fonts This lets you see at a glance how each font looks like Show tooltips Lets you specify whether or not tooltips should be displayed Tooltips are little text boxes that are displayed next to the mouse pointer when you position the pointer over certain screen elements for example a button on a toolbar Beep on errors When this option is enabled a sound plays when TextMaker displays an error or warning message Use large icons When this option is enabled larger icons are displayed in toolbars and menus Note Changes to this setting become effective only after the program is restarted Use system file dialogs Windows only This option controls the type of dialogs that appear when com mands to open and save files are issued The options are E Disabled TextMaker uses its own file dialogs m Enabled TextMaker uses the file dialogs provided by the operating system The former are easier to use the latter offer more options Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 533 Live preview Enable disables a live preview for the dropdown lists in the Formatting toolbar When this option is enabled you can e g select some text open the font dropdown in the Formatting
271. eader To export a document to an EPUB file proceed as follows 1 Choose the File gt Export as EPUB command 2 A dialog window appears where you can change the settings described below After that confirm with OK 3 Another dialog window appears where you can specify the filename and loca tion of the EPUB file to create After that confirm with OK The EPUB file will then be created To view it open the EPUB file in an e book reader or a reader application of your choice Hint If your device does not have a reader application for EPUB files installed you can find suitable programs in the Internet by performing a search for EPUB reader in your web browser The dialog window mentioned above provides the following options General tab On this tab you can edit the document s summary information and some additional information and specify several other settings Options available Title Author Subject Keywords Description Here you can edit the document s summary information title author etc If you plan to publish the EPUB file after its generation don t forget to fill these fields with data Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 483 Note These fields can also be edited using the Summary tab in the File gt Properties dialog E Language ISBN UUID Publishing date Publisher Copyright notice Here you can enter additional information on your document If you plan to publish the EPUB
272. eadings to the desired levels Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 409 To raise or lower the outline level of any heading position the text cursor in the heading and use the q higher level or gt lower level button Assign the major headings to outline level 1 the immediately subordinate headings to outline level 2 etc To exit Outline view invoke View gt Standard Outlining a new document The procedure for outlining a new document is no different than the one described above except that a new document will have no headings at first You can write out the whole document in a single stretch and then worry about the outline Alternatively you can assign each new heading to an outline level as soon as you have typed it using the procedure described above Numbering headings The headings of a large document are often numbered For example a major heading might have the numbering 1 and its sub headings the numberings 1 1 1 2 1 3 etc TextMaker can number the headings of a document for you automatically You can instruct it to do so as follows 1 Create the document and outline it 2 Create a numbered list with the desired type of numbering Set the list type to Hierarchical list and check the Use paragraph s outline level as list level op tion 3 Apply the numbered list to the paragraph style Heading 1 Without having to do anything more a numbering is immediately applied to each
273. ear 356 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 New document Creates a new document with the filled out labels instead of printing them Manage This button allows you to save label definitions that is all settings made in this dialog and retrieve them any time later This also works with lists and tables More information on this can be found at the very end of this sec tion Lists and tables can be created the same way however some of the dialog options are available only for labels Also the Print button will be replaced by an Insert button here This button will insert the list label into the document at the current position of the text cursor Dialog options In detail the dialog box for this command contains the following options Large edit field The large edit field in the upper part of the dialog allows you to specify what to display on the label or list table The screenshot at the beginning of this sec tion shows an example You can add text by simply typing it in Database fields can be inserted as well given a database has been chosen already using the Database button To insert a field click on the Database field button and choose the desired field Alternatively simply type in the field s name with enclosing curly braces e g CITY The miniature formatting toolbar above the input field can be used to change the text formatting Select the text of interest beforehand m Output as Here you can
274. earch terms If the search term is entered as tax the search will also find documents whose keywords contain Tax Folders Here you can select the folder in which the file manager is to carry out the search Include subfolders If this option is enabled the file manager searches not only the selected folder but also all folders below the selected folder E New list button Starts a new search using the current settings m Add to list button Also starts a new search however any previous search results remain in the list rather than being cleared from the list Backup copies Note This feature is supported only under Windows and Linux On Android solely an option for simple single backups is available the option Create backup files in the preferences 496 o Document management Manual TextMaker 2016 Whenever you save a document TextMaker can automatically create a backup copy containing its previous version There is even an option to keep multiple generations of backup copies for each document You will find the related settings in the dialog of the Tools gt Options command Files tab The dropdown list in the Backup section allows you to specify if and how backup copies will be generated Options available m No backup When you choose this option no backup copy is created when you save a document Not recommended Simple backup Here exactly one backup copy is created when
275. ears To open the document displayed in the preview window click Open To close the preview click Cancel Searching with the file manager With the help of the file manager s Search button you can have TextMaker look for specific files or simply choose the folder to be displayed in the file manager 494 o Document management Manual TextMaker 2016 Search File x File name tmd tmy doc dot docx do alders ae ay a aoo File type All documents X HE ant Add to list E Include subfolders Batch cence Docs Title Quick paths Subject vaii and Sett Author EE Downloads Keywords P Description You can search for files that meet criteria of the following types filename folder file type as well as the items in the document summary title subject author keywords and description Moreover you can combine several search criteria For example if you only specify a particular folder in the search dialog TextMaker will display all the documents in this folder But if you also enter a search term in the Title field TextMaker will find only those documents that are both in the selected folder and contain the given search term in the Title field of their summaries The search dialog has the following functions File name Allows you to search for a specific file or a filename pattern With the default setting the search function will find all docum
276. ecided to convert everyone in the office to personal computers We are now using TextMaker which has an integrated database allowing us to send personalized form letters to all our members All in all TextMaker provides enormous savings in time and cost not to mention quills and ink With best regards Now you have created a template that TextMaker can fill in with the field con tents from the database records when it prints the form letters Bring up the example database TMW DBF and enter a few data records Naturally it is up to you to choose the names and addresses When you have entered the rec ords exit the database with File gt Close All the basic steps have now been taken and your form letter is now ready for printing or faxing In the rest of this chapter you will learn how to choose the addressees of a form letter and how to actually print form letters 372 e Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 Selecting data records If desired you can specify exactly those addressees to whom a form letter is to be sent To do this open the database containing their addresses and select the desired data records Note TextMaker saves the selection permanently It remembers which data records are selected even after you exit and restart TextMaker There are three ways to select data records and they can be used in combination as you choose You can for example first select data records by me
277. ecific to chap ters as such To modify a chapter s page formatting use the commands described in chapter Page formatting beginning on page 99 To modify a chapter s chapter formatting proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor anywhere within the chapter of interest or select several chapters to change the format for all of them at the same time A selec tion can begin in any paragraph of the first chapter of interest and end in any paragraph in the last chapter 2 Invoke the Format gt Chapter command 112 Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Page Setup A Page Format Chapter Master pages Different left and right pages Borders and shading of master pages Change w Chapter starts on vertical Alignment Either page Top Right page Centered Left page Bottom Justified Chapter number Page Number Increment Increment Value value 3 Make the desired changes and confirm with OK The dialog box for this command allows you to make the following settings m Master pages This section provides options related to the master page s of a chapter see also section Master pages beginning on page 108 Different first page When you check this option the first page of the chapter will use a different master page This is useful when you would like to have for example a different footer on the first page of the document or chapter Different left and right
278. eck the Hidden option The text is now hidden By default it will still be displayed on the screen but will not appear on the printed page Displaying printing hidden text By default hidden text is visible on the screen but does not appear on the printed page However you can specify in the document s properties whether hidden text is to be visible on the screen and whether it is to be printed To do this invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the View tab In the Hidden text section you will find the following options m Show hidden text This option controls the visibility of hidden text on the screen By default this option is checked so that hidden text is visible Hidden text is displayed with a dotted underline to distinguish it from normal text If you disable this option hidden text is not visible on the screen 70 o Character formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Print hidden text The Print hidden text option controls the printing of hidden text along with the document s normal text By default this option is not checked and hidden text is not included on the printed page If you want all hidden text segments to be printed you must enable this option Removing the Hidden property If you want to remove the Hidden formatting do the following 1 Make sure that the Show hidden text option in the document properties is enabled see above so that you can see the text 2 Select the
279. ecords containing the same last names by first name select NAME1 under Field 1 and FIRSTNAME under Field 2 Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 349 As soon as you confirm with OK the data records are sorted and the database is saved in the new order Note When sorting a database the data records are physically reordered in the database This action cannot be undone Closing a database When you want to close the currently opened database invoke the command File gt Close The database is automatically saved and then closed Alternatively you can use the command File gt Copy record and close which does the same thing except that it first copies the contents of the active data record into the clipboard The command File gt Insert record and close is only available when the database was invoked through a document template a topic covered in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 350 Importing individual addresses What is a word processor most often called on to do To quickly write letters or faxes You have purchased TextMaker precisely for such routine work and you will find it to be an especially efficient helper All you need for such tasks is a suitable document template that is a document template to which an address database is assigned to and in which database fields are inserted Several such templates for letters faxes memos etc and a suitable database come with TextMaker
280. ected press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the selection to the last cell of interest There is an alternative way to select complete rows or column of cells When you invoke the Table gt Select command a sub menu opens from which you can specify selection of the current row the current column or the entire table You can also select complete rows or column with your mouse To select a column click into the area right above the column To select a row click into the area left of the row Occasionally you will want to select only a single table cell To do this you have to use the following trick With the left mouse button pressed drag the mouse pointer from the cell of interest to a neighboring cell and then back Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 191 Deleting copying moving cell contents To delete copy or move the contents of table cells select the cells and then use the familiar commands in the Edit menu Command Explanation Delete The Edit gt Delete command keyboard shortcut Del deletes the contents of all the currently selected cells Cut The Edit gt Cut command keyboard shortcut Ctr1 X cuts the contents of the selected cells and holds them in the clipboard Copy The Edit gt Copy command keyboard shortcut ctrl c copies the contents of the selected cells into the clipboard Paste The Edit gt Paste command keyboard shortcut V inserts the contents of the clipbo
281. ed 62 Working with selections Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting Using the Format gt Character command you can change the appearance of one or more characters in the text Character Sm Font Spacing Hyperlink Typeface Size Style Language Times New Roman y 10 Regular Y Default X Styles Underline Text color Small caps Yo Continuous Black 4ll caps Words only teas Hidd Background color rike gu maden Single Transparent v Protected Double Sample AaBbCcXxYyZz Reset Cancel The options in the Format gt Character dialog are distributed over several index cards You can switch between them by clicking on one of the tabs along the top of the dialog E Font tab For selecting the typeface and font size font styles like bold italic and under lined colors and language E Spacing tab For changing properties like super and subscript character spacing and pitch and kerning m Hyperlink tab For inserting and editing hyperlinks e g to web pages You will find infor mation about this topic in section Creating links beginning on page 462 Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 63 Modifying character formatting There are two ways to modify character formatting m After text has been entered you can modify character formatting by selecting the desired text invoking the Format gt Character command and making the desired cha
282. ed Furthermore the document is saved in an encrypted form so that it cannot be examined with programs other than TextMaker Protection depending on password Here the protection depends on whether the read or the write password is entered at the time the document is opened If the user enters the read password he is permitted to open the document but not to save it If he enters the write password he has full access Thus he can both read and also save the document If he enters a false password or nothing at all access to the document is de nied Disabling document protection When you succeed in opening a read or write protected document by entering the correct password protection is disabled but only temporarily When you close the document protection is again armed and the query for the password reap pears the next time someone makes an attempt to open the document To disable the protection on a document permanently do the following 1 Open the document 2 Invoke the command File gt Properties Manual TextMaker 2016 Document protection o 503 3 Switch to the Protection tab 4 Select the No protection option 5 Confirm with OK 6 Save the document so that the changes will take effect Document protection is now permanently disabled The next time someone opens the document no password query will interfere All users can now open and save it 504 e Document protection Manual TextM
283. ed as a file with the name extension BAK stored in the same folder as the document m Advanced backup With this option multiple generations of backup copies are kept for each document All of these copies are stored in a special Backup folder Tip When this option is selected also the File gt Revert to Previous Version command becomes available It provides a comfortable means of returning to a previous version of the current document Additional options Folder for backup files Here you can change the location of the Backup folder in which all backup copies are stored Number of backup files per document Here you can specify the maximum number of backup copies generations to be kept for each document More detailed information on the usage of backup copies can be found in the section Backup copies Preferences System tab The System tab in the Tools gt Options dialog contains the following system settings Compress pictures in memory If this option is enabled pictures inserted into documents will be stored losslessly compressed in memory Advantage Documents containing many pictures consume significantly less main memory Disadvantage The compression of course con sumes some CPU time As a general rule you should leave this option enabled Note Changes to this setting become effective only after TextMaker is restarted Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 541 Limit internal picture
284. ed as follows 1 2 Invoke the command Insert gt SmartText Click on the New button to create a new SmartText entry Give the SmartText entry a name sd in our example Later the SmartText entry can be called up by using the specified name Confirm with OK which takes you back to the main dialog 334 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 5 Type in the text of the SmartText entry in the large input field sales depart ment in our example 6 If you want TextMaker to remember the formatting of the entry you must enable the Apply formatting option Now you can use the miniature format ting toolbar above the input field to set the font text emphasis and color 7 Click on Save to save your new SmartText entry 8 Exit the dialog by clicking on the Close button The SmartText entry has now been created In the next section Inserting Smart Text entries you will learn how to use your new SmartText entry B Using the background spell checker If you have activated the background spell checker SmartText entries can alterna tively be created as follows 1 Make sure that the Use background spell checking option on the Language tab in the Tools gt Options dialog box is checked 2 Type sd and press the space bar 3 TextMaker now underlines sd in red since it is an unknown word Click on this word with the right mouse button to open the context menu Android In the Android versio
285. ed document windows in one step with the command Window gt Close All Maximizing a document window Android This feature is not available under Android since the Android version supports maximized document windows only Normally a document window covers only a part of the program window But you can maximize a window when you want to concentrate on the document it contains Mouse Click on the E button in the upper right corner of the window The window then occupies the entire work space and covers up all other windows To reduce the window to its original size click the E button Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Ait minus key and select the Maximize command To return the window to its original size select the Restore command Minimizing a document window Android This feature is not available under Android since the Android version supports maximized document windows only If you want to get a window off the work space for a while without closing it you can minimize it The window then appears only in the form of an icon in the lower left corner of the program window 518 e Document windows Manual TextMaker 2016 Proceed as follows Mouse Click on the button in the upper right corner of the window To restore the window double click on the window s icon or select it from the Window menu Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Ait minus key and select the Minimize co
286. ed in additional details or you would like to create your own fax templates or fax form letters please read the following sections of the manual Requirements for extended fax support Note Fax functions are available only in the Windows version of TextMaker To make use of TextMaker for Windows extended fax functions you must have installed and configured one of the following fax programs E Microsoft Fax included with most versions of Windows XP m Windows Fax and Scan included with most versions of Windows 7 or later m AVM EFRITZ fax version 2 0 or later Of course you also need the corresponding hardware be it a fax modem a multi function printer a router or any other fax device that is supported by your fax software 472 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Note If you have a different fax program you can of course continue to use it If you choose to do so you must follow the procedure for faxing described in your fax software manual You will not be able to use TextMaker s extended fax support or the form fax function since these work only with the programs listed above Starting a fax transmission Note Fax functions are available only in the Windows version of TextMaker When you want to send a document by fax invoke the command File gt Send gt Fax rather than the command File gt Print Send Fax Fax device Fax Microsoft Fax on FAX X Setup Pages Options iA High resolut
287. edly to any paragraph you like For example if you want the headings in your document to be in large bold type and centered simply create a paragraph style called Heading and apply it to the desired paragraphs 128 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Note The difference between character styles see section Character styles beginning on page 120 and paragraph styles is that character styles contain only saved character formatting typeface text styling etc while paragraph styles contain both character formatting and paragraph formatting Moreover character styles are applicable to individual characters while paragraph styles are applicable only to complete paragraphs On the next pages you will find detailed information on working with paragraph styles The following topics are covered m Creating paragraph styles m Applying paragraph styles Modifying paragraph styles m The scope of paragraph styles m The paragraph style Normal Creating linked paragraph styles m Paragraph styles and the sidebar Creating paragraph styles To create a new paragraph style do as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles o 129 6 7 Paragraph Style x Heading 1 Apply Heading 2 eadra 3 Close New New From text Edit Update show Styles in use Z gt Click on the New button Give the paragraph style whatever name yo
288. eeeeeeeeeereeeeens 245 Frames and drawings 247 Frames basic TUNCUONS 2 ssecseossesdies sepsi iperen oi anei S ieies 248 Tnsertine frames si ek oneee eens to iiaee OTi a O Ee VSEE NO EEE EEOSE 248 Select GOD OCtS cv see scvevecsieseeredeaagevschcetsesenss sdueebeegten weal Ee hE a AERES 249 Object moderi s Posen dey ce sage seedings decocd sos a a e IEEE S devs S EEES EESE S 249 Changing the position size and margins of objects eseeeeseesereeseeeree 252 Rotating and flipping objects sssesesseessseeessseserssrsrrerrserersseerrssrrrreresreeresre 254 Aligning and distributing frames s essseeesseeeeesrsereresrerssrerrssrrrreresrreresre 255 Duplicating ODJECts sisi siscssccescessnsssetsctvskdy shpescebs seuss iins e ora Teske setro ene 255 Changing the properties of Objects ee eeeceeseesecesecesecnsecaecseeeneeeas 256 Frames advanced functions cee eceesceescesecesecesecssecsecaeecseeeseseeeeeeeeeens 271 Converting between frame and embedded object eee eee eee ereeeee 271 Idi S ODI ECtS ein ee aea a e ea Eara ea akiai 272 Changing the order of frames ee eee eeeeeeceeeceeecesecesecsecaecseeeneeeas 272 Grouping Frames 23 sssssesescseesscetsceseehseusk sp sap seeds oE EEE EREET E EIR ESSEE ESEE obis 273 Changing the names of objects essssessseeesseeseresrsereresrterssreresserrrnsesrreresre 274 PESEE E EE E T 275 Inserting text frames isn n n n E E S E E 275 Changing the properties of text frames
289. eesseceeeeecsseceeeeecsaeceeneeesaeeesnes 111 Chapters and page formatting elec eeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecesecssecaecaeesaeeaes 111 Chapter formatting sosisini a ag rewteu N E ES 112 Navigating among chapters esssessseeessseersserstsstsreeesreeresreresserrreresrenresre 115 Changing the page background sesssseerssresssreesssesrreresteeresrenrrsrerresesrrsresreee 115 Styles 119 Character Styles nii etone a eo E EErEE E E hives TEE ens 120 Creating character styles eeseesseeseseeessseeesrsrrrtsstresresreetrseerensesrreresrreresre 121 Applying character styles seeeseseseseeessseeessseertssrsesresteetrseeressesrreresrreresre 123 Modifying character styles ee seeseseeessseeessseseresesesreseessrsreresserrrerrsrreresee 123 The scope of character styles seseseeesseeeessseseresrsreereseeersseeressrsrreresreeresre 125 The character style Normal eessssesesseessseessseerresesreesesreersseerenserrreresrreresee 125 Creating linked character styles 0 0 elec ee eesseeeceeecesecesecesecsecaecseeeaeeens 126 Character styles and the sidebar oo eee eeeeceeeceseceecesecesecnaessaecaeeens 127 Paragraph styles aii renees ee ee rea eea E EES EE NETE EE 128 Creating paragraph styles seesseseseeeseseeesssesrtsseresesreetrseerensesrreresresresre 129 Applying paragraph styles seessseseseeessseesssesrrssesrsresreerrseeressesrreresreeresre 132 Modifying paragraph styles eseeeeseeessseeessseeerssrs
290. efinitions cannot be sub sequently changed with TextMaker Changes are possible only with a dBase compatible database program So before creating a database you should consider carefully what fields you need what field types are appropriate for them and the maximum number of characters that each field must accommodate Notes about the field type With the field type you specify what kind of data can be entered into the field The field types are as follows the allowed length for each field is given in parenthe ses Field type length Allowed input Character 1 to 254 Character fields allow any type of input Numeric 1 to 19 Numeric fields accept only numbers as input You can set the desired number of decimal places with Decimals You can perform calculations on the contents of such fields see chapter Calculations in the text beginning on page 379 Date always 8 Date fields are intended for date entries Logical always 1 Logical fields are intended for yes no entries The allowed entries are limited to for Yes or for No Memo always 10 Memo fields accept any type of input However what you enter in these fields can only be viewed and edited not printed The width is always given as 10 but in fact you can enter up to 4000 characters Tip For numeric entries like telephone numbers zip codes etc select Charac ter rather than Numeric Here numeric fields provide no advantages
291. elected the correct style to search for and check if text formatted in that style actually exists Dialog options In the dialog box appearing when you insert a style reference field the following options are available m Style In this list box select the paragraph style or character style to be searched for m Search for character styles Usually style reference fields are used to search for paragraph styles If you want to search for character styles instead choose this option The list of styles displayed in the Style list box will change accordingly 438 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 E Search page from bottom Affects only style reference fields that are inserted in headers or footers since in that case they follow a special search order as follows First only the current document page is searched in the following direction If this option is turned off the page is searched from top to bottom If this option is turned on the page is searched from bottom to top back wards After that the search is continued as usual first towards the beginning of the document backwards and then if nothing was found towards the end of the document forwards E Insert paragraph number If this option is checked the style reference field returns the numbering of the found paragraph rather than its content Of course this only works if a numbering has been applied to the text See sections Auto
292. en select the desired colors for foreground and back ground If desired you can also change the Transparency of the fill Values between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency are permitted Picture Fills the object using a picture file To select the picture file to be used click the Open button to bring up a file selection dialog Tip The most recently used Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 263 picture files are presented in the Images list and can be selected with a single mouse click Additional options Rotate with object If you activate this option the image will be rotated as well whenever you rotate the object to be filled Mirror Allows you to mirror the picture horizontally or vertically Transparency If desired you can also change the transparency of the fill Values between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency are permit ted Tile as texture If this option is enabled multiple copies of the picture are arranged like tiles to fill the object The options in the Tile options section then allow you to change the size and position of the tiles X scale and Y scale change the size in percent while X offset and Y offset change the position The Alignment option can be used to determine to which edge of the object the tiles should be aligned If the Tile as texture option is not enabled only Offsets relative to the edges of the object can be set for the image Save Y
293. en you copy and paste a chart from PlanMaker it will loose any connection to the original chart So when you later alter the original chart in PlanMaker this will have no effect on its copy in TextMaker If you want to insert a chart that keeps a connection to the original chart in PlanMaker you must insert it as an OLE object To do so invoke the Object gt New OLE object command and choose PlanMaker Chart from the list of available object types For more information on working with OLE objects see the chapter OLE objects page 239 Inserting charts manually The previous section described how you insert a chart by creating it in PlanMaker and then copying it into a TextMaker document As an alternative you can simply create an empty chart in the TextMaker document and then fill it with data by hand Proceed as follows Step 1 Insert an empty chart First insert an empty chart as follows 1 In your TextMaker document move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke the Object gt New Chart command Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 225 3 In the resulting dialog box select the desired Chart type and Subtype to specify how the chart will look More information on chart types can be found in the PlanMaker manual keyword chart type 4 Confirm with OK The chart is now inserted into the document Step 2 Enter the data to be presented When you insert a new chart it is filled with the v
294. ent Delete current comment Go to previous comment Go to next comment Comments pane on off m The buttons further to the right are not for comments but for tracking changes in the document see the section Tracking changes in a document beginning on page 453 Detailed information about these functions is presented in the following sections Inserting comments To insert a comment do the following 1 Select the text to which you want to attach a comment 2 Invoke the command Tools gt Comments gt Insert Comment 448 o Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the L icon in the Reviewing toolbar 3 Type your comment in the small window that appears 4 When you have completed your comment click anywhere in the text to close the comment window The comment is now entered You recognize this from the fact that the text to which it is attached is highlighted in color Editing comments To edit a comment do the following 1 Position the text cursor anywhere within the text whose comment you want to edit 2 Invoke the command Tools gt Comments gt Edit Comment Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the L icon in the Reviewing toolbar 3 Make the desired changes in the small editing window that appears 4 When you have finished editing click anywhere in the text to close the com ment window The comment now reflects your changes
295. ent 76 Rotate or Flip Object menu 254 255 Rotating drawings 254 objects 262 pictures 254 text in AutoShapes 291 292 text in text frames 276 277 ROUND function 388 396 398 Row Properties Table menu 197 RTF file format 505 506 538 539 RTRIM function 396 398 Ruler 26 76 77 85 Run Script Tools menu 515 S Save File menu 36 Save all File menu 36 Save as File menu 36 140 505 506 Save within document pictures 216 279 280 Scanning 217 Scribbles drawing 286 287 properties 290 scripts 515 Search Edit menu 150 152 155 Search again Edit menu 151 Searching files 494 formatting 155 in a database 345 text 150 Section Format menu Manual TextMaker 2016 line numbers 186 multi column page layouts 143 147 resetting auto numbers 185 Section break 147 185 186 187 Sections 147 Select Table menu 191 Select All Edit menu 58 59 Select Source File menu 217 Select whole words when selecting 530 Selecting database records 373 objects 249 text 57 Send File menu E Mail 486 Fax 471 Fax merge 475 476 Send Backward One Level 272 273 Send to Back 272 273 Sequence number field 161 163 421 423 Set Database Tools menu 368 369 Set default 142 Set left and first line indent with Tab and Backspace keys 530 532 Settings 523 Shade 91 Shade fields 161 165 546 547 Shading Format menu 91 Shadow for objects 266 SHM extensions 541 543 Show bookmark
296. ents of the chosen file type in the chosen folder If you specify a unique filename like INVOICE TMD only files with exactly this name will be found If you specify a filename pattern like INV TMD all documents whose file names begin with Inv will be found m File type From this list you can choose the type of the files to be targeted in the search For example if you want to search for files in Rich Text Format select this format from the File type list Manual TextMaker 2016 Document management e 495 E Title Subject Author etc By making entries in these fields you can target your search to the contents of the summaries that are included in your documents see the section Document summary If you fill in several fields the file manager will search for documents that meet all of your specified conditions For example if you enter tax in the Key words field and Smith in the Author field only documents whose summar ies contain corresponding entries for both fields will be found You will get different search results depending on the precision with which you specify the search terms For example if you typed tax as the search term in the Keywords field your search would also turn up documents whose key words contain tax increase and my income tax etc that is all the docu ments in which tax was contained anywhere in the keywords Case is of no significance in s
297. eposition a guide delete it and then set a new guide at the desired position Mouse In Object mode guides can simply be grabbed with the mouse and dragged to new positions Also if you move a guide into the horizontal or vertical ruler the guide will be deleted The same happens when you hit the key while dragging a guide Locking guides You can lock guides so that they cannot be moved accidentally with the mouse To do this invoke File gt Properties switch to the View tab and enable the Lock guides option in the Locking group box From this point on guides cannot be shifted with the mouse Their positions can be changed only in the dialog box of the Object gt Guides amp Grid command 576 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Activating the Snap to page margins function When you enable the Snap to page margins option the page boundary lines of the document also function as guidelines Accordingly if you drag an object to a position near one of these lines the object will snap to it Hint To enable or disable the display of the page boundary lines invoke the Tools gt Options command switch to the View tab and turn Page borders on or off Installing additional dictionaries You can install additional dictionaries for the spell checker whenever needed Just follow the instructions given in the following sections Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Windows Windows only In the
298. equently change the formatting of the numbered list the paragraphs formatted with this list will change accordingly Using hierarchical lists Numbered lists have the additional advantage that they allow the creation of hierarchical enumerations While simple lists like 1 2 3 etc have only one level hierarchical lists can have several levels For example a hierarchical list might look like this 176 e Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 2 etc In the above example the two paragraphs under 1 have second level numbering 1 1 and 1 2 For details on creating numbered lists see the next pages Creating numbered lists To create a new numbered list proceed as follows 1 7 8 If you want to apply the new numbered list immediately after creating it first select the paragraphs to which you want to apply it Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command Switch to the Numbered Lists tab Click on the New button Give the new numbered list whatever name you like and then confirm with OK Select either Simple list 1 2 3 etc or Hierarchical list 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc depending on the type of list you want to create see the introduction Make any additional required settings for the numbering see below Confirm with OK The new numbered list is now set up If you want to apply it to the paragraphs currently selected in the text click on Apply Otherwise click on Close You wi
299. er 1 However if necessary you can instruct TextMaker to begin with a different number To do this invoke the Format gt Chapter command change the Page number setting from Increment to Value and enter the desired starting number in the edit box For example type 42 to assign the number 42 to the first page Changing the properties of headers and footers Like all types of frames header frames and footer frames that contain the headers and footers have certain properties that can be modified using the Object gt Properties command For example you can change their height or modify their distance from the text and page edges To do this proceed as follows 1 Click with the mouse in the header or footer frame depending on whether you want to edit the header or the footer Alternatively you can invoke Insert gt Go to Header or Insert gt Go to Foot er which accomplish the same thing 2 Invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip This dialog can also be invoked by clicking on the Li icon in the Header and Footer toolbar The following settings can be made in this dialog Properties tab The Properties tab allows you to edit the following properties Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 105 m Height Here you can change the height of the header or footer frame At least This is the default setting The height of the frame is adjusted auto matically The
300. er Style S Apply Close New New From text Edit Update Show Styles in use Z gt gt Click on the New button Give the character style any name you like and click on OK A dialog box very much like the dialog for Format gt Character appears Here you can specify the desired character formatting see section Character formatting beginning on page 63 If you will need this style frequently you can assign a keyboard shortcut to it see below When all the desired settings have been made click on OK to define the style Exit the dialog with Close The style is now defined and ready for use You will learn how to use it in a mo ment section Applying character styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles e 121 Creating character styles from existing text Alternatively you can format some text first and then create a character style that uses exactly the same formatting options For this purpose use the New from text button instead of the New button This method is useful when you have formatted text by hand and want to have a character style that has exactly the same formattings Proceed as follows 1 Set up the character format font face font size etc of any text segment to your liking 2 Place the text cursor inside that text or select it either will do 3 As described above use the Format gt Character Style command to create a new character style Ho
301. erfluous white spaces If when printing or faxing TextMaker comes upon two database fields that are separated by one or more space characters and the first of these fields is empty TextMaker automatically suppresses the space characters An example You have inserted fields for first and last names into the text and separated them with a space character FIRSTNAME NAME1 At this point TextMaker normally prints the first name the space character and the last name However if the FIRSTNAME field of a given data record is empty TextMaker prints only the last name and removes the space character since in this case it is superfluous Automatic suppression of empty lines with database fields If a text line contains only database fields and separating space or tab characters and if for some data record none of these fields has any content the entire line is suppressed An example your form letter contains the following text segment FIRSTNAME NAME1 NAME2 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP If for some data record the NAME2 field is empty TextMaker automatically removes the resulting empty line Thus it prints the first and last names and then prints the street on the immediately following line Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes e 377 If both FIRSTNAME and NAME1 were empty this line would be entirely suppressed Preventing the automatic suppression of white spaces In certain cases Te
302. ering beginning on page 171 Adding bullets To begin a bulleted list do the following 1 Invoke the command Format gt Bullets and Numbering 2 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering tab 3 Select the Bullet option in the Type group box 86 o Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Bullets and Numbering Sa Bullets amp Simple Numbering Numbered Lists Bullet Default Custom Ee on Color Size Auto Auto Z Horizontal position 0 25 in vertical position Opt 4 Select the kind of bullet you want by clicking on one of the bullets in the Bullet group box 5 Confirm with OK 6 Now type your text At the end of the paragraph press the Enter key to start a new paragraph TextMaker automatically indents the paragraph and adds a bullet Naturally you can also add bullets to paragraphs after they have been typed To do this select the text invoke the command introduced above and select a bullet Removing bullets To end a list or remove existing bullets proceed as follows 1 At the end of the last bulleted paragraph press the Enter key to start a new paragraph Alternatively Select the bulleted paragraphs where you want the bullets to be removed Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 87 2 Invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering 3 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering tab 4 Turn bulleting off by selecting the option None in the T
303. errreresrreresre 413 Tables of references TOC index etc ssssssseseesersereessesessseersesressereesseresssee 413 TAdiCE Soise kenep e naa ae e ATI ES aO EE r Sea 414 Tables GE cont ntS eseese eer aee e eens ata e Meh dnote 418 Captions and tables of figures eeesseessseseseeeeerssrsrrererreereseeresserrreresrreresee 420 Bibhographies soreer desseesssseeepsagdveds dosed eons Eo a o rS SET 426 Updating tables of references erosissrsessisernoesesiiors eenei iznesti beessiis 432 Editing and formatting tables of references eeseseeeseeeseeeerserrererrrererreee 433 Cross refere NCES ss cis e rearen raa e aE aa aa a a a EEE seppa sos 434 Inserting a CLOSS reLerenCe sissies eisein itise okoa Tsor oE aonais 435 Editing and updating a cross reference esseseeeseesesreeresreersserrreserreeresre 436 Style TELErEN Ces 5 52 sek ss sess shes falas ese cheb se cv abtstecesceed steak sa EE E R a TE SEESE anaes 437 FOOtHOtES 3555s EEEE Maze stenteea bts tisesvesd T 440 Inserting and editing footnotes 0 eee sees cesecesecssecssecseecseesseseneeees 440 Changing the formatting of footnotes 0 0 0 eee cece cesecesecneecneecneeeneeees 443 FOOIMO tS OPHONS 4 535 sac sees sce seseesas aaa eaaa a AEE E E Eaa Tai 444 Document revisions 447 Using comments esen a N eerterceetee Shee E 447 Inserting comments rennen a a A N Seite 448 Editing COMMENtS pann a A A R 449 Deleting comments soen n a a A A E ES 449 Displaying and printing comments
304. ersreeresreerssrerrsserrenresrreres 494 Backup COPIeS aviscg satis codssedstdeecesned tite ons ised hocks EEE eE EE EEEE R EE eS 496 Document protection 501 Enabling document protection ce eeeecceeecesecesecesecssecseecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerenseens 502 Disabling document protection ee eeceeceseceecnseceseceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 503 Working with other file formats 505 Saving and opening files in other file formats cece eeseeseceeceeeeneeeeeeees 505 Working with text files ansarin Sites ten sent ee hig A Suisa wueeet hee 507 Working with Arabic text 509 Activating extended support for Arabic text 0 00 eee cee creeereeeeeeeeeeeeeeerens 509 Changing the text direction of paragraphs 00 eee ceeeseecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 510 xii e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Changing the direction of tables o oo eee ceeeceseceecesecesecaeecseeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 511 Changing the direction of multi column text sseeeeseeeseeesssreesrsrreresrrrreresreee 511 Changing the font of Arabic text esseseesseeseseesrserersserrrerrsreereserrreserresresreet 512 Inserting dates imArabie o eneore Sesytneevtssspeuyecreges tevin tees ee Se UREE esmee eats 513 Scripts BasicMaker 515 Document windows 517 Creating a document Window 20 00 ee eeceesceescesecesecesecesecsaecaeecseeeseseeeeeeeeeens 517 Activating a document Window sessssesrsseesssetesseerrertsrreresreersserrresrsrrsresreet 517 Closing a document Window
305. erst 470 Faxing a dOCUMOMNt Hs iaa a E EEE E E E 471 A fax 1M five Minutes ens eee eeso koer ieri ireo rosin i eo En E Ee ieSe 471 Requirements for extended fax support esssesssessssssssssrrssressreessseresessee 472 Starting a fax transmission 0 0 eee cece cee esse cee caeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeseenseenseesaes 473 Settings for fax transmissions 0 0 0 eee cee cee ence ceeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeneeeseenaes 474 Faxing a form letter icici schccs s sess oreson o iten decteseeus ante eE Eo see ee 475 Exporting a document to a PDF file 2 0 0 eee eeeceeeseceececseeceeceeceeeeeeneecsaeeesnees 477 Exporting a document to an EPUB file o oo cee cee cneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 483 E mailing a COCUMENE eee eee eeeeeeeeeeceeeeesecsecsaecsaecsaecsaecaeesseseeeeeeeeeens 486 Common problems 1 0 0 0 cee ceeecseeseeeeeseeesseesecesecsecaecsaecsaecseecseseseseeeeeeeeeens 487 Document management 489 Quick paths sicse veces nde Ree he es eae ds ee etek eae ee 489 Defining quick paths 00 eee cseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecesecesecaecsaecsaessaecneeeneeees 490 Using quick paths isre tesa as le ced eE ERE TE aE es 490 Editing and deleting quick paths eee eee eecesscesecesecesecseeceecseeeneeees 491 Document SUMMALY cece cece e ea Ee reaR EnS EERE erent 491 The fileman ter ninne s e tae aah E E ES E 492 The file manager s buttons seseseseseeesssreeseesressrsesrerteeresreresserrrneesreeresee 493 Searching with the file manager seeeseeeeseereere
306. erties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format For changing the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 E Filling For changing the filling of the object Not supported by all OLE applica tions See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For adding border lines See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 m Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 mw Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning on page 268 m Properties For modifying common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 For OLE objects there is an additional tab with further options Picture tab On the Picture tab you can change settings that affect the graphical representation of the OLE object Note Depending on the application associated with the OLE object some of the options may be not supported Options available 244 e OLE objects Manual TextMaker 2016 Variants In this list a number of pre defined variations of the object are presented for example different color modes grayscaled black amp white etc as well as col orized variants of the object To choose one of these variants simply click on it and the options in the dialog will be adjusted
307. erties of a picture first select the picture with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the picture The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modify the following settings Layout On this tab the only settings that apply to pictures are those for outside margins The other options are available only for picture frames See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format For changing the size of the picture See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Manual TextMaker 2016 Pictures e 219 E Filling For changing the filling Only visible in pictures that have transparent areas See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For adding border lines See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 m Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 m Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning on page 268 Properties For modifying common object settings Also displays some infor mation on the picture See section Object properties Properties tab beginning on
308. escriptions can be found in the section Computational functions page 396 To start with here are a few examples Example TODAY The function TODAY returns the current date For example on September 16 2015 it would return 09 16 15 Example MONTH TODAY Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 393 Here one function is applied to another The function TODAY returns the current date But this result is immediately evaluated by the MONTH function which returns only the month of the date as a number So on September 16 2015 the formula would produce the value 9 Example INT B 1000 Here the function INT which converts a floating point number to an integer by removing its fractional part is applied to the calculation B 1000 If B has the value 3752 70 the formula gives the value 3 In summary the arguments of functions can be other functions any sorts of calcu lations database fields table cells references or any combination of these Variables The result of a formula can be assigned to a variable Tip All variables that are defined at a given moment appear in the Variable Field list box in the dialog box for Insert gt Calculation You can insert any one of them in the formula by double clicking on it Example PRICE 17 99 Here the formula is just the constant value 17 99 The entry as a whole defines the variable PRICE and sets it to 17 99 Its value is valid from the position
309. ese tasks TextMaker Tree4 tmd o aa File Edit View Format Insert Object Table Tools Window Help x PEZAR a 4 fal Q 4 Al Q D Dlt ali 2 3 4 5 6 7 a o Al Ted Headngz x 1 The Love Life of Trees o Dolor sit awt consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nomunmy nibh euismod tincidurt ut laoreet dobie magn quis mostud exerci tation ullamcorper suscipit lobortis nisl ut aliquip ex ea commodo consequat Duis autem lestie consequat vel ilh m dolore eu feugiat malla facilisis at vero e105 et accumsan et msto odio dignissim quil feugait malla facilisi 1 1 In Spring o Velilumdobre eu feugiat ralla facilisis at vero eins et accumsan et sto odio dignissim qui blandit prae facilisi 1 1 1 March o Lowmipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam normmeny nibh euismod tincidunt vel eum iriure dobr inhendrerit invulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel ilh m dolore eu feugiat ssim qui blandit praesent huptatum zzril deknit augue duis dolore te feugait rulla facilisi 112 April o Duis autem vel eum imme dobr inhendhenit invulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel ilham dola odio dignissim qui blandit praesent hiptatum zzril delenit augue duis dobre te feugait rulla facilisi 1 13 May o Lowmipsumdolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam noummy nibh euismod tincidunt 1 2 In Summer o Hendrerit invulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel illum dolore eu feugiat malla
310. essed to jump to the next cell Naturally you can lock not only the contents of individual cells but whole tables For this purpose simply select the whole table and then use the procedure de scribed above Protecting forms Before you put a newly created form to use you should protect it from being changed When a form is ready for use the form itself should no longer be subject 314 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 to change and only the objects in the form that are intended to be filled in should be changeable The following methods for protecting forms are available to you Using Forms mode When you activate Forms mode see section Filling out forms the forms objects can still be filled in but other parts of the document can no longer be edited and most TextMaker commands are no longer available Forms mode can be activated and deactivated with the View gt Forms Mode Note Keep in mind that users who fill in the form can deactivate Forms mode at any time unless you prevent them from doing so by locking Forms mode with a password see below Saving the form in Forms mode Tip When you save a document in Forms mode Forms mode is automatically reactivated the next time the document is opened Locking Forms mode with a password As required you can prevent other users from deactivating Forms mode by locking it with a password To do this invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to the Forms tab
311. evious page Click on the button with the down arrow to jump to the target following the current position to the next page for example Navigating documents with the sidebar Apart from the Edit gt Go to command introduced in the previous section there s another useful tool for navigating your documents the sidebar The sidebar can amongst other things display a list of all headings that exist in a document To jump to a specific heading simply click on the corresponding entry in the list You can also let the sidebar list the bookmarks objects footnotes and other com ponents of a document for easy navigation All you have to do is enable the sidebar and activate its navigation function This can be achieved as follows 1 If the sidebar is not displayed enable it e g by invoking the command View gt Sidebar gt Show at Right 2 In the little toolbar displayed at the top of the sidebar click on the amp icon This will switch to the navigation function of the sidebar The sidebar now displays all headings of the document unless you haven t created any headings naturally To jump to a certain heading simply click on the corre sponding list entry You can not only navigate the headings but also several other components of your document For this purpose open the dropdown list Document content at the top of the sidebar and choose what you would like the sidebar to display Options available
312. ew tab and enable the option Soft hyphens This will display all soft hyphens as hyphens with a gray background Inserting non breaking hyphens When a word or a number that contains a hyphen is located at the end of a line TextMaker might use this hyphen to hyphenate the word In certain cases this is not desirable For example for a phone number like 936386 0 it is not advisable to separate the zero from the rest of the number through hyphenation The phone number would be more legible if it was not distributed over two lines but instead moved to the next line as a whole If you want to prevent TextMaker from performing hyphenation at a hyphen that a word contains insert a non breaking hyphen instead of a regular hyphen You can do this by pressing the key combination J minus key Non breaking hyphens look exactly like regular hyphens however the hyphenator will never break a word at a non breaking hyphen Thesaurus With the command Tools gt Thesaurus you can have TextMaker search for a word s synonyms terms with equivalent or similar meanings This function can help you express yourself precisely and avoid repetition Even if you command a vocabulary that is larger than average the thesaurus may still find alternative words This function is especially useful with foreign languages Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 331 Using the thesaurus To open the thesaurus type a word or move the text curs
313. ext cursor jump from one tab stop to the next this is called inserting tabs Note Although the tab key on most keyboards is marked with S_ the legend is used for representing tabs in this manual to distinguish tabs from the direction keys For detailed information on using tabs see the pages that follow Using tabs By default tab stops are preset at 0 5 inch intervals However these preset tab stops are merely relics from the era of the typewriter and you are by no means limited to them You can define different tab stops for every paragraph of the document To set tab stops proceed as follows 1 Place the text cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple paragraphs to be modified 2 Invoke the command Format gt Tabs 82 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph Tabs Tabs Alignment Tab leader A 1 25 cm Left None Se Right Solid ___ Clear Centered Dashed Clear all Decimal Dots Middle dots Default width 1 25 cm C e 3 In the Tabs edit box enter the desired position relative to the left page margin thus 0 corresponds to the left page margin 4 If desired select another Alignment and another Tab leader for the tab stop see below 5 Don t forget Click on the Set button 6 Set up any additional tab stops you need in the same way before you exit the dialog box with OK Once tab stops have been set yo
314. ext segments in another language Apart from that you can set the language of any text segment to a language different from the standard language whenever required This is useful if a doc ument contains a segment of foreign language text for example a citation in Spanish To do this invoke Format gt Character switch to the Font tab and choose the respective language from the Language list You can change the language within a document as often as you like and of course you can format a whole document in a foreign language Setting the hyphenation frequency If desired you can specify how often the hyphenator should break words or you can turn the hyphenator off You can do this separately for each individual para graph as follows Select the paragraph s of interest invoke the command Format gt Paragraph switch to the Text flow tab and select an option in the Hyphenation dropdown list The following options are available Setting Effect None No hyphenation is performed Always Hyphenation is attempted in successive lines without limit This is the default setting Every 2 Lines Hyphenation is attempted only in every second line Every 3 Lines Hyphenation is attempted only in every third line Thus with None you turn hyphenation completely off for the selected paragraph With Always on the other hand you allow hyphenation to be performed whenever possible on any line of the paragraph In some cases it
315. extMaker 2016 Step 4 Creating the bibliography In the final step you have TextMaker generate the bibliography at the end of the document The bibliography will list all the sources from the bibliography database to which you inserted references in the text as described in step 3 To insert a bibliography proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which you want the bibliography to be placed 2 Invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography 3 Specify whether a new bibliography is to be created at the current position or whether an existing bibliography is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box 4 As required you can modify the way the source listings will appear in the bibliography using the large edit field at the bottom of the dialog see below When you confirm with OK the bibliography is inserted into the text Note As mentioned in the introduction to step 4 only those sources from the bibliography database that are actually referenced in the document see step 3 appear in bibliography Changing the appearance of the bibliography Before clicking on OK to close the above described dialog you can if required change the form in which the source listings will appear Editing text You can always edit the text that appears in the edit field Use the standard editing procedures for this purpose Changing formatting The formattin
316. f the most daring building projects in town will become our new home We cordially invite you to the opening ceremony e The celebration will take place next Saturday at 38 42 Linden Street We have taken every care for your personal comfort and the program we have organized for this event will make for an unforgettable afternoon pa Bring your family along for a day of fun and entertainment pal Typing mistakes When you make a typing mistake you can immediately delete it by pressing the Backspace key _ This key is situated above the Enter key J If you have followed the example your document should look something like this 38 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 T Untitled 1 fo e Dear Clients This year we have been building more than usual not just for you but also for ourselves The new Escher Complex one of the most daring building projects in town will become our new home We cordially invite you to the opening ceremony The celebration will take place next Saturday at 33 42 Linden Street We have taken every cate for your personal comfort and the program we have organized for this event will make for an unforgettable afternoon Bring your family along for a day of fun and entertainment Jaleo a4 The finished text Next we need to insert an address above the text of our letter To get to the begin ning of the document press the key co
317. f these rows it will insert the break before them ensuring that they will remain together on one page 198 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Page break at row When this option is checked TextMaker inserts a page break before the selected row ensuring that this row will always be at the beginning of a new page Allow page break in row When you check this option TextMaker is allowed to insert a page break within the selected row Thus if an automatic page break should fall within this row one part of the row s contents will remain on the current page while the rest will appear on the following page However by default this option is unchecked meaning that TextMaker will insert the break before this row in such a case Repeat as header row This option is only available in the first rows of a table It affects only tables that extend over more than one page When it is checked TextMaker repeats the selected rows at the beginning of every subsequent page This is useful for example when the first two rows of the table contain headers that you want to appear at the beginning of every page of the table To do this select the first two rows and activate this option for them Cell properties The appearance of the current table cell can be modified with the Table gt Cell Properties command It goes without saying that you can select more than one cell or even complete rows and columns before you invoke this command in order
318. facing pages odd pages on the right Additional options This section provides the following additional options Display document title Display the document s title in the title bar of the PDF viewer instead of its file name Hint You can change the title of a document on the Summary tab of the File gt Properties dialog Center viewer on screen Automatically center the program window of the PDF viewer on the screen when the PDF file is opened Full screen mode Automatically switch the PDF viewer to full screen mode when the PDF file is opened Hide menu bar Hide the menu bar of the PDF viewer Hide toolbars Hide all toolbars of the PDF viewer Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 481 Hide navigation pane controls Hide all controls of the navigation pane Security tab This tab provides options that allow you to encrypt the resulting PDF file and to set up passwords that protect the file against opening or changing it Encryption type Here you can select if the PDF file should be encrypted You can choose be tween 40 bit encryption low level of security and 128 bit encryption high level of security Note The other options on this tab are not available until you have chosen an encryption method m Password to open the document If you enter a password here the PDF viewer will ask for this password when users try to open the PDF file If they don t enter the correct password the viewer wi
319. fied 2 To choose the desired tab type click on one of the following icons in the Formatting toolbar L Flush left tab d Flush right tab the text ends at the tab position 4 Centered tab the text is centered on the tab position amp Decimal tab numbers are aligned on the decimal separator Alternatively you can click the icon directly left of the ruler to change the tab type Each mouse click rotates through the available tab types 3 Finally simply click on the ruler on the desired positions to set the tab stops If the position of a tab stop does not suit you you can move it very easily by clicking on it with the mouse and while holding the mouse button down dragging it to another position To clear a tab stop drag it downward outside the ruler Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 85 Bulleted lists Lists in which each item is placed in its own paragraph and set off with a marker are much easier to read than comma separated lists The markers used for such lists typically little boxes circles etc are called bullets Creating bulleted lists is an easy task for TextMaker users TextMaker can add bullets to paragraphs and automatically inset them with the press of a key Alternatively you can create lists whose elements are numbered rather than bullet ed In this case the paragraphs are automatically numbered with 1 2 3 etc You will find information about this in chapter Automatic numb
320. first click on the desired color in the large color field Then click on the desired luminance in the luminance slider Using the hue saturation and luminance controls Alternatively you can set colors with the controls labeled Hue Sat saturation and Lum luminance Values between 0 and 240 are allowed for each m Using the Red Green and Blue controls Colors can also be specified by their red green and blue components The controls labeled Red Green and Blue are provided for this purpose Here val ues between 0 and 255 are allowed Entering the hex code of a color Additionally you can specify a color by entering its hex code like in HTML code for web pages into the edit control labeled with a sign The hex code for colors consists of 3 two digit hexadecimal values standing for red green and blue RRGGBB For example OOFFOO represents pure green Document properties Fax tab Note This tab is available only in the Windows version of TextMaker since only the Windows version offers extended fax support The Fax tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to make settings that relate to fax transmissions fax number recipient s name time to send etc The values entered here will appear in the dialog box associated with the File gt Send gt Fax and Fax Merge commands when you later issue one of these com mands and confirm it with OK Normally when you base your faxes on one of the document te
321. first letter As soon as you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts the index into the text Q Quantum mechanics 78 R Raster 102 163 Registration card 11 Right arrow key 20 Roman 151 Sample from an index with First letter headings The keywords appear in alphabetical order At the right of each keyword Text Maker inserts the numbers of the page s on which it occurs Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 417 If the Use chapter number option is checked in the Generate Index dialog the chapter number together with a separating dash is added before each page refer ence Q Quantum mechanics 4 78 R Raster 5 102 8 163 Registration card 1 11 Right arrow key 1 20 Roman 7 151 Sample from an index with chapter numbers Naturally it makes sense to use this option only when you have divided the docu ment into multiple chapters with the Insert gt Break gt Chapter break command see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 432 m You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 433 Tables of contents A table of contents TOC is a list of all the headings in the document each with a page number Unli
322. font size with the Formatting toolbar R Normal TimesNewRoman 10 My B ff u Z felaa ae HESE The Formatting toolbar This is done by selecting the text you want to format opening the dropdown list box containing typefaces or the one containing type sizes and selecting the desired format from the list with a mouse click Text styles Text styles are formatting options like bold italic underline etc that give emphasis to text TextMaker provides the following text styles Italic A slanted variant of the typeface Bold A heavier thicker variant of the typeface SMALL Caps Lowercase letters are replaced with small uppercase letters ALL CAPS All letters are rendered in uppercase Strikeout The text is struck through Hidden The text does not appear on the screen or on the printed page or both see the section Hiding text beginning on page 70 Protected The text cannot be modified see the section Protecting text beginning on page 71 Underline You can give text a single or double underline The underline can be continuous or by words only Superscript e g r and subscript e g H2O These text styles are found on the next tab see Superscripts and subscripts beginning on page 67 Text color and Background color see the next section Language If necessary you can also specify the language of a section of text only required when you use more than one
323. for example tables Bibliographies TextMaker can also help you create a bibliography a collection of references to cited literature for a document Its integrated database module provides a con venient way to enter and edit the sources m Cross references It is also possible to insert cross references to other parts of the text or to objects for example see the picture on page 12 m Style references A style reference field searches the document backwards for text that is format ted in the specified paragraph style and displays the first text found This allows Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 401 you to display e g the current main heading which is usually formatted in the paragraph style Heading 1 in the text Footnotes Finally you can insert footnotes that TextMaker controls automatically Outlines You should use outlines to organize large documents An outline presents the entire subject matter of the document in summary form as a structure of major and minor topics This structure is based on headings that you give to different parts of the body text The headings break the text into manageable segments An outline provides an overview of the document and allows you to easily easy manipulate document segments to obtain the desired organization of the text Once you have invoked the View gt Outline command you will be able to use TextMaker s Outline view to perform th
324. fy here where the object should be placed Normally all you need to do is enter the desired spacing from the left page edge in the Offset field For example if you set the Offset to 2 in the left edge of the object will appear 2 inches from the left edge of the page But you 256 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 can also set the alignment to be rightward rather than leftward If you do that the object s right edge will appear 2 inches from the right page edge The options for Position and Relative to provide additional control over the positioning when that is required You can for example set the position relative to the page margin rather than to the page edge If you do that the object s po sition will move to the right as you widen the left margin and to the left as you shrink it with similar results for altering the right margin on a rightward aligned object Each of the various horizontal position options is given below together with a description Position With the Position options you specify how the object is to be aligned Option Effect Left The object is positioned from the left Accordingly the offset is from the left page edge page margin etc to the left edge of the object For example the object s left edge would appear 2 in from the left page edge Centered The object is positioned from the center of the page page margins etc For example if Offset is set to 0 in the object
325. fy whether or not horizontal and or vertical scrollbars are to be displayed Wrap text to window in continuous and outline view When this option is enabled lines of text are always wrapped at the right border of the document window regardless of their actual lengths The actual layout of the document is thereby ignored but the text becomes more legible on small displays mobile devices for example which might otherwise require you to scroll to the right and left frequently in order to read a text Note Activating this option only affects continuous view View gt Continuous and the outliner If the document is viewed in normal view View gt Standard this option is ignored Show multiple pages side by side With this option you can specify if TextMaker should display multiple pages of a document side by side when the document is viewed at a very low zoom level m On Display as many document pages next to each other as fit into the docu ment window This allows you to view multiple pages at the same time Off Display one page on top of each other Preferences General tab The General tab in the Tools gt Options dialog contains common program set tings Maximum number of undo steps Here you can specify the number of actions that can be reversed with the Edit gt Undo command You can increase this number up to a maximum of 999 undo operations Note On devices with little main memory it is not recommended t
326. g the company name FIRSTNAME First name STREET Street and number STATE_ZIP State and zip code CITY City PHONE Telephone number FAX Fax number REMARKI First line for remarks REMARK2 Second line for remarks REMARK3 Third line for remarks What you now see on the screen is the first record in the database It consists of several fields A field is an individual part of a record containing an item of infor mation for example a first name Together the fields make up the record which contains a person s complete address In the status bar at the bottom of the program window you can see the following information 342 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 E First the number of the active data record the record number and the total number of records in the database are shown Record 1 of x To the right of the record number the following status information is displayed Deleted if the record is marked for deletion Selected if the record is selected For more information on selecting records see section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 E At the very right you can read the active field s field type which determines what entries are allowed in the field Field type Allowed entries Character Any Numeric Numbers Date Date entries in the form MM DD YY e g 06 24 15 or in the form MM DD YYYY e g 06 24 2015 Logical Only for yes or for no Memo Notes these can be edite
327. g to the View tab and checking the Display field names option In this way you can examine the text to determine exactly what terms have been added to the keyword list and exactly where they occur 416 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 This method does not apply to terms that have been added to the list with the Index all occurrences option checked because no index fields are inserted for such terms They are handled by functions internal to the program Creating the index In the course of adding terms to the keyword list with the Tools gt Index gt Add Index Entry command you have made TextMaker aware of the words that are to appear in the index Now you can have TextMaker create the index itself To do this proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which the index should be placed 2 Invoke Tools gt Index gt Generate Index 3 Specify whether a new index is to be created at the current position or an existing index is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box 4 Select the desired form of the index in the Heading group box None Index entries follow each other without breaks Blank line A blank line is inserted before each index entry that begins with a new first letter First letter A large letter representing the first letter of the imme diately following index entries is inserted before each entry that begins with a new
328. g arithmetic functions support symbolic cell references AVG COUNT MIN MAX PROD SUM For detailed information on each function see the section Computational func tions page 396 Database fields in calculations Fields from a database can also be entered in calculations provided that a database has first been assigned to the document with Tools gt Set Database You do not even have to enter the field names manually If you have a look at the Insert gt Calculation dialog box you will see that the names of all the database fields are shown in the Variable Field list box as soon as you assign a database to the document They can be entered in the formula with double clicks Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 385 As an example we want to create an invoice form that can be easily printed as a form letter For this all we need is a database whose fields contain the customers personal data name address etc Beyond that we ll simplify things and allow only one item per invoice the database should contain a QUANTITY field for the order quantity an ITEM field for item designators and a PRICE field for the unit price Proceed as follows 1 Create a new document with File gt New 2 Assign an appropriate database to it with Tools gt Set Database see below for an example 3 Next create a normal form letter as described in chapter Database Insert the database fields containing th
329. g can also be changed To do so first select the segment of text that you want to format in the edit field Then use the miniature formatting toolbar displayed above it to change the character format Inserting fields Fields from the bibliography database are indicated with curly braces As required you can insert additional database fields into the edit field either by manually typing the field name e g AUTHOR or by double clicking on the desired field in the Fields list Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 431 Hint The first item in the Fields list is a field called REF This field is creat ed automatically and it has a special function It contains either the abbrevia tion or an automatically generated number for the source depending on which of these two options you have selected in the bibliography settings dialog Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 432 You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 433 Updating tables of references Important When you edit a document into which you have already inserted a table of references table of contents index table of figures or bibliography the table is not automatically updated in step with your editing Thus when the document s page numbers
330. g chosen in the Regional and Language options of Windows Control Panel Tip You can always override this setting and enter a value into a dialog field in another unit of measure by typing one of the following unit abbreviations after the value Unit Explanation cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equals 1 in pi Pica for characters For example if you typed 5 08 cm for the left margin TextMaker would set the margin to 5 08 cm 2 in Window Manager dialogs Linux only When this option is disabled TextMaker for Linux draws its own dialogs This is somewhat faster than using the window manager to draw them However in this case dialogs cannot extend beyond the boundaries of the program window When this option is enabled the window manager draws the dialogs Window Manager positioning Linux only When this option is disabled TextMaker for Linux positions dialogs itself and always centers them in the program window When this option is enabled TextMaker leaves it to the window manager to posi tion dialogs wherever it will Preferences Language tab The Language tab in the Tools gt Options dialog contains settings that are related to the program s language tools spell checker hyphenator etc Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 535 Default language Here you can select the default language to be used for spell checking hyphena tion and the
331. g shortcuts Keyboard Mappings Close New Edit Reset Moreover you can work with complete keyboard mappings The keyboard shortcuts for all the commands are stored in a keyboard mapping When you switch between two keyboard mappings all the shortcuts change accordingly To customize TextMaker s keyboard shortcuts use the following buttons in the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings dialog box mu Apply button Activate the selected keyboard mapping New button Create a new keyboard mapping Note If you simply want to add or change a few keyboard shortcuts it is not necessary to set up your own keyboard mapping Simply click on the Edit button and modify the standard keyboard mapping itself 568 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Edit button Edit the keyboard shortcuts in a keyboard mapping E Delete button Delete a keyboard mapping Rename button Rename a keyboard mapping Reset button Reset the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping to the default possi ble only for the predefined Standard and Classic mappings Detailed information is provided on the following pages Activating a keyboard mapping You can select which keyboard mapping to activate with the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings 2 Select the desired keyboard mapping 3 Click on Apply to acti
332. g ways m To change the formatting of paragraphs after they have been typed select the paragraphs of interest invoke Format gt Paragraph and make the desired changes m To change the paragraph formatting while typing new text set the desired formatting with Format gt Paragraph without anything selected The current paragraph is re formatted according to your settings Moreover from this point on every new paragraph that you begin by pressing the Enter key takes on the same new format until you change the paragraph formatting again Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 75 Paragraph styles for the advanced user You will find that paragraph styles can relieve you of a considerable amount of the work involved in formatting para graphs With their help you can apply pre defined formats to paragraphs very quickly You will find information about this topic in the chapter Styles begin ning on page 119 Units of measure You can enter values in TextMaker s dialog boxes not only in inches but also in other units of measure To enter a value in specific units simply add one of the following units of measure after the number Unit Explanation cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equal 1 in pi pica character 1 pi equals 12 pt The default unit of measure depends on your computer s region settings For example if you type 7 62 cm as the position for a tab stop Tex
333. ge 177 8 Confirm with OK 9 The numbered list is now defined and you can exit the dialog box by clicking on Close Step 3 Applying the numbered list to the Heading 1 paragraph style This final step is the real key once you apply the numbered list that you created in the previous step to the Heading 1 paragraph style everything else follows automatically every existing and newly inserted heading will be numbered automatically Even subordinate headings of the second third etc levels will be numbered because their styles are based on the Heading 1 style Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 411 Proceed with this step as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Paragraph Style command 2 Select the Heading 1 paragraph style 3 Click on the Edit button 4 Adialog appears to enable you to edit the style Switch to the Paragraph tab 5 Click on the Bullets button contained there 6 Another dialog appears to enable you to set up numberings Switch to the Numbered lists tab 7 Select the numbered list that you created in step 2 8 Click successively on OK OK and Close to exit all the dialogs All existing headings are now automatically numbered and numbering will be applied automatically to any headings that you might add later Tip If the format of the numberings does not suit you you can always change the settings for the numbered list that you created in step 2 to adapt
334. ght to left the column on the very right becomes the first column instead of the column at the very left See also chapter Working with Arabic text page 509 Borders tab Here you can specify border lines for the entire table The options accessible from this tab are the same as those for the Format gt Bor ders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Note In tables not only outer border lines but also gridlines between the cells can be added Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 203 Shades tab Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the entire table The options accessible on this tab are the same as those for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading beginning on page 91 AutoFormat The Table gt AutoFormat command can be a real time saver it provides pre defined table styles that can be used to format an entire table with the push of a button Simply put the text cursor into the desired table and invoke this command A dialog presenting a list of all available table styles pops up Select the desired style and confirm with OK The entire table will be reformatted accordingly The options at the bottom of the dialog can be used to adjust more specifically how the table style should be applied m Apply section Allows you to specify which formatting options to apply For example if you deselect all options except Borders only the border lines
335. gt Borders Its purpose is to put border lines around a paragraph or to put single lines along the left right top and or bottom edges To place a line above the footer click into the first line of the footer and invoke the command Format gt Borders A dialog box similar to the following appears Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 53 Cell Properties cs Borders Line style Single lines 2 Es None Outline Inside Double lines m Thickness 1 pt KA Color Black Z YA N The dialog box for border lines Essentially you operate this dialog as follows First you specify what type of line you want After that you pick where to apply this line Accordingly to place a line above the paragraph proceed as follows 1 First choose what kind of border line you want by specifying the following settings in the dialog Line style single double dashed etc Thickness Color In our example we would like to have a single line 1 pt thick in black color However since these are the default settings of the dialog anyway there s actually nothing you have to do in the first step 2 After that specify where to apply this line top bottom left right etc For this purpose a preview box surrounded by a set of buttons is available in the right half of the dialog To apply a border line simply click on the corresponding border right in
336. gt Field to insert data base fields from the assigned database see also section Inserting database fields beginning on page 370 5 Invoke File gt Save as 6 Select the Template entry from the Save as Type list 7 TextMaker changes automatically to the folder for document templates 8 Type a name for the template in the File name edit box and confirm with OK In general you proceed as if you wanted to create a form letter but without enter ing the text of the letter and then save the letter as a document template If you want to learn more about document templates read through the basic in structions in section Document templates beginning on page 139 To view an example you can open one of the document templates supplied with the program Using document templates The use of a document template with a database assigned is very simple begin a new document with File gt New TextMaker now asks you what template to use as a basis for the document Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 351 If at this point you select a template that has a database assigned to it TextMaker displays this database and lets you choose the data record to be inserted into your text You page to the desired record and then click on the Insert button Here is the step by step procedure 1 Invoke File gt New 2 Choose one of the document templates that have a database attached either a template that you have prepared or one
337. gt Page break command but also by giving a paragraph the attribute always begins on a new page here To do the latter position the text cursor within the paragraph of interest invoke Format gt Paragraph switch to the Text flow tab and check the Page break option TextMaker will then always insert a page break before this paragraph even when you move the paragraph to a different place in the text Page setup You can specify the page format of a document with the File gt Page Setup com mand Here you can set such things as paper size page orientation portrait or landscape and page margins 100 o Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Page Setup Page Format Chapter Orientation Margins A Portrait Top Bottom D Landscape 2m Left Right Paper 2 cm 2cm Size E Mirror margins A4 z Gutter Width Height Position Width 21 cm gt 29 7 cm Inside z 0 cm Paper bins First page Next pages Use printer setting d Use printer setting KA The dialog box for the File gt Page Setup command The settings that can be made are as follows E Orientation Here you can specify the Orientation of the document on the printed page Portrait or Landscape E Paper Here you can specify the size of the paper for which the document is to be formatted The Size dropdown list contains all paper sizes that are supported by the current printer If you want to specify a size that
338. h individual object by its name For example Textbox1 references the content of the text field Textbox1 You evaluate the contents of objects in calculations as follows Text fields and text frames Textbox1 Text or Textbox1 for short returns the content of the text field with the name Textbox as text without any formatting Textbox1 Value on the other hand interprets the content of the text field as a number and returns it m Tables Table1 A1 returns the content of cell Al in Tablel Table1 A1 interprets the content of this cell as a number and returns it Table1 A1 interprets the content of this cell as text and returns it Table1 returns the sum of the contents of all cells in Table1 m Checkboxes and checkbox frames Checkbox1 Sel or Checkbox for short returns 1 if the checkbox is checked or 0 if not Checkbox1 Text returns the text for this checkbox if it is checked otherwise an empty text string Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames Dropdown1 Text returns the text of the selected item in Dropdown1 Dropdown1 Sel or Dropdown for short returns the number of the selected item An example The formula Textbox Value 2 references the current numeric value in the text field named Textbox1 and multiplies it by two Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 387 Formatting and rounding calculations With the command Insert gt Calculation you can not only enter new calc
339. hange the outside margins Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 253 The inside solid lines bordering the object are for changing the object s size When you drag one of these lines the object is enlarged or reduced according ly The outside dashed lines are for changing the object s outside margins When you drag one of these lines only the margins are changed Preventing changes in an object s position and size By locking an object you can prevent it from being moved or resized with the mouse or the keyboard arrow keys To lock an object first select it Then invoke Object gt Properties switch to the Properties tab and check the Locked option Now the object can no longer be moved with the mouse and its size cannot be changed by dragging its border Nor is it any longer possible to move the object with the keyboard arrow keys The only way to change the object s position or size is to enter values in the Object gt Properties dialog box By unchecking the Locked option you can re enable changes to the object s position and size with the mouse Rotating and flipping objects Note Rotation and flipping can be performed only on drawings and pictures These operations are not possible on other types of objects When you select an object that can be rotated an additional green handle will appear on the selection frame surrounding it To rotate the object drag this handle with the mouse lt 4 To rotat
340. have to do now is change the value of HOURS To do this select the 2 before hours invoke Insert gt Calcula tion and simply replace the 2 in the formula with the desired number of hours After your OK TextMaker carries out the recalculation Decimal places You might find it more desirable to show the amounts with two decimal places You can make the necessary change immediately for each amount select the corresponding calculation field invoke Insert gt Calculation choose the Fixed option for Decimals and enter a 2 beside it Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 383 Table cells in calculations You can also use the cells in tables for calculations almost like in a spreadsheet application Take a look at the status bar at the bottom edge of the program window When you move from cell to cell in a table the coordinates of the active cell in the table are shown there TextMaker designates the rows of a table with numbers the columns are assigned the letters A B C etc So the first cell in a table has the coordinates column A and row 1 or for short Al To perform calculations on the contents of the cells of a table invoke Insert gt Calculation and simply enter the coordinates preceded by signs So the correct formula for add the contents of cells Al and A2 would be A1 A2 The sign tells TextMaker that it should treat the content of the cell as a nu
341. he Download folder on your SD card in it There tap once on each of the downloaded files If on the other hand you have performed the download on a different device for example a PC first copy the downloaded APK files to your Android de vice and then tap on each of the files in a file manager This will start the installation process of the respective application Note In case the installation aborts with an error message saying that apps from unknown sources cannot be installed please read the section Allowing the installation of apps from unknown sources below Allowing the installation of apps from unknown sources Most Android devices are configured to allow the installation of applications only from within Google Play Store When you try to install an installation archive directly a corresponding error message appears In order to be able to install the software you must first allow the installation of software from unknown sources Proceed as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Installation and program startup e 21 1 Open the Settings of your Android device 2 Tap on Security 3 Activate the option Unknown Sources After that you will be able to install SoftMaker Office as described above Hint When the installation is complete you should consider turning this option off again for security reasons 22 e Installation and program startup Manual TextMaker 2016 The application screen On the fol
342. he New button 3 Give the style a name 4 Switch to the Style tab 5 Now comes the distinctive step In Based on select the style to which the new style is to be linked 6 Now you can enter the desired formatting etc An application example Let s assume that you want to use a bolded strong featured font for the headings in your doctoral thesis But you also want the headings to be in different sizes to reflect their hierarchical relationships To accomplish this you would proceed as follows 1 First create a character style called Headings for the highest level headings At this point select the special typeface you want specify 24 points for the size and enable bold 2 Next add a style called Headings2 select the Headings1 style in Based on and specify 18 points for the size 3 A character style called Headings3 based on Headings2 and with 14 point type can follow for the next lower level etc 126 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Benefit If it should occur to you later that a different font is better suited for the headings you can reformat all the headings with the styles Headings through Headings3 in this font merely by changing the font specification for the Head ings character style If you had based the heading styles on normal you would have had to change the font specification for each style separately Relative font sizes When you base one
343. he contents of a database click on the Database button and choose the desired database for example the address da tabase TMW DBF supplied with the program 4 The large edit field found in the upper part of the dialog serves as a mask for designing the label Use it to add database fields and or any regular text ar ranged as they should appear later when the labels are rendered To insert a database field click on the Database field button A list of all fields in the database will be displayed Click on a field in the list to insert it The miniature formatting toolbar above the edit field allows you to change the text format font text emphasis color etc Select the text of interest before hand When you have finished filling out the edit field proceed as follows 5 Only when creating labels Click on the Format button and choose the format of the labels to be created The button opens another dialog where you can se lect the manufacturer and product number of the label from pre defined lists In case you are using a label that is not included in the lists you can specify a new label format by clicking on the New button and entering the measurements of the label For details see the section explaining the individual dialog op tions below 6 Set up the other dialog options to your liking see below 7 When done press one of the following buttons Print Prints the labels The usual Print dialog will app
344. he document TextMaker places headers in the top and footers in the bottom page margins When you change the margins of your document the positions and sizes of the headers and footers are adjusted automatically The following pages present everything you will ever need to know about headers and footers 102 o Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Creating and editing headers and footers To enter a header invoke the Insert gt Header command TextMaker then positions the text cursor in the header frame in the top page margin Here you can enter and format text as usual The header frame is initially only one line high however it grows automatically as you type text that extends beyond this single line or when you begin a new line with the Enter key 2 To get back to the normal text from the header frame simply click anywhere in the normal text with the mouse If you should later want to edit the header again you can invoke Insert gt Go to Header or click in the header frame with the mouse to return to the header and perform your editing The insertion and editing of footers is accomplished in a similar way A footer is inserted in the bottom page margin with the Insert gt Footer command and edited with the Insert gt Go to Footer command Note By default the header and footer apply to the whole document If you want to use different headers and footers within the same document you must divide the document into chapters
345. he document the header for the right pages will remain untouched Likewise changes to the header on any right page will affect only the right pages The same goes of course for footers Deleting headers and footers You can remove the text from a header any time you like by clicking in the header frame selecting all the text and then simply deleting it Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 107 As required you can also completely remove the header frame itself from the document even though this is normally not necessary To do this proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor within the header frame 2 Click on the 5 icon in the Header and Footer toolbar Alternatively you can right click on any empty area in the header frame and choose the Delete Header Footer command from the context menu The header frame together with all its content is now removed You can set up a new header frame any time you like with Insert gt Header The procedure for removing footers is similar Master pages This chapter has already introduced you to headers and footers which have to be entered only once and then appear on every page This is a very useful thing but TextMaker has yet another trick up its sleeve The master page likewise appears on every page of the document However as its name implies it is not limited to a few lines at the top and bottom margins but can cover an entire page Please note that only frame
346. he label that you want to be displayed in the caption e g Figure 4 Make any additional required settings for the caption see Options below 5 Click on the Insert button TextMaker will now insert the selected label followed by a sequential number for example Figure 1 Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 421 If desired you can always type in some explanatory text directly behind the cap tion for example to extend the caption Figure 1 to Figure 1 The Larch This text will also appear in the table of figures if you create one see the next section Proceed the same way for all pictures that you want to insert captions for Note Captions can be added not only to images but also to any other kind of text elements For example the tables in a document can be labeled the same way Simply choose the corresponding entry in the Labels list Dialog options The dialog box for this command offers the following options Labels Use this option to choose which label to use in the caption The name of the selected label will be used for the text in the caption For example when you choose the label named Figure the caption Figure 1 will be inserted Note Each label uses its own numbering This allows you to add inde pendently numbered captions to for example the pictures and the tables of a document Simply choose the label Figure when you want to insert
347. he paragraph to which the object is anchored to the next page the object also moves to the next page This is how TextMaker handles objects when the default setting Move with text is in effect On the other hand if you select the Fix on page option Text Maker always leaves the object on the page determined by the page number you specify You will find additional information about the use of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 252 m When object is moved group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings When you have selected the option Move with text in the Object group box see above you can specify how the object s anchor should behave when you move the object When the default setting Move anchor to the nearest paragraph is selected the anchor moves with the object Accordingly when you move the object to another place the object s original anchor is removed and a new anchor is set to the paragraph left of the object s target position Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 261 On the other hand if you select the Keep anchor at current paragraph option the object s anchor always remains attached to the paragraph at which it was previously set even when you move the object Object properties Format tab Use the Format tab to modify the size of objects rotate objects or flip objects Options available m Size group box Here y
348. he right half of the dialog or on the buttons surrounding it Note for upgraders Please note that in SoftMaker Office 2012 and earlier this procedure had to be performed exactly the other way round Let s have a look at the entire procedure in detail For example to add borders to a text paragraph proceed as follows 1 Place the text cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple paragraphs to be modified Invoke the command Format gt Borders First choose what kind of border lines who want by specifying the following options Line style single double dashed etc Thickness of the line Color of the line Then specify where to apply this line top bottom left right etc For this purpose a preview box surrounded by a set of buttons is available in the right half of the dialog Use it as follows A When you click on one of the lines in this preview the selected type of border line is applied to the corresponding border B Alternatively you can click on the buttons displayed to the left and below the preview Each button represents one border indicated by the symbol dis played on the icon C The buttons shown above the preview provide some shortcuts The Outline button applies the currently set up border line to all outer borders The Inside button does the same for all inner lines e g with table cells The None button removes all lines at once Add as many lines as
349. he spacing between lines This setting is effective only for text that consists of multiple lines Alignment group box Here you can change the alignment of the text This setting is effective only for text that consists of multiple lines m Placement group box If you check the Vertical text option the letters will be rotated by 90 degrees Deformation tab available only for TextArt objects Note This tab appears only for TextArt objects Use the Deformation tab to change the type of shaping effect to be applied to the characters To do this click the desired type of deformation Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 293 Forms Forms are documents to be filled out For example you could prepare an application form for vacations Then when one of your coworkers wanted to apply for a vacation he would simply open this form enter his name and the dates on which he wanted to begin and end his vacation and print the form He would then have a completed vacation application to submit Creating a form is no more complicated than this you simply insert forms objects at the places in the document where someone must later enter something for example you insert text fields for text entries T Form2 tmd fo eem A text field E Name Jessica Lange Address 42 Faraday Ave z City Mountain View CA 90427 2 Gender female v A dropdown list i New client 5 A checkbox Jule 4
350. heet application PlanMaker Invoking BasicMaker To start BasicMaker or to execute a BasicMaker script use one of the following procedures Starting BasicMaker from the Start menu You can start BasicMaker by clicking on Start gt Programs gt SoftMaker Office gt Utilities gt BasicMaker in the Start menu Starting BasicMaker from within TextMaker PlanMaker Alternatively you can start BasicMaker from within TextMaker or PlanMaker From the main menu in TextMaker PlanMaker choose the command Tools gt Edit Script m Running a script directly from within TextMaker PlanMaker To execute a script invoke the command Tools gt Run Script in TextMak er PlanMaker A file dialog appears Choose a script confirm with OK and the script will be executed For more information on BasicMaker and details on programming TextMaker and PlanMaker see the BasicMaker online documentation which can be found in BasicMaker s Help menu Manual TextMaker 2016 Scripts BasicMaker e 515 Document windows Every document that you create or open is displayed in its own document window This feature allows you to work on multiple documents at the same time and copy data between them as needed In this chapter you will learn how to use document windows See the next pages for detailed information Creating a document window To create a new empty document window invoke the File gt New command If you would like to cre
351. here You will find detailed information about the uses of names for objects in the section Changing the names of objects page 274 Visible This option is checked by default If you deactivate it the object will no longer be visible on the screen See also section Hiding objects page 272 Printable This option is checked by default If you deactivate it the object will no longer print See also section Hiding objects page 272 Locked This option is NOT checked by default If enabled the size of the object and its position in the case of frames and drawings cannot be altered with the mouse or keyboard It is still possible though to open the Object gt Properties dialog and make changes there Tab stop Available only for forms objects e g text fields and text frames checkboxes and dropdown lists In Forms mode you can jump back and forth among forms objects with the key or the key see also section Changing the tab order page 313 However if an object s Tab stop option is unchecked that object is skipped Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 269 E Text locked Available only for objects that contain text e g text fields and text frames When this option is checked text contained in the object cannot be changed while the document is edited in Forms mode However the default setting is unchecked allowing the text in the object to be edited even in Forms mod
352. hether you would like to save them first 36 o Basics Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour Welcome to the TextMaker Tour On the next few pages we will introduce you to TextMaker s most important functions using some practical examples Note When working through the exercises don t be afraid to experiment with new commands as you get acquainted with them There is no harm done if something goes completely amiss We have provided example documents for every lesson this way at the beginning of each new lesson you can open the appropriate exam ple document and use it to get started Note Most of the illustrations in this manual were prepared with the Windows version of TextMaker On other operating systems some of the controls have a slightly different appearance but their modes of operation are identical A practice letter Ready for the first exercise Then start TextMaker now Note When you start TextMaker for the first time you will be asked to enter your name and address TextMaker needs this information to automatically personalize the document templates for letters faxes etc that come with the program You can always change this information later with the command Tools gt Options see the section Preferences General tab beginning on page 527 After the program starts it always displays an empty document window in which you can immediately start typing The text cursor blinks at the beginning
353. higher position in the list The position of the object in the tab order changes accordingly Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 313 Protecting contents of forms objects In certain situations it is desirable for forms to contain forms objects whose con tents cannot be modified in Forms mode for example text frames containing explanatory material This objective can be realized by checking the Text locked option in the forms object s properties dialog If this option is activated the contents of the object can no longer be altered in Forms mode In addition it is no longer possible to click on it in Forms mode or to jump to it with the key To lock the contents of a forms object do the following 1 If Forms mode is currently activated exit this mode with View gt Forms Mode 2 Select the object to be protected with a mouse click 3 Invoke the Object gt Properties command 4 Switch to the Properties tab 5 There check the Text locked option 6 Confirm with OK The contents of the object are now locked Special considerations for tables With tables you can specify a locked or unlocked state applicable in Forms mode for every single table cell To lock the contents of table cells select them invoke the Table gt Cell Properties command dialog switch to the Format tab and check the Text locked option Once locked the cells contents can no longer be edited in Forms mode and they are skipped when the key is pr
354. his paragraph that the new text forces the paragraph to the next page the object that is anchored to this paragraph is forced to the next page along with it An object s anchor can be moved at any time To move an object s anchor select the object and then while holding the mouse button down drag the anchor to another paragraph Setting an anchor to a fixed page You can disable the above described behavior for any object so that the object will always remain on a specific page To do this select the object invoke Object gt Properties switch to the command dialog s Layout tab and select Fix on page in the Object group box Then enter the number of the page on which you want to fix the object The object is then no longer anchored to a paragraph and will remain always on the specified page When you select the object a non moveable anchor will appear at the upper left corner of the page You will find information about the functions of the other anchor options on this dialog in the section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Changing the size and margins of objects You can change the sizes and the margins of objects as follows m To change the size of an object select it with a mouse click and then drag any of the lines that mark the borders of the object or the handles at the corners of these lines until the object is the desired size E For frames and drawings it is also possible the c
355. hors keywords etc You can select a file and then invoke a function to be performed on the file by clicking on one of the buttons The functions associated with these buttons are described in the next section The file manager s buttons The buttons in the file manager have the following functions m Open When you click on this button TextMaker opens the selected file Tip You can also open a file by double clicking on its filename E Close Use this button to exit the file manager Manual TextMaker 2016 Document management e 493 m Search You can click on this button to search for specific files or simply to select a new folder for display in the file manager For more information on this topic see the next section entitled Searching with the file manager Output Use this button to print or e mail the selected file When you click on the button a menu opens with the following functions depending on the operating system E mail Send the document by e mail Print Print the document Print Merge Print the document as a form letter Fax Send the document by fax only under Windows Fax Merge Send the document as a form fax only under Windows m Rename Click on this button if you want to change the name of the selected file m Delete If you click on this button the selected file will be deleted after confirmation m Preview Click on this button to preview the selected file A preview window app
356. hould be written differently following the German spelling reform These are underlined in blue On the next page you can learn how to convert these words to the new spellings Correcting words with old German spellings As explained in the last section if you have turned on the Underline old German spelling in blue option German words whose spellings were changed by the German spelling reform are indicated with a blue underline Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 325 To correct one of these underlined words simply change its spelling manually or click with the right mouse button on the word in order to bring up the context menu of the spell checker Android In the Android version you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second The context menu contains the following items Item Function List of All spellings that are correct according to the reformed German suggestions spelling rules are displayed in the upper part of the menu If you click on one of them TextMaker will replace the word in the text with it Info Opens a dialog box with additional options and information see section The Info command of the spell checker Ignore Word Ignores the mistake and removes the blue underline Use this option for words that are in fact correctly spelled but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ign
357. hyphenator a thesaurus and other power ful language tools Depending on your chosen language you may have only the hyphenation feature or the hyphenation and spell check features This chapter provides information on working with these tools as follows m Setting the language The default language for spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus can be set with the command Tools gt Options Language tab In addition with Format gt Character you can designate a segment of text to be in any other language you like You can do this for example when you use a Spanish language citation in a document you are writing in English E Spell checking The spell checker examines the text in your document for spelling mistakes When it finds mistakes it suggests corrections m Hyphenation The hyphenator hyphenates long words at the ends of lines This is performed automatically in the background right as you type E Thesaurus The thesaurus is a tool that lets you quickly find terms in a synonym dictionary with equivalent or similar meanings of the word you are looking for This fea ture helps you express yourself precisely and avoid repetition Berlitz translation dictionaries In some variants of SoftMaker Office TextMaker includes Berlitz translation dictionaries enabling you to translate words between five languages English French German Italian and Spanish with the push of a button E SmartText With TextMaker
358. ically any type of change you make in a document You can for example undo an insertion of an object The Undo command can be applied repeatedly For example you can invoke it five times to reverse the last five changes You can also invoke the undo command with the key combination z Redoing undone actions There is also an opposite to the Undo command the command Edit gt Redo It restores the effect of your most recent undo action There is also a keyboard shortcut for this command the key combination Manual TextMaker 2016 Basics e 31 Insert or overwrite Text entry works very simply You move the text cursor to the desired place and begin typing In TextMaker Insert mode is on by default If you type a character in this mode it is entered in the existing text and shifts the following text forward Alternatively you can switch to Overwrite mode In this mode entered text over writes the following text The status bar always shows which mode is presently active If INS appears there the insert mode is active If OVR is shown you are working in overwrite mode You can switch back and forth between the two modes with the key Beginning a new document To begin a new document invoke the menu command File gt New or press the key combination n New Template EE Deutsch F EE English Business Card O Later geraat Memo misc Planmaker B Espa ol Fran ais Italiano
359. ice once again If you obtained SoftMaker Office on CD ROM you will find the setup program in the root folder of the CD If you obtained SoftMaker Office by download simply launch the setup program that you have downloaded In case you have deleted it meanwhile download the setup program one more time For instructions on how to do this see the e mail that you received from us after purchasing the software 2 After several dialog windows that you can simply confirm you will get to a dialog with the following options Change Repair and Remove Click on Change 3 Another dialog appears listing all individual components of SoftMaker Office In this list open the category Proofing Tools by clicking on the plus sign displayed in front of it 4 You are now presented a list of all languages available When you click on the icon displayed in front of a language options for in stalling the corresponding language will be displayed For each language that you want to install choose the option Will be installed on local hard drive 5 When you have made your selections click on the Next button until the instal lation procedure begins The selected dictionaries will now be installed Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Android Note This section applies to the Android version only The Android version allows you to download and install dictionaries from our web servers whenever you need them free of charge
360. ick on the icon in the Object toolbar 2 The text frame is inserted If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners You can immediately begin entering text in the text frame Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 275 Note When TextMaker displays a red bar at the lower margin of a text frame this indicates that the frame cannot completely accommodate the text that has been entered In this case you must either enlarge the frame or reduce the amount of text To move from a text frame back to the normal body text click anywhere in the body text To move from the body text back to the text frame click in the frame No special action is required to insert a text frame over existing body text this text is automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the new frame Changing the properties of text frames To modify the properties of a text frame first select the frame To do this click on the border that surrounds it or if you are in Object mode simply click on the frame Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the border of the text frame The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modify th
361. icture frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for documents in newspaper style You will find more information about picture frames in section Picture frames beginning on page 279 Selecting other sources When several scanners are connected to your PC you can switch among them with the File gt Select Source command Manual TextMaker 2016 Pictures e 217 To switch scanners invoke the command select the desired device and confirm with OK Inserting pictures from the gallery Android Note This feature is available only in the Android version With the Android version you can also insert pictures using the Gallery application on your device Proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke the Object gt New Picture from Gallery command 3 Your Android device opens its Gallery app Choose the image to insert by tapping on it The picture is now inserted into the text Inserting as a picture frame The procedure just described inserts the picture right into the text Alternatively you can insert the picture into a freely movable picture frame To do this simply use the Object gt New Picture Frame from Gallery command instead of the New Picture from Gallery command The difference Picture frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do n
362. iding a document into chapters beginning on page 110 m Sequence number A sequential number inserted automatically in captions See section Captions and tables of figures beginning on page 420 m Style reference Searches the document backwards for text that is formatted in the specified paragraph style and displays the first text found This allows you for example to display the current main heading which is usually formatted in the para Manual TextMaker 2016 Fields o 163 graph style Heading 1 in the text See also section Style references begin ning on page 437 E File name The file name of the current document optionally including the complete path e g C DOCUMENTS TEST TMD or without the path e g TEST TMD Summary Any of several items of information about the current document Subject Author Keywords etc You can edit the contents of these fields by clicking on Settings See also section Document summary beginning on page 491 m Last edited by The first name last name or initials of the user who last modified that is saved the document These fields work only when the user has invoked Tools gt Options switched to the General tab clicked on the User Home button and entered their name E User Home Any of several items of personal information that can be edited with the Set tings button You can insert one of these fields in the text if you want your name addres
363. ify a background color for the text using the Background color list By default text has a transparent background If you select a color for the 66 o Character formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 background the text will appear against this color similar to being marked with a highlighter Notes m The default color named Auto has a special feature Text formatted in this color is normally displayed in black However when you change the back ground color of the text to some very dark color this color automatically switches to white to keep the text readable m If none of the existing colors offered in the color list suits you you can always compose your own colors To do this click on Define color the last item in the color list see also section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 m The text color can also be changed using the color list in the Formatting toolbar Click on this list which is situated to the right of the font size list and select the desired color Directly to the right of that the Formatting toolbar additionally offers a High lighter control which also is a dropdown color list It adds a colored back ground to the currently selected text just like a highlighter Note This color is not identical to the background color described above It is an additional color that can be applied only via this color dropdown list That is not necessarily logical bu
364. ight align page numbers If this option is enabled TextMaker separates the page numbers with a right aligned tab filled with dots If disabled only a space character will be inserted to separate the page num bers m Placement Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 425 Use this option to specify what should happen if the document already contains a table of figures for the chosen label If you select Replace existing table the existing table of figures is replaced On the other hand if you select Create new table TextMaker leaves the original table in place and inserts an additional table of figures Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 432 m You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 433 Bibliographies In the appendices to scientific literature you often find a bibliography This is a reference list of all the publications to which the author refers in the work TextMaker has functions that you can use to make working with bibliographies much easier These functions are best applied step by step as follows m Step 1 First of all you need a bibliography database There you enter all your cited sources You can use an existing database an example is included with the program or set up a new
365. iginated with the typewriter Tab stops can be set with the command Format gt Tabs or with the help of the Formatting toolbar and the horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler If the horizontal ruler is not visible at the top of the document window you must turn it on first with the command View gt Horizontal Ruler You set tab stops as follows 1 Select the paragraph in which the tab stops are to be set If you want to adjust the tab stops of several paragraphs you must first select these paragraphs as previously described Please select the line you just entered and the line below it because we want the tab stops for the next line which is to be filled out later to be set the same way 2 Choose the desired tab type in the Formatting toolbar At the very right of the Formatting toolbar four different tab icons are present ed 5 Flush left tab a Flush right tab the text ends at the tab position Centered tab the text is centered on the tab position 48 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 k Decimal tab numbers are aligned on the decimal separator Now click on the icon for flush left tabs 3 Click on the desired tab position s in the ruler With the mouse click on the approximate positions 1 inch 3 inches 4 inches and 5 5 inches to set tab stops at those positions Notice how the text is adjusted according to your settings By the way you could have proceeded in the opposite way You could h
366. ign can be used in a quick path name to give the name a keyboard shortcut For example if you enter Letters to the amp tax office as the name the quick path of this name can be invoked by pressing the key whenever the list of quick paths is opened Using quick paths Quick paths are available in all file dialogs for example the dialogs for the File gt Open and the Object gt New Picture commands 490 o Document management Manual TextMaker 2016 To invoke a quick path do the following 1 Click on the Quick path button in a file dialog 2 A menu of all the previously defined quick paths opens Select the desired quick path TextMaker now changes to the folder specified for the quick path Editing and deleting quick paths To modify or delete an existing quick path do the following 1 Click on the Quick path button in a file dialog 2 Amenu opens Select the Change quick paths command from it 3 A dialog box appears Select the desired quick path from the list box 4 Click on Change to edit the name or path or on Delete to remove the quick path Document summary You can use the command File gt Properties not only to make document specific settings but also to enter summary information about the document The summary contains additional information subject author keywords etc about a document To view or edit it invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Summary tab Manual Tex
367. ile gt Revert to Previous Version that displays a dialog with all available previous versions of the origi nal document For more details on this command see above Open the original file Opens the original file for this backup copy Of course this only works as long as the original file still exists Make your choice and then click on OK Once again please note that TextMaker creates and manages the files in the Back up folder automatically It is not recommended to e g manually rename or move files in this folder In case you want to clean up your drive to gain more space you can always delete the files in this folder However you will of course loose all backup files for all your documents by doing that Manual TextMaker 2016 Document management e 499 Document protection You can protect your documents from being read or saved by unauthorized persons by applying document protection or to be more precise read and or write protec tion to them For example you can require the entry of a password to open or save a protected document To protect the current document invoke the command File gt Properties switch to the Protection tab and select the kind of protection you want Then enter whatever password you like for reading and or writing The following types of protection are available No protection The document is not protected This is the default setting Write protection The document can be s
368. ill be correct As needed you can also update the fields of a document manually by invoking the Tools gt Update Fields command keyboard shortcut F9 All fields and calcula tions will then be brought up to date Invalid references If you delete the target of a cross reference then of course the cross reference becomes invalid In such a case when you update the document the message Target not found is displayed in the text by the cross reference You can correct this problem by removing the cross reference and inserting a new one with a valid target Style references Apart from cross references detailed on the previous pages you can also insert so called style references into the text A style reference is a field that functions as follows It searches the document from the place where you inserted it backwards for text that is formatted in the paragraph style you specified and displays the first text found This can be helpful for example in the following situation Large documents are often organized according to an outline i e headings with several levels are used The easiest way to accomplish this is to format all headings with the provided paragraph styles Heading 1 Heading 2 etc When you have done that you can insert a style reference field at any place in the text If you let it search for e g the style Heading 1 it will find and display the main heading of the te
369. ill not be visible unless the document actually contains comments m In pop up windows made visible by pointing If the comments pane is disabled a comment becomes visible only when you point with the mouse to a text segment to which a comment is attached A small window will open and display the comment Printing comments Normally comments appear only on the screen they are not printed If you want comments to be printed along with regular text activate the Print comments option see the section Settings for comments beginning on page 451 Note Regular text will be reduced in size to make room on the printed page for the comments Thus its measurements will not correspond to the measurements specified for the document 450 o Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 Locating comments The Tools gt Comments menu contains two commands that you can use to jump from one comment in the document to another Tools gt Comments gt Previous Comment jumps to the previous comment Tools gt Comments gt Next Comment jumps to the next comment Tip These commands can also be invoked by clicking on the 45 and icons in the Reviewing toolbar Settings for comments You can make various settings for comments with the command Tools gt Com ments gt Options Note The options dialog box is also accessible by invoking File gt Properties and switching to the Reviewing tab The following options are available
370. in the text at which you insert it to the end of the text unless you assign another value to the PRICE variable farther down in the text Note Whenever you assign a value or a calculation to a variable the value of the variable appears at the active position in the text If you don t want this for example because you only want to perform an intermediate calculation whose result should not be shown enable the Hide result option in the dialog box for Insert gt Calculation Example MY_MONTH MONTH TODAY Here the month of today s data is calculated and shown At the same time the result is saved in the variable MY_MONTH Naturally you can insert such a variable in other formulas Example PRICE 1 19 This formula gives the current value of the PRICE variable multiplied by 1 19 394 e Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 Operators The following operators can be used in formulas Operator Function Addition with numbers or concatenation with text strings Subtraction X Multiplication Division Modulo remainder after division The plus sign is used not only to add numeric values but also to concatenate text strings For example the formula Text Maker gives TextMaker An associative rule applies Multiplication and division operators take precedence over addition and subtraction operators so that multiplication and division are performed before addition and subtraction
371. ine a SmartText entry See section SmartText beginning on page 333 Ignore Ignores the mistake and removes the blue underline Ignore All Ignores all further instances of this word Note Use Ignore or Ignore All only for words that are correctly written but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Advises TextMaker to add the word to the user dictionary TextMaker remembers such words permanently they are from now on not underlined in blue see note Close Closes the dialog box without applying a change Note Use the Add command only for those German words underlined in blue that are in fact correctly spelled according to the new German spelling rules If you allow words with old spellings rather than new spellings to be added you will be supplying TextMaker with incorrectly spelled words Editing user dictionaries Occasionally a mistake is made and the spell checker is taught a word that is not spelled correctly The command Tools gt Edit User Dictionaries was devised for such a situation With it you can remove from TextMaker s vocabulary words that you have previously taught it To do this invoke Tools gt Edit User Dictionaries select the word to be deleted and click on Delete The word is now removed from the user dictionary thus the Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 327 spell checker will now view this word as incorrectly spelled as
372. ingle records manually With the command Select gt Current record keyboard shortcut s you select or deselect the data record currently displayed in the database module If you invoke this command when the current record is not selected it is selected If you invoke the command when the current record is already selected the record is excluded from the selection Tip In list view data records can also be selected or deselected by clicking with the mouse to check or uncheck the checkbox to the left of the data record With the commands Select gt Select all records and Select gt Deselect all records you can select and deselect all the records in the data base at once Display in the status bar The status bar at the bottom of the window also shows whether a data record is selected or not the word Selected appears here for a selected data record Selecting by record numbers The data record number record number for short is the number representing the record s sequential position in the database The first data record has the number 1 the tenth 10 etc The record number is always displayed in the status bar of the program window The command Select gt By number keyboard shortcut Ctr1 8 allows you to select or deselect a range of records delimited by record numbers A dialog box appears allowing you to enter the desired range The range of the entire database is shown initially For example if you want to select
373. ings that you insert or move They can be adjusted with the command Object gt Guides amp Grid Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 523 Installing additional dictionaries When you install SoftMaker Office dictionaries for some languages are already installed by default In case you want to install additional dictionaries follow the instructions given in this section These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Preferences To modify TextMaker s global preferences use the Tools gt Options command These settings apply to all documents The dialog box associated with this command contains several tabs each of which presents options relating to a different topic area If you click on the Files tab for example you will be able to make settings that control the opening and saving of files On the next pages you will find detailed information on each of the individual options available Preferences View tab The View tab in the Tools gt Options dialog allows you to control how documents are displayed on the screen Document window group box Here you can choose the tools to be displayed in the document window m Table guidelines Here you specify whether or not a grid of gray lines should be used to make the boundaries of table cells visible on the screen These lines serve simply as visu al aids they are not printed By default this option is enabled 524 e Cus
374. ion Current page Drop pictures Pages 1 1 J Extended fax support A dialog box appears allowing you to make the following settings m Fax device Here choose the fax driver that was installed by your fax software for exam ple Microsoft Fax on FAX m Setup button If you click on this button you will get the setup dialog for your fax software You can use it to configure your fax program see your fax software manual m Pages Here you can choose to fax the entire document only the current page or a specific range of pages Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 473 High resolution Faxes are usually sent in normal resolution If you enable the High resolu tion option the fax will be sent with finer quality but the transmission will take longer Drop pictures If this option is enabled TextMaker skips over any pictures drawings and OLE objects inserted into the document when transmitting it m Extended fax support This option is available only when a fax program compatible with TextMaker is installed on your PC see section Requirements for extended fax support on page 472 In this case this option should not be disabled If you disable it the extended fax functions described in this chapter will not be operable TextMaker will route the fax directly to your fax software which will require you to supply the name and fax number of the recipient When you confirm with
375. ion 396 397 Duplicate Edit menu 255 E Edit gt Copy 60 Edit gt Cut 60 Edit gt Delete 60 Edit gt Duplicate 255 Edit gt Evaluate 390 Edit gt Go to 156 157 158 159 Edit gt Go to link 462 464 Edit gt Link 242 Edit gt Paste 60 Edit gt Paste Special 61 Edit gt Redo 31 Edit gt Replace 151 152 155 Edit gt Replace again 151 Edit gt Search 150 152 155 Edit gt Search again 151 Edit gt Select All 58 59 Edit gt Sort 210 Edit gt Undo 31 Edit Database Tools menu 340 Edit mode 249 Edit Script Tools menu 515 Edit User Dictionaries Tools menu 327 Effects for objects 268 Ellipses drawing 286 288 properties 290 E mail 486 E mailing a document 486 Encryption 501 See Document protection End notes 444 Enter key 29 Enumeration 86 171 172 176 Envelope Insert menu 360 EPUB export 483 Equation Editor 245 Evaluate Edit menu 390 Exit File menu 36 590 e Index Export as EPUB File menu 483 Export as PDF File menu 477 Exporting documents 505 Extended support for Arabic text 509 527 528 Extended support for Asian fonts 527 528 F Faxing faxes 471 form letters 367 Field Insert menu 161 Field names display 161 165 File gt Acquire 217 File gt Close 518 File gt Exit 36 File gt Export as EPUB 483 File gt Export as PDF 477 File gt File Manager 492 File gt New 32 139 140 350 File gt Open 33 141 505 506 File gt Page Setup 100 File gt Print
376. ion character key Immediately sd is replaced with sales department In this way you can use TextMaker to put together a personal computer short hand and save significant typing time Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 333 In this section you will learn details about TextMaker s SmartText feature includ ing the following Creating SmartText entries SmartText entries can be created either with the Insert gt SmartText command the background spell checker or the on the fly spell checker You give the SmartText entry a name e g sd and then enter the desired content e g sales department Inserting SmartText entries To call up a SmartText entry simply type its name and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuation character The name will be immediately replaced by the content of the SmartText entry Alternatively SmartText entries can be inserted manually using the command Insert gt SmartText Editing SmartText entries You can create new SmartText entries with the command Insert gt SmartText and you can edit format rename and delete existing entries Detailed information is provided on the following pages Creating SmartText entries To create a new SmartText entry choose one of the following methods A Using the Insert gt SmartText dialog To create for example a SmartText entry with the name sd containing sales department proce
377. ired The text is then displayed inside the AutoShape exactly as it would be in a text frame To add text to an AutoShape do the following 1 Select the desired AutoShape Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 289 2 Right click on it to open its context menu 3 Choose the Add Text command You can now type text inside the AutoShape Hint There s a much faster way to add text to an AutoShape First select the AutoShape with a mouse click then simply start typing If you want to change the formatting of the text use the commands Format gt Character and Format gt Paragraph as usual When you have finished editing the text click anywhere outside the object If you want to return to this text later to edit it you can do so by reselecting the Au toShape right clicking to obtain the context menu and selecting Edit Text from this menu Important When TextMaker displays a red bar in the margin below the text this indicates that the area available for text within the AutoShape is not large enough to accommodate all the text that has been entered In this case you must either enlarge the object or reduce the amount of text Note Text frames which are described in an earlier section of this chapter are really nothing more than AutoShapes in this case simple rectangles to which text has been added Thus all the information in the section Text frames beginning on page 275 applies with equal validity to
378. is not listed you can do so by manually entering values in the Width and Height fields Margins Lets you enter values for the page margins Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 101 E Gutter A gutter can be added in addition to the page margins To do so select the position of the gutter and enter its size m Paper bins Available only under Windows If your printer has multiple paper trays you can select which one s the printer should use If you don t want TextMaker to influence tray selection you should retain the default setting Use printer set ting On the other hand if you want the first page of your document to be printed on paper from tray and the remaining pages on page from tray 2 for example you should change the settings accordingly m Chapter tab This tab contains settings related to the chapter format which is discussed in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 Note Changes of these settings affect the whole document unless you divide the document into chapters Each chapter can have its own page formatting You should divide the document into chapters when for example you want to change the paper format in the middle of the document see section Dividing a docu ment into chapters beginning on page 110 Headers and footers Headers and footers are lines of text that are always printed the same way at the top and bottom respectively on every page of t
379. istbox Annotation With most chart types the x values are irrelevant and therefore set to Auto automatic All they do is providing labels for the category axis x axis Exception E g in XY scatter charts and bubble charts the x and y values determine the coordinates of the data points Bubble size The bubble sizes of the data points only in bubble charts To modify them do not enter values directly but use the Edit button located be low the Series listbox Display this series as group box Allows you to modify the way the selected data series is displayed in the chart For example in a column chart you can change the appearance of one or more data series to lines instead of columns m Use secondary axis for this series If you check this option the selected data series will be displayed using a secondary value axis y axis Secondary axes can have a different scale than primary axes Annotation Using a secondary axis is helpful if one or more data series require a completely different scale on the axis because they contain values many times larger or smaller than the other data series Elements tab Use the Elements tab to show hide certain chart elements or to add captions to them Options available Chart title Lets you enter a title for the chart The title will be displayed above the chart m Primary Axes group box Allows you to configure the primary axes The checkbox in front of the axis de
380. it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame You will find information about text fields in the preceding section Additional information about text frames is given in the section Text frames beginning on page 275 Checkboxes You insert a checkbox with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Checkbox com mand Checkboxes can be used in forms for yes no entries The box is checked to repre sent yes when unchecked it means no Usage of checkboxes Simply click on the box not the text to put a checkmark in it that is to check it If you click on it again the check mark is removed Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 307 Changing the properties of checkboxes To modify the properties of a checkbox first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command A dialog window with the following options will appear Layout tab Available only for checkbox frames On this tab you can change the object s position outside margins and other layout related properties See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format tab Available only for checkbox frames On this tab you can change the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Properties tab On this tab you can modify common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 Fo
381. it finds mistakes it suggests corrections This section describes the different spell checking tools in detail It covers the following topics m Manual spell checking The manual spell checker lets you check and correct the spelling of the entire text in a document word by word Background spell checking The background spell checker constantly checks the text for spelling errors Incorrectly written words are underlined in red and can be corrected manually or with the aid of a context menu Conversion to new German spelling If you compose documents in German the above mentioned background spell checker can also help you adopt the new reformed German spelling rules 320 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 E Editing user dictionaries When you teach the spell checker new words they are added to your user dictionary You can edit this dictionary at any time in order to delete incorrect entries See the following pages for detailed information Hint In case you want to check the spelling of text written in a language that is currently not installed read the section Installing additional dictionaries page SU Manual spell checking You activate the manual spell checker with the Tools gt Check Spelling command This checks the text word for word for spelling errors If an unrecognized word is found the spell checker stops and displays the word in a dialog box Spellcheck x Word quartl Cha
382. ithin document option because picture files cannot be saved within HTML documents Besides it is not possible to insert picture frames in HTML format Which picture file format On the web pictures are usually stored in one of the following file formats GIF JPG or PNG All of these formats save the picture information in compressed form and thereby reduce picture file sizes considerably 460 o Internet functions Manual TextMaker 2016 m The GIF format is most appropriate for smaller graphics with a maximum of 256 colors It uses a lossless compression method that does not impair image quality m The JPG format is most appropriate for photographs and other large images in true color However the compression method used here is not lossless the higher the chosen compression ratio the worse the image quality m The PNG format is the most versatile image file format It comes in various sub formats with different types of compression including lossless as well as lossy compression Use pictures in one of these file formats whenever possible since other formats are not supported by all browsers Tables in HTML documents It is also possible to insert tables into HTML documents To do this use the com mand Table gt New Table in the usual way see chapter Tables beginning on page 189 Tip With tables you can simulate sophisticated formatting for which the HTML format makes no explicit provisions For example yo
383. k on the word To select an entire line click in the left margin beside the line You can select multiple lines by dragging the mouse pointer beside them in the left margin To select a whole paragraph double click in the left margin beside the para graph E Selecting objects To select an object e g a picture a drawing etc simply click on it with the mouse A frame appears around the object to indicate that it is selected m Canceling a selection When you want to cancel a selection simply click anywhere in the document outside the selection Using the keyboard for selection You make selections with the keyboard as follows m Selecting text Move the text cursor to the beginning of the text segment you want to mark Press the Shift key Shifts hold it down and move the cursor in any direction with the arrow keys You can select as little as a single character with Shifte J lt or Shifte gt and as much as whole pages with Shifts PgUp TJ or Shifto Pgdn 4 58 o Working with selections Manual TextMaker 2016 To select the entire document press the key combination Home followed by the key combination ctr Shifte End or invoke the command Edit gt Select All Selecting objects Objects can be selected only with the mouse see above m Canceling the selection When you want to cancel a selection simply press any arrow key Selecting in the Android version In the And
384. ke an index a table of contents does not depend on a list of entries that you have to create yourself prior to its creation Your document merely has to be outlined You can review the outlining process in section Outlines beginning on page 402 TextMaker already knows from the outline what headings the text contains and what hierarchical relations they have to each other Accordingly the creation of a table of contents is easy 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which the table of con tents is to be placed 418 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 2 Invoke Tools gt Generate Table of Contents 3 Specify whether a new table of contents is to be created at the current position or an existing table is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box As soon as you confirm with OK the table of contents in inserted into the text The Love Life of Tr Sample from a table of contents TextMaker puts the headings at the left to the right of each heading it inserts a tab followed by the corresponding page Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows You can select an option for Include levels to specify the outline levels to be included in the table of contents By default all levels 1 through 9 are includ ed m When you check the Use up to first tab option TextMaker examines each heading to see if it co
385. ks as you wish in each document Using bookmarks To return to a bookmarked position in the text do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go to command or press E5 2 Select Bookmark from the Go to list 3 A list of all bookmarks in the document is displayed Select the desired book mark from the list or enter its name manually 4 Confirm with OK TextMaker immediately moves the text cursor to the position at which the book mark was set Deleting bookmarks When a bookmark is no longer needed you can delete it using the following procedure 1 Invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command 2 Select the bookmark you want to delete from the list or enter its name manual ly 3 Click on Delete Note When you delete a passage of text containing a bookmark the bookmark is deleted automatically Displaying bookmarks in the document Normally bookmarks are invisible However you can make them visible by acti vating the option Display bookmarks in the document in the dialog of the Insert gt Bookmark dialog Bookmarks are then displayed in the text surrounded by angle brackets Note This option is identical to the Show bookmarks option in the dialog of the File gt Properties dialog View tab Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching and replacing e 157 The Go to Command The command Edit gt Go to keyboard shortcut or Ctr1J G is used to jump to a specific position in a document to a specific pag
386. l 1 2 3 etc Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 181 Format This option allows you to specify the format for the numbering Besides the usual 1 2 3 you can select e g letters A B C or Roman numerals I I IM Numbering starts with If you want the numbering to start with some value other than 1 you can enter the starting value here This option takes effect only when the numbering is beginning anew or when it is reset with the Restart numbering option in the main dialog Character button If you click on this button you can change the character formatting font size emphasis etc of the numbers Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the number Vertical position Allows you to specify the vertical position of the number Negative values are used to lower the number positive values to raise it Additional indent You can use this option to indent the entire list item including the number to the right Applying numbered lists Numbered lists are used much like paragraph styles First select the paragraphs to be formatted then apply the numbered list Thus you do the following 1 Position the text cursor in the paragraph to which you want to apply the num bered list or select multiple paragraphs Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command Switch to the Numbered Lists tab
387. l TextMaker 2016 Preview field A preview box is displayed in the right half of the dialog It gives an impression of how the border lines will look like when the changes currently made in the dialog are applied Apart from that the preview field also allows you to add and remove lines as follows When you click on one of the borders displayed in the preview the correspond ing border line is applied using the currently selected line style thickness and color When you click again the line is removed Alternatively buttons are available for the same task displayed to the left and below the preview Each button represents one border indicated by the symbol displayed on the icon The buttons shown above the preview are shortcuts None removes all lines at once Outline adds border lines to all outer borders Inside does the same for all inner lines e g with table cells Bounds Only with text paragraphs Determines where the lines should begin and end Options available Page margins Lines extend from the left page margin to the right page mar gin Paragraph indents Lines extend from the paragraph s left indent to its right indent This is the default setting Text Lines are the same width as the text they surround m Clearance Only with text paragraphs Determines the distance from the lines to the text Outline level Long documents manuals for example are usually organized and composed on the b
388. l footnotes is formatted with this paragraph style Thus changes you make to the Footnote text paragraph style will affect all footnote texts except those whose formatting you have changed manually To edit this style proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the Footnote Text style from the list then click on Edit 3 A dialog appears Here make the desired changes Hint You can also change the character formatting by clicking the Character button on the Paragraph tab 4 Exit the dialogs with OK followed by Close You will find general information about the use of styles in chapter Styles beginning on page 119 Formatting footnote markers TextMaker automatically formats the footnote marker as superscript However you can change the marker s formatting according to your preference To do this select the footnote marker invoke the Format gt Character command and make the desired changes Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 443 Tip By default all footnote markers are formatted with the Footnote Reference character style note character style not paragraph style Thus if you change this character style with the Format gt Character Style command all footnote markers in the entire document will be affected Footnote options The command Insert gt Footnote gt Options gives you access to additional settings for the footnotes in the current docu
389. l modes Edit mode Object mode Outline Database mode Picture Header Footer The selected toolbar is always visible provided that it is not disabled The toolbar is visible only in normal Edit mode and not in Object mode see also section Object mode beginning on page 249 Example the Formatting toolbar The toolbar is visible only in Object mode and not in normal Edit mode see also section Object mode beginning on page 249 Example the Object toolbar The toolbar is visible only in Outline view see also section Using the Outline view beginning on page 404 Example the Outline toolbar The toolbar is visible only in the database module Example the Database toolbar The toolbar appears only when a picture is selected Exam ple the Picture toolbar The toolbar appears only when the text cursor is in a header or footer To change the setting for one of the toolbars invoke View gt Toolbars select the toolbar and then choose the desired option in Visible in mode Note Normally it does not make sense to change this setting for the default toolbars Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar etc These options are primarily meant for user defined toolbars Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 561 Positioning toolbars on the screen You can position toolbars anywhere on the screen as follows Changing the position with the View gt Toolbars command The position of a tool
390. language in a document see sec tion Setting the language beginning on page 318 Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 65 Applying text styles To apply text styles invoke the command Format gt Character and switch to the dialog s Font tab To turn on bold or italic open the Style list to the right of font size option and select the desired style from the list Regular Italic Bold or Bold Italic To apply other text styles turn them on or off by clicking on the corresponding in the Styles section of the dialog You are not limited to just one style rather you can apply combinations of the styles to text although not all combinations are possible Using the Formatting toolbar The most commonly used text styles can also be applied using the Formatting toolbar elas ae EEA R Normal v TimesNewRoman 10 W B vi U hhl wl AWN Click on the icon for the text style you want to apply or remove The B stands for bold the J for italic and the U for single underline Tip There are also keyboard shortcuts for the application of these text styles for bold for italic and for single underline Text color You can specify the color for both the text itself and for its background To do this 1 Select the desired text 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font tab You can now select the desired color for the text from the Text color list You can also spec
391. late the volume of a swimming pool that measures 23x13x7 feet Accordingly you proceed as follows 1 Type e g the text The volume is 2 Invoke Insert gt Calculation or press F2 3 Enter 23 13 7 in the Formula field and confirm with OK The result is now inserted into the text 2093 The number 2093 can be edited and formatted like normal text but it is in fact a field that is a symbolic place holder for the calculation 23 13 7 You see this when you enable the Display field names option on the View tab in the File gt Properties dialog Then Formula 23 13 7 appears in the text instead of 2093 Editing calculations The formula for the calculation can be changed at any time To do this select the result 2093 and again invoke Insert gt Calculation The formula 23 13 7 is displayed in the dialog box If the swimming pool had different measurements you could simply change the formula accordingly Following your OK the result would be recalculated and placed in the text 380 o Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 More information For more detailed information on inserting calculations read the next pages Topics covered E Variables in calculations m Table cells in calculations E Database fields in calculations Objects in calculations Variables in calculations You can save the result of a calculation for reference in other calculations by assigning it to a variable
392. lays all comments for the current page of the document When this option is enabled the comments pane is displayed automatically when you insert the first comment into a document or when the document al ready contains comments When the option is disabled the comments pane is not displayed However you can still make comments visible In this case whenever you point with the mouse to a segment of text to which a comment is attached a small window containing the comment pops up Note Even when this option is enabled the comments pane does not appear unless the document actually contains comments Width Allows you to modify the width of the comment pane Position Here you can modify the position of the comments pane right left outside or inside 452 e Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 Changes group box The rest of the dialog contains additional options that pertain not to comments but to the Track changes function see the next section Tracking changes in a document After you enable the Track changes function you can continue just as before to make whatever changes you like in a document However the changes are not immediately applied but are highlighted in color and saved in the document as proposed changes Subsequently you or another user can review these changes and then separately accept or reject each of them If a change is accepted it is applied permanently to
393. lbar When working with paragraphs to which a hierarchical numbered list has been applied you can use the following buttons in the Formatting toolbar to convenient ly change the paragraph s list levels 2 Lowers the list level Raises the list level Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 183 Modifying numbered lists You can modify a previously defined numbered list at any time To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 2 Switch to the Numbered Lists tab 3 With a mouse click select the numbered list that you want to edit 4 Click on the Edit button 5 Make the desired changes 6 Confirm with OK The numbered list is now modified in accordance with your new settings If you want to apply the modified list to the paragraphs currently selected in the text click on Apply Otherwise click on Close Note Changes to a numbered list affect all paragraphs that have been formatted with this list Deleting and renaming numbered lists To delete a numbered list select the list in the above mentioned dialog and then click on the Delete button Note When you delete a numbered list the numbering is removed from all the paragraphs that were formatted with this list To rename a numbered list select it click on the Rename button and enter the new name Numbered headings Numbered lists can also be used for automatic numbering of all the headings in a
394. lbar 402 403 Outlines 402 Overlapping objects 276 277 291 292 Overwrite mode 32 P Page Background Format menu 115 Page borders displaying in the document 524 525 Page break 96 100 Page count 161 163 Page margins setting 100 101 Page number 104 161 163 Page orientation 100 101 Page Setup File menu 100 Pagination 96 Paper bins 100 102 Paper size 100 101 Paragraph Format menu 75 Borders tab 92 Drop Caps tab 90 Paragraph tab 76 77 78 79 80 81 Manual TextMaker 2016 Shading tab 91 Tabs tab 82 84 Text flow tab 96 98 328 329 Paragraph alignment 80 Paragraph breaks 524 526 Paragraph control 96 Paragraph formatting searching and replacing 155 Paragraph Style Format menu 129 132 133 135 Paragraph styles 128 137 Password for documents 501 for forms 314 315 Paste Edit menu 60 Paste Special Edit menu 61 Pattern 91 92 PDF export 477 Pica 75 76 Picture frames 247 248 279 inserting 279 properties 280 Pictures inserting 216 labeling 421 position and size 218 properties 219 rotating 254 scanning in 217 Point 64 75 76 Portrait format 100 101 Position of objects 252 256 POW function 396 398 Preview of files 33 35 Print File menu 35 467 Print date 161 162 Print Merge File menu 470 Print page background 546 548 Print Preview File menu 466 Print time 161 163 Printable object property 269 Printing 467 faxing 471 form faxes 475 form let
395. lculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 3 The formula that you have to enter in place of the question marks after Total is TOTAL HOURS PRICE The result of the calculation HOURS times PRICE has now been assigned to the variable TOTAL and this result is shown in the text What matters here is that if you later change the value of HOURS or PRICE the content of the vari able TOTAL will change accordingly 4 After 19 tax insert the formula TAX TOTAL 19 100 with Insert gt Calculation to calculate some tax of 19 This formula uses the total just calculated as a basis for a further calculation Here too what counts is that the result for TAX is automatically corrected for whenever the result for TOTAL changes 5 Finally calculate the Amount due as TOTAL TAX In the last step we opt not to define another variable We just want to get the result into the text we don t need to reference it anywhere else If you check the Display field names option on the View tab in the File gt Proper ties dialog the formulas in the text will become visible The invoice then ought to look something like this INVOICE Formula HOURS 2 hours Formula E 10 Total TOTAL HOURS PRICE t 19 tax Formula T TOTAL 19 100 Amount due Formula TOTAL TAX When you uncheck Display field names you will see the results in the text again To write an invoice for another customer all you
396. le for each heading that your document contains Some EPUB readers are able to display these bookmarks for example in a pane left of the document You can utilize this pane as an interactive table of contents just click on a heading to jump to the corresponding section in the document Hint If your reader does not display a bookmark pane search it for a command to display the table of contents or bookmarks and activate it 484 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Note Please note that in order to use this feature you have to outline the document by adding headings beforehand See the section Outlines page 402 for details Preferences tab This tab contains options related to the output of the EPUB file including the following m Image options Lets you choose if images should be stored using a lossless compression method or the lossy JPEG compression method If you choose the latter op tion the JPEG quality option becomes available and lets you modify the quali ty level of the compression Hint Lossless compression provides perfect image quality However if your document contains a large number of images especially photographs the re sulting file can become very large If this is the case you may want to switch to JPEG compression which provides a much higher compression rate for photographic images m Split EPUB text When exporting documents that contain a huge amount of text it is advi
397. le of the document Read this section to learn more about it m Changing the page background You can change the page background of your document s pages for example to add some color to them There are two different commands available for this Format gt Page Background and Format gt Chapter In this section you will learn how to work with these two commands and what differences there are be tween them Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting 99 Inserting manual page breaks Normally TextMaker fills the pages of a document automatically from top to bottom When the text reaches the end of a page an automatic page break is performed and the text is continued on the following page If you want to start a new page before the text has reached the end of the current page you can always insert a manual page break Whenever you want to do this position the text cursor at the point in the text where the new page is to begin and invoke Insert gt Break gt Page break Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcut TextMaker now inserts a forced page break When you need to remove a manual page break that you have forced in this man ner you can do so by positioning the text cursor at the beginning of the first line following the break and pressing the Backspace key lt _ Specifying a page break at the beginning of a specific paragraph You can force an early page break not only with the Insert gt Break
398. le of your choice on the Lines tab To learn more about AutoShapes refer to the section Drawings page 286 Linking text frames With TextMaker you can let text flow through multiple text frames that are linked together just as you could with a desktop publishing program If two frames are linked text that exceeds the limits of the first frame is automatically continued in the second frame Let s assume that you have created two text frames on one page and that you want text to flow from one to the next You would link these frames as follows 1 Click on the R icon in the Formatting toolbar or invoke the View gt Object Mode command to activate Object mode 2 Select the icon for Link text frames in the Object toolbar 3 Click on the text frame in which the text should begin 4 Click on the text frame you want to link to the initial frame Important This text frame must be empty 5 Finally click again on the R icon or invoke the View gt Object Mode com mand again to exit Object mode 278 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Now when you enter text in the first frame to the extent that it overflows that frame the text will be continued in the second frame You can even link together more than two frames To do this first link the first frame with the second then the second with a third etc To remove an existing link click on the first of two linked frames with the Link text frames tool Te
399. lename for the program to be started in the Command line field for example C WINDOWS NOTEPAD EXE 7 Optional If the program s own icon is not the one you want to use to represent the program in the toolbar you can enter the path and name for an icon file that you want to use in the Icon file field Note however that the icons used in toolbars are somewhat smaller than the usual Windows icons 8 Confirm with OK 9 The user defined icon is now set up If you want to add it to one of the toolbars drag it with the mouse into the desired toolbar As soon as you exit the dialog box with Close you can try your newly created icon In the example above clicking on the newly defined icon should start Win dows Notepad 566 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 If it does not work this is because the program path or filename is incorrect In that case edit the icon as described above to correct the error Using the toolbar menu Some toolbars end with a double arrow as shown in the following picture E Gl a When you click on this double arrow the toolbar menu will open This menu gives you quick access to all the toolbar related commands mentioned in the previous sections In detail the toolbar menu includes the following com mands m Add remove buttons This command opens a list of all icons available for a toolbar When you click on one of its entries the corresponding icon will instantaneously be ac
400. les In the sidebar select the style of interest with a single mouse click Then click on the Organize button at the bottom of the sidebar A little menu with commands for managing styles pops up allowing you to create styles delete styles rename styles etc Detailed information on each of these commands can be found in the section Paragraph styles beginning on page 128 Hint You can open this menu faster by right clicking on a style in the sidebar 136 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 E Creating a new paragraph style In the sidebar right click on the style on which the new style should be based on The menu mentioned above pops up There choose the New command Managing styles TextMaker s integrated style manager allows you to manage the character styles and paragraph styles of documents Its main purpose is to copy styles from one document to another To open the style manager choose the Format gt Manage Styles command Manage Styles x 1 World Languages tmd z 2 Untitled 6 Z 4 Bullets 1 Heading 1 1 Bullets indented A Heading Heading 1 2 gt 1 Heading 3 q Heading 2 1 Normal 1 Heading 3 a Normal a Hyperlink 1 Info Rename q Normal a Normal Delete Open Open Description Normal 18 pt Dark Blue Bold Level 1 6 pt Above 6 pt Below Keep with next Close By default the left list displays the styles of the current document while the right list is empty To
401. les To join two tables do the following 1 Delete any text between the two tables until only a blank paragraph is left between them 2 Position the text cursor in that empty paragraph 3 Press the key The two tables are now combined into one table 196 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Formatting tables The next pages will acquaint you with the commands available for formatting tables The following topics are covered Row properties Use the Table gt Row Properties command to change the formatting of the rows in a table including their row height and options that change the behavior of a row at page breaks m Cell properties Use the Table gt Cell Properties command to format individual table cells With it you can modify the width and margins of specific cells and change their borders and shading m Changing the overall properties of tables Use the Table gt Table Properties command to change the formatting of entire tables This command also allows you to set the borders and shading of an en tire table at once mw AutoFormat The Table gt AutoFormat command can be a real time saver it provides pre defined table styles that can be used to format an entire table with the push of a button Row properties The Table gt Row Properties command is for modifying the formatting of com plete rows in tables Before invoking this command select the rows whose format is to be changed If you
402. lets If you have selected the Bullet option in the Type group box the following options appear in the dialog Bullet group box Here you can select the bullet you want to use The Default row contains pre defined bullets from which you can choose while the Custom row contains user defined bullets If you click on one of the bullets in the Custom row and then click on the Change button at the end of that row you can select any symbol to be used as a bullet m Color default bullets only You can select a color for the bullet from the dropdown Color list If the pre defined colors presented in the list don t suit you you can always define new colors see section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 Tip If you set the color to Auto TextMaker automatically uses the font color assigned to the paragraph at the right of the bullet m Size default bullets only Here you can change the size in points of the bullet Tip When you select the Auto option TextMaker automatically uses the font size assigned to the paragraph at the right of the bullet 180 o Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 m Character button custom bullets only If you have selected a bullet from the Custom row the two options mentioned above are replaced by a Character button Click on this button if you want to change the character formatting size color emphasis etc of the bullet Tip If you do not make any
403. letterhead with the address filled in Lists and labels It is almost as easy to create lists and labels with TextMaker Address labels for example You choose the address database place its fields in a large edit con trol and select the label format from a list That s it printing can begin Printing envelopes You can also print the address of sender and recipient of a letter on an envelope All you have to do is to choose the paper format of the envelope and to specify the placement of the address database fields Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 339 E Creating a new database Although the database TMW DBF supplied with the program is all that many users need to manage their addresses TextMaker lets you define a new data base any time you want Here you learn how m Form letters and form faxes covered in the next chapter Creating form letters in TextMaker is easy you set up a letter in the normal way place database fields in it and select the database records to be used The form letter can then be printed or sent by fax You will find information about this in the chapter Form letters and form faxes beginning on page 367 Opening a database To open a database in TextMaker invoke the command Tools gt Edit Database A dialog box appears and TextMaker asks for the name of the database to be edited Type the name or select a file from the list of databases displayed Databases with the following for
404. line spacing will be changed according to your settings Methods of specifying the line spacing You can specify the line spacing in different ways The Line spacing dropdown list allows you to choose from the following methods E Single Automatic single line spacing Determines the optimum line spacing automatically If you increase the font size in the paragraph the line spacing will be increased accordingly If you decrease the font size the line spacing is reduced accordingly Multiple Multiple of automatic single line spacing Just like the Single option this option determines the optimum line spacing automatically However whenever required you can increase or decrease the line spacing easily Simply enter the desired number of lines into the edit box right of this option Some examples When you enter 1 5 in the Lines edit box the automatically determined spacing is multiplied by 1 5 giving you automatic one and a half line spacing 78 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 When you enter 2 the automatically determined spacing is multiplied by 2 giving you automatic double line spacing Entering 1 corresponds to choosing the option Single giving you automatic single line spacing E Exactly Fixed line spacing If you choose this option you can enter the exact line spacing manually in points Here the line spacing will not be adapted to the font size Tip Arule of thumb for
405. ll find additional information about the application of numbered lists in section Applying numbered lists beginning on page 182 In the dialog box for setting up and editing numbered lists you can make the following settings Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 177 General options Simple list or Hierarchical list The option you select here determines the overall layout of the numbered list for it controls the type of the list Select Simple list for a simple enumeration with only one level thus 1 2 3 etc Select Hierarchical list for a hierarchical enumeration with multiple levels for example 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc m Use paragraph s outline level as list level Available only when the type of the numbered list has been set to Hierarchical list When this option is checked the outline levels of the paragraphs to which the numbered list is applied are used as the levels in the automatic numbering of the list For example if a paragraph has an outline level of 3 is thus a third or der heading it becomes a level 3 list item when the list is applied thus 1 1 1 for example Note When this option is checked numbering is applied only to headings Normal text paragraphs with outline level zero is not numbered You will find information about document outline levels in section Outlines beginning on page 402 If the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option is not checked you
406. ll refuse to display the file If you leave this field empty any user can open the file without having to enter a password Password to set permissions Additionally you can restrict the access rights for the PDF file To do this first enter a password required to change the access rights Then use the options in the Permission section of the dialog to specify which permissions should be granted Background information In some PDF viewers a command for changing the access rights is available If users try to invoke this command they will be asked for the password you have entered here m Permissions Here you can specify which types of actions should be permitted Only availa ble when you have specified a password to set permissions see above 482 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Exporting a document to an EPUB file As an alternative to the PDF format you can also export documents to an EPUB file EPUB is an open standard for e books electronic books and other electronic publications The EPUB format can be read by most hardware e book readers For PCs and mobile devices various viewer applications are available As opposed to the PDF format where the text formatting is retained exactly as in the original document EPUB files are usually re rendered by the e book reader in order to optimize the text flow to the given display size Accordingly your docu ment might look quite different in an e book r
407. llowed in expres sions see section Formulas and functions on page 391 If you type SQRT 2 select it and invoke Edit gt Evaluate you will get the square root of 2 as a result One line limit The selected calculation must be within one line of text If you select several lines of text the command Edit gt Evaluate is not available and is grayed out in the menu For lengthy expressions use the command Insert gt Calculation Summing the contents of table cells Such calculations can be performed in tables as well There is yet another feature in connection with tables E If you have selected a calculation that is within a table cell you can get the result with the command Edit gt Evaluate as described above m On the other hand if you select several complete table cells the command Sum cells will become available in the Edit menu If you invoke it TextMaker com putes the sum of the values in the selected cells A window then appears and tells you the result If you want simply to learn what it is and make no further use of it click on Close Alternatively you can click on the Copy button TextMaker then copies the result of the calculation to the clipboard Now you can insert the value at any position you like in the doc ument with the command Edit gt Paste Formulas and functions On the next pages you will learn about the rules you have to observe when con structing formulas Then all of TextMaker s
408. lls at the bottom of a table simply by pressing the key when the text cursor is in the last cell TextMaker then automatical ly extends the table by adding a new row In general you can insert new cells into a table by doing the following 1 Position the text cursor in the cell before which the new cells are to be inserted 2 Invoke the Table gt Insert Cells command 3 In certain cases a dialog appears to allow you to specify the way the new cells are to be inserted see below 4 Click on Insert to insert the new cells before the current cell or on Append to insert them at the end of the table The cells are now inserted If you did not select complete rows or columns prior to invoking the Table gt Insert Cells command a dialog appears that allows you to specify the way the cells are to be inserted Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 193 Insert or Append Cells Ss Append Entire columns Single cells Cancel Number 1 2 4 The dialog presents the following options Option Meaning Entire rows Complete rows of cells are inserted Entire columns Complete columns of cells are inserted Single cells Cells are inserted on a cell by cell basis depending on the current selection For example if you selected 4x4 cells prior to invoking the command 4x4 cells are inserted An additional option allows you to specify the Number of cells to be inserted If for example you select Entire rows an
409. lly snaps to that guide as if guides were magnetic This is useful for example when you want several picture frames or text frames to be precisely aligned alongside one another 574 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Enabling the Snap to guides function Before attempting to use guides you should check to see if the Snap to guides option is enabled To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 On the Guides tab make sure that the Snap to guides option is enabled If this option is disabled the guides can still be displayed and changed but they will not have any effect on the insertion and repositioning of objects Showing the guides on the screen In the same dialog the option Show guides allows you to specify whether or not the guidelines should be displayed on the screen By default this option is enabled Note If you disable it the guidelines are no longer displayed but nevertheless retain their function Note Guidelines are displayed on the screen only they do not appear on the printed page Adding guides under menu control To set up new guides do the following 1 Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 Under Horizontal or Vertical enter the position at which the guideline should be placed and then click the Set button Adding guides with the mouse Alternatively you can set up new guides with the mouse 1 Click on the icon in the For
410. lowing pages the individual components of TextMaker s user interface are described in detail ia TextMaker Untitled 1 o a File Edit View Format Insert Object Table Tools Window Help e X acA ma e Anann 9 iih z R Normal gt TimesNewRoman 10 W LU 4 mi r L1col1 Section 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 1 English United Ins TextMaker 5 application window Note Most of the illustrations in this manual were prepared with the Windows version of TextMaker On other operating systems some of the controls have a slightly different appearance but their modes of operation are identical Title bar At the top of the application window you will find the title bar TextMaker Untitled 1 ce C fsa The title bar indicates the name of the application and the name of the current document Manual TextMaker 2016 The application screen o 23 If this document contains changes that have not been saved yet a little asterisk is displayed behind its name Menu bar The menu bar is found directly under the title bar File Edit View Format Insert Object Table Tools Window Help It contains all of TextMaker s commands in the form of clearly arranged menus Click on a menu item to open a menu and invoke a command Context menu In addition a menu called context menu is also available This menu contains different commands depending on the current situation For example when
411. ls gt Options command 2 Switch to the Language tab 3 Select the desired language from the Default Language list When you compose new documents they are automatically formatted in the default language If you never write documents in which other languages occur you don t need to concern yourself with any of what follows 318 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 Formatting text in another language In the last section you learned how to set the default language that TextMaker is to use in the normal case for the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus Beyond that you can format any segments of text you like in another language for example if you want to use a Spanish language citation in a document that is for the most part in English To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the segment that contains foreign language text 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font tab 4 Choose the desired language from the Language list Now the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus know that this segment of text is in another language and they produce the appropriate results The Language list contains two entries with special meaning E The language Default This is the default setting Normally all the documents you compose are formatted in the default lan guage As you have learned in the preceding section the default language can be selected with Tools gt Options m The language
412. lso two keyboard shortcuts available for moving selected text Ait Shifto 4 moves the text one paragraph up moves it one paragraph down Formatting headings There is nothing magical about headings They are just paragraphs that have been assigned to different outline levels Accordingly headings can be formatted as desired using the formatting commands with which you are already familiar Tip Formatting all the headings at a given level collectively keyword paragraph style TextMaker formats headings automatically with specific paragraph styles level one headings are always formatted with the Heading 1 paragraph style level two headings with the Heading 2 style etc Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 407 Thus if you want to change the appearance of all headings at a specific level all you have to do is edit the corresponding paragraph style To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the style corresponding to the headings you want to modify from the list For example if you want to modify all level one headings select the Heading 1 style 3 Click on Edit 4 A dialog box appears to enable you to set the desired paragraph formatting Hint As needed you can also modify the character formatting by clicking on the Character button on the Paragraph tab 5 Make the desired changes 6 Click on OK 7 Exit the dialog box with Close If nece
413. lustration above hold the mouse button down and drag it to the desired position When changing the Left indent be careful to catch hold of the correct triangle the lower triangle is the one that will affect this indent Likewise the upper triangle is only for the First line indent The rectangular slider under both triangles changes both the Left and First indents together Using the keyboard Indents can also be changed using the following keyboard shortcuts E Increase Left indent ctr M E Decrease Left indent ctri Shifto E Increase hanging indent etri T m Decrease hanging indent cetri shifte Increases the Left indent while at the same times decreasing the First line indent As a result the first line of the paragraph keeps its position and only the other lines are indented Line spacing Line spacing is the distance between the lines of a paragraph Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 77 To change the line spacing do the following 1 5 Place the text cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple paragraphs to be modified Invoke the Format gt Paragraph command Switch to the Paragraph tab You will find the options for line spacing in the Line spacing group box First select the method you want to use to specify the line spacing see below from the dropdown list box Then enter the spacing in the edit box to its right When you confirm with OK the
414. ly the NORMAL TMV template is a suitable basis for creating a complete ly new template starting from scratch Important As a rule you should not modify the default template NORMAL TMV Nevertheless if you want to do this you ought to be aware that it contains the default values for page paragraph and character formatting as well as many additional defaults Any modification will affect all documents that you subse quently create new on the basis of the default template NORMAL TMV If you want to change a default format for example the typeface so that the format will be applied by default to all documents that you create in the future on the basis of the NORMAL TMV template open the template make the change in this case to the character formatting for the Normal paragraph style and save the template You can also choose a template other than NORMAL TMV to be the default for new files To do this invoke File gt New select the desired template and click on Set Default From now on TextMaker will always offer this template as the default when you create a new document 142 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Multi column page layouts In TextMaker it is possible to lay out text in multiple columns Within a document you can change the number of columns as often as you like Entering text in a section of the document that has multiple columns is not much different than entering text in a single column section Th
415. m Apply to Determines what parts of the document will be affected by the settings you make in this dialog Whole document the entire document This point forward that part of the document beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the document Selected text the selected text Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 187 Current section the current section Tip You can use the Insert gt Break gt Section break command to split up the document into as many sections as you want Selected sections all sections included in the current selection To end of section the segment of text beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the current section 188 o Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables Would you like to lay out certain parts of your document including text numbers and or pictures in tabular form to make them more legible Then simply insert a table into the document This is an example of As you can see the text The columns in a table can be of a table within a table cell is different widths wrapped automatically Each cell can have its Each cell can be shaded TextMaker automatically determines own border individually the optimum height for each row of cells Of course you could also use tabs if you only want to set up a simple list but tables offer the following advantages m Within a table cell text
416. mail You can send us questions by mail or fax at the following address SoftMaker Software GmbH Kronacher Str 7 90427 Nuernberg Germany Fax 49 911 303 796 About this manual TextMaker has a wide variety of functions In the beginning you might find this a bit intimidating but don t worry You don t have to master all the commands While you re getting started just use those you need Later when you would like to make use of TextMaker s extended functions you can review the appropriate pages in the manual The manual for TextMaker is laid out as follows The chapter Installation and program startup page 19 covers the installa tion of TextMaker You also learn how to start the program m The chapter The application screen page 23 describes the individual components of TextMaker s main window Ideal for beginners m The chapter Basics page 29 acquaints you with TextMaker s most im portant commands Ideal for beginners Manual TextMaker 2016 Welcome e 17 E The chapter The TextMaker Tour page 37 treats the topic of text editing in tutorial form and introduces you to the operation of TextMaker with some prac tical examples m The chapters Working with selections page 57 and following are the reference part of the manual These chapters are organized by subject like a reference book and describe all the functions of the program in detail System requiremen
417. mand File gt File Manager or you can use the keyboard shortcut Fiz 492 e Document management Manual TextMaker 2016 File Manager c ba X File name Title Subject Keywe cs Scotland B amp B tmd Bed amp Breakfast List prices C Er lpocstacotlend taknoral tmd Balmoral Castle General Informationen Sc C Docs Scotland Edinburgh tmd Edinburgh Fringe Festival Sc C Docs Scotland Games tmd Highland Games Listings Sc C Docs Scotland Glasgow tmd Glasgow General Information Sd C Docs Scotland Highlands tmd Highlands General Information Sc C Docs Scotland History tmd Scotland s History Scotland s History Sc C Docs Scotland Loch Ness tmd Loch Ness General Information Sc C Docs Scotland Lowlands tmd Lowlands General Information Sc C Doacs Scotland Whisky Trail tmd Whisky Whisky Trail Overview sc 4 w r Close Search Output Delete Preview Rename Using your mouse you can resize the File Manager window or move it to a differ ent position anytime The widths of the columns can be changed by dragging the lines that separate the column headers By clicking on one of the column headers you can sort the files according to the contents of the column under that header You can use the Search button to change to another folder Apart from that this button also provides access to search functions that work with document summary information so that you can search for specific titles subjects aut
418. manipu late and therefore the best choice for most kinds of forms Objects in frames e g dropdown list frames on the other hand are freely posi tionable on the page They can always be moved with the mouse but once posi tioned they remain fixed in place on the page even when text lines are added or deleted above them 300 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 Inserting forms objects To insert a forms object into the text do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Forms Object command 2 A sub menu opens There select the desired object type 3 For some types of objects a dialog appears at this point to enable you to make various settings for the object After you have made the necessary settings con firm with OK The object will now be inserted You will find detailed information about each individual type of forms object in the sections Text fields and following beginning on page 305 Using the Forms toolbar You can also use the Forms toolbar to insert forms objects To activate or deacti vate this toolbar invoke the View gt Toolbars command and click on the checkbox in front of Forms Forms asd E a e EME anaa The icons in this toolbar represent the following functions from left to right E Insert text field E Insert checkbox Insert dropdown list Insert text frame Insert checkbox frame Insert dropdown list frame Insert label Insert groupbox Enable disable the shading
419. matic numbering page 171 and Numbering headings page 410 E Insert above or below If this option is checked the style reference field returns solely a hint on the position of the found text either above or below rather than its content If the text is located above the field the field displays the text above If the text is located below the field the field displays the text below This allows you to insert references like see above or see below Updating style reference fields Like all kinds of fields style reference fields are updated automatically when the document is printed They can also be updated manually if desired with the Tools gt Update Fields command For more information on working with fields see the chapter Fields page 161 Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 439 Footnotes When a word or a phrase in your text requires explanatory comments you can place such comments in footnotes Footnotes usually appear at the bottom of the pages on which they are referenced however they can also be grouped together at the ends of chapters or even at the end of the document Footnotes consist of two parts a superscripted footnote marker in the body text and the footnote text to which it refers When you encounter heavy fog you should immediately slow 2 down and turn on your fog lights l Visibility less than 150 feet 2 Ma
420. matically so usually you don t have to care about that at all In case you want to apply manual changes to the numbering you have the following options Modifying the number of an individual footnote To modify the number of one individual footnote place the text cursor behind it and invoke the Insert gt Footnote gt Edit Footnote command In the dialog change the numbering of the footnote marker from Automatic to Custom and type in the desired number Modifying the overall numbering of footnotes To modify settings related to the numbering of all footnotes in the document invoke the Insert gt Footnote gt Options command Its dialog allows you to 442 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 change the start value the type of numbering and other settings See section Footnote options page 444 Changing the formatting of footnotes You can change the formatting of the footnote text or its footnote marker any time Formatting footnote text To change the formatting of the text of a footnote simply set the text cursor into the footnote text and apply the desired formatting Tip When you want to change the formatting of the text for all the footnotes in the entire document TextMaker can save you a lot of work All you need to do is change the Footnote text paragraph style that TextMaker creates automatically as soon as you insert the first footnote By default the text of al
421. mats are supported File format Description dBase DOS Database with DOS character set This is the default format see note below dBase Windows Database with Windows character set dBase Unicode Database with Unicode character set This is a special variant of the dBase format developed by SoftMaker that supports complex scripts Asian scripts for example However apart from TextMaker only very few programs support this format To select a database format open the Files of type list in the dialog mentioned above Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs utilize the DOS format instead of the Windows format If you are not sure whether a database contains the DOS or the Windows format open the file as dBase DOS and check if characters with accents e g or 4 are displayed correctly If they are not close the database and reopen it in dBase Windows format 340 o Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Using the database module When you open a database as described in the previous section TextMaker s database module appears The database module not only allows you to edit your databases but also includes several expanded database functions This section acquaints you with all the functions this powerful module has to offer Topics covered The database module s main window List and form view Browsing through data records Calling up a data record
422. matting toolbar or invoke the command View gt Object Mode to activate Object mode 2 Now you can drag vertical guides out of the vertical ruler and horizontal guides out of the horizontal ruler Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 575 To do this click with the mouse on one of the rulers and drag the mouse pointer left mouse button held down into the text area Release the mouse button when you reach the position at which you would like the guide to be set 3 Finally click once more on the R icon or invoke View gt Object Mode again in order to exit Object mode Note If the ruler you want to use is not displayed invoke Tools gt Options switch to the View tab and there enable Horizontal ruler or Vertical ruler as needed Changing the tolerance for guides By default a frame or drawing snaps automatically to a guide when it is moved with the mouse to within 8 pixels of the guide However the tolerance level is customizable If you raise the tolerance to 20 for example the object will snap to the guide when it is at a distance of 20 or fewer pixels from the guide To change the tolerance invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid switch to the Guides tab and enter the desired value in pixels in the Tolerance field Moving and deleting guides To delete or reposition a guide proceed as follows Keyboard Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid To remove a guide select it from the list and click the Delete button To r
423. mber If the cell s content is to be treated as text use the dollar sign for example A1 Please note that calculations with short cell references e g A1 A2 are possi ble only within a table If you would like to refer to table cells outside a table put the table s name and a period in front of the cell address For example if the table s name was Tablel you could write Tablel A1 Tablel A2 See also section Objects in calculations page 386 384 e Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculating the sum over a range of table cells The SUM function is especially useful for adding numbers in table cells Simply enter the first and last cells as parameters TextMaker adds the values in all the cells in the range For example you can add the contents of cells B2 through B5 with the formula SUM B2 B5 Calculating with adjacent cells made easy Tip In some arithmetic functions e g SUM you can use symbolic cell references in order to reference all cells directly adjacent to a cell The following types of symbolic cell references are available m ABOVE represents the cells above the current cell m BELOW represents the cells below the current cell m LEFT represents the cells to the left of the current cell RIGHT represents the cells to the right of the current cell For example the formula SUM ABOVE calculates the sum of the cells directly above a cell The followin
424. mbination Home Press the Enter key seven times to insert some blank lines This makes room for our own address which is to be entered later on By the way you can remove blank lines you might have inserted inadvertently with the Backspace key _ Next press the key once to position the text cursor in the blank line above the text of the letter Now type the name and address of the person to whom the letter is to be sent Fred Backfish 7 Shepard s Way Salmon River Oregon 77123 Next insert additional blank lines by pressing the Enter key eleven times to create a space between the address and the text of the letter We have now created the most important elements of a simple letter and at this point would like to save them Saving the practice letter Note You will find detailed information about this topic in the section Saving documents beginning on page 36 To save the current document use the Save command in the File menu From now on we will use the notation File gt Save to represent this Invoke this command as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 39 Mouse Click on File in the menu bar The File menu opens and you can invoke the Save command with a mouse click Keyboard PC users can alternatively use the underlined letters in the menus to invoke the corresponding commands Type them while holding down the Alt key To save the file press for File and then for Save
425. ment It opens a dialog box with the following options Position Normally the footnote texts are placed at the bottom of the pages on which they are referenced You can specify that they should be placed elsewhere by changing the setting of the Position option Bottom of page This is the default setting the footnote texts are placed at the end of the pages on which they are referenced E End of chapter Select this option if you have used Insert gt Break gt Chapter break to divide your document into multiple chapters and you want the footnote texts refer enced in each chapter to appear grouped together at the end of the chapter For more information on the use of chapters see the section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 End of document With this option you obtain what are called end notes all the footnote texts appear together at the end of the document Numbering group box Here you make settings that control the automatic numbering of the footnotes 444 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 m Type Here you can change the type of numbering used For example you can select letters instead of numerals as markers for successive footnotes The succession of footnotes is then represented by A B C rather than by 1 2 3 E Start at Here you can specify the number with which the enumeration should begin The default value is 1 If you enter
426. ment click on Close Spell checker not working correctly If the spell checker classifies many words as incorrectly spelled when in fact they are not it is likely that the text segment in which they occur is formatted in the wrong language In this case select the text segment invoke Format gt Character and set the Language option on the Font tab to Default or to the language in which the segment was composed Background spell checking The background spell checker constantly checks the text for spelling errors Incorrectly written words are underlined in red and can be corrected manually or with the aid of a context menu Activating background spell checking To activate background spell checking invoke Tools gt Options switch to the Language tab and enable the option Use background spell checking 322 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 TextMaker now examines the entire document for spelling errors on an ongoing basis It not only recognizes existing spelling errors in the document but also immediately examines changes and additions to the text for correct spelling Correcting misspelled words Misspelled words are highlighted on the screen with red underscores This allows you to see at a glance all misspelled words so that you can either correct them immediately or at a later time To correct one of these underlined words either simply change its spelling by hand or click with the right mouse button on the w
427. mentary fonts for TextMaker To do this enter the subdirectory in which the font files reside If you want to enter multiple directories separate them with colons TextMaker can then use these fonts in addition to the fonts available to it from the operating system Note Changes to this setting become effective only after the program is restarted Preferences Fonts tab The Fonts tab in the Tools gt Options dialog allows you to specify which fonts to display in font lists e g in the dialog of the Format gt Character command The tab presents a list of all fonts installed on your system To activate or deacti vate a font in the list click on the checkbox in front of its name Fonts where you have removed the checkmark are no longer displayed in font lists Background information The fonts installed on your system by default contain several fonts that you will probably never need for example fonts that contain solely glyphs for foreign languages that you don t use If you like you can hide such fonts as described above Use font filtering of the operating system Windows 7 or later Users of Windows 7 and later will additionally find an option named Use font filtering of the operating system on this tab When activated your system will automatically hide all fonts that contain solely glyphs for foreign languages in font lists Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 545 Document properties With the File
428. mmand To restore the window select it from with Window menu Arranging document windows Android This feature is not available under Android since the Android version supports maximized document windows only TextMaker can arrange your document windows automatically as required E With the command Window gt Cascade you tell TextMaker to stack the win dows one behind another as in a file cabinet The active window is placed at the top of the stack m With Window gt Tile Vertically the windows are arranged one below another With Window gt Tile Horizontally they are arranged one beside another To change the size and position of a window manually do the following Mouse If the window is not maximized you can position the mouse cursor in the window s title bar hold down the mouse button and drag the window to a new position You can change the size of a window by dragging the right or bottom edge of the window to a new position Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Ait minus key and select the Move or Size command Now you can change the position or size of the window with the arrow keys These commands are not available when the window is maximized Manual TextMaker 2016 Document windows e 519 Using document tabs When you open two or more documents a bar with document tabs appears below the toolbars One tab is displayed for each open document window T Untitled 1 T Hiking Tour tmd T Le
429. mmmm name of the month spelled out April yy year with two places 15 yyyy year with four places 2015 h hour 12 hour format 8 hh hour with two places 12 hour format 08 H hour 24 hour format 8 HH hour with two places 24 hour format 08 M minute 5 MM minute with two places 05 S second 0 SS second with two places 00 am show am pm following the hour am AM show AM PM following the hour AM In addition to these abbreviations you can use any punctuation characters period slash etc you like in your entry Example If you enter dddd d mmmm yyyy as the format in the Format field the date 4 26 2015 will be represented as Wednesday 26 April 2015 Changing the language You can change the Language of a text segment in the dialog for the Format gt Character command When use this command to format text in a given language the names of months and days of the week that result from date fields are automatically changed accordingly see also section Setting the lan guage beginning on page 318 166 e Fields Manual TextMaker 2016 Inserting the date and time as text With the Insert gt Date Time command you can insert the current date or time into the document as fixed text Unlike the command described on the preceding pages for inserting date and time fields this command uses the current date or time to create a fixed text that will not be updated automatically When you invoke Insert gt Date Time a di
430. mplates supplied with the program you don t need to fill in these values yourself since the fields are already filled in for you It makes sense to enter values here only when you create new fax templates with an attached database You can either enter fixed values in these fields or you can click on the buttons to the right of these fields to select database fields from the assigned database for entry 552 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 You will find detailed information about this topic in section Settings for fax transmissions beginning on page 474 Document properties Internet tab The Internet tab in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to change the colors and background of the current document and set other HTML related options Do not save colors in HTML file If you enable this option the color settings you make on this tab will apply only within TextMaker They will not be preserved when you save the document as an HTML file So if you open the HTML file in a web browser the document will appear in the browser s default colors not in the colors set here Show blink style as Text that is formatted with the HTML attribute blink is not displayed in TextMaker as blinking but is indicated with the color selected here By default this color is yellow Background color Here you can change the document s background color With the default setting Auto the backg
431. mple You want to sort the following three paragraphs Peter Miller Tab 5 University Ave Tab Pleasantville NY 12345 Thomas Chris Howe Ttab 24 Park Drive Tab Cambridge NJ 20220 Claudia Fisher tab 1024 13th Street TabJForest Park IL 98765 In this case you should set the Separator option to Tabs since the separate ele ments of each address name street city are delimited by tabs Advantage Now you can make use of the Sort by option available in the sort command dialog to specify a sort by Column 1 Column 2 or Column 3 Column 1 stands for the names Column 2 for the streets Column 3 for the cities If you selected Spaces instead of Tabs as the separator TextMaker would see every word in a paragraph as belonging to a separate column and would produce an unwanted result First paragraph contains headings If the first of the selected paragraphs contains headings you should check this option so that TextMaker will not include the first paragraph in the sort Example The selected paragraphs contain addresses The first paragraph contains headings like Name Street City etc that identify the different parts of the addresses In this case you should check this option to ensure that the headings will not be incorrectly sorted along with the parts of the addresses to which they refer but will remain in the first paragraph Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 211 Case sensitive If you check this option s
432. n This will switch to the character styles function of the sidebar The sidebar now displays all character styles available in the document allowing you to perform the following actions m Applying a character style First select the characters to be formatted in your document Then double click on the desired style in the sidebar Alternatively select the style with a single click and then click on the Apply button at the bottom of the sidebar Editing a character style In the sidebar select the style of interest with a single mouse click Then click on the Edit button at the bottom of the sidebar m Managing character styles In the sidebar select the style of interest with a single mouse click Then click on the Organize button at the bottom of the sidebar A little menu with commands for managing styles pops up allowing you to create styles delete styles rename styles etc Detailed information on each of these commands can be found in the section Character styles beginning on page 120 Hint You can open this menu faster by right clicking on a style in the sidebar Creating a new character style In the sidebar right click on the style on which the new style should be based on The menu mentioned above pops up There choose the New command Paragraph styles You can save a frequently needed paragraph format indentation tab stops align ment etc in a paragraph style and apply it repeat
433. n see also section Inserting SmartText entries beginning on page 335 To exit the dialog click the Close button If the active SmartText entry has been changed and not yet saved TextMaker will ask automatically if it should save the changes Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 337 Database TextMaker provides an easy to use dBase compatible database module It is seam lessly integrated into the word processor and provides all the functions needed to manage addresses and other information You can enter and edit data search for specific items and much more In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know to work with databases in TextMaker m Opening a database In the first section you will learn how to open a database You use the command Tools gt Edit Database for this E Using the database module Next you will get acquainted with the powerful database module that is inte grated into TextMaker This module allows you to edit databases and also in cludes several expanded database functions for selecting sorting and deleting records for example Importing individual addresses via document templates Here you will learn how simple it can be to write everyday documents with TextMaker You invoke the command File gt New and choose one of the letter or fax templates supplied with the program Now the database appears Simply choose the desired address click on Insert and TextMaker sets up a
434. n you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second 4 Select the Create SmartText Entry command from the context menu 5 Type sales department 6 Confirm with OK The result is the same the SmartText entry sd has now been created If you want to learn more about the background spell checker see section Background spell checking beginning on page 322 Inserting SmartText entries Once you define a SmartText entry you can use it anytime as you compose your documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 335 Type the name of the SmartText entry sd in our example in the text and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuation character TextMaker immediately replaces sd with the content of the SmartText entry in our example sales department Note If this does not work the Expand SmartText entries option might be disabled If so invoke the command Tools gt Options switch to the Language tab and turn on this option Alternatively you can use a dialog to insert SmartText entries in the text by invok ing the command Insert gt SmartText choosing the desired entry and then click ing the Insert button The Apply formatting option has the following meaning in this context Off Normally this option is turned off The SmartText entry is accordingly insert ed without formatting it is rendered in
435. n TextMaker s dialog boxes not only in inches but also in other units of measure To enter a value in specific units simply add one of the following units of measure after the number Unit Explanation cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equals 1 in pi pica 1 pi equals 12 pt The default unit of measure depends on your computer s region settings For example if you type 7 62 cm as the position for a tab stop TextMaker puts it at 3 in 7 62 cm Back to our practice letter Now that the tab stops for the line Your reference etc and the line under it have been set we want to put something in the second line Move the text cursor to the beginning of this line line 18 and type MB Tab 10 29 07 Tab HG Tab 10 25 07 You see since this line was selected along with the line above it when the tab stops were set those same tab stops are used here too Of course what is still missing is today s date In the next lesson segment we will let TextMaker insert it automatically and in this way we will get acquainted with fields Inserting dates and other fields Today s date should be inserted in the area below Date which has remained empty up until now Of course we don t want to type it manually rather we leave this task to TextMaker gt Insert a tab following the text you just entered with the key and invoke the command Insert gt Field 50 o
436. n choose how the line should be justified Left at the left margin Right at the right margin or Centered in the middle of the page Color Here you can choose the line s color You can always define new colors to supplement those that are available by default see section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 3D shading If this option is enabled the line is rendered with a shadow effect Tip With thin lines this effect is hardly noticeable Thus it is recommended to increase the line s thickness when using the 3D shading effect Color of 3D shading You can choose the color of the 3D shading here Creating links You can put hyperlinks in TextMaker documents and then follow them by clicking with the mouse 462 o Internet functions Manual TextMaker 2016 For example you can place a link to a website in a document When the user clicks on it the web browser starts automatically and presents the page You can also insert a link to another TextMaker document allowing the document to be opened automatically by clicking on the link Creating a link To create a link proceed as follows 1 Select the text that is to be made into a link 2 Invoke the command Format gt Link 3 Enter the target of the link in the URL or file name box that is enter the path and name of the internet resource or file to which the selected text is to refer Links to web pages must be entered as http
437. n of the line is variable only in increments of 45 degrees Annotation Arrows are simply lines see above with the End option in the object properties Lines tab set to an arrowhead Connectors straight elbow and curved The three alo Straight Connector Elbow Connector and Curved Con nector tools allow you to draw connecting lines between two objects You can see the differences among these three kinds of connector in the following illustration A A A Straight Elbow Curved Connector Connector Connector To use one of these tools select it and then drag the mouse pointer from one object to another holding down the mouse button Tip When you move the mouse pointer over an object small blue boxes appear at various points on the object These boxes indicate where the connector line can dock to the object Rectangles rounded rectangles and ellipses circles The three H LJ Rectangle Rounded Rectangle and Ellipse Circle tools allow you to insert rectangles and ellipses Every time you click on one of these tools the corresponding drawing object is inserted in a standard size You can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To change its size drag one of the handles on its corners 288 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 In the case of rounded rectangles you can additionally change the rounding of the corners To do this select the rectangle A yellow handle will then appear at one of its corner
438. n order to improve the legibility of the plain text in the document In this view the document is presented not as a sequence of separate pages but as a single continuous text 556 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Master Pages Outline Actual Size etc Object Mode Forms Mode Toolbars Full Screen Horizontal Ruler Manual TextMaker 2016 Additionally the lines of text are automatically rewrapped to utilize the full width of the document window The latter can be deactivated anytime by turning off the option Wrap text to window in the Tools gt Options dialog View tab Please note In the continuous view some components of the document will not be displayed anymore This includes all types of frames and drawings as well as page head ers footers and footnotes Switches to the master pages view In this view you can edit only the document s master page s Objects residing on the master page will be replicated on every page of the document See the section Master pages beginning on page 108 Switches to the Outline view In this view you can see the structure of the document assign text to a header and assign existing headers to higher or lower levels See the section Outlines beginning on page 402 You can set the zoom level with the commands View gt Actual Size through View gt Zoom Level See the section Changing the zoom level beginning on page 558 Turns Object mo
439. n order to use this feature you have to outline the document by adding headings beforehand See the section Outlines page 402 for details Create interactive form Determines if forms objects text boxes dropdown lists etc as well as text frames and tables should be exported as editable objects By default this option is not checked If you activate it such objects can be edited when the PDF file is viewed in a PDF viewer provided that the corre sponding permissions are set see Security tab For more information on the creation of forms see the chapter Forms begin ning on page 295 E Create tagged PDF If this option is checked information about the logical structure of the docu ment will be included in the PDF file This information is required in order to produce barrier free PDF files that for example can also be used with screen readers or applications that are able to read the text in a PDF out loud Export comments You can add comments to a document using the Tools gt Comments command as described in section Using comments page 447 478 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 When this option is enabled these comments will appear not only in the origi nal document but also in the PDF file Note Regular text will be reduced in size to make room for the comments Thus its measurements will not correspond to the measurements specified for the original document
440. n you delete text it is colored and struck throuch m When you change the formatting of text it is colored In addition a vertical line appears in the margin beside each line that contains a change providing an indication that a change was made at that point Step 3 Accepting rejecting changes When all the desired changes have been made they can be either accepted or removed one by one Use the Reviewing toolbar described in the introduction for this purpose Reviewing xl BPR a BAY Y VY HOS Ble The Reviewing toolbar This toolbar appears automatically when the document contains changes that were made with the Track changes function enabled If it does not appear invoke the command View gt Toolbars and enable the checkbox in front of Reviewing The following icons on the Reviewing toolbar are responsible for working with tracked changes Icon Function Ww Track changes on off Enables disables the Track changes function as described earlier Corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Changes gt Track Changes Y Go to previous change Positions the text cursor at the previous change Corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Changes gt Previous Change Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions e 455 Go to next change Positions the text cursor at the next change Corresponds to the menu command Tools gt Changes gt Next Change Accept current change Accepts the change at whi
441. naea E nia eepe 305 Textfeld Sa e e a ae i A RAS I Eo E ESES S 305 Text frame Sn r ere e aee eaa aea e A TENPE EES a O EE S aans 307 CHECKBOXES drn r e e a i ano a a rni 307 Checkbox frame Sene eheee aerer Ean E oraa aaa a resani 309 Dropdown Sts appin hoen aee an Ea ape breins 309 Dropdown list frames ehee eren aerei eais ier aeri ri 311 Labels and gro pbokES sprono errn soiin Eeri aior prae 311 Forms advanced functions 3 cscessctssciseistssnsosessceesgesssesoet sseesstetecnsesessonseges 313 Changing the tab order is 325 0 ccsscessesecvabsstssesceedscesh co ssestescevuaststsnsconeessesesee 313 Protecting contents of forms Objects eee ee eeeceeecesecesecesecneecneeeneeens 314 Protecting forMS js 35 sssssescscsssedssetspescetteceasde tesesceedscesh ga bssesdencevaaedstsnscoeveseaes see 314 Calculating with forms Objects eee eee eeseeesceeeceeecesecesecssecsaecseeeneeens 316 Language tools 317 Setting the langage ionisiertes 318 Setting the default language isisisi Aasauessoesenter iat gneanete terete 318 Formatting text in another language eee eeeeeceeeceseceecesecnneceeeneeens 319 Application examples s cscdscessiesscessees sete diay eel del Siena Rahs 319 Spell checking minio ea E E E Aus sta naieerse EA 320 Manual spellicheCkin gs nneniennn A 321 Background spell Checking 0 0 0 ee eeeeseeeeeeceescesecesecsecsaecssecaecaeeeneeees 322 Conversion to new German spelling 0 eee eeceeeceseceecesecseeseeeneseneeee
442. nd replacing In this chapter you will get acquainted with all the functions that have to do with searching and replacing text and formatting Searching and Replacing You can search for terms in the text and if required replace them with other terms For example if a text contained several occurrences of the name Smith misspelled Smithe you could direct TextMaker to replace all occurrences of Smithe with Smith In addition it is possible to search and replace formatting such as the format ting for characters and paragraphs Bookmarks Bookmarks provide another way to get quickly to specific points in the docu ment You can set a bookmark at any position in the document you wish After giving the bookmark a name you can use the Edit gt Go to command to return to the bookmarked position any time you wish You can insert as many book marks as you like in a document m The Go to Command The Edit gt Go to command also allows you to move to specific positions in the document according to other criteria for example you can move to a specific page a specific chapter a specific object etc m Navigating documents with the sidebar The sidebar provides an even faster way to navigate your documents It pre sents a list of all headings bookmarks objects etc at the right of the document window When you click on a list entry TextMaker jumps to the corresponding place instantaneously
443. nd suitable fax software you can send a document by fax directly from TextMaker for Windows The command File gt Send gt Fax is provided for this purpose m Faxing a form letter Windows only If you have installed fax hardware and suitable fax software you can even send form letters by fax with TextMaker for Windows You use the command File gt Send gt Fax Merge for this purpose m Exporting a document to a PDF file Using the File gt Export as PDF command you can export a document to a PDF file Such files can be viewed on virtually any computer provided that it has a PDF viewer installed m Exporting a document to an EPUB file Alternatively using the File gt Export as EPUB command you can export a document to an EPUB file Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 465 EPUB is an open standard for e books electronic books and other electronic publications The EPUB format can be read by most hardware e book readers For PCs and mobile devices various viewer applications are available E mailing a document When you would like to send a document by e mail you can use the command File gt Send gt E mail Detailed explanations are presented in the following pages Print preview The print preview displays a preview of the printed document on the screen Using this feature can help you avoid wasting paper on test prints To open the print preview choose the File gt Print Preview menu command
444. nd tab stops with the mouse see chapter Paragraph formatting beginning on page 75 By default this ruler is enabled Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 525 E Vertical ruler Here you can enable or disable the vertical ruler The vertical ruler is displayed to the left of the text It serves merely to provide information and not for formatting changes By default this ruler is disabled m Overflow mark When this option is enabled TextMaker displays a red bar at the bottom edge of text frames whenever there is too much text to be fitted completely in the frame Show unprintable characters group box Here you specify if paragraph breaks tabs spaces etc should be indicated as symbols on the screen to make them easier to recognize m Paragraph breaks If you enable this option TextMaker displays the paragraph break at the end of every paragraph represented by the symbol This lets you see exactly where paragraphs end m Tabs If you enable this option all tabs become visible on the screen as small arrows m Spaces If you enable this option small dots are used to make all spaces visible on the screen Soft hyphens If you enable this option soft hyphens become visible on the screen They are displayed as hyphens with a gray background E All Enables all the above listed options together 526 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Show scrollbars group box Here you can speci
445. ndex e 591 Glow effect for objects 268 Go to Edit menu 156 157 158 159 Go to link Edit menu 462 464 Gradient color gradient 263 264 Grid between table cells 199 202 203 for positioning objects 573 Group Object menu 273 Groupboxes forms object 299 300 311 Guides 524 525 574 Guides amp Grid Object menu 573 574 575 Gutter 100 102 H Header Insert menu 103 Header and footer toolbar 103 Headers 102 Headings 402 See Outlines numbering 410 Hidden Text 546 548 Hiding objects 269 272 546 547 text 70 Highlighter 66 67 Horizontal line 461 Horizontal position of objects 256 Horizontal ruler 26 76 77 85 524 525 556 557 Horizontal Ruler View menu 556 557 HTML Documents 459 Hunspell dictionaries 535 536 577 Hyperlinks in objects 269 270 in the text 462 Hyphen non breaking 328 331 Hyphen soft 328 330 524 526 Hyphenation language selection 318 use 328 l IF function 390 396 397 Importing documents 505 Inch 75 76 Indents 76 Index 414 Index Tools menu 592 e Index Add Index Entry 414 415 Edit Index Entries 416 Generate Index 417 432 Inner margins of AutoShapes 291 292 of text frames 276 277 Insert gt Bookmark 156 Insert gt Break Chapter break 110 111 Column break 143 Page break 100 Section break 147 185 186 187 Insert gt Calculation 380 388 Insert gt Caption 421 Insert gt Cross reference 434 435 Insert gt Date Tim
446. new folder and save the template there In this way templates can be stored in separate folders according to application For example the document templates supplied with TextMaker are organized under folders named Fax Letter etc Applying document templates To make use of a document template simply begin a new document with File gt New TextMaker automatically asks you what template you want to use as a basis for the new document So you do the following 1 Invoke File gt New 2 A dialog appears allowing you to select the desired document template from a list 140 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 You will see both templates and folders in the list The folders can be opened by double clicking on them They contain prepared document templates for writing letters faxes etc 3 Select a document template Hint In the right half of the dialog a preview of the currently selected tem plate is presented The preview can be turned on off with the gt gt button and the lt lt button anytime you wish 4 Confirm by clicking on OK A new document is now set up from this template and all the character and para graph styles saved in the template become available to you Additionally all settings made in the File gt Page Setup and the File gt Properties dialogs are also inherited from the document template And If the template also contains text this text is displayed in the new document and can be edited just lik
447. nge to po Change all quartl quart 4 Ignore quarts F quartz 3 Ignore all quanta quarry quartile J Add No more suggestions Close You can then choose to correct the word add it to the dictionary or simply ignore the supposed error Additionally in the list under Change to some suggestions for the correct spelling of the word are presented if any are found Use the dialog buttons to specify what to do with the unknown word as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 321 Button Function Change Lets you correct the word Before you use this button type the correct spelling in the Change to input field or select one of the suggested words from the list Change All Works like the Change button but changes all further instances of the word from here to the end of the document Ignore Ignores the supposed spelling error and continues with the spelling check Ignore All Ignores all further instances of this word Note Use Ignore or Ignore All only for words that are correctly written but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Advises TextMaker to add the word to the user dictionary and in this way to enlarge its vocabulary Note Use this option for correctly spelled words that TextMaker does not yet know TextMaker remembers these words perma nently If you want to exit the spell checker before it reaches the end of the docu
448. nges E As you type new text you can modify character formatting by pausing to select the format for the text to follow with the Format gt Character dialog and then continuing to type For example you can select a new font From that point on all text that you enter will appear in the new font until you again make a font selection Additional information on the topic of character formatting is presented on the following pages Typeface and font size To change the typeface and or the font size do the following 1 Select the text to be modified 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font tab Now you can set the desired typeface and font size m To change the typeface open the Typeface dropdown list box by clicking on the small arrow to its right and select the desired typeface m The most useful font sizes are presented in the Size dropdown list box You can select one of these sizes or enter a different size manually Type sizes can be given with a precision of a tenth of a point thus a size such as 12 7 is allowed Font sizes are customarily given in points abbreviated pt As a rule you should use font sizes between 10 and 12 points for normal text and a somewhat larger size say 14 to 18 pt for headings Major headings may be even larger 24 pt for example 64 e Character formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Using the Formatting toolbar You can also change the typeface and
449. nning on page 91 106 e Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Different headers footers on the first page The header and footer are parts of the so called master page see also section Master pages beginning on page 108 By default the content of the master page is repeated on every page of the document If required you can specify that a different master page should be used for the first page of the document including a different header and footer This is useful when for example you plan to print the first page of a letter to a pre printed letterhead and the pages 2 and following to plain white paper To achieve this invoke the Format gt Chapter command and activate the option Different first page From now on headers and footers on the first page can be edited independently from the rest of the document Different headers footers on left and right pages In books different headers and footers are often used on left and right facing pages For example on left pages of manuals the page number is usually flush left in the footer and on right pages it is flush right To enable different headers and footers for left and right facing pages proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Chapter command 2 Check the Different left and right pages option You will now be able to set up different headers and footers for left and right facing pages More precisely When you set up or edit a header on any left page of t
450. nt s color palette From now on it will be available in all dialog boxes that permit color selection Changing a color Note You can change only those colors that you have added The first 24 colors in the palette are default colors that cannot be changed To change a color do the following 1 Invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Colors tab Or Select the Define color entry in any color list 2 Select the color to be changed from the Color palette list 3 Make the desired changes see the section Working with the color controls below 4 Click on Change The color is now changed for the current document Deleting or renaming a color You can delete or rename user defined colors at any time To do this invoke the colors dialog select a color from the Color palette list and click the Delete or Rename button Working with the color controls The controls in the colors dialog allow you to set colors in a number of different ways All these ways lead to the same results just choose the method that suits you the best m Using the color field and luminance slider Setting colors is easiest when you use the large color field and the luminance slider to its right The color field presents all the available hues in all available saturations while the luminance slider next to it provides a means of varying the luminance Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 551 To set a color
451. nt You can manage the data series of a chart by selecting the chart invoking Object gt Properties and switching to the Series tab On this tab you can add delete and edit data series m Rename button Renames the data series that is currently selected in the Series list Hint This name is also displayed in the legend of a chart The largest part of the dialog is occupied by a table where you can enter the values m X values The left column represents the x values These values are required only by a few chart types e g XY charts For all other types this column is by default set to Automatic using the checkbox located above this column E Y values The middle column represents the y values Here you usually type in the values to be displayed in the chart Bubble sizes The right column is not used for most chart types It represents the bubble sizes in bubble charts Insert Row button Inserts an additional row above the current row m Append Row button Appends an additional row below the last row Delete Row button Deletes the current row Paste button Overwrites the values in the current data series with the content of the clip board Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 229 Copy the desired values to the clipboard beforehand Use a new line for each value See also notes below Some notes on using the Paste button m The Paste button can fill only one data series at a time This means that you c
452. nt and has a special significance It is the standard style for the text When you start typing text in a new document the text is automatically assigned the Normal style unless and until you select another style which becomes effective from the current position If you change the Normal style for example by specifying a new typeface for it the new typeface is applied to the entire existing text to the extent that no special typeface has been assigned to it with Format gt Character Moreover it is ap plied to any text you enter subsequently for by changing the Normal style in this way you are changing the default font Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles o 125 Creating linked character styles When you create new character styles as described at the beginning of this section they are always based on the character style called Normal Accordingly if you change the Normal style for example by selecting a different typeface for it all the character styles based on it are changed as well except for those styles where you have explicitly specified a different typeface So By default all character styles are linked to the Normal style However when you create a new style you can specify another character style as the basis for it in Based on To create a character style and base it on a specific style other than Normal do the following 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Click on t
453. nt and speed up access to them Quick paths You can set up quick paths to change immediately to folders that are frequently used to save or retrieve files Document summary Every document can have a document summary that you can display and edit using the Summary tab in the File gt Properties dialog You can specify the document s title subject and author enter keywords for the file manager s search function and compose a brief description of the document s contents E The file manager The integrated file manager provides a convenient way to access your docu ments It allows you to see at a glance the names and summaries of your docu ments and to examine open print or delete them with the press of a key With the search function you can look for documents not only by filename but also by subject title author etc m Backup copies Whenever you save a document TextMaker can automatically create a backup copy containing its previous version There is even an option to keep multiple generations of backup copies for each document You will find detailed information for each of these functions on the following pages Quick paths TextMaker gives you the capability to define up to twenty quick paths and use them to change to specific folders where you open or save files frequently A quick path is a symbolic statement like Letters to the tax office that stands for a specific folder on the hard disk
454. nt at all levels below the paragraph visible a double click on a hides everything at the lower levels Editing text in Outline view It is possible to enter edit and format text in Outline view However the normal view is better suited for these tasks and it is recommended that you switch back to normal view to perform them 406 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Deleting copying and moving text On the other hand the Outline view is especially well suited for deleting copying and moving headings together with associated text The easiest way to perform these tasks is to make use of the plus and minus sym bols at the left the headings By clicking on one of these symbols you can select the associated heading and any text that is subordinated to it Then you can delete copy or move the contents of your selection with the usual commands in the Edit menu see chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 For example to move a heading and its associated text proceed as follows 1 Click on the plus or minus symbol to the left of the heading In this way you select the heading including all text subordinated to it 2 Invoke the Edit gt Cut command 3 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line before which you want to reinsert the text that you just cut 4 Invoke Edit gt Insert The heading and its associated text have now been moved accordingly Hint There are a
455. nt of the field from any database record you like rather than the field name provided that a database has first been assigned to the document with the command Tools gt Set Database Once this has been done invoke File gt Properties and switch to the dialog s View tab Make sure that the option Display field names is not checked Then check 370 o Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 Show merge record and next to it enter the number of the database record whose field contents are to be displayed Note If you now invoke File gt Print Merge the letter will be rendered using all the selected data records just as before On the other hand if you invoke File gt Print TextMaker will print only a single letter using the address in the record you selected for display Using the Mail Merge toolbar Displaying test data records is substantially easier if you enable the Mail merge toolbar To do this invoke the command View gt Toolbars and activate the Mail merge toolbar in the Toolbars list box The Mail merge toolbar is brought up in response You can use this toolbar as follows To page from record to record click on the arrows at right and left m To display a specific record enter its record number in the edit box in the middle and press the Enter key m When you want to see the field names again instead of the test data records page to data record 0 or enter a 0 in the edit box and p
456. nt wherever the Print date field had been inserted If required field contents can be updated manually at any time with the Tools gt Update Fields command keyboard shortcut F9 Fields can be formatted deleted copied and moved like normal text however their contents cannot be edited directly For detailed information on fields see the pages that follow Inserting a field To insert a field in the text move the text cursor to the desired position and invoke the Insert gt Field command Manual TextMaker 2016 Fields o 161 Insert Field Field type Type Creation date r Title Creation time Subject Print date C coe Print time Keywords Date last changed Description Time last changed Database field Database info Page number Page count Chapter number Sequence number StyleRef File name Summary b m Select the type of field to be inserted from the Field type list If you wish you can also specify the field s subtype or form of representation in the right half of the dialog For example you can specify whether a page number should be rendered in Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I II III numerals When you have made your selection click on Insert The field is inserted into the text and its content is displayed there By default what is displayed is the result of replacing the field symbol with the data for which it stands Thus if you insert for example the Print dat
457. ntains tabs If a heading contains tabs any text behind the first tab is ignored when the heading is imported into the table of contents m The Use numbering option is checked by default Thus if you have numbered the headings in your document they will appear in the table of contents with the corresponding numberings If you don t want the table of contents entries numbered uncheck this option You can review information about numbering the headings of a document in section Numbering headings beginning on page 410 m The options in the Placement group box allow you to specify what should happen if the document already contains a table of contents If you select Replace existing table the existing table of contents is replaced Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 419 On the other hand if you select Create new table TextMaker leaves the original table in place and inserts an additional table of contents Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 432 E You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 433 Captions and tables of figures You can insert automatically numbered captions below images for example Figure 1 Figure 2 etc When you have done that you can even add a table of figure
458. ntering the follow ing Table1 C3 2 You will find detailed information about performing calculations with objects in the section Objects in calculations beginning on page 386 This concludes the general description of frames and drawings The following sections present the various types of frames in detail m Text frames beginning on page 275 m Picture frames beginning on page 279 m OLE object frames beginning on page 282 m Drawings beginning on page 286 274 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms objects in detail beginning on page 305 Text frames With the help of text frames you can insert text boxes into a document For exam ple you can highlight especially important information by placing it in such a box A text frame like all types of frames occupies a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or remove body text above it By default the normal body text is automatically broken at the boundary lines of the frame it flows around the frame In this section you will find detailed information on working with text frames The following topics are covered Inserting text frames m Changing the properties of text frames Linking text frames See the next pages for details Inserting text frames To insert a text frame do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Text Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively cl
459. nual TextMaker 2016 32 is not present in the list of font sizes It doesn t matter because the list offers only the most commonly needed sizes and you can always enter values manually Simply click on the font size shown in the Formatting toolbar enter 32 there and confirm with the Enter key By the way you can even specify non integer font sizes by using a decimal point e g 11 6 points for example when the area at your disposal is fixed and you want the text to fit precisely In the end the Formatting toolbar should look like this XS Normal y MicroSquare z 3 Ey B LU Font is now set to MicroSquare 32 point bold Next we want to format the second line in MicroSquare 12 point italic To do that we must first select it as before This time however don t use the Formatting toolbar to change the font size Instead invoke Format gt Character so that you can get acquainted with this frequently needed command as well A dialog box opens revealing at a glance all the possibilities for formatting charac ters Character x Font Spacing Hyperink Typeface Size Style Language Times New Roman y 10 v Regular v Y Default EA Styles Underline Text color E Small caps Yo E Continuous E Black E All caps F Words only Background color E Strike out Hidden Single Transparent v Protected Double Sample AaBbCcXxVyZz Reset Cancel The dialog box for
460. nual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 201 Margins Here you can change the interior margins of the selected cells Options If the Text locked option is checked no modifications of the contents of the selected cells will be allowed when the document is edited in Forms mode By default this option is not checked accordingly the cells will remain editable in Forms mode You will find more information about this in section Protecting contents of forms objects beginning on page 314 Borders tab Here you can specify border lines for the selected cells The options accessible on this tab are the same as those for the Format gt Borders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Note If you have selected multiple cells not only outer border lines but also gridlines between the cells can be added v Tip You can also use the icon in the Table toolbar to change the borders of cells Select the desired cells and then click the arrow right of the icon not the icon itself A menu with several pre defined border styles will open Click on the desired style to apply it If you want to apply the same border style to other cell ranges thereafter simply select them and click the icon itself not the arrow TextMaker will apply the last chosen border style once more Shading tab Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the selected cells The options accessible on this tab are the same as th
461. numbers of all the pages on which the term occurs Editing the keyword list The content of the keyword list can be edited at any time after terms have been added To edit the list invoke the Tools gt Index gt Edit Index Entries command and proceed as follows m Deleting an index entry Keywords added to the list by mistake can be removed with the Delete button To remove an entry select it from the list and click on Delete Searching for occurrences of a keyword You can find the position at which a specified entry in the keyword list occurs in the text with the Go to button To do this select the keyword from the list and click on Go to TextMaker places the text cursor at the position in the text where the term occurs If several occurrences of the term were recorded the cursor is positioned at the first occurrence Click on the Go to button again to jump to the second occur rence third occurrence etc Note The Go to button is not available for keywords that have been added with the Index all occurrences option turned on The Index field In conclusion some technical information for advanced users When a selected term is added to the keyword list TextMaker inserts an invisible Index field in the text immediately following the selection For example if the term is fish the index field inserted is Index fish You can make these index fields visible by invoking File gt Properties switchin
462. o increase this value Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 527 You will find more information about the Edit gt Undo command in section Undoing changes beginning on page 31 User Home and User Business buttons Here you can enter your addresses separately for home and business These entries are used by the document templates supplied with the program to personal ize letterheads fax forms etc by filling in the sender address see section Document templates beginning on page 139 Extended support for Asian fonts When this option is enabled the dialog box for the Format gt Character command presents lists for typeface font size style and language under not only a single category but under three For Latin scripts e g English For East Asian scripts Chinese Japanese and Korean m For complex scripts e g Arabic Thus you can specify the settings for each kind of script separately For example if you specify Arial as the typeface for Latin characters and Sim Hei as the typeface for Asian characters all the Latin characters that you type will appear in Arial and all the Asian characters you type will appear in SimHei Note TextMaker recognizes automatically whether given characters are part of the Latin Asian or complex scripts Extended support for Arabic text When you activate this option additional features for editing text in Arabic script will
463. object m Under dialog control With frames and drawings you can also invoke the Object gt Properties command and switch to the Layout tab in the dialog box where you can specify the precise position for the object Tip This tab also gives you access to a number of expanded options You can for example set the position of the frame relative to the page margin See sec tion Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Note An object s anchor determines the page on which it is displayed Note This section applies only to frames and drawings When you insert a frame or a drawing you will notice that an anchor is displayed along with it to the left of the paragraph in which you positioned it Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adi piscing elit E sed diam non ummy nibh ig Q evismod tinci dunt ut laor eet dolore ma gna aliquam erat volutpat Dolor sit amet consec tetuer adi ee piscing elit sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat The anchor for the selected object is displayed at the upper left An object s anchor determines the page on which the object is displayed More precisely 252 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Important A frame or drawing that is anchored to a paragraph always appears on the page on which the paragraph to which it is anchored appears Accordingly if you insert so much text above t
464. objects invisible on the screen and or on the printed page By means of these two options you can make these objects visible and or printable again overriding their individual visibility settings Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 547 Show invisible objects If you enable this option any object whose Visible property is disabled becomes visible on the screen Print unprintable objects If you enable this option any object whose Print able property is disabled will nevertheless be printed along with normally printable objects By default both options are disabled Hidden text group box Not only objects but text too can be hidden see section Hiding text beginning on page 70 The Show hidden text and Print hidden text options control respectively the display and printing of text that has been formatted hidden By default Show hidden text is enabled and Print hidden text is disabled Ac cordingly hidden text is visible on the screen but does not appear on the printed page If you enable Print hidden text hidden text will appear on the printed page along with visible text Print page background Use this option to specify if a page background set up with the Format gt Page Background command should also appear in printouts This option is off by default meaning that the page background will be displayed on the screen only Please note that this option has no effect on a page background set up
465. ocument For details read the pages that follow Character styles You can save a frequently needed character format typeface size emphasis etc in a character style and apply it repeatedly to any characters you like For example if you want some sections of a contract to be formatted in a special typeface and in a smaller size simply create an appropriate character style let s call it Fine print and apply the style to those sections Note The difference between character styles and paragraph styles see section Paragraph styles beginning on page 128 is that character styles contain only saved character formats while paragraph styles contain both saved character formats and saved paragraph formats indentation tab stops alignment etc Accordingly character styles are applicable to individual characters while para graph styles are applicable only to complete paragraphs On the next pages you will find detailed information on working with character styles The following topics are covered Creating character styles m Applying character styles Modifying character styles m The scope of character styles m The character style Normal m Creating linked character styles m Character styles and the sidebar 120 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Creating character styles To create a new character style do the following 1 6 7 Invoke Format gt Character Style Charact
466. ocument Note Fax functions are available only in the Windows version of TextMaker Extended fax support is integrated into the Windows version of TextMaker simpli fying the creation and transmission of faxes and form faxes E Fax templates supplied with the program To send a fax simply pick one of the fax templates supplied with the program specify the recipient type the text and send it on its way with File gt Send gt Fax see section A fax in five minutes beginning on page 471 m Create personalized form faxes Even form letters can be sent by fax TextMaker handles this task by fetching the addressees names and fax numbers from the database assigned to the doc ument see the next section Faxing a form letter beginning on page 475 Important Before you can make use of these functions you must install one of the fax programs that are supported by TextMaker See section Requirements for extended fax support on page 472 Detailed information about TextMaker s extended fax functions is presented on the following pages A fax in five minutes Before we present TextMaker for Windows extended fax functions in detail we want to show you how to create and send your first fax in just five minutes However before you send a fax for the first time you should check to see if you have fax software that TextMaker supports see section Requirements for extend ed fax support on page 472 In additi
467. of the document When you type something it always appears just behind the text cursor which moves forward to accommodate it To start we would like to begin a simple letter from Escher amp Sons Architects Simple but by no means less than professional quality At the end of this tour you will have composed a full fledged business letter complete with all the bells and whistles At this point you might say This will be a lot easier if I invoke the command File gt New and select one of the prepared letter templates Naturally but you won t learn anything that way If you are going to participate in this tour you have to Manual TextMaker 2016 The TextMaker Tour e 37 invest a little time but afterwards you will be in command of the program s most important functions and can immediately start adapting the templates to your needs So let s get started First type something resembling the example text that follows You don t have to copy it exactly you can enter whatever text you please the content doesn t matter Important Press the Enter key only at the indicated places When using a word processor you don t press this key at the end of every line as you would on a typewriter Rather you press it only at the end of a paragraph or to insert blank lines Dear Clients This year we have been building more than usual not just for you but also for ourselves The new Escher Complex one o
468. of the templates supplied with the pro gram Then click on the OK button 3 Adialog displaying the respective database opens Database ES ee SALUT_BODY Dear Mr Backfisch NAME1L Backfisch ee e NAME2 Cashflow Consulting Corp Ea Search FIRSTNAME Mirco Find next a STREET 25 Main Street a STATE_ZIP CA 90400 A cITY Anytown PHONE 555 555 5555 as 555 555 5556 REMARK1 t4 43 lo ba Record 1 of 2 5 List Filter Apply Form 4 Browse to the data record for the recipient You can also enter a new address by first clicking the Append button to append a new record and then typing in the address For detailed instructions on this dialog see below 5 Click on the Insert button At each place in the template where there is a database field TextMaker now inserts the content corresponding to that field from the chosen data record 352 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 The result is for example a letterhead completely filled out with the address of the letter s recipient All you have to do now is write the text of the letter and then print the document To do this invoke File gt Print not File gt Print Merge Tip In the dialog box for the command File gt New you will see some folders Any of them can be opened with a double click They contain preformatted document templates for writing letters faxes etc Most of these templates are associated with the example databa
469. oftMaker include extensive kerning information Transferring formatting With the command Format gt Transfer Formatting you can quickly apply a character s format typeface size styles etc to other characters To do so proceed as follows 1 Select the character whose format you want to transfer You can also select multiple characters they should however have the same character format 2 Invoke the command Format gt Transfer Formatting The mouse pointer now becomes a little brush lg 3 Drag the mouse with the mouse button held down over the characters to which the format is to be transferred Hint If you press and hold the key while you do this not only the character format is transferred but also the paragraph format 4 If you want to apply the format to additional characters repeat step 3 as often as required 5 When finished invoke Format gt Transfer Formatting again or simply press the key Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 69 Hiding text You can hide sections of text Normally hidden text is displayed on the screen but not printed Hidden text is ideal for comments or notes that you want to incorporate into a document so that for example they will be viewable on the screen but not appear on the printed page Hiding text To hide text do the following 1 Select the text you want to hide 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font tab 4 Ch
470. olumns in the Number field 5 TextMaker determines the optimum column widths automatically However you can specify manually both the column width and the spacing between col umns in the Columns group box if you need to do so see below 6 Confirm with OK The selected text is now formatted in the specified number of columns If you want to convert multi columned text back to single columned text follow the procedure described above but enter 1 for the number of columns The dialog box for the Format gt Section command also contains the following options Columns tab You specify the number of columns and their format on the Columns tab 144 e Multi column page layouts Manual TextMaker 2016 Presets group box Here you can select one of several pre defined column layouts by clicking on it with the mouse m Columns group box Lets you specify the number width and spacing of columns Enter the desired number of columns at Number Specify the width and spacing of the columns at Width and Spacing respec tively If Equal column width is checked all columns will have the same width and spacing If this option is unchecked you can specify a different width and spacing for each column Height Let you specify the height of the columns Auto When you select this setting TextMaker automatically adjusts the height of the columns based on the length of the text so the text is fitted into columns of equal height
471. om the equal sign described above the dialog allows to choose from several other operators to build conditions The following operators are available in the dropdown list right of the field name Operator Explanation The search field must exactly match the search term or at least start with it lt gt The search field must not match the search term or start with it lt Less than for use with numeric fields gt Greater than for use with numeric fields lt Less than or equal to for use with numeric fields gt Greater than or equal to for use with numeric fields The search field must contain the search term at any position For example the condition NAME1 Smith selects all records where this field has a content like Smith or Smithfield as well as Miller Smith amp Company 376 e Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 Printing or faxing form letters Once you have created a form letter and selected the desired records from the database you can let TextMaker merge the two and print or fax the form letter To do this don t invoke the usual command File gt Print but instead the command File gt Print Merge for printing or File gt Send gt Fax Merge for faxing availa ble only in Windows You will find more information about this in section Printing a form letter page 470 and section Faxing a form letter page 475 Automatic suppression of sup
472. ommand Explanation Delete If you select a text segment or object and invoke Edit gt Delete the segment or object will be deleted without being moved into the clipboard There is a keyboard shortcut for this command to invoke it faster the key Cut The command Edit gt Cut likewise deletes the content of a selection but not permanently Instead it places this content in the clipboard so that it remains available for insertion later anywhere in the document There is also a keyboard shortcut for cutting Od Copy The Edit gt Copy shortcut ctr1 C copies the content of the selection into the clipboard Paste You use the Edit gt Paste command to insert the content of the clipboard into the text Move the text cursor to the place in the text where you want to make the insertion and then invoke the command or press v You can insert the content of the clipboard multiple times in this manner In case it still isn t completely clear how the clipboard helps you delete copy or move something you can consider the whole subject once again from a different point of view How do I delete text Select the text segment and either cut it with to place it in the clip board or delete it permanently with De1 How do I move text Select the text segment and cut it with OJ Then move the text cursor to the place in the text where you want it to appear and reinsert it with v 60 o Working with selections Man
473. ommand presents two rows of bullet icons The bullets in the Default row cannot be modified The bullets in the Custom row on the contrary can be swapped at will Proceed as follows 1 In the Custom row click on the icon that you want to change 2 Click on the Change button to the right of the row 3 A character table appears First set the Font that you want to use Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting e 89 Tip for Windows users The Symbol and Wingdings fonts contain numerous characters that are suitable for bullets 4 Double click on the character you want to select 5 The selected character now appears in the row of available Custom bullets Click on OK to apply it Note Although only six user defined bullets are shown in the dialog box you are not limited to using only six different bullets The custom bullets can be rede fined as often as you like even within the same document Drop caps A drop cap refers to a large ornamental letter at the beginning of a paragraph TextMaker is capable of creating such an ornamental letter automatically from the first letter of a paragraph and of automatically adjusting the following paragraph text so that it flows smoothly around this first letter Note Drop caps can be used only in paragraphs that have been aligned flush left or justified To create a drop cap do the following 1 Position the text cursor in the paragraph that is to be ornamented with a
474. on Here you can change the position of the sender s address on the envelope relative to the top left corner Recipient position Here you can change the position of the recipient s address Recipient margins Here you can change the right and the bottom margin of the recipient s address Paper settings button This button opens an additional dialog where you can specify the paper format of the envelope Options available E Use the Envelope type list to specify the paper size of the envelope The list contains all paper sizes supported by the current printer If you want to specify a size that is not listed enter its dimensions manually in the Width and Height fields 362 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 mw If your printer has multiple paper trays you can use the Paper bin option to select which one to use when the envelope is printed This option is available under Windows only m Under Envelope orientation specify how envelopes have to be inserted in your printer s tray left aligned centered or right aligned rotated or not rotat ed m If required you can also specify an Additional offset in case the printout is not placed exactly where it should Creating a new database With TextMaker you can not only use existing databases but also create new databases To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke Tools gt Create Database 2 Input a filename for the database to be created and confirm wi
475. on With the Linux version use the Help gt Check for Updates command to check if updates are available Android version purchased in Google Play Store When you have installed an application via Google Play Store your device should inform you about software updates automatically depending on the settings made in Google Play Store 542 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Android version purchased in Amazon App Shop The same goes for apps installed via Amazon s app shop Android version purchased at www softmaker com With this version use the Tools gt Check for Updates command to check if updates are available Tipp Subscribe to our free newsletter at www softmaker com to get an e mail automatically whenever updates are available The newsletter will also provide you with other useful information and special offers related to SoftMaker Office Associate file types Windows only This button can be used to associate certain file types for exam ple Microsoft Word documents with TextMaker As a result such files can be opened with a double click on the file in Windows Explorer TextMaker will automatically start if it is not already running and open the file When you click on the Associate file types button a dialog appears It indicates which files types currently are associated with TextMaker To activate or deactivate any of these associations click on the checkbox in front of it Show hide keyboa
476. on if you have not done so already you must configure your fax software by giving it your name fax number etc before you can begin Once you have completed this you can proceed as follows 1 In TextMaker for Windows invoke the command File gt New to create a new document 2 A dialog box appears so that you can select the desired document template The list shown in this window includes a folder called Fax Choose one of the tem Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 471 plates from this folder Double click on the folder then double click on a tem plate 3 TextMaker now takes you automatically to its address database Page to the desired addressee Alternatively you can click on the Append button to add a new addressee record including the fax number 4 Click on the Insert button to insert the address into the fax form The database will close automatically 5 Now type the fax s message text 6 When the fax is ready invoke the command File gt Send gt Fax 7 A dialog box appears Important Make sure that the driver for your fax soft ware e g Microsoft Fax on FAX is shown as the selected Fax device Then click on OK 8 Another dialog box appears and presents data about the recipient Make sure that the correct number is shown and click on OK to begin the transmission 9 Done At this point your system s fax software takes over and sends the fax on its way If you are interest
477. on on saving and opening documents in a different file format Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with other file formats e 505 Saving a document in a different file format To save the active document in a different file format invoke the command File gt Save as and open the dropdown list Save as Type Choose the desired format enter a new filename if desired and confirm by clicking on OK Opening a document stored in a different file format To open a document stored in a different file format invoke the command File gt Open open the Files of type list and select the format of the file to be opened Then select the file and confirm with OK Supported file formats The list of available file types in Open and Save dialogs contains among others the following file formats Document The native file format and default for TextMaker documents This is the format in which you will typically save your documents Template Document template for TextMaker documents see section Document tem plates beginning on page 139 Microsoft Word You can also open and save documents in Microsoft Word file format Supports doc files Word 6 0 through 2003 as well as docx files Word 2007 or later m OpenDocument Text Documents stored in OpenDocument Text format can be opened and saved as well providing compatibility with applications like OpenOffice Writer E Rich Text Format The RTF format is very suitable for doc
478. ong ceeseceeneeesteceeeees Manual TextMaker 2016 E EEE ANENE 32 Contents o iii Setting up a letterhead nnrir ie toh anon eaaa apie E S 44 Parasraph alipnment eer eneen ee enr arae En eae EESE EREE EES RETER 46 LADS REE EET E EEEE E E EE peptone eh 47 Inserting dates and other fields 00 eee eeeeeceeeceseceseceseceaecssecseecaeesaeseneeees 50 Pa Se fote S a2 i arene aeneae ea e visas psec dupe E E EEE A pef tober eep 52 Limes anid Dord6rs ia ssed ees detec do Mesias sss sue EEEE pepe atte 53 Printing the practice letters 05 Joss cses a e e oieee e 55 IAEE aeo MEE E E sees tases sacenigess E E E 56 Working with selections 57 Selecting text and objects essssessseeseerseeesrseesseeersserrrestrrenresrenrrsrrrreserrenresrent 57 Selecting in the Windows Linux version sesseseeeseesssreesssreerrsesrreserrreresre 58 Selecting in the Android version sssesseeeesseeeesesrsererrsreersserersserrrererreeresre 59 Moving deleting and copying eee eeeeeceseeeseceseceeecaeecseeeseeeaeeeeeesseeeenseenaes 60 Pasting with special formatting 00 0c ee eec eee cesecseecneecneeeeeeeeeeseeeseceseenseenaes 61 Inserting a document ienien e notea o nE E e a e ie 62 Character formatting 63 Typeface and font size ocssvscesscesccceststesessecedeeeasikeus use dheestgnstecsnensteetieeccscbteedeees gt 64 Text styles 8 ses etek E r ean Hots dake ese ea eee ee 65 TOXb COLO ps esa tice see Set ee ee ah aan i ate tk i ed 66
479. ons taken from the database or as automatically generated numbers To change the style of references invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings and make the desired settings in the Reference Style group box The following options are available m You can select Use reference field to specify that the references should be shown as abbreviations for the sources based on entries in the database for example DNA1979 m You can select Number entries to specify that the references should be shown as numbers generated automatically for example 42 The source for the first reference that you insert receives the number 1 the source for the second reference receives the number 2 etc Note When you switch from one of these options to the other the appear ance of all the references in the document immediately changes in accordance with your selection On the other hand the bibliography itself if it already exists will not reflect your changes until you update it see section Updating tables of references beginning on page 432 m The Parentheses option allows you to specify the type of parentheses in which the references will be enclosed For example if you choose the setting instead of the default setting references will be enclosed with curly braces rather than with square brackets Accordingly instead of DNA1979 you will see DNA1979 430 Working with large documents Manual T
480. ont in a style all text segments that are formatted with this style are automatically modi fied accordingly By the way text and formatting can be searched in combination Thus you can search for a specific term in a specific format For example if you enter Text Maker as the search term and also specify bold character formatting for the search the search will find every occurrence of TextMaker in bold characters in the document Bookmarks You can place text markers in TextMaker documents just as you do in books when for example you want to be able to return quickly to important passages These text markers are called bookmarks To insert a bookmark invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command at the desired position in the text and give the bookmark a name Once you have marked a position in the text in this way you can jump to it at any time with the Edit gt Go to command Setting bookmarks To mark a position in the text set a bookmark there using the following procedure 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the text that you want to mark 2 Invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command 3 Enter whatever name you like for the bookmark Note Bookmark names may contain only letters numbers and underscores Special characters are not allowed The name must always begin with a letter 156 e Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 4 Click on OK to set the bookmark You can set as many bookmar
481. onts can lead to a much larger output file Note Please respect the license terms of the fonts vendors For most com mercial font packages embedding in EPUB files is not allowed or requires the payment of additional charges E mailing a document Provided an appropriate e mail application is installed on your device you can send documents by e mail directly from TextMaker To do this proceed as follows 1 2 Create or open the document that is to be e mailed Invoke the File gt Send or the File gt Send gt E Mail command if you have the Windows version of TextMaker Select the format in which the document is to be sent Note If you choose the TextMaker document format the recipient receives an e mail with the TextMaker document as an attachment In order to read the attachment the recipient needs to have TextMaker installed Your default e mail application is invoked and a blank e mail message is generat ed with the document as an attachment You can specify the recipients and type in a subject and message if desired and then send the e mail 486 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Common problems Problems that can be encountered when outputting documents are listed here along with their likely causes mu The File gt Send gt Fax command is not available Extended fax support is available only in the Windows version of TextMaker If you have a version of TextMaker for a diffe
482. or modes grayscaled black amp white etc as well as col orized variants of the object To choose one of these variants simply click on it and the options in the dialog will be adjusted accordingly E Settings group box Here you can change brightness contrast saturation and gamma color balance with an effect on brightness m More button This button opens a dialog with the following additional options When you activate the Mix with color option and choose a color below the object will be colorized accordingly The options in the Cropping group box can be used to crop the object This is useful when you need only a segment of the object For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the object enter 25 percent at Top Export button You can use this button to export a copy of the graphical representation of the object that is to save an image of the object on your hard disk Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 285 Drawings TextMaker offers several tools for creating drawings You can insert the following types of drawings into your document E Lines Freeforms scribbles as drawn by hand Curves Arrows Connectors for linking objects as in flowcharts Rectangles and ellipses AutoShapes pre defined shapes TextArt objects text effects Drawings behave like frames they always remain at the same place on the page even when you delete or insert lines of text above them
483. or section breaks inserted with Insert gt Break gt Section Break m Chapter break c searches for chapter breaks inserted with Insert gt Break gt Chapter Break To include one of these symbols in the search term click on the Special button and select the desired symbol with a mouse click You can repeat and combine these symbols at will within the same search term Moreover you can use them together with normal text A search for gallons of would yield all occurrences of this form for example 10 gallons of oil 42 gallons of gas etc 154 e Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 Searching replacing formatting The Edit gt Search and Edit gt Replace allows you to search not only for text but also for formatting and to replace the specified formatting with other formatting as required With this command you can for example replace a specific font with another font at all the points in the text where the former occurs To search for formatting proceed as follows 1 Invoke Edit gt Search 2 Ifthe Format button is not displayed in the dialog click on the Enlarge button to expand the search dialog 3 Clear any old search term in the Search for field by clicking on the Reset button 4 Click on the Format button 5 Select the kind of formatting for which you want to search character format ting paragraph formatting character style or paragraph style
484. or to a word you have already typed Then invoke the command Tools gt Thesaurus Thesaurus Ea Word Synonyms Fair M Bo sufficient Replace Eer acceptable z competent Close al decent n attractive adjective enough beautiful adjective good blond adjective t mediocre Fair adjective z passable fair adjective reasonable Fair adjective respectable Fair noun satisfactory J honest adjective J TextMaker now searches for the word in the Thesaurus If the word is not found words with similar spellings are presented for selection Otherwise synonyms for the word are shown Note If a word has several meanings several items are presented in the Mean ing list First choose the meaning of interest to you and then view the corre sponding synonyms in the Synonyms list Now with a mouse click you can select a word from the Synonyms list Then you can choose one of the following functions by using the buttons Button Function Look up Looks for alternatives to the selected synonym Replace Replaces the word in the text with the selected synonym Close Exits the thesaurus Berlitz translation dictionaries Note This feature is available only in SoftMaker Office Professional for Win dows and SoftMaker Office for Linux 332 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 In some variants of SoftMaker Office TextMaker comes with a very useful tool for writing foreign language documents Its integrated
485. ord to bring up the spelling correction context menu Android In the Android version you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second The context menu includes the following items Item Function List of When TextMaker finds suggestions for the correct spelling suggestions of the word it presents them in the upper part of the menu If you click on one of them it will replace the word in the text If TextMaker finds a large number of suggestions an additional menu item called Additional Suggestions appears If you click on it a dialog with all the suggestions found will appear Ignore Word Ignores the spelling error for all instances of this word and removes the red marking Use this option for words that are in fact correctly spelled but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Word Advises TextMaker to add the word to the user dictionary and in this way to enlarge its vocabulary Use this option for correctly spelled words that TextMaker does not yet know TextMaker remembers these words permanently Create SmartText Creates a SmartText entry from the word You will learn Entry more about this feature in the section SmartText beginning on page 333 Manual TextMaker 2016 Language tools e 323 As soon as you correct the spelling or allow TextMaker to ignore or add the wor
486. ore invoking the Table gt Split Cells command When you do this all the selected cells are split in a single step Notice that the above described dialog presents a Join selected cells before split ting option if multiple cells are selected It offers the following options m If you choose Treat the selection as one cell and split it the selected cells are combined into a single cell before the splitting operation is carried out m If you choose Each selected cell will be split individually each of the select ed cells is split into the specified number of rows and columns Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 195 Joining table cells You can join together neighboring cells of a table any time you wish That is you can combine them to make a single cell You do this as follows 1 Select the cells to be joined 2 Invoke the Table gt Join Cells command The cells are now combined In this process the contents of the original cells are not lost they are combined in the resulting cell The content of each original cell is placed in a separate para graph Splitting tables With the help of the command Table gt Split Table you can split a table horizontal ly The result is two separate tables To split a table do the following 1 Position the text cursor in any cell of the row at which the table is to be split 2 Invoke the Table gt Split Table command The table is now split into two separate tables Joining tab
487. ored words Add Word Advises TextMaker to add the word to the user dictionary TextMaker remembers such words permanently they are no longer underlined in blue see note Note Use the command Add Word only for those German words underlined in blue that are in fact correctly spelled according to the new German spelling rules If you allow words with old spellings rather than new spellings to be added you will be supplying TextMaker with incorrectly spelled words The Info command of the spell checker When you invoke the spell checker s context menu as described in the previous section an additional item appears for German words in the old spelling the Info command This command refers to additional options and shows information about the rule governing the change in the word s spelling under the German spelling reform This command s dialog box provides the following functions 326 o Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 Item Function List of Here all spellings that are correct according to the reformed suggestions German spelling rules are displayed If you click on one and then push the Change button TextMaker replaces the word in the text with it Change Lets you correct the word after you have chosen the correct spelling from the list of suggestions If TextMaker should ever make a suggestion that is in fact wrong you can enter the correct spelling in the Change to field manually SmartText Lets you def
488. ort terms that begin with lowercase letters will be placed above terms beginning with uppercase letters Otherwise all sort terms that begin with the same letter will be grouped together regardless of the cases of the first letters Example Off Apples bananas Cherries On bananas Apples Cherries Tip Using the Table toolbar Apart from the menu commands TextMaker provides a very useful aid for editing tables the Table toolbar Table xl ES GH EH GE ee Hs H a H R M The Table toolbar This toolbar appears automatically when you position the text cursor in a table Its icons represent the following functions from left to right Insert a table into the current cell Edit table properties Edit row properties Edit cell properties Insert cells E Delete cells E Join cells E Split cells E Sort table m Insert entire row s E Insert entire column s Delete entire row s Delete entire column s m Change borders of the selected cells 212 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 m Change shading of the selected cells For details on each of these functions see the chapter Tables beginning on page 189 Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 213 Pictures You can insert pictures into your document whenever you wish Their sizes are fully adjustable their positioning depends on whether you simply insert them directly into the body text or as a so called picture frame m Inserting pictures into
489. ose for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading beginning on page 91 202 e Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Changing the overall properties of tables You can make additional settings for tables with the Table gt Table Properties command This command also allows you to set the borders and shading of the entire table at once To modify the properties of a table first position the text cursor in any cell in the table Then invoke the Table gt Table Properties command to bring up the associ ated dialog Note This dialog can also be invoked with the Object gt Properties command the two commands are identical The following settings can be made in this dialog Properties tab On this tab you can change some general settings for the table For descriptions of these settings see section Object properties Properties tab beginning on page 269 Note The Text locked option mentioned in the section referenced above is not present for tables because protection for table cells is set on a cell by cell basis using the Table gt Cell Properties command see the description of the Text locked option in section Cell properties beginning on page 199 Of course you can always protect an entire table by selecting all its cells and then checking the Text locked option for them Text direction For text in Arabic script you can also change the writing direction of the table When you set the direction to ri
490. osition in the text at which it is defined So if you insert the formula VOLUME 23 13 7 in the third paragraph of your document and then try to call out its content or reference it in a formula in the second paragraph TextMaker will respond with the error message Un known variable name An application example A tennis center wants to write invoices for the rentals of its courts The computer should calculate the total amount and add 19 tax Such an invoice would be written more or less in this much abbreviated form INVOICE gt hours Total 19 tax Amount due Those places indicated by question marks would have to be filled by hand after calculating the amounts with a pocket calculator TextMaker takes away this labor Let s assume that the tennis players have rent a court for 2 hours and that each hour costs 10 00 plus tax 1 Delete the question mark before hours and enter the calculation HOURS 2 there using the Insert gt Calculation command This has the following result Firstly you have now assigned the variable HOURS a value of 2 secondly you have caused the content of this variable 2 to appear in the text 2 To the right in place of the question marks after enter the calculation PRICE 10 The same goes here Firstly you have now assigned the variable PRICE a value of 10 secondly you have caused the content of this variable 10 to ap pear in the text 382 o Ca
491. ot move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for documents in newspaper style You will find more information about picture frames in section Picture frames beginning on page 279 Changing position and size of a picture A picture inserted with the Object gt New Picture command is treated by Text Maker like a character within the text When you want to change the position of 218 e Pictures Manual TextMaker 2016 such a picture all you need to do is cut it and paste it at another place using the familiar Edit menu commands The size of picture can be changed in either of two ways Dragging the boundary lines Click on the picture to select it When the picture is selected blue lines are displayed on its borders When you drag one of these lines with the mouse the size of the picture is changed accordingly Entering values manually after double clicking Double click on the picture to bring up a dialog box where you can change the picture s properties see also the next section Switch to the dialog s Format tab and enter the desired measurements in the Size group box Changing the properties of pictures The Object gt Properties command gives you access to a dialog where all the properties of an object can be edited An object s properties include for example its size and margins along with numerous other properties that you can set To modify the prop
492. ou can alter the size of the object To do so enter the desired Width and Height For objects that contain text e g text frames you can either specify exactly a fixed width and height or you can allow TextMaker to adjust the size of the frame automatically as required to accommodate the text that it contains To do the latter select the Growing option for Width or Height and enter the desired minimum and maximum values Scaling group box Alternatively you can change an object s size by specifying the width as a percentage of the original width in Horz Scaling and the height as a percent age of the original height in Vert Scaling If the Keep aspect ratio option is checked modifying the object s height adjusts its width automatically keeping the object proportional and vice versa when modifying the object s width For OLE objects an additional option named Keep scaling is available When enabled any changes made to the object s size inside its source application are automatically adopted by the object in your TextMaker document When it is disabled the object in TextMaker won t change its size Note Not all OLE servers support this feature Rotation group box Available only for drawings and pictures Here you can rotate the object To do this enter the angle about which the object is to be rotated positive values correspond to clockwise rotation Flip group box Available only for drawings and pic
493. ou can use this button to export the currently selected picture that is to save a copy of it on your hard disk m Linear Gradient Rectangular Gradient etc The lowermost five fill types in the list allow you to fill the object using a gradient First open the Fill type list and select the desired type of gradient Then select one of the subtypes in the Variants list In the Options section the following additional settings can be made X offset and Y offset can be used to move the center of the gradient Angle rotates the gradient Hint You can also modify these settings by moving or rotating the cross hair displayed in the Sample field using the mouse If you check the Double gradient option for example a black white gradient will become a black white black gradient In the Colors section the colors can be adjusted as follows 264 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 If you want to change the gradient colors click one of the triangles below the bar representing the gradient Then select a color from the Color list 2 O Use the triangle on the left to change the start color and the triangle on the right to change the end color If desired you can also change the Transparency of the selected color Values between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency are permitted Additional colors can be added to the gradient by double clicking on the desired position in the bar and selecting a color To remov
494. ou must enter the desired page numbers for example 468 e Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 12 Print page 12 only 12 15 Print pages 12 through 15 12 Print page 12 and all pages following 12 Print pages 1 through 12 You can enter as many page ranges as you like provided you separate them with commas for example 2 5 12 Print pages 2 through 5 and page 12 In addition you can specify with the Pages to print option whether all pages or only the odd or even numbered pages in the given range are to be printed m Furthermore the Pages per sheet option allows you to print more than just one page on each sheet of paper For example when you select Four Pages each sheet of the printout will contain four pages scaled down accordingly Options This part of the dialog box contains additional printing options m Copies Here you can specify the number of copies of the document to be printed Collate copies When you print multiple copies of a document this option determines if the printout will be sorted after page numbers If you check this option and print multiple copies of a document with e g three pages the pages will be output in the following order 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 If it is not checked the order will be 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Note Not all printers support this feature Print to file Redirects the print output to a file instead of a physical printer Drop pictures Skips over all pict
495. ou tell TextMaker what database you want to use as the docu ment s bibliography database In addition you specify the fields of the database from which TextMaker is to obtain the abbreviations for use in references the author names and the titles for the sources To do this proceed as follows 428 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 1 Open the document to which you want to assign the bibliography database you created in step 1 or start a new document 2 Invoke Tools gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings 3 Click on the File button 4 A file dialog appears There navigate to the folder containing the bibliography database select the database and confirm with OK 5 After that specify the database fields that contain the abbreviations shortcuts the author names and the titles for the sources To do this make the appropriate selections from the three dropdown lists in the Settings group box 6 If required you can also specify the form in which the references that you will insert in step 3 see next section should be displayed by setting options in the Reference Style group box 7 When you are satisfied with all the settings confirm with OK TextMaker now knows what database contains information about the sources for this document and how this information is distributed over the database s fields So you can proceed to step 3 Step 3 Inserting references to sources When you hav
496. ould check this option to prevent TextMaker from including the first row in the sort Example A table contains addresses The first row contains headings like Name Street City etc In a case like this you should check this option to ensure that the headings will remain in the first row and will not be mixed up in the sort Case sensitive If you check this option sort terms that begin with lowercase letters will be placed above terms beginning with uppercase letters Otherwise all sort terms that begin with the same letter will be grouped together regardless of the cases of the first letters Example Off Apples bananas Cherries On bananas Apples Cherries Include cell formats Determines if cells should be sorted including their formatting Off Only the cell contents are sorted the original formatting of the table is re tained On Cells that are moved to another place due to the sorting take their formatting shading margins orientation rotation with them Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 209 Sorting text You can sort not only the contents of a table as described in the previous section but also paragraphs of normal text paragraphs To do this you use the Edit gt Sort command Proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of text to be sorted 2 Invoke the Edit gt Sort command 3 Select either an ascending or descending sort order 4 Confirm with OK The paragraphs are n
497. ound Thus if you search for test it will be found only when it stands alone as a separate word and not when part of another word like testament or protest 152 e Searching and replacing Manual TextMaker 2016 mw Search from top By default TextMaker begins a search at the current position of the text cursor However if you check the Search from top option TextMaker begins at the beginning of the document When the Search backwards option is checked Search from top is replaced by Search from end which works in a corresponding way m Search backwards If you check this option the search proceeds in the reverse direction that is from the current position of the text cursor towards the beginning of the text Search all frames By default TextMaker searches only in the text frame in which the text cursor is presently positioned If the text cursor is in the body text only the body text is searched However if you check this option TextMaker searches the body text as well as all text frames present in the document including headers and footers Reset button The Reset button clears the contents of the Search for field or the Replace with field including formatting depending on which of these fields contains the text cursor Format button The Format button enables you to search a document for specific formatting for example for all segments of text in bold characters or for
498. ow sorted in accordance with your settings The dialog box for the sort command allows you to set basic criteria and provides some additional options that can be set as needed The options include Sort by Normally all you need to specify here is the sort order Ascending A Z or Descending Z A The specification of a column as the basis for the sort makes sense only when the selected paragraphs are organized like a table that is when they contain elements delimited by tabs or other separator characters see the Separator option Then sort by If required you can specify more than one sort criterion For example if the selected paragraphs are in columnar form and if the first column contains last names and the second column contains first names you can select the first column for Sort by and the second column for Then sort by The paragraphs will be sorted first by last name In addition paragraphs containing the same last name will be sorted by first name 210 o Tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Separator You don t have to set the Separator unless you are sorting paragraphs organized in tabular form If the paragraphs contain for example names street addresses city names etc delimited by separator characters you can tell TextMaker how to recognize the separate parts of each address by checking one of the following options m Spaces E Tabs m User defined here you can enter the separator yourself An exa
499. owing options are available for this m Keep with next If this option is enabled TextMaker is prevented from inserting an automatic page break that would separate the current paragraph from the paragraph fol lowing Instead TextMaker inserts the break before the current paragraph If several paragraphs are selected these paragraphs and the paragraph that follows next after them are kept together 96 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Application example If you enable Keep with next for a heading you can avoid the situation in which a heading would fall at the end of a page and the text belonging to it would begin on the following page m Keep together Enabling this option prevents TextMaker from inserting a page break in the middle of the paragraph Instead TextMaker puts the automatic page break be fore the paragraph so that all of it falls on the next page Avoid widows orphans This option prevents paragraphs from being broken in such a way that so called widows or orphans would result A widow or orphan is a single line of a para graph that has been separated by a page break from all the other lines of the paragraph Widows and orphans are not especially pleasant to the eye and inter fere with the reading of a longer document If you enable this option pagination is performed in such a way that a para graph is not broken where the break would leave fewer than two of its lines on a given page If a paragra
500. ows Save within document If this option is checked TextMaker saves a copy of the picture in the docu ment and uses this copy instead of the original If this option is unchecked TextMaker saves only a reference to the picture file in the document m Copy to document s folder If this option is checked TextMaker creates a copy of the picture file in the folder where the document resides and uses this copy instead of the original This option is available only after the document is initially saved Changing the properties of picture frames To modify the properties of a picture frame first select the frame with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the picture frame The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modify the following settings Layout On this tab you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format For changing the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 280 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 E Filling For changing the filling of the picture Only visible in pi
501. p box These settings determine what happens when the text frame overlaps another object With the default setting Ignore object TextMaker does nothing Thus in the region of overlap the contents of both frames are rendered on top of one anoth er If on the other hand you check the Wrap text option TextMaker automatical ly reformats the text in this frame so that it flows around the area of overlap E Rotate by group box Lets you rotate the inner text in 90 degrees increments E Vertical alignment group box Lets you change the vertical alignment of the inner text as follows Option Meaning Top Align inner text at the top of the frame Centered Vertically center text between top and bottom of the frame Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 277 Bottom Align inner text at the bottom of the frame Justified Vertically justify text so that it is evenly distributed be tween top and bottom of the frame AutoShapes tab A text frame is actually an AutoShape that has been filled with text AutoShapes are drawings with a pre defined shape for example rectangles arrows banners callouts etc By default the AutoShape used for text frames is a simple rectangle To use a different shape select it on the AutoShapes tab Note Text frames have no border lines by default Therefore when you select a different AutoShape here the shape will not be visible until you add border lines To do this select the line sty
502. page 269 For pictures there is an additional tab with further options Picture tab On the Picture tab you can change settings that are specific to pictures Tip Some of these setting can also be modified using the Picture toolbar that appears automatically when you select a picture See section Using the Picture toolbar page 221 Options available on this tab Variants In this list a number of pre defined variations of the picture are presented for example different color modes grayscaled black amp white etc as well as col orized variants of the image To choose one of these variants simply click on it and the options in the dialog will be adjusted accordingly E Settings group box Here you can change brightness contrast saturation and gamma color balance with an effect on brightness More button This button opens a dialog with the following additional options 220 e Pictures Manual TextMaker 2016 When you activate the Mix with color option and choose a color below the picture will be colorized accordingly The options in the Cropping group box can be used to crop the picture This is useful when you need only a segment of the picture For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the picture enter 25 percent at Top m Transparency group box Lets you modify the transparency settings of the image Options available Detect automatically Reads the transparency set
503. pages This option is useful when your document is to be printed double sided like a book for example When it is checked differ ent master pages and thus also different headers and footers can be set up for left and right facing pages Hint In master page view the type of master page is displayed in the top ar ea of each master page For example if TextMaker displays Chapter 7 right master page there the corresponding page is the master page for all right pages in chapter 7 Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 113 Borders and shading of master pages Allows you to change the border and shading of a master page and thus of all document pages in the chapter When you click the Change button a popup menu appears where you can select which type of master page to change After that the usual dialog for border lines and shadings is displayed See also section Changing the page back ground page 115 m Chapter starts on Whenever you insert a chapter break TextMaker adds a page break According ly new chapters always begin on new pages Now when you change the setting of Chapter starts on from Either page the default to Right page for example TextMaker makes sure that the chapter al ways begins on a right page by automatically adding a blank page as necessary at the end of the previous chapter For example it is customary for every chapter in a printed book to begin on a right page This allows the re
504. paragraph style The only difference is that its original paragraph format is based on the selected text Of course you can change its formatting options anytime The Next Style option or Which style should be applied to the next paragraph Whenever you close a paragraph by pressing the Enter key that paragraph s style is automatically carried over to the next paragraph This is the normal case however it is sometimes inconvenient For example headings usually consist of just a single line followed by normal text and when you have typed a heading you usually want to revert to the Normal style Therefore for every paragraph style you can specify the style to be applied to the next paragraph once the current paragraph is closed by pressing To do this switch to the Style tab in the dialog for editing the style There select the desired following style in the Next Style option according to our example it would be the Normal style Using keyboard shortcuts If you need a format style very frequently you can give it a keyboard shortcut The advantage of doing that is that you can then apply the style very quickly using a single key press To assign a keyboard shortcut to a style switch to the Style tab in the dialog for editing the style There position the text cursor in the Shortcut key edit box and press the desired key combination Manual TextMaker 2016 Styles o 131 Note If you press a key
505. part from the fact that they are automatically positioned in the top and bottom margins they behave in principle like a text frame inserted on a master page Different master pages in the same document By default the master page applies to the whole document If you want to use different master pages within a single document the document must be divided into chapters for each chapter has its own master page You can read more about this in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 110 There you will also learn how to set up a master page that applies only to the first page of the document and how to create different master pages for the left and the right pages of the document Hint In master page view the type of master page is displayed in the top area of each master page For example if TextMaker displays Chapter 7 right master page there the corresponding page is the master page for all right pages in chapter 7 Locking master page objects in normal view Optionally objects that have been inserted on a master page can be locked to prevent them from being moved accidentally with the mouse when the document is being edited in normal view Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 109 To lock such objects invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to the View tab Check the Lock objects on master page option in the Locking group box Once locked master page objects can be neither
506. pecify the file to be opened and confirm with OK TextMaker opens the HTML document and displays it on the screen Note The presentation of a document in TextMaker can differ from a web brows er s presentation of it However you can always check the way the document will look in a browser by opening it in your web browser Manual TextMaker 2016 Internet functions e 459 Editing HTML documents In the following pages you will learn which special features are available to you when working with HTML documents and what you need to consider when using them Page formatting Page formatting does not apply to HTML documents If you make changes in the page format with File gt Page Setup the changes are not saved in an HTML document Pictures in HTML documents To insert a picture into an HTML document you can use the command Object gt New Picture as described in the chapter Pictures beginning on page 215 How ever you should take note of the following points m The picture should reside in the same folder as the document As a rule the picture file should reside in the folder where the document is saved So either copy the picture to that folder manually before adding it to the document or simply check the Copy to document s folder option in the Ob ject gt New Picture dialog and allow TextMaker to do this for you m The picture should not be saved in the document Beyond that you should not use the Save w
507. permanently in the doc ument if he rejects a change it is removed You can of course apply comments and use the Track changes function in combination You will find detailed information about both these functions on the following pages Using comments You can insert comments anywhere you like in the text of a document by invoking the commands from the Tools gt Comments menu Text to which a comment is attached is highlighted with color If you point to such text with the mouse the comment is displayed in a small window Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions 447 Or if the comments pane is enabled the comment is displayed there When ena bled the comments pane appears in the right margin of the document and displays comments associated with the visible text at all times By default comments are only displayed on the screen and are not printed Tip Using the Reviewing toolbar The easiest way to apply comments is to use the Reviewing toolbar Reviewing xl R PR a BEY yY yowa The Reviewing toolbar This toolbar appears automatically whenever the document contains at least one comment If this toolbar is not displayed you have probably disabled it To enable it again invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the check box to the left of Reviewing in the Toolbars list box The icons in this toolbar represent the following functions from left to right Insert comment Edit current comm
508. ph cannot be broken in this way for example be cause it has only two lines the entire paragraph is placed on the next page Non breaking spaces There s another method to control the text flow In certain cases it is necessary to keep two words that are separated by a space character on the same line TextMaker knows nothing about this and possibly puts the words on separate lines when it automatically inserts line breaks An example You want all the parts of the expression USD 29 80 to remain together and unbroken You can ensure this by inserting a so called non breaking space or protected space between USD and 29 80 To insert such a space press the key combination Ctri Shifts Space instead of the space bar alone When printed the non breaking space looks exactly like a normal space It differs only in directing TextMaker to ensure that the designated words are not separated on two lines Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 97 Suppressing line numbers The option Suppress line numbers on the Text flow tab in the Format gt Para graph dialog box has the following function Using the Format gt Section command Line numbers tab you can instruct TextMaker to display line numbers in the left page margin For paragraphs where you don t want a number to be displayed simply turn on the Suppress line num bers option Detailed information on line numbers can be found in the section
509. played in a chart proceed as follows 1 Select the chart by clicking on it 2 Right click on the legend to open its context menu Android In the Android version you can also open the context menu with your finger Just tap on the screen and hold your finger there for about a second 3 In the context menu choose the Legend Properties command not the Chart Properties command This command will open a dialog containing legend specific properties Hint Clicking the fi icon in the Chart toolbar or double clicking a chart ele ment will also access the element s properties dialog A different dialog appears for each type of chart element For example axes allow you to modify their scale legends allow you to choose a different font etc For detailed information on all chart elements and their individual properties see the manual for the spreadsheet application PlanMaker keyword chart ele ments Changing common chart properties The previous sections discussed how to change the properties of specific chart elements The following section details the common chart properties This includes layout options the chart type settings related to the data series etc 232 e Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 To modify the common properties of a chart select the chart and choose the Ob ject gt Properties command Hint Clicking the icon in the Chart toolbar will also access the Object Properties dialog In this dialog
510. plicable to this paragraph That is to say manually applied paragraph formats take precedence over styles If you want to free such a paragraph of its manual formatting simply select it and reapply the original paragraph style using Format gt Paragraph Style The format of the paragraph will revert to that specified in the style and subsequent changes to the style will be effective on the paragraph The paragraph style Normal A paragraph style called Normal is present by default in every document It has a special significance it is the standard style of paragraph formatting for the docu ment When you start typing text in a new document the Normal style is auto matically assigned to the text unless and until you select a different style which becomes effective from the current position 134 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 If you change the Normal style for example by specifying a new line spacing for it every paragraph in the document is reformatted accordingly excepting those paragraphs formatted with a different line spacing using Format gt Paragraph Moreover paragraphs you enter subsequently will have this new line spacing Creating linked paragraph styles When you create new paragraph styles as described at the beginning of this sec tion they are always based on the paragraph style called Normal Accordingly if you change the Normal style for example by selecting a different line
511. plicate of a data record To do this page to the desired record and then invoke the command Duplicated data records are always added at the end of the database just like newly defined data records Deleting and restoring data records Data records that are no longer needed can be deleted at any time in the database module Deleting a data record To delete a data record invoke the command Edit gt Delete current record key board shortcut 0J This function can also be invoked with the 2 icon on the Standard toolbar Please note that the data record is not immediately deleted but only marked for deletion Deletion of all data records marked for deletion actually takes place when the database is compressed with the command Edit gt Compress database see below Deleting all selected data records With the command Edit gt Delete selected records you mark all currently selected records for deletion This is useful when you want to delete a large number of records Working with selections is described in section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 Show deleted records By default the option View gt Show deleted records is turned on meaning that even data records marked for deletion are viewable As a visual indication that a record is deleted the word Deleted appears in the status bar 348 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 However you can deactivate the option View gt Show deleted records at
512. ppear farther apart If you change the character pitch the width of the characters themselves rather than the spacing between them is affected To change these settings invoke Format gt Character switch to the Spacing tab and enter the desired value at Spacing between characters or Character pitch Note For some printers changing the pitch of characters formatted in one of the printer s internal fonts is ignored in the printout Kerning Certain pairs of letters look better when the spacing between these letters is re duced or increased a bit Such adjustments called Kerning can be made automati cally by TextMaker A picture illustrates best what kerning is about VADUZ VADUZ Top without kerning bottom with kerning 68 o Character formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 The upper half of the picture without kerning shows that the letters V and A are too far apart when no kerning is applied In the lower half with kerning this has been corrected To activate kerning select the text of interest choose the Format gt Character command switch to the Spacing tab and activate the option Use kerning TextMaker now automatically adjusts the spacing between all letters where this would improve the text appearance Note Not all typefaces provide kerning information in their font data which is required to determine which letter pairs to adjust and how Almost all font collec tions published by S
513. pply certain commands that modify its formatting For example if you want to format a single word in a specific font you must select the word before you specify the font The following pages will teach you everything there is to know about working with selections Topics covered m Selecting text and objects m Moving deleting and copying m Pasting with special formatting Inserting a document Selecting text and objects Before you execute a TextMaker command you can in many cases select a seg ment of text or an object to which you want the command to apply The com mand is then performed only on the selected text or object Depending on whether you are using TextMaker under Windows Linux or on an Android device the way you proceed when selecting text is a bit different For that reason this section is split into two parts Selecting in the Windows Linux version m Selecting in the Android version Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with selections e 57 Selecting in the Windows Linux version In the Windows and the Linux version of TextMaker you can make a selection either with the mouse or the keyboard Using the mouse for selection You make selections with the mouse as follows Selecting text To select a text segment of any length position the mouse cursor at the begin ning of the segment press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the end of the segment To select a word double clic
514. ption for this label As mentioned before each label has its own numbering independent from the numberings of other labels Apart from that an individual table of figures can be generated for each label see the next section E Delete button The Delete button allows you to delete a label Select the label to delete before hand When you delete a label all existing captions are kept However you cannot insert new captions with that label anymore Also inserting or updating tables of figures for that label is no longer possible Hint In case you have deleted a label by mistake you can fix this by simply clicking the New button and creating a label with exactly the same name Notes m The label will be inserted into the caption as text E The sequential number will be inserted as a field of the type Sequence num ber Fields of this type return a sequential number that is increased by one for each of its occurrences given that they belong to the same label For each la Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 423 bel an individual series of Sequence fields is used with its numberings being independent from each other label For general information on working with fields see the chapter Fields page 161 Creating a table of figures As described in the last section you can insert automatically numbered captions into the text using the Insert gt Caption command For example the picture
515. quickly assign headings to levels 1 through 3 or convert headings back to normal text Moreover all of the key combinations mentioned above work not only in Outline view but also in the normal view Selecting the outline levels to be displayed To enable you to gain a better overview of a document s structure in Outline view TextMaker provides you with a way to hide the normal text while leaving the headings visible It also allows you to hide headings below a specified level when ever required The Outline toolbar provides buttons for this purpose as follows 2S 5678 9 Al Tet The Text button furthest to the right is especially helpful in this regard With it you can control whether only headings or headings together with associated text are displayed You can activate or deactivate this button by clicking on it with the mouse When the button is activated the text is displayed When it is deactivated only the headings remain visible Hint You can also use the keyboard shortcut to turn the display of text on off With the other buttons you can specify the outline levels to be displayed A click on the 1 button hides all headings with outline levels below 1 so that only the major headings remain visible A click on the 3 button makes all headings of level 3 and higher visible etc Hint You can also use the keyboard shortcuts Alt through 9 instead of these buttons By default the All button is activated
516. r 2016 Outputting documents e 475 9 Open or create a form letter see chapter Form letters and form faxes begin ning on page 367 Assign the desired database to the form letter see section Assigning a data base to a document beginning on page 368 If you don t want to send the fax to all recipients stored in the database open the database and select in it the recipients you want included see section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 Invoke the command File gt Send gt Fax Merge Make sure that the driver for your fax software e g Microsoft Fax on FAX is shown as the selected Fax device Specify which records of the attached database are to receive the faxed letter All every record in the entire database Selected all records in the database that are selected this is the default setting Range a range of record numbers here you must enter the numbers of the first and last records in the range Confirm with OK Provided TextMaker supports your fax software it will display a dialog that allows you to make settings for the fax transmission First enter the database field that contains the fax numbers unless it is already entered To do this click on the three dots beside the Fax number edit box select the database field containing fax numbers and confirm with OK TextMaker now displays the field name and under it as an example the content of the field for
517. r document that contains the link to this file the OLE object will appear modified accordingly thus the OLE object remains linked to the original file Editing OLE objects OLE objects can be modified as follows Manual TextMaker 2016 OLE objects e 241 Tip To edit an OLE object simply double click on it The object will be opened immediately in its native application where it can be edited Alternatively you can use the menu to edit an OLE object Proceed as follows 1 Click on the OLE object to select it 2 Open the Edit menu At the bottom of the menu you will find an item that refers to the object by name for example Bitmap object Selecting this menu item opens a sub menu containing all the OLE commands that are available for this object There is an Edit command for editing the object Invoke this com mand 3 The application associated with the OLE object now starts Make the desired changes there To return to TextMaker simply exit the object s source application When exiting some applications you will be asked if you want to update the object in the TextMaker document Answer Yes otherwise your changes will be discarded Editing links to OLE objects If you acquire an OLE object from a file with the Link option checked you can edit the resulting link to the source file with the Edit gt Link command When you invoke this command a dialog box appears and displays a list of all the e
518. r rename the files in this folder manually To restore a previous version of a document you don t have to worry about this folder anyway TextMaker has a special menu command for this the command File gt Revert to Previous Version You can use this command to revert to a previous version of a document as fol lows 1 Open the document of interest in case it isn t opened already 2 Invoke the command File gt Revert to Previous Version 3 A dialog opens listing all backup copies available for the current document along with their creation date Select the version that you want to revert to Hint The Preview button opens a preview of the selected version 4 Click on Restore to revert the document in the current window to the selected previous version Note Please note that this action will replace the current document with a previous version Accordingly when you save it now its current version is overwritten by an older version Alternatively a button named Open as Copy is available When you click this button the backup copy will open in a new window instead rather than replac ing the document in the current window This is useful when you want to compare the current version with an older version But what to do when the original file is no longer available The procedure described above only works as long as the original document is still available But what to do when the original file has been lost for ex
519. rd thus it will search the complete database Otherwise the search begins with the active data record m Search backwards If this switch is activated the database is searched in reverse record order E Case sensitive If this switch is activated the search engine takes account of the case of the characters in the search term Thus in a search for House only House would be found not HOUSE house etc m Search only selected records If this switch is activated only the selected data records are searched otherwise all are searched see also section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 m Accuracy Specifies how closely the content of a field must agree with the search term 346 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Search term anywhere in the field Finds all data records in which the search term occurs anywhere in the fields being searched Field begins with the search term Finds only those data records in which the search term occurs at the beginning of the search fields So if you search for Fish only records with Fish at the beginning of a field are found includ ing for example records in which a field begins with Fisher but excluding records in which a field contains Ralph Fisher Field matches the search term Here the search function finds only data records in which the field content corresponds completely with the search term So if you search for
520. rd automatically Android only When checked the on screen keyboard will pop up automatically whenever you are given an opportunity to enter text for example when you tap into the document or when you tap into an input field in a dialog Change keyboard layout automatically Android only When checked the layout of the on screen keyboard will automati cally adapt to the current situation For example in a dialog when you tap into an input field that accepts only numbers the keyboard will automatically be switched into numeric mode Use SHM extensions Linux only When this option is enabled TextMaker uses shared memory caching to speed up the responsiveness of the display Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 543 Note Depending on the particular system in certain cases the amount of shared memory available might not be sufficient for TextMaker In such cases TextMaker automatically disables this option Use XIM Linux only When this option is enabled TextMaker supports the composition of accented characters a etc using XIM For example with a German keyboard you can insert the character 6 by first pressing the key and then pressing the 0 key If you disable this option composing characters like this is no longer possible Note On some systems disabling this option improves the responsiveness of the display when you are typing text fast Use XRender Linux only When thi
521. re information on frames see chapter Frames and drawings page 247 Editing charts On the next pages you will learn how to edit existing charts Topics covered Entering editing the data of a chart The first section covers the Object gt Chart gt Edit Data command It allows you to edit the data of a chart i e to enter or change the values that are pre sented in the chart Working with chart elements Charts consist of various components data series axes legend etc referred to as chart elements Each of these chart elements can be selected and modified Read this section to learn how m Changing common chart properties Apart from the properties of specific chart elements there are also common chart properties that you can modify This includes various layout options the chart type setting related to the data series etc To change the chart properties use the Object gt Properties command detailed in this section See the next pages for details Hint Basic information on charts can be found in the manual for the spreadsheet application PlanMaker chapter Charts Tip Using the Chart toolbar When you select a chart a toolbar named Chart toolbar will automatically appear ld X p v Chart Area z ib H AE E mE The Chart toolbar This toolbar provides icons helpful for working with charts From left to right E Change chart type m Change chart subtype Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 2
522. reate apply and modify para graph styles Alternatively you can perform these tasks with the help of another very useful tool in TextMaker the sidebar The sidebar can amongst other things display a list of all paragraph styles availa ble To format a paragraph in a specific style simply place the cursor inside it and then double click on the paragraph style in the sidebar Apart from that you can also use the sidebar for editing and managing paragraph styles All you have to do is enable the sidebar and activate its paragraph styles function This can be achieved as follows 1 If the sidebar is not displayed enable it e g by invoking the command View gt Sidebar gt Show at Right 2 In the little toolbar displayed at the top of the sidebar click on the Wi icon This will switch to the paragraph styles function of the sidebar The sidebar now displays all paragraph styles available in the document allowing you to perform the following actions m Applying a paragraph style First place the cursor in the paragraph of interest or select multiple para graphs Then double click on the desired style in the sidebar Alternatively select the style with a single click and then click on the Apply button at the bottom of the sidebar Editing a paragraph style In the sidebar select the style of interest with a single mouse click Then click on the Edit button at the bottom of the sidebar m Managing paragraph sty
523. rent operating system use the File gt Print command as usual and follow the instructions given in the manual of your fax software E The File gt Print Merge or the File gt Send gt Fax Merge command is not available These commands are not available until a database containing addresses of recipients is attached to the document with the Tools gt Set Database com mand See section Assigning a database to a document beginning on page 368 m TextMaker for Windows A fax is sent to the printer instead of to the fax A Did you use the correct command If you want to make use of TextMaker s extended fax support send your faxes with File gt Send gt Fax not with File gt Print B Invoke File gt Send gt Fax Make sure that the Fax device option is set to the fax printer driver that was installed by your fax software For example if you use Microsoft Fax this setting must read Microsoft Fax on FAX m TextMaker for Windows When sending faxes the dialog box for entering recipient data does not appear You are using fax software that TextMaker does not support Naturally you can continue to use it following the fax procedures described in your fax software manual However TextMaker s extended fax functions including the fax merge function will not be accessible Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents 487 Document management TextMaker provides functions that simplify document manageme
524. resents a list of all images that you have added captions to For example if you have inserted captions for all images in a document you can create a table of these images It includes page numbers so that the reader can see at a glance on which page each image is located Note Text entered directly behind a caption also appears in the table of figures For example if you have extended the caption Figure 1 to Figure 1 The Larch this entire text will be displayed in the table For detailed information see the next pages Inserting captions for images and other objects Use the Insert gt Caption command to insert an automatically numbered caption into the text For example if you want to label the images in a document simply select the image of interest and invoke this command TextMaker will insert a caption below the picture It consists of a label and a sequential number e g Figure 1 The numbering is performed fully automatically If you add additional captions or remove existing ones all other numbers are adapted accordingly To add a caption to a picture proceed as follows 1 Select the picture that you want to add a caption to by clicking on it Alternatively place the text cursor at the position where you want to insert the caption For example insert a blank line below the picture and place the text cursor there 2 Invoke the Insert gt Caption command 3 In the Labels list select t
525. resresrrerrsrerensrsrrerrsreeresee 132 The scope of paragraph Styles eee cece eeeeeeceeecesecesecesecsecaecseeeseeeas 134 The paragraph style Normal eeeeeeeseeeceeeceseceseceseceaecaecseeeaeeens 134 Manual TextMaker 2016 Contents o v Creating linked paragraph Styles eee eceeceeeceeeceecesecsecnaecneeeneeens 135 Paragraph styles and the sidebar eee eceeceeeceeecesecesecesecnneceeeaeeens 136 Manat ing styles cc esere eener sacs decsthcestgsspcusteeshes device ss eNe oni OERS S 137 Doc me nt template S ienee eeo area nre iaee ape aeee onie ETEN RASS ea E 139 Creating document templates eseseeessseeeseseretssesrrereseeeresreressererererrrereset 140 Applying document templates sesseesseeeesseesereseseeerereeerrsreresserrreresrreresee 140 Modifying document templates ee eesceeceeesseceeeeecsseceeeeecnseceeeeeeaeeeees 141 The document template Normal tm ceeeesseceeeeeeseeceeeeecneeceeneeenaeeeeee 142 Multi column page layouts 143 Changing the number of columns 000 eee eecesecesecnse cee ceeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeens 143 WHat are SECTIONS Tiesin i a bed cs stvns donde deaseecte o 147 Searching and replacing 149 Searching aeeoea aetseeebvass og thee EEE ES E EE EEEE ESS 150 Replacing eise n a aoe ta T ee S EE RE 151 Repeating a search replace ss essseeesseeseseseseeereseterrsrerrssesrenrrsrenrssrerrsserrrsresrent 151 Expanded search options sssessseeesseeserssrsrrerrsreerrsrrrrssertrnrsrenresee
526. ress the Enter key In response TextMaker unchecks the Show merge record option Tip When you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons without clicking a text box appears indicating the function of the icon Practice letter Practice makes perfect Therefore in this section we want to create a form letter for practice Before you begin start a new document with File gt New Assign the example database TMW DBF that was provided with the program to this document using the Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes e 371 command Tools gt Set Database Under Windows this file can be found in the SOFTMAKER folder under your documents folder Then type the following text Naturally you are free to abbreviate it or to type something completely different What matters is simply this Important Do not type those parts of the text that are enclosed in curly braces they represent database fields Instead whenever you get to one of them invoke Insert gt Field select the item Database field in the Field type list box select the field name in the Field name list box and then click on Insert In this way the database fields will be entered into the text The Society of Calligraphers FIRSTNAME NAME1 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP SALUT _BODY We are pleased to announce that the Society of Calligraphers will no longer have to rely on handwriting for its official communications We have d
527. resserersresrent 152 Searching replacing formatting eseeeseseseseeeseseeeseserrrsrestesresrenreseerresesreeresee 155 BOOKMarkS cei E E EEE T E E AR ERE NER a eeiaees 156 The Goto COMMan snie e e i ai 158 Navigating documents with the sidebar essseeesseeseeeeseeerrsreerrserrresrrrreresrees 159 Fields 161 nsere A fe d a E a A aa aa a A Eaa aaa ear E aiaa 161 Inserting the date and time as text eee eeeceeneecsseceeececeaeeeeeeeceaeeesaeecsaeeenees 167 Inserting special characters 169 Automatic numbering 171 Simple CNUMETALIONS ecinic Ei i a a 172 N mbered HstSiinr enrica in Ea E E EE E E ER 176 Creating numbered listsissnegeninrnis gin aa i a 177 Applying numbered lists 2 0 0 cee ceesceceseceesceceseeessceceeeeenceceeeeeneecsseeeeneeesees 182 Modifying numbered lists cescceseceesceceseceeeeceeeeeeneeceeeeeeneecsereeeneeesees 184 Numbered headin Siea a e e a E ie ese he aes 184 Numbering with Auto NnUMbers eseesseseeeseeeseseeereserrresesreeresrerreseerreserrrsresrene 185 Adding line numbe ineno eae nE R oae E o rE E ien 186 vi e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables 189 Inserting tablen sanii enei ao rei otera eben reni pE E EEEE apes enne TSE 190 Editing tables siise naaasar En o ETE Sr a eeri iSS 190 Selecting table cells and cell Contents ee eee ee ceeeceeecesecesecaecneeeneeens 191 Deleting copying moving cell CONtENES eee ee eee eeteceee cess ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 192
528. rid function Normally the grid is disabled Accordingly you can move frames and drawings with complete freedom using the mouse To enable or disable the grid do the following 1 Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 573 2 Switch to the Grid tab 3 Enable or disable the Snap to grid option When the grid is enabled and you insert for example a new text frame or shift the position of an existing frame the object cannot be positioned arbitrarily with the mouse Instead it jumps from one point on the grid to the next Changing the grid distance You can set the distance between the grid points to any value you like To do this proceed as follows Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 Switch to the Grid tab 3 Enter the desired values in the Grid distance group box Showing the grid on the screen By default the grid is not shown on the screen If you want it to be displayed activate the Show grid option in the dialog described above Note The grid is displayed on the screen only it does not appear on the printed page Using guides Besides the grid described in the previous section TextMaker gives you an addi tional aid for positioning frames and drawings called guides You can set up horizontal and vertical guides As soon as a frame or drawing that you have inserted or moved comes near one of the guides it automatica
529. ription of TextMaker s most important basic functions After that you should consider taking the TextMaker Tour in the next chapter which guides you through the program step by step with practical examples Note Most of the illustrations in this manual were prepared with the Windows version of TextMaker On other operating systems some of the controls have a slightly different appearance but their modes of operation are identical Entering text When you start TextMaker an empty document window is opened automatically Thus you can begin entering text immediately Don t worry If you can use a typewriter you will have no problem operating TextMaker Note With a typewriter you press the Enter key at the end of every line You should not do this with a word processor If a word you type won t fit on the current line TextMaker will transfer it to the next line automatically You should press the Enter key only in the following cases E to end a paragraph to enter blank lines So while inside a paragraph simply let TextMaker take care of making correct line breaks Moving the text cursor While editing text you always see a blinking line This is the so called text cursor When you type something the letters always appear where this text cursor is positioned You can move the text cursor anywhere between the beginning and the end of the document The direction keys are provided for this purpose The arrow keys
530. rk properly the paragraph must have been given a numbering using the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command If the para graph has not been numbered the cross reference will show a zero This option is not available for objects Editing and updating a cross reference Cross references are fields thus what goes for fields in general goes for cross references as well they can be formatted deleted copied and moved in the same way as normal text however their contents cannot be edited directly Tip Whenever you want to see a document s cross references and the targets to which they refer you can check the Display Field Names option on the View tab of the File gt Properties dialog Then the cross references will be displayed in a form in which their type and their target is visible for example Refer ence Bookmark Page name_of_bookmark 436 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Updating cross references Just like all other kinds of fields cross references are not updated automatically For example if you move the target of a cross reference to another page the page number displayed by the cross reference continues to reflect the original position of the target However when you print the document TextMaker automatically updates all fields including this cross reference to reflect the latest state of the document Thus when you print the document you can be sure that all cross references w
531. rms Object tab On this tab you can make settings that are specific to checkboxes E Text Here you can enter the text that is displayed to the right of the checkbox m Value Here you can specify the initial state of the checkbox whether it should appear checked or unchecked in the document 3D effect If you check this option the checkbox is drawn with a 3D effect 308 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 With checkbox frames you can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the text Checkbox frames You insert a checkbox frame with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Checkbox Frame command The usage and behavior of a checkbox frames correspond to those for checkboxes see the previous section The difference A checkbox frame like all types of frames has a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you insert or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame Dropdown lists You insert a dropdown list with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown command You encounter dropdown lists in many dialog boxes They offer several alterna tives from which you can select only one Such lists are ideal for forms since they reduce the amount of typing needed when forms are filled out and prevent typing errors Usage of dropdown lists To open a list you click on
532. rogram Rather TextMaker needs it to automatically personalize the document templates for letters faxes etc that come with the program You can always change this information later see the section Preferences General tab beginning on page 527 Manual TextMaker 2016 Installation and program startup e 19 Installing under Linux You will find information about installing TextMaker in the e mail that you re ceived after purchasing the software Starting In most Linux distributions the installer automatically creates shortcut icons for all SoftMaker Office applications in the menu or on the desktop To start any of the applications double click on the corresponding icon Alternatively the following shell scripts are available for launching the programs E textmaker16 launches TextMaker m planmaker16 launches PlanMaker m presentations16 launches Presentations To start an application execute the corresponding script e g in a shell Note When you start TextMaker for the first time you will be asked to enter your name and address This information is not for the purpose of registering the program Rather TextMaker needs it to automatically personalize the document templates for letters faxes etc that come with the program You can always change this information later see the section Preferences General tab beginning on page 527 Installing on an Android device The installation procedure on Android
533. roid version the procedure for selecting text is a bit different You can use either your finger or a mouse Proceed as follows E Selecting text The easiest way to select a segment of text is the following Select the word that you want to use as the starting point of the selection by double tapping on it Large handles will appear before and after the word to indicate that the word is now selected Lorem Yagi dolor These two handles represent start and end of the selection They allow you to extend the selection easily Simply drag these handles to the desired positions m Selecting objects To select an object picture drawing etc tap on it A frame appears around the object to indicate that it is selected m Canceling a selection When you want to cancel a selection tap anywhere in the document outside the selection Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with selections e 59 Moving deleting and copying All the operating systems that TextMaker supports have an extremely useful feature the clipboard The clipboard works like this when you select something in the document and then cut or copy it your selection goes into the clipboard The clipboard holds the selection temporarily so that it is available for reinsertion anywhere in the docu ment In this way the clipboard facilitates the deletion copying and moving of text segments as well as objects All the required commands are found in the Edit menu C
534. round color is not changed Accord ingly when you save the document in HTML format and open it in a browser the document is displayed with the browser s default background color Background image You can specify a picture to be used for the background of the document by entering the filename of the desired image here The background is created by tiling the image You must specify the full path and filename of the image You can either enter this information manually or click on the Browse button to locate the image file on your hard disk Note Background images are not displayed in TextMaker they only appear when the file is saved in HTML format and opened in a web browser Hint If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do this click on Define color the last item in the color list see section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 553 Document properties Statistics tab The Statistics tab in the File gt Properties dialog displays statistical information about the current document number of characters number of sentences average word length etc Tip If you select a segment of text before you open this tab it will show statis tics for the selected text only otherwise it will show them for the entire docu ment The items of information shown are mostly self explanatory However the differ
535. rs allowing you to select the picture to be inserted Choose a picture file and confirm with OK The picture is now inserted into the text Picture not visible If you can t see the picture in the document after you have inserted it that is probably because you have disabled the display of pictures in other words checked the Use placeholders option for pictures To re enable the display of pictures invoke File gt Properties switch to the View tab and check the Show pictures option Picture frames As explained in the introduction there is an alternative way of inserting pictures using picture frames These are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text above them is inserted or deleted You will find more information about this topic in section Picture frames beginning on page 279 Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows m Save within document If this option is checked TextMaker saves a copy of the picture in the docu ment and uses this copy instead of the original Otherwise TextMaker saves only a reference to the original picture file in the document m Copy to document s folder If this option is checked TextMaker creates a copy of the picture file in the folder in which the document itself resides and uses this copy instead of the original This option is available only when the document has already been saved before since otherwise Tex
536. rties 3D tab Note This tab is available only for text frames and drawings Use the 3D tab to add a three dimensional effect to the object Options available 3D effect variants Offers a variety of pre defined 3D effect settings to choose from The entries in the list are merely samples If required you can specify the way the effect appears more precisely with the options listed below Options group box Lets you modify the depth of the 3D object and the angles about which it is rotated on the horizontal and vertical axes 3D surface group box Side faces By default the color used for the side faces of the object is deter mined automatically To use a different color activate the Side faces option and select the desired color from the list Affect front side If this option is checked the front side of the object will also be lightened or darkened according to the lighting of the 3D effect To change the lighting click the More button Wire frame If you check this option the object is rendered as a wire frame model Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 267 More button Click the More button to change the lighting of the 3D effect An additional dialog box will appear To change the position of the light source click the cor responding position in the Lighting field The other two options let you change the Intensity of the light source and the type of Surface to be simulated Object properties Effects t
537. s By dragging this handle you can change the rounding accordingly AutoShapes The AutoShape tool allows you to insert AutoShapes AutoShapes are ready made drawings appropriate for a wide variety of applications including standard shapes like rectangles and ellipses as well as arrows flow chart symbols stars speech balloons etc As soon as you choose the desired AutoShape it is inserted in a standard size If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners Note With some types of AutoShapes yellow handles appear on the object when it is selected If you drag on one of these handles a parameter controlling the shape of the object is changed For example stars have handles that let you change the size of their tines Tip If you wish you can even enter text in an AutoShape just as you can in a text frame You will find information about this in the section Adding text to AutoShapes beginning on page 289 TextArt The TextArt tool allows you to insert TextArt objects These are characters that can be rendered with various kinds of special effects When you activate this tool a dialog appears Enter your text in the dialog s Text field and then click on Variants to choose one of the ready made effects to be applied to the text Confirm with OK to leave the dialog Adding text to AutoShapes You can add text to an AutoShape if des
538. s anid es dcecsse sof e cepacia co eae ara EEEE E ARE AES anes 92 Outline level praene ee e ar E e E a EEE nie an ean 95 Forcing breaks before paragraphs seseesseresesreeseserersserrrsrsreeresrerenserrrererreeese 96 Paragraph COMPO sii sce arerp ra ae E ea pA E Ea EA peptone IE 96 Suppressing line NUMDETS woeks eoor cee ceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceseceseesaeeaeenaes 98 Page formatting 99 Inserting manual page breaks 2 0 0 ee eee eeceeeceeecesecnseceecaeecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 100 Pale Setup ieai enrii ee eneo ra E E EEES E RER Gants E a Eo n aeS 100 Headers and footers oii cnsieieeiro nonno abs seh Shek ste eorna r E aSo ea e 102 Creating and editing headers and footers ssseeeseseseseresssreeeserrererrrerereeee 103 Inserting the page number date etc seeesseeesseseseeeseseesrseeresserereresrreresee 104 Changing the properties of headers and footers esseeesseeeesseeseresrrereeeeee 105 Different headers footers on the first page seseeseseesseeesseeeerserrererrrrreresee 107 Different headers footers on left and right pages eee eeeeeeeeee 107 Deleting headers and footers 0 0 0 lees eeeeeeceeecesecesecesecsecaecnaeeaeens 107 Master page Ssenari E teh ceesk seid cs EEE E E EN eE 108 Editing the master pag rssisi ieee eiiesineien eerie evie oaii i ies 108 Dividing a document into Chapters ee eeceeceseceseceseceseceeceeeseeeeseeeeeesees 110 Inserting and removing chapters cesscesce
539. s creating deleting renaming or resetting toolbars m Customizing toolbar icons adding removing or repositioning icons E Creating user defined toolbar icons to start other programs These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Displaying and hiding toolbars You can enable or disable individual toolbars at any time for example when you want to gain more room on the screen for text editing To select the toolbars you would like to display proceed as follows 1 Invoke the View gt Toolbars command 2 Click on the check box in front of a toolbar s name to enable or disable it 3 Exit the dialog box with Close The toolbars you have checked or unchecked are now enabled or disabled 560 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Tip There is a faster way to do this When you click with the right mouse button on any toolbar a list of all available toolbars is displayed To enable or disable a toolbar simply click on the corresponding list entry Visible in mode Some toolbars are visible only in particular working modes of TextMaker The Formatting toolbar for example is visible only in normal editing mode When you switch to Object mode which is only for editing objects it disappears since it has no function in this mode The Visible in mode option controls this behavior With it you can specify when a toolbar will be visible for example Option Meaning Al
540. s telephone number etc to appear in the document These fields are used for example in the document templates supplied with the program m User Business You can use these fields in the same way you use the home address fields see above when you want contents of your business address to appear in the doc ument These fields can be edited with the Settings button Auto number Generates a serial number There is more about this in chapter Automatic numbering beginning on page 171 Editing fields If you want to edit an existing field e g to change the date format it displays simply select it in the text and invoke the Insert gt Field command once again The dialog for inserting fields will appear Make the desired changes confirm with OK and the field in the text will be replaced accordingly 164 e Fields Manual TextMaker 2016 Updating fields Whenever a document is opened or printed all the fields it contains are updated automatically Accordingly if you print a document containing the Print date field tomorrow tomorrow s date will appear in the field You can update the fields manually at any time using the Tools gt Update Fields or the key All the fields and calculations in the document will then be brought up to date Showing field names and shading fields When you want control over the fields contained in a document you can check the Display field names option Then TextMaker displays
541. s 156 157 546 547 Show fonts in font list 532 533 Show merge record 546 547 Show multiple pages side by side 524 527 Show pictures 546 548 Show unprintable characters 524 526 Sidebar View menu 26 27 127 136 159 Size of objects 253 262 Small caps 65 Smart quotes search 152 154 use 535 537 SmartText expand automatically 535 537 use 333 SmartText Insert menu 334 335 336 Smooth edges of pictures 541 542 Smooth edges of screen fonts 532 534 Manual TextMaker 2016 Snap to page margins 574 577 Soft edges effect for objects 268 Soft hyphen 328 330 Soft hyphens 524 526 SoftMaker 16 SoftMaker Basic 515 SoftMaker Equation Editor 245 SoftMaker Office Professional 15 16 Sort Edit menu 210 Sort Table Table menu 208 Sorting databases 349 tables 208 text 210 Spaces 524 526 Spaces non breaking 96 97 377 378 Special characters 169 Spell checking editing user dictionaries 327 in the background 322 535 536 installing additional dictionaries 577 language selection 318 manually 321 Spelling reform German 324 Split Cells Table menu 195 Split Table Table menu 196 SQRT function 396 398 Standard Format menu 72 125 Standard View menu 556 Standard toolbar 25 Statistics 554 Status bar 27 STR function 396 398 Strike out 65 STRING function 396 398 Style manager 137 Style reference field 161 163 437 StyleRef field 161 163 437 Styles 119 137 Subscript 6
542. s 324 Editing user dictionaries ienie a E EAS 327 Hyphenation cence n gions A E E ES 328 Thesaurus nipan E E A A E S 331 Berlitz translation dictionaries 0 0 0 0 eee eee eeceeeceseceecsseceeceecaeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeens 332 SMALE OR ern taea ree ere E EE ESEE EEr EE OE E S EE EES ESS 333 Creating Smart Text ntTie S si essri eseri nire E S EEEE EEE 334 Inserting SmartText entries nseries isesi eiei e erreti Sr soie esise 335 Editing SmartText entries eeesereseseorerstereesererererersersrererereresrererererereersre 336 Database 339 Opening a data base niesie ne oiee ieee cen tists adie este eeds 340 Using the database module 0 0 eee eee eeceeeceeecesecesecesecsaecaeecaeeeseseaeeeeeeneens 341 The database module s main Window esseseseeseesecseeeecneeeeeeaeeneeseenees 341 List and form VIEW eiscciccssessepesciweaoss ri enea erae E cates E E bene 343 Browsing through data records essseesseeeesseeseseseseeeresreerrsreresserrreresrreresre 344 Manual TextMaker 2016 Contents e ix Calling up a data record by its record number 0 eee eeseceeeeeeeereeeee 344 S arching a database sosser pener I aniisi 345 Adding and editing data records ss esseeeesseeeeeseseeesesreerrseeressereresesrenresee 347 Deleting and restoring data records eesseeeeseeeseeeseseeersseerssrrrrererrrerrsre 348 Sorting a database serpo eers aier errr aree enean a S I APER Ene aS 349 Closing adata base vase oner eei e an r ae i eS N
543. s 350 Importing individual addresses s snnneessesseseseeessesssseseseenssreseseseeesenensesesee 350 Preparing a document template 0 0 0 eee eeceeeceeecesecesecaecaecseeeaeeens 351 Using document templates ee eee esecesecsecseecneeeseseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeseenaes 351 Eistsand labels yi eee e a doped eau e aE a keni 354 Printing envelopes cos ernen ee ar E ae anae aE anie easi 360 Creating a mew database cossens erredak onses esr ao eine 363 Form letters and form faxes 367 Assigning a database to a document ssssssssesessisssessrstsesessseeseseseeresennseresee 368 Inserting database fields eee ee eeeceeeceeecesecesecesecaecaecaeecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeees 370 Viewing test records in the teXt ee eee cee eeeeseeeeeeeeceeceecesecssecaecseecneeees 370 PractiCe letter oesi aenieei pete Sie Sek bee co veces E E E 371 Selecting data records seessesrerersererererersersterersresesrerersresesrersrererssnereresersensrs 373 Selecting single records manually eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesseenaes 374 Selecting bY record NUMBELS oiis ene ious eneaet esses 374 Selecting DY COMCUMON se ssstiessicseevensceesnteeeee scot i R 375 Printing or faxing form letters eee ee eeceeecesecesecnseceeecaeecaeeeaeseneeeeeeneens 377 Calculations in the text 379 Inserting Calculations nennen ee aei r r aE a E aea ISR 380 Variables in calculations eeseeeseeeseseeeseseeessseertssrsreeesreerssreresserrrnresrenresee 381 Table cells in calc
544. s allows you to modify settings that apply to the current document only see section Document properties View tab beginning on page 546 Changing the zoom level TextMaker offers you several different ways to specify the zoom level at which a document is displayed on the screen Use the following View menu commands to do this Command Function Actual Size Sets the zoom level to 100 This is the default setting Fit Margins to Window Automatically selects the zoom level at which the width of a page fits exactly in the window Full Page Displays one entire page of the document Two Full Pages Displays two entire pages next to each other Magnifying Glass Activates the magnifying glass with which you can draw a frame around whatever part of the document you want to enlarge Zoom Level Allows you to select the zoom level from a list You 558 e Customizing TextMaker can also enter a value manually e g 125 for a zoom level of 125 Manual TextMaker 2016 Tip Using the zoom slider You can also use the zoom slider at the bottom right of the screen to modify the zoom level AA lOc To change the zoom level either drag the slider with your mouse or click on the minus icon or the plus icon Full screen view In full screen view mode TextMaker maximizes its program window and hides all toolbars in order to display as much of the document content as possible To enter this mode use the View gt
545. s any selection that you make with the mouse to word boundaries When the option is disabled selections can be made on a character by character basis Add or remove spaces when pasting When this option is enabled spaces are added or removed automatically as re quired when words are deleted or cut from the text and when they are pasted into the text from the clipboard For example if you selected the word is in the sentence This is a test and cut it with Edit gt Cut TextMaker would automatically remove the space behind is since it is now superfluous If you subsequently pasted the word is into the text in front of another word using Edit gt Paste TextMaker would automatically add a space between is and the following word 530 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Middle mouse button Linux only Here you can specify what should happen when the middle mouse button is pressed Options available E No function The middle mouse button doesn t have any function Paste Clipboard A click with the middle mouse button pastes the content of the clipboard Automatic scrolling When you press and hold the middle mouse button you can scroll in the document by moving the mouse Apply character formatting to entire words Enabling this option has the following effect When the text cursor is inside a word and you change the character formatting i e choose a different font or activat
546. s are permitted on a master page thus for example text frames picture frames etc For example if you wanted to enhance a letter with a watermark you would simply insert a picture frame containing an appropriate picture on the master page and set the Text wrapping property of the picture to Behind text The watermark would then appear on every page of the document and the text would flow right over it Editing the master page If you want objects to appear on every page of a document or chapter simply put them on the master page To do this switch to the master page view and insert the objects there 108 o Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Note Only frames text frames picture frames etc and drawings can be insert ed on master pages You can find information about working with these objects in chapter Frames and drawings beginning on page 247 You edit the master page as follows 1 Switch to the master page view with View gt Master Pages 2 Make the desired changes For example to insert a picture invoke the Object gt New Picture Frame command to be able to insert text first insert a text frame with Object gt New Text Frame etc 3 When you are finished invoke View gt Standard to exit the master page view Any object that you have inserted on the master page will now appear on all pages of the document By the way Both the header and the footer are also parts of the master page A
547. s command a dialog box appears and presents a list of all the icons that are available for addition to a toolbar 564 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Customize Toolbars x Group Command ae 7 Edit A view B New Format 7 Insert Open Object i Table ee Tools J Save Window User Save as Status Statistics Savasi J Outline Database Hint Use your mouse to drag any of these symbols into the desired toolbar The icons for the individual commands are organized under several categories to make them easier to find If you select a category in the Group list all the availa ble icons in that category will be displayed in the Command list Editing the icons in a toolbar can be accomplished as follows m Adding an icon Simply drag the icon with the mouse from the dialog box directly to the desired position on the toolbar Deleting an icon Drag the icon off the toolbar into the document for example to delete it Moving an icon Drag the icon to the desired position in the toolbar with your mouse You can also drag an icon from one toolbar to another Tipp You can move toolbar icons even when this dialog is closed Simply press and hold the key and drag the icon to its new position with your mouse Inserting a separator line or space If you drag an icon a small distance to the right a separator line or space depending on the operating system will be inserted to the left of the icon
548. s in a document can be labeled Figure 1 Figure 2 etc This also works with other components of the document e g tables When you have done that you have the option to create a table of figures and insert it into the text It will contain a list of all images that you have added captions to For example if you have inserted captions for all images in a document you can create a table of these images It includes page numbers so that the reader can see at a glance on which page each image is located To insert a table of figures proceed as follows 1 Using the Insert gt Caption command insert a many captions into the text as you like as described in the previous section 2 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which the table of figures should be placed 3 Invoke Tools gt Generate Table of Figures 4 In the Labels list select the label that you want to create a table of figures for e g Figures 5 Specify whether a new table of figures is to be created at the current position or an existing table is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box When you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts the table of figures into the text Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure Sample from a table of figures 424 e Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 TextMaker puts the label and sequential number at the left to the right of each c
549. s option is enabled the software utilizes the XRender library for rendering text on the screen This resolves an issue with text being rendered incorrectly in the document or in dialogs that occurred on some systems Insofar you should normally leave this option turned on Note When you deactivate this option text might be rendered faster however you might experience text rendering issues on certain combinations of Linux distributions and graphics drivers Mouse wheel Linux only If your mouse has a mouse wheel you can set the scrolling increment for a turn of the wheel either by page one complete page or by a certain number of lines External applications Linux only This button opens a dialog where you can specify which external applications to start on certain actions For example when a PDF file is created the application specified in the PDF Viewer field will be launched to display the result 544 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Note You don t have to fill out these fields For all fields that are left empty your system s default application for the corresponding action will be used Make changes to this dialog only when you want applications different from the default applications to be used To do so enter the file name of the corresponding executa ble including the entire file path if necessary User defined font paths Android and Linux only Here you can specify paths to supple
550. s to the document It presents a list of all images that you have labeled that way including their page numbers Captions can be added not only to images but also to any other kind of text ele ments For example the tables in a document can be labeled as well You can even insert captions for the images and the tables in a document with both of them using their own numbering Apart from that you can insert an individual table of figures for each of them Working with captions and tables of figures is actually quite easy Inserting captions for images and other objects Use the Insert gt Caption command to insert an automatically numbered caption into the text For example if you want to label the images in a document simply select the image of interest and invoke this command TextMaker will insert a caption be low the picture It consists of a label and a sequential number e g Figure 1 The numbering is performed fully automatically If you add additional captions or remove existing ones all other numbers are adapted accordingly If desired you can always type in some explanatory text behind the caption for example to extend the caption Figure 1 to Figure 1 The Larch 420 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 E Creating a table of figures Once you have inserted captions you can use the Tools gt Generate Table of Figures command to insert a table of figures into the text It p
551. sable to let TextMaker split the text into small segments Otherwise some low end EPUB readers might be unable to display it It is therefore recommended to have this option activated TextMaker will split the text into segments of about 100 KB in the resulting EPUB file Even the weakest e book readers are able to process such files without getting into trou ble CSS options EPUB files usually include a CSS file where the document s character para graph styles are stored TextMaker generates this file automatically so normally you don t have to care about it In case you have created a custom made CSS file you can alternatively use this file instead of the one that is generated automatically To do so activate the op tion Append custom CSS and click on the three dots next to the text field be low this option This will open a file dialog allowing you to browse your de vice for the CSS file Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents e 485 Note Not all readers support the use of a custom CSS file Font options The Font embedding options let you choose if the fonts used in the document should be included in the EPUB file Note This is usually not required since most EPUB readers render the docu ment in their own fonts anyway However some readers provide an option for displaying the document in its original fonts For such readers embedding the document s fonts would make sense But please note that embedding f
552. se TMW DBF that is supplied with the program Detailed instructions on the database dialog In detail the database dialog mentioned above has the following functions Data display The largest part of the window is devoted of course to the display of data You can work with data either in tabular form using the list view or in more detail using the form view To switch between these two views use the options List and Form in the lower part of the window You can use the usual keys to navigate Note Please note that editing of data is possible only in the form view To save changes to a data record you do not have to invoke any special command because changes to the active data record are saved automatically when you page to another record or exit the database Filter You can filter the data records as necessary To do this enter a search term in the Filter input field and click the Apply button The display of data changes immedi ately only those data records are displayed that contain the search term in any of their fields So if you filter for Miller only records containing Miller will be displayed Insert button Inserts the content of the active record into the document Only available when the database was invoked through a document template as described above Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 353 Close button Saves all changes made to the database and exits the database module
553. se settings Make a choice and confirm with OK To exit the dialog click on OK once more TextMaker will now save the formatting options that you have chosen in the dialog as the new default character format For advanced users Technically speaking TextMaker simply applies these set tings to the default character style Normal See also section The character style Normal page 125 Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 73 Paragraph formatting To specify the formats for paragraphs use the Format gt Paragraph command Some of the most common paragraph formats include E Indents Line spacing Spacing above below a paragraph Paragraph alignment Character format for entire paragraphs Tabs The following additional paragraph formats are available Bulleted lists and numbered lists Drop caps Shading Borders and lines Outline level Hyphenation frequency see section Hyphenation Forcing breaks before paragraphs page breaks column breaks Paragraph control keeping certain paragraphs together etc Suppressing line numbers See the next pages for details Paragraph formats always apply to complete paragraphs Changes to paragraph formatting affect the entire paragraph in which the text cursor is positioned If you select multiple paragraphs all the selected paragraphs are affected Changing the paragraph formatting You can modify the paragraph formatting in either of the followin
554. se this field if your entries are delimited by slashes or commas for example It is also possible to enter multi ple characters here Note The separator must not occur within an entry if it does TextMaker will of course treat it as such and divide the entry in two m Remove quotation marks If you check this option TextMaker will remove all surrounding quotation marks from the text entries when they are converted This is useful when for example you want to convert a list in which all the entries are enclosed in quotation marks Henry Meyer Many database programs generate lists of this type m Remove trailing leading spaces If you check this option TextMaker will remove all leading and trailing spaces from the text entries when they are converted Spaces within a particular text entry will not be removed Note It is also possible to proceed in the opposite direction you can convert tables into text see the previous section Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 207 Sorting tables You can let TextMaker sort the rows of a table using the Table gt Sort Table command Note This command is applicable only to tables If you want to sort ordinary text paragraphs please read section Sorting text beginning on page 210 To have TextMaker sort the rows of a table proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor in any cell of the table Or If you want to have only a part of the table sorted select the
555. se to drag a rectangle around the part of the document that you want to magnify ETE These two buttons determine if comments and tracked changes should be included in the printout By default both options are turned off For more information on these features see the chapter Document revisions beginning on page 447 To close the print preview click on the Close button or press the key Printing a document To print the current document choose File gt Print or use the keyboard shortcut for this command J Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents 467 Print fae Print device Printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer on XPSPort z Pages Options All Copies 1 Current page 7 Collate copies D Pages 1 1 Print to File Pages to print Drop pictures Reverse order All selected pages zZ z Pages per sheet A dialog box appears allowing you to make the following settings Printer Here choose from the installed printers the one that is to handle the printing The Setup button opens a window for setting up and configuring the printer You can find information about this in your printer manual Linux users can also specify the command to be used for printing here Pages Specify here the part of the document to be printed a All Print the entire document Current Page Print only the page on which the text cursor is positioned E Pages Print only the specified pages Y
556. see below Forms e 299 Dropdown lists When the user clicks on a dropdown list the list opens and he or she can select one of the predefined items in the list Manual entry of an item is not possible Dropdown list frames Like dropdown lists but confined within frames see below In addition to these types of objects there are two types of forms objects that cannot be filled out and are intended for captioning Labels Labels can contain any captions or legends that should appear in the form Groupboxes Groupboxes are rectangles to which captions can be added at the upper left They can be used for the visual grouping of related parts of a form Of course forms are not limited to containing just the above described forms objects They can also contain all other types of objects as well as normal text You will find detailed information about the individual types of forms objects in the section Text fields and in following sections of this chapter beginning on page 305 With or without frames As you might have noticed you can insert most types of forms objects with or without frames m Text fields and text frames m Checkboxes and checkbox frames m Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames The difference between normal objects and objects in frames Normal Objects e g dropdown lists are inserted directly into the text They are integrated into the text flow just like a letter Such objects are simpler to
557. seesesseeseeesrseresrsreerssrrereserrereresee 276 Linking text frame S i e E EER a E E EE 278 Picture frames nn a a eek a ie heap te sgt E eee 279 Inserting picture frames 20 0 lees ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeesecesecsaecsaecseeeaeeens 279 Changing the properties of picture frames 20 0 0 ee eeeeeceseceeceee cree eeeene 280 OLE object frames inie Seiichi Bite ee hep ha te ee ee E 282 Inserting OLE object frames 0 0 eeeeceeeceeeeeecesecesecaecaecseeeneeens 283 Changing the properties of OLE object frames cee eee eeseceeeceeeeeeeeee 284 Drawings sss elie el ee is ae aig ante ti a el ees 286 Inserting drawing 0 0 0 cece cee cseecseeeeceeeeeceesscesceeeesseesecsaecnaecnaecnaecnaeens 286 Adding text to AutoShapes 0 0 eee cseeeeeeeeeeceeseeesceeeesecesecsaecsaecsaeeaeeens 289 Changing the properties of drawings 0 0 ee eeceeceeecesecesecnsecnneceeeneeens 290 Forms 295 Filing Out fOrms ss os cssdei ss sc osee beetieksges capassqsevass cee dbecsscbsoes beabstee asia skeesiees 296 Creating fOr stisces sescscetekessecessshescesbh oari Er re aes EO aise Areata kee ety 299 viii e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Types OF forms OD CCtS 2 0 04 202s Fess lessee sestsstesasevece ESTESE Eks e I a ar ates 299 Inserting Lorms Objects sisine eere pe a oaa apipi ihren 301 Editing forms objets otri eenn rered peat ES e air Enaren 302 Preparing an example form siseses sinceri hes isas ieste ei seipie piioiksi 302 Forms objects detail sssri ee are inea
558. self To create a new keyboard mapping complete the following steps 1 Invoke the command Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings 2 Choose the existing keyboard mapping that you want to use as a basis for the new one Note The new keyboard mapping will automatically be assigned all the key board shortcuts contained in the mapping you choose here 3 Click the New button 4 A dialog box appears and prompts you to enter a name for the new keyboard mapping Enter for example My keyboard mapping and then confirm with OK The new keyboard mapping is now set up Next a dialog appears to allow you to modify the shortcuts contained in it You will find information about this in the section entitled Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping beginning on page 571 Renaming or deleting a keyboard mapping User created keyboard mappings can be renamed or deleted at any time These tasks are carried out as follows 1 Invoke the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command 2 Select the keyboard mapping you want to delete or rename with a mouse click 3 Click on Rename to give it a new name Or Click on Delete to delete it 570 o Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 You can rename or delete only keyboard mappings that you have created yourself The predefined Standard and Classic mappings cannot be renamed or removed Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping The Tools gt Customize gt Key
559. shortcut keys ctri Space TextMaker now removes any character formatting that you have applied using Format gt Character or the Formatting toolbar Paragraph formatting and character formatting that is part of a paragraph style remains in place Note This process also removes the Hidden and Protected property of charac ters Accordingly text that was previously hidden becomes visible and text that was previously protected can again be edited 72 e Character formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 Changing the default character format You can easily modify the default character format settings anytime For example if you don t like the default font face in a document setting it to a different font is just a matter of a few mouse clicks Proceed as follows 1 2 5 6 Invoke the command Format gt Character In the dialog adjust the character format settings to your liking Now comes the distinctive step Instead of clicking on OK click on the Set as default button TextMaker asks you if you want to change the default settings only for the current document or for all future documents Change in this document only If you choose this option the new default settings will affect only the current document Change for all new documents If you choose this option the new default settings will also be stored in the standard document template Normal tmv meaning that all future documents will use the
560. sions e 457 Note For this to work correctly all users who edit the document must have entered their names in the preferences To enter your name invoke Tools gt Options switch to the General tab click on either the User Home or User Business button and type your name or at least your initials in the appro priate edit boxes 458 e Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 Internet functions TextMaker is equipped with functions for editing HTML documents for the Inter net m Opening HTML documents Internet pages are usually in HTML format With TextMaker you can open HTML files directly Invoke the command File gt Open and choose the HTML format from the Files of Type list box Editing HTML documents The second section of this chapter covers the editing of HTML documents Here you will learn what functions are available for HTML documents and how to use them Saving HTML documents The last section covers the use of the command File gt Save as to save docu ments in HTML format once they have been prepared Detailed information is provided on the following pages Opening HTML documents Internet pages are usually saved in HTML HyperText Markup Language format HTML documents can be recognized by the extension HTM or HTML appended to their filenames They can be opened in TextMaker as follows 1 Invoke the command File gt Open 2 Choose the HTML format in the Files of Type list box 3 S
561. space key _ The chapter lying before the break is then integrated into the chapter after the break and takes on the latter s formatting Chapters and page formatting Note A different page format can be applied to each chapter of a document To recapitulate a page format includes E Paper format orientation and margins m Headers footers and master pages m Page numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Page formatting e 111 When you begin a new document the document consists initially of a single chapter Accordingly if you change something related to page formatting your change affects the whole document If you divide the document into chapters with Insert gt Break gt Chapter break each new chapter assumes at first the page formatting of the original document In general the following holds Important When you insert a chapter break the new chapter that is created takes on the page formatting and the master page layout of the current chapter However when you subsequently modify the page formatting and master page layout of the new chapter your changes affect only that chapter However when you have divided a document into chapters you can set up differ ent headers and footers for each chapter set a different paper format for each chapter etc Chapter formatting Chapter formatting goes beyond the page formatting that can be applied to chap ters on a chapter by chapter basis and involves formats that are sp
562. specify if the command should create labels a list or a table E Format With labels only In this section the currently selected label format is dis played manufacturer product name number of rows columns To choose a different format click on the Format button and pick the label s manufacturer and product name from the lists If required you can also modify the margins to be left blank on each individual label Manual TextMaker 2016 Database e 357 In case you are using labels that are not contained in the lists click on the New button to create a user defined label format If known specify the manufacturer name and product name number Then use a ruler to measure the labels and enter the resulting values into the dialog The picture below shows how some of the values are related Left page margin Distance 4 left to left Width Height The Edit button allows you to modify existing user defined label formats The pre defined formats are not available for editing However you can always cre ate a new user defined label format based on an existing format by selecting the format in the list and clicking the New button Top page margin Distance top to top The Delete button deletes the selected user defined format E Database button Lists and labels are often used to output the contents of a database When you click on the Database button you can specify which database to use for ex
563. ssary you can review the detailed information about styles that is presented in chapter Styles beginning on page 119 Note When you edit the structure of a document in Outline view TextMaker automatically applies the Heading 1 9 styles to the corresponding headings You should not attempt to change the names of these styles or to apply other styles to the headings Any such attempts would work but not for long because TextMaker would automatically reapply its styles when you subsequently changed the outline levels of paragraphs in the Outline view Expert tip Managing headings with paragraph styles When you change the outline level of a paragraph in Outline view nothing much really happens TextMaker merely applies one of the paragraph styles Heading 1 through Heading 9 What would some clever fox make of this You guessed it a clever user would infer that he or she could create a heading simply by applying one of the styles Heading 1 through Heading 9 to a text paragraph which would be correct 408 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 It follows that when you want to add a new heading you can do so without even using the Outline view Simply type the heading and select the desired heading style from the Formatting toolbar done You can change the outline level of an existing heading just as easily For example if you position the text cursor in a level 2 heading and apply the Heading 3 style
564. st Delete Deletes the selected label definition Rename Allows you to enter a new name for the selected label definition The above of course not only works with labels but also with lists and tables Printing envelopes In order to address a letter you can either create an address label see the previous section or you can let TextMaker print the address directly on the envelope To do this proceed as follows 1 2 Invoke the Insert gt Envelope command Click on the Paper settings button specify the paper format of the envelope and click on OK In the Sender field enter your own address In the Recipient field enter the recipient s address You can type the address in manually or use database fields from your address database To insert a database field click the Database field button to open a field list and then choose the field to insert 360 oe Database Manual TextMaker 2016 Envelope x Sender Recipient A Escher amp Sons Architects FIRSTNAME NAME2 78 Baker Street STREET Atlanta GA 30009 CITY STATE_ZIP User data Database Database field v Sender position Recipient position Preview Left Top Left Top 0 39in 0 39in 4 33in 2 36in r Recipient margins Paper settings Right Bottom 0 39in 0 39in f Create new document Append to document Print envelope Cancel 5 When finished click one of
565. st support OLE OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding The object that is imported from the other application into TextMaker is called an OLE object In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know about OLE objects It covers the following topics Inserting OLE objects m Editing OLE objects Editing links to OLE objects Changing position and size of an OLE object m Changing the properties of OLE objects Using the SoftMaker Equation Editor See the next pages for details Inserting OLE objects Note The use of OLE objects is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 OLE objects e 239 The Object gt New OLE Object command allows you to embed an OLE object into the document The command opens a dialog box containing a list of all applications that are able to create OLE objects The entries displayed in the list depend on the OLE capable programs installed on your system Selecting Paintbrush Picture for example will open Windows Paint program called Paintbrush in older versions of Windows There you can create a picture Simply exit Paint and the picture will be embedded into your document It is displayed in the text and you can edit the picture whenever you wish To do so simply double click on the picture Step by step the procedure for embedding an OLE object is as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the document where you
566. t Text file Text file in which each line contains a data record and the field contents of each record are separated by semicolons Text file DOS Also a text file but with an MS DOS character set rather than a Windows character set You specify the file format by opening the dialog s Files of type list box and choosing the desired format from the list Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs utilize the DOS format instead of the Windows format If you are not sure whether a database contains the DOS or the Windows format open the file as dBase DOS and check if characters with accents e g or 4 are displayed correctly If they are not close the database and reopen it in dBase Windows format As soon as you have selected a database and confirmed with OK TextMaker knows the database from which you want to insert fields and you can proceed as described in the next section TextMaker remembers which database has been assigned to the document as soon as you save it The next time you open the document this database is again as signed to it Of course you can assign a different database to the document any time you like Detaching a database You can detach a database by invoking the command Tools gt Set Database and clicking on Clear database Manual TextMaker 2016 Form letters and form faxes e 369 Inserting database fields Once you have decided how you want
567. t Microsoft Word offers this feature exactly this way so it was implemented in TextMaker the same way for compatibility rea sons Superscripts and subscripts You can position text above or below the baseline and in this way create a super script e g r or subscript e g H20 Simply select the text invoke the command Format gt Character switch to the Spacing tab and check the Superscript or Subscript check box If you wish you can specify the amount of offset above or below the baseline by entering a percentage in the Position edit box In addition you can specify the size reduction to be applied to the superscripted or subscripted text by entering a percentage in the Size edit box For example if you want a subscript to be the same size as adjoining normal text you can specify 100 percent Manual TextMaker 2016 Character formatting e 67 Tip Keyboard shortcuts are available for super and subscripts as follows ctri Shifte Num the plus key located on the numeric pad for superscript ctri Shift Num for subscript and Ctr1J ShifteJ Num to remove a super or subscript Letter spacing and character pitch TextMaker also allows you to change the spacing and pitch of text Spacing is the horizontal distance between characters Giving a value smaller than 100 causes the characters to appear closer together than normal giving a value larger than 100 causes the characters to a
568. t from the Type list a Bookmark a Footnote or an Object 5 Select the specific bookmark footnote or object to which the cross reference should refer from the Target list 6 From the Show list select either Page to specify that the cross reference should show the page number of the target or Number to specify that the cross reference should show the target s own number see Options section below 7 Confirm with OK TextMaker now inserts the cross reference into the text Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 435 Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows m Type Here you specify the kind of text element that the cross reference is to target a Bookmark a Footnote or an Object Target Here you select the target for the cross reference The contents of this list depend on the Type of target selected For example if you have selected Bookmark as the type all the existing bookmarks in the document will be dis played in this list Select the desired bookmark from the list with a mouse click E Show Here you specify what the cross reference should show Page The cross reference shows the number of the page on which the target is to be found Number The cross reference shows the number of the target itself For footnotes the footnote s number is shown For bookmarks the number of the paragraph in which the bookmark has been set is shown For this to wo
569. t it When the object is selected blue lines are displayed on its borders When you drag one of these lines with the mouse the size of the object is changed accordingly m Entering values manually You can also enter precise numeric values for the size and margins of an OLE object To do this select the object with a single mouse click and then invoke the Object gt Properties command A dialog box appears to facilitate changes to the object s properties see also the next section Switch to the dialog s Format tab and enter the desired measurements in the Size group box Changing the properties of OLE objects The Object gt Properties command gives you access to a dialog where all the properties of an object can be edited An object s properties include for example its size and margins along with numerous other properties that you can set To modify the properties of an OLE object first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the associated dialog Manual TextMaker 2016 OLE objects e 243 The following settings can be made in this dialog Layout Format Filling etc tabs The tabs listed below are present for almost all object types They allow you to modify the following settings Layout On this tab the only settings that apply to OLE objects are those for outside margins The other options are available only for OLE object frames See section Object prop
570. t it is evenly distributed be tween top and bottom of the text field Margins tab On this tab you can modify the margins of the text field m Wrap margins group box Here you can change the outside margins m Margins group box Here you can change the inside margins Properties tab On this tab you can change settings that affect general properties On this topic see the section Object properties Properties tab beginning on page 269 Borders tab With this tab you can give the text field a full border or individual border lines 306 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 The options on this tab correspond to those for the Format gt Borders command see the section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Shades tab With this tab you can apply shading to the text field using a color or a pattern The options on this tab correspond to those for the Format gt Shading command see the section Shading beginning on page 91 Text frames You insert a text frame with the Object gt New Text Frame command A text frame is filled out the same way a text field is filled out see the preceding section you simply position the text cursor in the field and start typing The difference between a text frame and a text field A text frame like all other types of frames has a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted so that
571. t letter the data from the second record for the second letter etc If you use the Windows version of TextMaker and you have a suitable fax program you can even fax form letters with TextMaker To do this all you have to do is tell TextMaker which of the database fields contain the recipients fax numbers and names The following sections describe each of the required steps in detail from the creation of a form letter to the sending of the completed document to a printer or fax The following topics are covered Assigning a database to a document Inserting database fields m Viewing test records in the text Practice letter Selecting data records Printing or faxing form letters Assigning a database to a document Before you insert the fields of a database into a form letter you must tell TextMak er which database is being referenced by assigning a database to the document 368 o Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 To do this invoke Tools gt Set Database A dialog box appears allowing you to select the database Type the name of the desired database or choose a file from the list of databases displayed Databases with the following formats are supported File format Description dBase DOS dBase database with MS DOS character set This is the standard format see note below dBase Windows dBase database with Windows characters set dBase Unicode dBase database with Unicode characters se
572. t to left to change the direction to right to left To set the direction to left to right deactivate the option The direction of the multi column text section changes accordingly Thus when you change the direction of a section to right to left the column on the very right becomes the first column instead of the column at the very left Note Of course you can still change the writing direction of the text in each paragraph individually as described in the section Changing the text direction of paragraphs above For general information on working with multi column text see the chapter Multi column page layouts page 143 Changing the font of Arabic text When the Extended support for Arabic text option is enabled the dialog box for the Format gt Character command presents lists for typeface font size style and language under not only a single category but under three For Latin scripts e g English For East Asian scripts Chinese Japanese and Korean m For complex scripts e g Arabic Thus you can specify the settings for each kind of script separately For example if you specify Arial as the typeface for Latin characters and Sim plified Arabic as the typeface for characters in complex scripts like Arabic all Latin characters that you type will appear in Arial and all Arabic characters you type will appear in the font Simplified Arabic Note TextMaker recognizes automa
573. tMaker 2016 Document management e 491 Document Properties x Summary View Colors Fax Internet Statistics Protection Forms Revie File name Glasgow Copy tmd Folder C Docs Scotland Title Glasgow Subject General Information Author Sean Cavanaugh National Board of Tourism Keywords Scotland Glasgow European Capital of Culture Description General tourist information accomodations places of interest transportation etc Last changed Donald Greene on 2 16 2010 13 46 Eea Enter your modifications and confirm with OK Tip Using the file manager see the next section you can search for documents based on the contents of their summaries For example you can have the file manager find all documents from a specific author Automatic prompt for summary information when saving At your option you can have TextMaker prompt you to fill in the document summary whenever you save a newly created document To enable this function invoke the command Tools gt Options switch to the Files tab and enable the Prompt for summary infor mation when saving option Now each time you save a new document for the first time the dialog box for the entry of summary information will appear The file manager The file manager displays a list of documents from one or more folders and lets you open print delete or view any document with a click of the mouse To start the file manager use the com
574. tMaker puts it at 3 in 7 62 cm Indents With the help of indents you can change the left and right margins of paragraphs to inset or widen text The indent for the first line of a paragraph can be specified separately Indents are always given relative to the page margins For example if the left page margin is set at 1 in and you set the Left indent to 1 5 in the text begins at 2 5 in Note You set the page margins themselves with the help of the File gt Page Setup command not with indents To use indents place the text cursor in the desired paragraph or select multiple paragraphs to be modified Then invoke the Format gt Paragraph command and switch to the Paragraph tab In the Indents group box you can set the Left indent the Right indent and the First line indent Enter the desired values in the respective edit boxes 76 e Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 You can also enter negative values when for example you want to widen the text Using the Horizontal ruler When the horizontal ruler is enabled View gt Horizontal Ruler checked it provides a convenient alternative for changing indents Indents are shown in the ruler as follows Change first line indent Change left indent Change right indent Change both first line and left indent together To change the indents first select the paragraph s you want to modify then click with the mouse on one of the triangles in the ruler see il
575. tMaker will automatically set the size of the bullet to the font size specified for the paragraph at its right 88 o Paragraph formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 m Character button custom bullets only If you have selected a bullet from the Custom row the two options mentioned above are replaced by a Character button Click on this button if you want to change the character formatting font size color emphasis etc of the bullet Tip If you do not make any changes to the character format the bullet will automatically use the character format of the paragraph at its right except for the font face Horizontal position Specifies how far the text is to be inset to the right to make room for the bullet m Vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the bullet on the line A negative value makes the bullet lower a positive value makes it higher Numbered lists tab This tab gives access to an additional option for creating bulleted or numbered paragraphs numbered lists Numbered lists can be saved and re used whenever you need them In addition numbered lists can have hierarchical numbering 1 1 1 1 1 1 ete You will find information about numbered lists in section Numbered lists beginning on page 176 Using user defined bullets If the bullets presented in the dialog described above are not sufficient you can select from many custom symbols to choose a bullet Recall that the dialog box for this c
576. tMaker would not yet know in which folder the document will be stored 216 o Pictures Manual TextMaker 2016 Scanning in pictures Note Scanning pictures directly into a document is possible only with the Win dows version of TextMaker TextMaker for Windows supports scanning printed matter directly into a document To make use of this function you must have connected a scanner to your computer and installed the scanner software The scanner software must be TWAIN compati ble as it is with almost all scanners To scan a picture directly into the text do the following 1 Power up the scanner and insert the document to scan 2 Move the text cursor to the position in the document where you want to insert the result of the scan 3 Invoke the File gt Acquire command At this point TextMaker activates your scanner s software Normally this software presents a dialog box where you can make any settings you want to make and then start the scanning process see the manual for your scanner When the process has been completed an image of the original will appear as a picture in the document Scanning into a picture frame The procedure just described inserts the scanned picture right into the text Alterna tively you can insert the picture into a freely movable picture frame To do this simply switch to Object mode using the View gt Object Mode command before you invoke the File gt Acquire command The difference P
577. tab eee ceeeeceeecesecesecesecesecesecaecsaeeneeens 552 Document properties Internet taboo ee ee cee cess cesecesecesecaecneeeneeens 553 Document properties Statistics tab 0 eee eeceeeceseceseceseceeceeecneseneeees 554 Document properties Protection tab 0 0 eee ee ceeeesecesecnsecseeceeeeneeeneeees 554 Document properties Forms tab ee eee eeceeecesecesecesecssecseecseeeneeees 555 Document properties Reviewing tab oo eee ee ceeeesecsseceseceseceeeeeeneeees 556 Document properties Fonts tab eee eeceescesecesecesecesecssecsaecneeeneeees 556 Customizing the document display 0 eee ee ceecesecesecseecseecaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenerens 556 Changing the zoom level sis sic csc ssscsssessettssses sassva shots aaaeeeaa sess iepr tesies 558 Pull SCrEOM VICW AE EEE EE T 559 Customizing toolbars s seesssseessseesssstserssrsesreseeerssesrrseseeetrsrentnsrerrsserrrsresreet 560 Displaying and hiding toolbars 0 eee ee eeeeeecesecesecesecssecesecaeeeaeeeneeees 560 Manual TextMaker 2016 Contents o xiii Positioning toolbars on the SCreen eee eee eeeeesceeecesecesecesecssecsaeseeeaeeens 562 Managing too Bats seis n en cons e teense rnin 563 Customizing toolbar iCOMS eessseesesseesssreeesererssrsresesteesesreressesrreresrreresre 564 Creating user defined toolbar icons sesesseessssseseeesesreersseeressesrreresrreresee 566 Using the toolbar MENU essene cece cesecseceseceecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseenseenaes 567 Customi
578. tandard command with the key combination Fi2 Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 571 Available keyboard shortcuts Notice that some of the keystroke combinations that are possible on your keyboard are not allowed as shortcuts As a rule you should use alphabetic keys numeric keys or function keys for shortcuts You can combine them with Ctr1 and or the Shift key Shift You can easily check to see if the key combination you want to use is allowed Click into the Please press accelerator field and then try to enter your key com bination If it does not appear in the field it is not allowed Some examples of valid keyboard shortcuts include E Ctr m Alt However key combinations including the Alt key are not recom mended since they are usually occupied by the main menu entries Ctr Ctr Ctri ait shifte a Ctr etc Note Alphabetic keys by themselves are not allowed Thus you cannot use A or as a shortcut Shortcut already assigned If you press a shortcut that is already assigned the current assignment will be shown just below the entry field You should press the Back space key to delete your shortcut and try a different shortcut Otherwise you will overwrite the existing assignment for the shortcut Two part shortcuts You can also use two part shortcuts in accordance with the WordStar standard for example x However in this case only shortcuts of the form
579. te The default style named Normal cannot be deleted 138 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Close button Use this button to close the style manager Document templates As you learned from the previous sections character and paragraph styles are saved in the document in which they were created If you want to use certain styles in future documents as well you should save them in a document template Each time you invoke File gt New TextMaker allows you to select a document template as the basis for the new document If at this point you select a document template that you have created all character and paragraph styles that you stored in the template will become available to you in the new document Document templates can also include text for example a letterhead So you can kill two birds with one stone set up a document template with your letterhead and your favorite styles for letters create another template for faxes another for busi ness reports and so forth Templates linked to a database It gets even better You can attach a database to a document template and then insert database fields into it Then when you create a new document on the basis of this template the TextMaker database appears automatically allowing you to select a record and insert its fields into your letterhead your fax form etc Creating a letter becomes child s play invoke File gt New choose the letter tem plate select th
580. tein and Switzerland signed an agreement concerning a reform of Ger man spelling attempting to simplify German orthography and make it easier to learn 324 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 TextMaker s Background spell checking feature discussed in the last section can help you apply the reformed spellings for text composed in German language At your command it underlines in blue all German words that conform to the old German spellings and that should be spelled differently in accordance with the new German spellings If you click with the right mouse button on such a word the approved spelling is presented to you in a context menu In addition you can call up information as to why this word is now written differently For detailed information on this topic read the following pages Activating conversion to the new German spelling To activate checking for and conversion to the new spellings in texts composed in German you must take the following steps 1 Invoke the command Tools gt Options 2 Switch to the Language tab 3 Turn on the Use background spell checking option 4 Additionally activate the Underline old German spelling in blue option 5 Confirm with OK Note The Underline old German spelling in blue option works only with text formatted in the language German Germany or German Switzerland From now on in the background TextMaker examines the document for German words that s
581. termines if it will be displayed in the chart The text box to the right lets you enter a caption for the axis Manual TextMaker 2016 Charts e 235 The options Major grid and Minor grid determine if a grid will be displayed in the background of the chart m Secondary Axes group box Allows you to configure the secondary axes only available for charts that contain a secondary axis m Legend Allows you to change the position of the legend A legend is a small box indicating which colors patterns are assigned to the data series displayed in the chart 3D View tab Note This tab is only available for three dimensional chart types Use the 3D View tab to modify the 3D effect settings for the chart Options available Rotation angle and Elevation angle Lets you modify the viewing position Rotation angle rotates the chart around the vertical axis Elevation angle changes the height of the viewing position m Perspective To display the chart with perspective distortion check this option and choose the amount of distortion 0 to 100 percent Height and Depth Lets you modify the height and depth of the chart as a percentage of its origi nal size Radar tab Note This tab is only available for Radar charts Use the Radar tab to modify settings specific to Radar charts Options available 236 o Charts Manual TextMaker 2016 E Starting angle Rotates the chart by the specified angle Orientation Specifies
582. ters 470 PROD function 396 398 Prompt for summary information when saving 538 539 Index e 595 Properties File menu 546 Colors tab 550 Fax tab 552 Fonts tab 556 Forms tab 555 Internet tab 553 Protection tab 502 554 Reviewing tab 451 456 556 Statistics tab 554 Summary tab 491 546 View tab 546 Properties Object menu changing default settings 270 for charts 232 233 for checkbox frames 308 for checkboxes 308 for drawings 290 for dropdown list frames 309 for dropdown lists 309 for footers 105 for groupboxes 312 for headers 105 for horizontal lines 461 for labels 312 for OLE object frames 284 for OLE objects 243 for picture frames 280 for pictures 219 for tables 203 for text fields 305 for text frames 276 general properties 256 Protecting contents of forms objects 314 documents 501 forms 314 text 71 Quick paths 489 Quotes typographically correct search 152 154 use 535 537 R Record number 341 343 Rectangles drawing 286 288 properties 290 Redo 31 Redo Edit menu 31 References 434 437 596 e Index Reflection effect for objects 268 Remove Link Format menu 462 464 Replace Edit menu 151 152 155 Replace again Edit menu 151 Replacing formatting 155 text 151 Return to the last editing position when a document has been opened 538 540 Revert to Previous Version File menu 496 498 Reviewing toolbar 447 448 453 455 RIGHT 384 385 RIGHT function 396 398 Right ind
583. th OK 3 Define the first database field To do this give the field a unique Name select the appropriate field Type and the desired Length and only for numeric fields enter the desired number of decimal places at Decimals Explanations of the available choices are given further down 4 When you have made all the specifications for a field click on Append to add the field after the last field you defined If other fields are already defined you can instead click on Insert to insert the new field ahead of the currently active field 5 Repeat the last two steps for every additional field that the database is to comprise You can set up as many as 256 fields provided that the lengths of all of them do not exceed 4000 characters in total When all the fields have been entered to your satisfaction confirm with OK The database will now be created and opened You will find information about filling in databases in section Using the database module beginning on page 341 Manual TextMaker 2016 Database o 363 Tip If you have made a mistake while entering the definition of a field and you recognize it after already having clicked the Append button you can go back and correct the error To do this double click in the Fields list on the affected field make the correction and click on Replace With Delete you can completely remove a field that has been entered incorrectly Important Once the database has been created your d
584. that does not fit on a single line is automatically broken into multiple lines and the height of the cell is adjusted automatically to ac commodate it m You can delete copy move or format individual table cells or complete rows or columns of cells m Table cells can have borders a grid and shaded or patterned backgrounds m It is even possible to perform calculations on the contents of table cells see chapter Calculations in the text beginning on page 379 In this chapter you will find detailed information on working with tables The following topics are covered m Inserting a table Editing tables Selecting table cells and cell contents Deleting copying moving cell contents Deleting and inserting table cells Splitting and joining table cells Formatting tables Manual TextMaker 2016 Tables e 189 E Converting a table to text Converting text into a table Sorting tables Sorting text Tip Using the Table toolbar See the next pages for details Inserting a table To insert a table in the text move the text cursor to the desired position and invoke the command Table gt New Table A dialog box appears to allow you to specify the number of rows and columns the table should contain New Table x Rows 3 Columns 3 Margins Cancel Left 0 0 in Right 0 04in Top 0 0 in Bottom 0 04in When you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts the table in the text E
585. the previous page PgDn gt Go to the next data record in list view to the next page Ctr1 Ait Pgup TJ yy Go to the previous selected data record Ctrl j Alt Pgdn J by Go to the next selected data record Ctr1 Paup T 14 Go to the first data record Ctr J PgDn 4 Di Go to the last data record Calling up a data record by its record number The Data record number record number for short is a simple counter The first data record has the number 1 the tenth 10 etc The record number of the active data record is displayed at the lower left in the status bar You can call up a data record in the database module directly by means of its record number To do this use the command Go to gt Record number or press the keyboard shortcut for this command the key 344 e Database Manual TextMaker 2016 A dialog box appears you enter the number of the desired record there and confirm with OK The corresponding data record is then brought up IdMyY ql D by DI This is even quicker if you click with the mouse on the record number shown in the toolbar and simply type in the number of the desired record Searching a database With the help of the command Edit gt Search keyboard shortcut Ctr1 F you can search for an item in the database currently opened in the database module The search function can also be invoked with the icon in the Standard toolbar Search Ea Search For In field All fields X l Cancel
586. the active paragraph or for all the paragraphs that might be selected at a given moment are shown there The unit of measure used is inch or centimeter depending on your computer s settings Indentations and tab stops are not just shown here they can also be changed here using the mouse You will learn how in the sections Indents page 76 and Tabs page 82 Document The document itself takes up the largest area of the document window Sidebar The pane displayed to the right of the document called sidebar is a very useful tool It can be used for example to display a list of all headings in a document When you double click on one of its entries TextMaker immediately jumps to the corre sponding heading in your document The icons in the small toolbar displayed on the top of the sidebar let you choose what to display in the sidebar navigator character styles or paragraph styles 26 o The application screen Manual TextMaker 2016 The sidebar can be switched on and off anytime by choosing the View gt Sidebar command A submenu opens where you can change the position of the sidebar or hide the sidebar To learn more about the sidebar and its individual functions see the following sections E Navigating documents with the sidebar page 159 m Character styles and the sidebar page 127 Paragraph styles and the sidebar page 136 Status bar The Status bar is found at the bottom of the program
587. the current document TextMaker inevitably displays false results on the screen The command Tools gt Update Fields keyboard shortcut F9 is provided for such situations When you invoke it TextMaker updates all the calculations and fields in the document Note It is only necessary to use this command in the situations described above when you want to update the screen display of the calculations Before printing a document TextMaker updates all calculations and fields automatically Text Maker ensures that you will never print a document with results that are out of date Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text o 389 Conditional text TextMaker also allows you to work with conditional expressions using the func tion IF By this means you can for example use conditional text in your docu ments A typical case You have an address database with a field called GENDER and the record for each person contains either an M for male or an F for female in that field indicating the person s gender Using the following IF expression you could have TextMaker form a salutation according to gender IF GENDER M Dear Madam Dear Sir If you use this calculation in a form letter TextMaker looks at each data record to see if the GENDER field contains an M If it does TextMaker outputs Dear Sir as the replacement for the formula given above otherwise it outputs Dear Madam
588. the currently active font On On the contrary if this option is turned on the entry is inserted with the font type and size that you set in the dialog when you defined the SmartText entry Text styles and font color are also reproduced Editing SmartText entries You can edit SmartText entries that you have previously defined with the command Insert gt SmartText as follows Creating a new SmartText entry To create a new SmartText entry click the New button see section Creating SmartText entries beginning on page 334 E Deleting a SmartText entry To delete an entry select it from the SmartText entries list and then click on the Delete button m Renaming a SmartText entry If you want to change the name of an entry select it from the list and click on the Rename button A dialog box appears and you can enter the new name there 336 e Language tools Manual TextMaker 2016 E Editing a SmartText entry To edit an entry select it from the list and then click in the large input field Now you can modify the content of the SmartText entry Furthermore you can change the formatting by using the miniature formatting toolbar above the input field Of course the Apply formatting option must be enabled before you can do this When you have made the desired changes click on the Save button Inserting a SmartText entry To insert a SmartText entry into the text select it from the list and click on the Insert butto
589. the currently active record Next let TextMaker know the field that contains the names of the fax recipi ents To do this click on the three dots to the right of the Name of recipient edit box and select the appropriate database field Make sure that all the settings are correct and confirm with OK TextMaker now generates the form faxes and routes them to your fax software which then begins the transmission 476 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Important If the dialog box described above does not appear it is because TextMaker does not recognize your fax software You must use fax software that TextMaker supports otherwise it is not possible to fax form letters For a list of supported software see section Requirements for extended fax support begin ning on page 472 When the transmission process has been completed you should examine your fax software s transmission log to check whether the faxes have reached all the recipi ents Exporting a document to a PDF file You can also export documents to a PDF file PDF files can be viewed on virtually any computer provided that it has a PDF viewer installed for example Adobe Reader Text formatting and objects pictures drawings etc are retained exactly as in the original file To export a document to a PDF file proceed as follows 1 Choose the File gt Export as PDF command 2 A dialog window appears where you can change the settings
590. the division of a document into chapters makes sense in a variety of situations not only when you are writing a long work that contains chapters in the ordinary sense For example it could be that you would want to change from portrait to landscape orientation in the middle of a document in order to better accommodate a wide table 110 o Page formatting Manual TextMaker 2016 To do that you could insert a chapter break set the paper orientation in the new chapter to Landscape and then lay out the table Following the table insert another chapter break and set the paper orientation back to Portrait so that you can contin ue the writing the main text in portrait format You will find details about working with chapters on the following pages Inserting and removing chapters To start a new chapter simply insert a chapter break in the text 1 Move the text cursor to the position at which the new chapter should begin 2 Invoke the Insert gt Break gt Chapter break command TextMaker now inserts a chapter break Note TextMaker always performs a page break at the beginning of a new chap ter Tip The chapter in which the text cursor is currently positioned is displayed in the Chapter field in the status bar at the bottom of the TextMaker window Removing a chapter break You can remove a chapter break by positioning the text cursor at the beginning of the first paragraph following the break and then pressing the Back
591. the fields names in curly braces instead of their results for example Print time for the Print time field To get to this option invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to the View tab There check the Display field names option This dialog box also contains an option called Shade fields If you check this option all fields are displayed with a light gray background so that they can be more easily distinguished from normal text Note These settings are effective only for the current document Specifying your own date and time formats If none of the predefined formats in which the contents of date and time fields can be rendered suits you you can specify your own formats in the dialog box for Insert gt Field First select the date or time field you want to use then click on the New format button You can specify precisely the format in which the date or time is to be represented by entering abbreviations in the dialog box that appears As you enter these abbre viations TextMaker shows an example of the result Any combination of the following abbreviations can be used in your format speci fication pay attention to case Abbreviation Meaning Example d day 2 dd day with two places 02 Manual TextMaker 2016 Fields e 165 ddd weekday abbreviated to three letters Mon dddd weekday spelled out Monday m month 4 mm month with two places 04 mmm name of the month abbreviated to three letters Apr
592. the heading is demoted to level 3 And there is an even faster way By default keyboard shortcuts through are defined for Heading 1 through 3 and the shortcut 0 is defined for Normal Thus you can very quickly add headings change their levels or demote them to normal text by using these key combinations Explanation The outline level is a paragraph format At this point you might ask What do styles really have to do with the outline Simply put the outline level is an altogether ordinary paragraph format as far as TextMaker is concerned If you look at the Format gt Paragraph dialog you will also find an Outline level option there on the Paragraph tab This option is preset to 1 9 for the styles Heading 1 through 9 respectively This is the reason you can change the levels of headings with the styles Note Normally you should not change the Outline level option in the Format gt Paragraph dialog manually Use the Outline view or the styles mentioned above to do this These methods are more convenient and avoid potential sources of error Practical outlining To summarize let s consider how outlines can be applied most effectively in your documents Outlining an existing document Let s assume that you have already typed a document that includes headings and now want to use outlining to restructure it To do this all you need to do is to switch to the Outline view with View gt Outline and assign the h
593. the practice letter tomorrow tomorrow s date will appear in the same place With the help of fields you can not only insert the date but also output the current page number of your text its filename and many other kinds of information Furthermore fields can be used to put in database fields from a database as is required for form letters Page footers Before you continue you can open the file TOUR3 TMD It contains the example document as it should look at this stage of the exercise You can set up page headers and footers for every document headers will be printed at the top and footers at the bottom of every page For page footers you invoke the command Insert gt Footer Nothing much really happens the text cursor is just positioned in the bottom margin This is the area in which you can enter footers This time we will select the MicroSquare font in 8 point before typing So select this font with the aid of the Formatting toolbar Now when text is entered it ap pears immediately in the chosen font For the footer type for example the address of our architecture firm and some other information like our firm s bank details Of course you don t have to follow the example exactly if that is too much typing for you Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 30009 Telephone 555 555 4242 Fax 555 555 4243 4 SunTrump Bank Atlanta Account No 123 456 78 Routing Code STB6 543
594. the records 10 through 20 inclusive enter 10 and 20 here If you then click on the Select button all data records in this range will be selected on the other hand if you choose Deselect they will be deselected that is excluded from the selection 374 e Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 Selecting by condition With the command Select gt By condition keyboard shortcut Ctri U you can make a selection by means of a condition for example select all records that contain Smith in the NAME 1 field All records that fulfill this condition will then be included in the selection Hint It is necessary only that the content of the field begins with the search term Thus continuing our example if the NAME field of a given record con tained Smithfield TextMaker would select this record too You can combine several conditions as required for example NAME1 Smith and CITY London to select all Smiths living in London When you invoke the command Select gt By condition the following dialog appears Select Records by Conditions lt Conditions ns Select NAME Smith Deselect Cancel Delete all Delete Database field Content a To select for example all data records containing Smith at the beginning of the NAME field you would proceed as follows 1 Select the desired field from the dropdown list box Database field NAME1 following the
595. the small arrow to the right Now you can select an entry by clicking on it Changing the properties of dropdown lists To modify the properties of a dropdown list first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command A dialog window with the following options will appear Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 309 Layout tab Available only for dropdown list frames On this tab you can change the object s position outside margins and other layout related properties See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format tab Available only for dropdown list frames On this tab you can change the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Properties tab On this tab you can modify common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 Forms Object tab On this tab you can make settings that are specific to dropdown lists List entries group box Here you specify the items that should appear in the dropdown list You do this as follows To add an item Enter the name of the item in the New entry field and press the Enter key or click on the Add button To remove an item Select the item in the list of entries and click on the Remove button To change an item Remove the item and reinsert it To change the order Select one of the items in the list and click on one of the small
596. the string VAL 3 gives 3 VAL 3 eggs and VAL Can I have 3 eggs and 1 roll likewise give 3 However VAL eggs gives 0 since this string contains no number Returns the year part of a date as a number with two places the formula YEAR 09 17 15 gives 15 Calculations in the text e 399 Working with large documents TextMaker provides some useful functions for working with large documents Outlines Large documents are often organized according to an outline that is to say a hierarchical structure of headings TextMaker s Outline view allows you to view and edit a document in outline form You can change heading levels and move headings together with subordinated text with a click of the mouse m Indices Large documents often need an index an alphabetical list of keywords In this chapter you will also learn how TextMaker can create one for you from words that you select for it E Tables of contents Outlined documents are often provided with a table of contents TextMaker can create one from the outline with the press of a button Captions and tables of figures You can insert automatically numbered captions below images for example Figure 1 Figure 2 etc When you have done that you can even add a table of figures to the document It presents a list of all images that you have added captions to including their page numbers This also works with other text elements
597. the text direction for Arabic text For text in Arabic script there s an additional option named Text direction where you can set the writing direction of the paragraph to right to left See also chapter Working with Arabic text page 509 Character format for entire paragraphs In the dialog box for the Format gt Paragraph command you will also find a button called Character on the Paragraph tab With the help of this button you can modify the character formatting font text style etc for entire paragraphs This is especially useful in paragraph styles see section Paragraph styles begin ning on page 128 To change the character formatting of complete paragraphs select the paragraphs you want to change invoke Format gt Paragraph and click on this button A dialog box like the one for Format gt Character will appear and let you set up the Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 81 desired character format see chapter Character formatting beginning on page 63 Tabs A tab stop is a kind of jump target that you can use to position the text cursor at a specific point within a line by inserting a tab Tabs help you to compose for example tabular reports To work with tabs two steps are required 1 Define the tab stops with the Format gt Tabs command This command is used to specify the positions for which tabs will move the cursor 2 Now you can use the key to make the t
598. the top of the dialog A font s characters are organized into sets If the character you want to use is not in the set immediately in view when you can jump to the set in which it is likely to be found by selecting it from the Set list For example you can select Cyrillic to view the font s Cyrillic characters provided the font contains such characters Note Many fonts contain only a few of the character sets that are available However the fonts that are supplied with your operating system usually consti tute a huge reservoir of characters These include for example the Arial Ta homa and Times New Roman fonts supplied with Windows Select the desired character by clicking on it Then press the Enter key or click on the Insert button to insert the character into the text Alternatively you can double click on a character to select and immediately insert it You can repeat the above described procedure to insert additional characters as required When you are finished exit the dialog with the Close button Tip for Windows users Most Windows versions include two symbol fonts named Symbol and Wingdings These fonts contain many symbols that could be useful as bullets for example Using keyboard shortcuts If you need to insert a special character frequently you can always give it a key board shortcut The advantage of doing that is that you can then apply the character very quickly using a single key press Manual Text
599. them in section Using comments be ginning on page 447 Track changes on off Go to the previous change Go to the next change Accept the current change Reject the current change Accept all changes Reject all changes Accept or reject changes under dialog control Show changes on off Detailed information about the individual functions of these buttons is given in the following sections Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function In order to use the Track changes function open the document that you want to revise and invoke the command Tools gt Changes gt Track Changes The Track changes function is now enabled and all changes made to the current document will be tracked If you want to finish using this function you can disable it anytime by invoking the same command once again Tip This function can also be switched on off by clicking on the icon in the Reviewing toolbar Step 2 Making the desired changes Next make the desired changes in the document as you normally would You can alter delete and add text change the formatting etc 454 e Document revisions Manual TextMaker 2016 Thus the document can be edited just as if the Track changes function didn t exist There is only one important difference Your changes are not immediately applied to the document but are highlighted in color and otherwise marked as follows m When you add text it is colored and underlined m Whe
600. these three options can be applied in any combination within the same table Thus you can set up for example tables where the cells in the first column have a fixed width while those in the remaining columns have widths set to Auto If you set up such a table and subsequently increased the width of the first column the widths of the remaining columns would automatically decrease pro portionally Tip Cell widths can also be changed with the mouse To do this drag the right border of a cell left or right with your mouse If you have not selected any cells the width of all the cells in the current column is changed If you have selected some cells only the width of the selected cells is changed Vertical alignment This setting determines how the content of cells will be aligned with respect to the top and bottom edges of the cell Option Explanation Top The cell content will be aligned flush against the top edge of the cell This is the default setting Centered The cell content will be centered between the top and bottom edges of the cell Bottom The cell content will be aligned flush against the bottom edge of the cell Justified The lines of text within the cell will be equally spaced in such a way that the top line will be flush against the top edge of the cell and the bottom line flush against the bottom edge Rotate by Here you can specify the angle of rotation for the contents of the current cell s Ma
601. this move the text cursor to the front of any character within the company name Escher amp Sons Architects and click on the icon for Centered in the Formatting toolbar Note Paragraph format actions in other words all format actions that you can carry out with the command Format gt Paragraph always affect complete paragraphs So if you want to modify the paragraph format of a single para graph you don t need to select it first Simply move the text cursor to any posi tion within the paragraph 46 o The TextMaker Tour Manual TextMaker 2016 On the other hand if you want to modify the formatting of several successive paragraphs you must select them beforehand The selection can begin at any position within the first paragraph and end anywhere in the last paragraph Let s try this out Invoke the command Edit gt Undo and the company name will again be formatted flush left Starting from any letter in the company name hold the mouse button down and drag the selection into the next line Then click on the icon for Centered in the Formatting toolbar Both paragraphs will now be cen tered After you have done this your application screen should look something like this Tourltmd kaba m Escher amp Sons Architects Design and Planning of Gonstruction Projects of all Sizes Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atknta GA 30009 1 Fred Backfish 7 Shepard s Way Salmon
602. tibility reasons Options available Use printer independent formatting The recommended setting Formats the document using a very high internal resolution which is independent from the current printer driver When you switch to a different printer driver the docu ment will not change by any means Printer output Formats the document using the resolution of the current printer driver This may in some cases lead to changes in line breaks and thus even page breaks when you switch to a different printer driver m Fax output Same as Printer output but using the current fax driver instead of the printer driver This setting was recommended for fax forms in older ver sions of TextMaker but is now obsolete Instead always choose the option Use printer independent formatting since it formats the document completely independent from the driver Decimal separator Here you can specify the character to be used as a decimal separator Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 549 This setting only affects the behavior of decimal tab stops If you change the separator character from a period to a comma for example numbers at decimal tab stops will be aligned not on periods but on commas Compatibility button This button provides access to settings that affect functions internal to the program in order to improve compatibility with documents created in older versions of TextMaker or in Microsoft Word These options
603. tically whether given characters are part of the Latin Asian or complex scripts 512 o Working with Arabic text Manual TextMaker 2016 Inserting dates in Arabic When the Extended support for Arabic text option is enabled the dialogs for the commands Insert gt Date and Insert gt Field contain additional options for the insertion of dates into the text Options available m Language Here you can select the language in which day and month names are to be displayed in the date You can choose between the language for Western scripts for Asian scripts or for complex scripts e g Arabic Note To specify the language for each of these script types use the three Language options in the Format gt Character dialog m Calendar Here you can choose if the date should be based on the Gregorian calendar or the Islamic Hijri calendar For general information on inserting dates and other fields see the chapter Fields page 161 Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with Arabic text e 513 Scripts BasicMaker Note BasicMaker is not included in some versions of SoftMaker Office Availa ble only under Windows BasicMaker is a tool that allows you to compose and execute scripts written in the programming language SoftMaker Basic SoftMaker Basic is modeled after the industry standard Visual Basic for Applications VBA from Microsoft Scripts can be used to automate tasks in the word processor TextMaker and the spreads
604. tings stored in the picture file and displays the image accordingly Note Only files in GIF or PNG format can contain transparency settings No transparency Ignores the transparency settings stored in the picture file Even pictures containing transparent areas will not be displayed transparently Color Lets you choose the color to be displayed transparently For example if you select white all white areas of the picture will become transparent m File button To use a different picture file click this button and choose a new file Export button Available only for pictures that are saved in the document You can use this button to export the picture that is to save a copy of it on your hard disk If you check the Create link to file option in the Export dialog TextMaker first copies the picture from the document to a file and then removes the picture from the document replacing it with a reference to the new file Thus the pic ture is no longer saved in the document Using the Picture toolbar Some of the properties of pictures can also be changed using the Picture toolbar Picture x sai NE EELA E a EN The Picture toolbar Manual TextMaker 2016 Pictures e 221 This toolbar appears automatically when you select a picture in the document From left to right its icons represent the following functions Invoke the Object gt Properties command for this image Add a photo frame effect to the image Use the
605. tion about them in section Using comments beginning on page 447 m Track changes Turns the tracking of changes on off Corresponds to the icon in the Reviewing toolbar and to the menu com mand Tools gt Changes gt Track Changes m Show changes Turns the Show changes option on off When enabled changes are highlighted in color When disabled the document appears as if all changes had been ac cepted Corresponds to the icon in the Reviewing toolbar Print changes When enabled tracked changes are highlighted colorized not only on the screen but also in printed output When disabled the document prints as if all tracked changes had been accepted Show tooltips When enabled additional information on a change are displayed on the screen when you point at it with your mouse author date and type of change Inserted text Deleted text etc The options in the lower area of the dialog let you specify how changes will be represented in the document You can modify both the manner in which chang es are displayed and the colors to be used to highlight the changes If you use the default setting By Author for a color a new color will be select ed automatically each time a new user makes changes When the first user makes changes they will appear in red Subsequently when another user opens the document and makes additional changes these will appear in blue etc Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revi
606. tivated or deactivated in the toolbar Note This command is meant for quickly turning icons on or off If you want to perform further customizations to the icons displayed in a toolbar follow the instructions given in the section Customizing toolbar icons page 564 Position Use this command to change the position of a toolbar Available options top bottom left right or floating in a little window that can be moved and resized with the mouse Toolbars Invokes the View gt Toolbars command that allows you to activate or deacti vate configure and manage toolbars See section Customizing toolbars page 560 Customize Invokes the Tools gt Customize gt Toolbars command that allows you to edit the icons on a toolbar add remove move icons See section Customizing toolbar icons page 564 Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 567 m Reset this toolbar Resets the toolbar All customizations made to the toolbar s icons and settings will be reverted Customizing keyboard shortcuts As you know TextMaker s most frequently used commands can be invoked with keyboard shortcuts For example you can execute the File gt Save command very quickly by pressing the key combination s With the Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard Mappings command these keyboard shortcuts can be customized as desired You can assign new shortcuts to com mands and change or delete existin
607. tomizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 E Frame guidelines Here you specify whether or not gray lines should be used to make the bounda ries of text frames visible These lines merely indicate the position and size of the text frame on the screen they are not printed By default this option is enabled OLE object guidelines Windows only Here you specify whether or not gray lines should be used to make the boundaries of OLE objects visible These lines merely indicate the position and size of the object on the screen they are not printed By default this option is enabled m Guides As described in section Using guides beginning on page 574 you can set up guidelines for each document that will simplify the accurate positioning of ob jects With this option you specify whether or not these guidelines should be dis played on the screen By default this option is enabled Note If you disable this option the guidelines are no longer displayed but retain their function m Page borders Here you specify whether or not page borders should be indicated in the docu ment window with dotted grey lines These lines serve merely as visual aids they are not printed By default this option is enabled Horizontal ruler Here you can enable or disable the horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler is displayed above the text It shows the current paragraph formatting and it also provides a means of changing indents a
608. toolbars delete and rename existing toolbars edit toolbar icons etc To perform these tasks use the buttons in the dialog box for the View gt Toolbars command Creating new toolbars TextMaker allows you to create your own toolbars whenever you wish For example if you frequently need to use commands in the Window menu that are not present in the Standard toolbar it might be worthwhile for you to set up your own toolbar for them You create a new toolbar as follows 1 Click the New button in the dialog box of the View gt Toolbars command 2 A dialog box appears and prompts you to enter a name for the new toolbar My toolbar for example Enter a name and confirm with OK 3 The new toolbar is set up Close the dialog box or click on the Customize button to add icons to the toolbar You can read more about this in the section entitled Customizing toolbar icons beginning on page 564 Customizing the icons in a toolbar You can edit the icons on toolbars with the Customize button Information about this is provided in the following section Deleting and renaming toolbars To delete or rename a toolbar in the View gt Toolbars dialog box select it and click Delete or Rename Note You can delete and rename only toolbars that you have created yourself The default toolbars Standard toolbar Formatting toolbar etc cannot be removed Resetting toolbars You can undo any changes you have made to one of the
609. tring STR 17 would produce the string 17 Returns a text string consisting of n repetitions of the text string t STRING Text 3 gives TextTextText Returns a text string consisting of n2 characters extracted from text string beginning at position nl SUB STR TextMaker 2 3 gives ext Returns the sum of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example SUM B2 B5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 384 Returns today s date in the form MM DD YY the empty pair of parentheses following the function name must be entered Manual TextMaker 2016 TRIM TRUNC n n2 UPPER 2 USER Q VALD YEAR d Manual TextMaker 2016 Returns the text string with all leading or trailing spaces removed TRIM Text gives Text Returns the number n truncated to n2 decimal places without rounding TRUNC 1 2345 2 gives 1 23 Converts the text string t to uppercase UPPER James gives JAMES Returns the user name under which you are logged in to your computer The empty pair of parentheses after the function name must be entered Converts the text string to a number The string may include non numeric characters In that case TextMaker takes the first occurrence of a number within
610. ts In order to run this software the following hardware and software is required Windows version m Windows 10 8 7 Vista or XP with Service Pack 2 Linux version m Any x86 Linux 32 or 64 bit Android Version E Android 4 0 or better m ARM compatible CPU m Display size 7 inch or larger recommended 18 e Welcome Manual TextMaker 2016 Installation and program startup This chapter covers information on installing and starting TextMaker It is divided into the following sections Installing under Windows Installing under Linux Installing on an Android device Please go directly to the section that covers your operating system Installing under Windows Download If you obtained TextMaker by download from our website you will find installa tion instructions in the e mail that you received after purchasing the software CD ROM If you obtained TextMaker on CD ROM please launch the installation program provided in the root folder of the CD Then follow the installation program s instructions to install the software Starting To start the installed programs use the Start menu at the lower left corner of the screen For example to start TextMaker click successively on Start gt All Pro grams gt SoftMaker Office gt TextMaker Note When you start TextMaker for the first time you will be asked to enter your name and address This information is not for the purpose of registering the p
611. ts only in one respect they contain forms objects at the places where something is to be filled out 296 o Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 T Form2 tmd nA A text field E Name Jessica Lange Address 42 Faraday Ave z City Mountain View CA 90427 2 Gender female v A dropdown list New client yes A checkbox A Ja le i la 4 w r In the following list you will learn about the different types of forms objects that can be present in a form and about how they are to be filled out m Text fields and text frames for entering text To fill out a text field or frame you simply position the text cursor in it and type the desired text Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames for menus of selectable items When you click on a dropdown list it opens You can then select one of the entries with a mouse click m Checkboxes and checkbox frames for items to be checked off When you click on the box with the mouse a little check mark appears in it indicating that the associated item has been checked When you click on it a second time the check mark is removed Moving the text cursor in forms You can move the text cursor within forms as follows m You can move the text cursor to the desired position in the usual way by using the arrow keys or clicking with the mouse Manual TextMaker 2016 Forms e 297 m You can use the key to jump to the next forms object and to jump to the previous o
612. tter tmd T Glasgow tmd The document tabs bar With document tabs the following actions can be performed Switching between document windows When you click on a tab with the left mouse button the corresponding document becomes the active document This allows you to switch between your open document windows quickly Alternatively you can use the keyboard switches to the next document window and to the previous one Closing document windows When you click on a tab with the middle mouse button the corresponding docu ment is closed Alternatively you can close a document by left clicking on the X icon displayed on the right of the tab When you click on a tab with the right mouse button a small menu containing commands for closing the current document or all other documents appears Showing hiding the document tabs bar The Window gt Document Tabs command lets you choose if the document tabs bar should be displayed When you invoke this command a menu with the follow ing choices opens a Off Disables the document tabs bar 520 o Document windows Manual TextMaker 2016 E For two or more documents Automatically displays the document tabs bar when you have two or more do cuments opened m Always visible Always displays the document tabs bar even if just one document is opened Further settings related to document tabs can be made in the dialog of the Tools gt Options command General tab See the
613. tures 262 Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 Here you can flip the object vertically or horizontally Object properties Filling tab Note This tab is available only for certain types of objects When applied to pictures the filling will be visible only in pictures that contain transparent areas Use the Filling tab to modify the filling of objects as follows First select the desired type of filling in the Fill type list Based on the fill type selected a series of options will be displayed You can then change those settings for the chosen fill type as desired The following fill types and settings are available E No Filling If you select the first fill type in the list the object is not filled and thus remains transparent Color Fills the object using a uniform color shade To change the color select it in the Colors list If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do this click on the More colors button and proceed as described in the section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 If desired you can also change the Transparency of the fill You can enter any value between 0 no transparency and 100 full transparency For exam ple if you set the Transparency value to 25 the filling will have 25 trans parency E Pattern Fills the object using a pattern To specify the pattern select the type of pattern from the Patterns list Th
614. tzerland Hunspell dictionaries Windows and Linux only As an alternative to its own dictionaries SoftMaker Office for Windows Linux also supports the use of Hunspell dictionaries These dictionaries are available as free downloads Most of them were created by pri vate users or non profit organizations 536 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 The Hunspell dictionaries button allows you to a install Hunspell dictionaries that you have downloaded and b specify which languages should use a Hun spell dictionary For details see section Installing additional dictionaries page 577 Hyphenation Here you can configure the automatic hyphenation module Settings available m Use automatic hyphenation Identical to the Tools gt Automatic Hyphenation menu command In TextMaker hyphenation is completely automatic and takes effect as you type However if you turn this option off automatic hyphenation will be com pletely disabled for the current document Hyphens will no longer be inserted automatically and existing ones are removed See also section Hyphenation page 328 Note Unlike all other options in this dialog this setting is not a global setting but a document setting In other words TextMaker remembers its state per document Expand SmartText entries As described in the section SmartText beginning on page 333 you can create SmartText entries e g sd for sales department
615. u can produce double columned text by placing the text in a table with one row and two columns Horizontal lines With the command Object gt New Horizontal Line you can insert a horizontal line into the text for example when a dividing line is needed Of course such lines are not limited to HTML documents they can also be used in normal documents To insert a horizontal line position the text cursor in the text line where the line is desired and invoke the command Object gt New Horizontal Line The line is now inserted By default it extends all the way from the left to the right margin Changing the line s properties To change the way the line is rendered select the line by clicking on it and invoke the command Object gt Properties Manual TextMaker 2016 Internet functions e 461 Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the line A dialog box appears and presents the following options Width of line The width of horizontal lines is normally specified as a percentage of the page width By default the width is set to 100 percent thus the line extends all the way from the left to the right margin If you change this setting to 50 percent for example the line will be shortened to half the width of the page Alternatively you can enable the Absolute option and enter the desired width as a fixed value Thickness Here you can enter the line thickness in points Justification Here you ca
616. u can use the key to insert tabs in the text to move from one tab stop to the next Note You can also use this dialog to enter the Default width for the predefined tab stops mentioned earlier normally 0 5 inch However once you have defined your own tab stops for a given paragraph the predefined tab stops are ignored Tab alignment Using Format gt Tabs you can specify not only the position for a new tab stop but also its alignment Alignment Function Left A normal tab stop similar to one on a typewriter The tab stop determines where the following text begins Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 83 Right Here the text following the tab is aligned flush right Thus the tab stop determines where the text ends Centered The text after the tab is centered on the tab position Thus the tab stop determines where the middle of the text falls Decimal For formatting columns of numbers The numbers are positioned in such a way that their decimal separators are vertically aligned Hint To change the alignment of an existing tab stop invoke Format gt Tabs Select one of the tab stops that have been set change its alignment by selecting a new alignment from the Alignment list and click on Set Tab leader The space that a tab skips over can be filled with a leader character if desired as follows None A tab without a leader Solid A tab with underscores as leaders Dashed A tab with
617. u like A dialog box much like the Format gt Paragraph dialog appears Here you can specify the desired paragraph formatting see section Paragraph format ting beginning on page 75 Tip If you will need the paragraph style frequently you can assign a keyboard shortcut to it see below When you have made all desired settings click on OK to define the style Exit the dialog box with Close The style is now defined and ready for use You will learn in a moment how to use it section Applying paragraph styles Creating a new paragraph style from selected text Alternatively you can format some text first and then create a paragraph style that uses exactly the same formatting options For this purpose use the New from text button instead of the New button This method is useful when you have formatted paragraphs by hand and want to have a paragraph style that has exactly the same formattings 130 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Proceed as follows 1 Set up the paragraph format indents line spacing alignment etc of one or more paragraphs to your liking 2 Place the text cursor inside one of these paragraphs or select the paragraphs either will do 3 As described above use the Format gt Paragraph Style command to create a new paragraph style However in this case use the New from text button rather than the New button A paragraph style created this way will behave like any other
618. ual TextMaker 2016 How do I copy text Select the text segment and copy it into the clipboard with ctri C Then move the text cursor to the place where you want to insert the copy and press etri h If you want to insert the text again all you have to do is move the text cursor to the next place where you want to insert it and press again Everything works the same way for objects like pictures and drawings as it does for text Moving and copying text with the mouse drag and drop You can select a text segment with the mouse drag it to another position and drop it there With this technique known as drag and drop you can move or copy text very quickly Proceed as follows 1 Select the text segment 2 Position the mouse cursor on the selection 3 Press the left mouse button and hold it down 4 With the mouse button held down drag the selection to the desired position 5 When you release the mouse button the content of the selection is moved to the new position When you release the mouse button while pressing the key the selection is instead copied to the new position Pasting with special formatting In addition to common clipboard operations like Cut Copy and Paste TextMaker offers the Edit gt Paste Special command which gives you more control over how the clipboard content is pasted into your document In detail When you place information in the clipboard using Edit gt Cut or
619. uccessive instances of this field are automatically numbered incrementally m Adding line numbers In addition you can have TextMaker show line numbers alongside the docu ment text The line numbers are inserted in the left page margin both for dis play and for printing These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Manual TextMaker 2016 Automatic numbering e 171 Simple enumerations The section Bulleted lists beginning on page 86 describes how you can add bullets to paragraphs with the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command This command is also suitable for enumerating paragraphs TextMaker automati cally indents the paragraphs at the left to make room for the numbers and then numbers the paragraphs incrementally T Manual tmd Co e j To jump to a specific page do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go to command 2 Select Page from the list of Go to options 3 Enter the desired page number The page is then 3 immediately brought into view 4 Click Close to close the dialog I ue 4 Paragraphs with numbering You can use enumeration as many times as you wish within a single document The numbering is automatically reset to one at the beginning of each new enumeration Adding numbering To add numbering to a group of paragraphs proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of interest 2 Invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering 3
620. ula please note the following 392 e Calculations in the text Manual TextMaker 2016 1 When you enter dates in formulas you must enclose them in double quota tion marks 2 Month and day must be given as two place numbers Thus 04 20 15 is correct while 4 20 15 is incorrect the month has only one place 3 The year can be given as a two or four place number as you prefer Thus 04 20 15 and 04 20 2015 are equally valid 4 When you enter a year as a two place number between 0 and 29 TextMaker automatically prefixes 20 When you enter a number between 30 and 99 Text Maker prefixes 19 Thus the date 01 01 29 is interpreted as 1 1 2029 while 01 01 30 is interpreted as 1 1 1930 Database fields table cells and objects You can also use the contents of database fields table cells and objects in formulas You will find information about this in the sections Table cells in calculations Database fields in calculations and Objects in calculations beginning on page 384 Calculations A formula can contain various kinds of calculations Example 6 5 Always returns the constant value 30 and is in fact a constant value not a calculation Example 5 NUMBER In this formula the constant value 5 is multiplied by the value of the variable NUMBER If NUMBER has the value of 10 the formula gives 50 Beyond that TextMaker puts a number of computational functions at your dispos al Detailed d
621. ulations seessseeeseeesseeeessseeeeeseseeseseeerrsrerensererererrreresee 384 Database fields in calculations 0 0 cele eee eeeceeeceeecesecesecssecaecneesaeeens 385 Objects in Calculations 2 0 eee cece eeeeeeeceeseeeeeesecsecaecsaecaecsaeeaaeens 386 Formatting and rounding calculations 00 0 0 ee eee ceseceeecseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 388 Updating calculations 0 0 00 cc eceseccscsecssesscseeesessesssesecseesscsesssessesesssessseseeneee 389 Conditional text aiseee eiee ioes Moreen Eeo EEE EEEE 390 Simple calculations with the press of a button esssssssessssissssssseserersssenses 390 Formulas and functions esesseeseeeeeeeeeeresrsrreresrerssserrrerestreresresrssrerrnsrsresresreet 391 The structure of a formula cece eee eeeceeeceeeeeseceseceaecsaecaesnaeeaeeens 392 OPELALOLS oenen e aei EE E E anette ebook oleae 395 Computational functions sssseeseeeseseeeseseeeresesrrsststsesteetssreressesrrsresreeresre 396 Working with large documents 401 OUNCES a ot ea ea a a e Ba te oe 402 Using the Outline View ariin e o a E R E E 404 x e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Formatting headings sriep deperi oenar Eks P EE S ie 407 Expert tip Managing headings with paragraph styles 0 eee 408 Practical outlining eo p ecvscesugecschisns enoro eae sive teas fees user a seperate 409 Numbering headings ternis senes eee r oa apipi ire Sipe 410 Outlined documents and chapters essseeesseeseseeeseeereseerseerens
622. ulations see section Inserting calculations and edit existing ones but also specify the format of the calculation s result You can set the format already when you enter a new calculation or you can do this at any time afterwards by selecting the calculation and invoking Insert gt Calculation The following options in the dialog box determine the format of the calculation m Thousands separator If you enable this option numbers 1000 and above are represented with thou sands separators For example 1230000 is shown as 1 230 000 mw Hide result If you choose this option the result of the calculation is not visible in the text This makes sense when for example you want to perform intermediate calcu lations with variables and do not want to show the results Note To make a hidden calculation visible again invoke the command File gt Properties change the View tab and activate the Display field names option Now you can select the calculation again invoke Insert gt Calculation and dis able the Hide result option m Decimal places With the default setting Floating as many decimal places are shown as are required to represent fully the result of the calculation You can select instead the Fixed option and enter a fixed number of decimal places to be shown For monetary amounts for example the number of decimal places should be fixed at 2 Attention The value is not actually rounded by setting a fixed number
623. ument exchange It supports all basic kinds of formatting and can be read by many other programs E HTML HTML format for web pages see also chapter Internet functions beginning on page 459 506 o Working with other file formats Manual TextMaker 2016 E Text file Plain text file m Text file with additional options Same as above However before the file is opened saved an additional dialog opens where you can specify the character set and other advanced settings See the section Working with text files below for details E TextMaker DOS import only available under Windows only Opens a document that was created with TextMaker for DOS version 3 0 or higher Saving in this file format is not possible Working with text files As described in the previous section you can also open and save plain text files with TextMaker When you do this make sure the correct character set is used Letting TextMaker determine the character set automatically Usually you don t have to care about choosing the correct character set since TextMaker handles this automatically for you as follows m When you open a text file TextMaker tries to determine its character set auto matically If it fails your system s default character set is used m When you open a text file and save it TextMaker automatically uses the char acter set in which the file was opened m When you save an existing document to a new text file
624. umeration is continued at the immediately following numbered paragraph Ending or removing an enumeration To end an enumeration of paragraphs or to remove a previously applied enumera tion proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the end of the last numbered paragraph and press the Enter key to begin a new paragraph Or If you want to remove all numbers from a given group of numbered para graphs select them 2 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 3 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering tab 4 Disable numbering by selecting None in the Type group box 5 Confirm with OK Dialog options The Bullets amp Simple numbering tab in the dialog box for the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command gives you access to the following options m Type Here you can specify either Numbering or a Bullet for the selected para graph s Select the Numbering option for numbering You can find infor mation relating to the Bullet option in section Bulleted lists beginning on page 86 When you set the Type to None existing bullets or numbers are removed You can always transform a numbered list into a bulleted list simply by chang ing the Type to Bullet Naturally you can proceed in the opposite direction as well 174 o Automatic numbering Manual TextMaker 2016 Before and After As required you can specify text to be added before and or after the number that TextMaker will assign to th
625. und the object contained within the frame following the object s contours as closely as possible Note This works only with graphics that contain transparencies as well as drawings Behind text The body text flows right through the frame and appears to lie behind the object in the frame In front of text The body text flows right through the frame and appears to lie above of the object in the frame Note This option is not available for objects whose anchor is placed inside a table cell m Contour group box This group box is available only for frames and drawings 260 o Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 When you have selected either the Square or the Contour option for Text wrapping you can specify here the side s of the frame around which the text should wrap The available options are from left to right Option Meaning Both The body text flows around both sides of the frame Left It flows only around the left side Right It flows only around the right side Larger side It flows only around that side of the frame on which there is the most room m Object group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings When you insert a frame or a drawing the object is automatically anchored to the paragraph in which is inserted and the anchor is placed to the left of that paragraph An object always appears on the page in which its anchor is found Thus if you move t
626. ures and drawings when printing useful for fast test print ing Manual TextMaker 2016 Outputting documents 469 E Reverse order Prints the pages from last to first To start printing click OK Hint Before actually printing a document you can preview the printout using the File gt Print Preview command Printing a form letter To print a form letter proceed as follows 1 Open or create a form letter see chapter Form letters and form faxes begin ning on page 367 2 Make sure that the database with the desired addresses has been assigned to the form letter with Tools gt Set Database see section Assigning a database to a document beginning on page 368 3 Select the database records to be printed as required see section Selecting data records beginning on page 373 4 Invoke the command File gt Print Merge 5 In the Records group box choose one of the options for controlling which records in the attached database are to be used All every record in the entire database Selected all records in the database that have been selected Range a range of record numbers in this case you must enter the first and last numbers in the range Finally confirm with OK to start the print job You will find detailed information about creating form letters in chapter Form letters and form faxes beginning on page 367 470 o Outputting documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Faxing a d
627. vate it Now the shortcuts defined in this keyboard mapping become available As stated in the introduction all the shortcuts for all the commands are stored in a keyboard mapping Accordingly when you switch between two keyboard map pings all the shortcuts change By default the following two keyboard mappings are pre defined Standard The standard mapping contains all the keyboard shortcuts described in this manual e g for the Save com mand Classic A largely WordStar compatible keyboard mapping for users who have worked previously with WordStar TextMaker for DOS or other programs with a WordStar compatible key board mapping Tip You will find a table for the Standard keyboard mapping in the chapter entitled Keyboard shortcuts beginning on page 581 If necessary you can modify either of these two standard mappings and also create your own keyboard mappings a topic which is covered in the following sections Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker o 569 Creating a new keyboard mapping The Tools gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command allows you to build complete keyboard mappings Thus you can set up different keyboard mappings to be used for different purposes and switch between them as needed Note When all you want to do is add or change a few keyboard shortcuts it is not necessary to set up your own keyboard mapping Simply click on the Edit button and modify the standard keyboard mapping it
628. w softmaker com You can also download the dictionaries there free of charge To download and install a Hunspell dictionary proceed as follows 1 With your web browser navigate to www softmaker com 2 In the Download area navigate to the free Hunspell dictionaries 3 You are now presented a list of all Hunspell dictionaries that SoftMaker Office supports Download the dictionary of interest and store it on your hard disk Manual TextMaker 2016 Customizing TextMaker e 579 4 Launch any SoftMaker Office application TextMaker PlanMaker or Presenta tions 5 Invoke the Tools gt Options command and switch to the Language tab 6 Click on the Hunspell dictionaries button 7 A dialog showing a list of all languages dictionaries installed appears Click on the Add Hunspell dictionary button 8 A file dialog is displayed Use it to browse to the folder where you have stored the downloaded dictionary 9 Select the dictionary file from the files list and click on Open The dictionary will be installed and is from now on available in any SoftMaker Office application Choosing a different dictionary for a language Note This feature is available only in the Windows and the Linux version In case you have installed more than one dictionary for a certain language e g a SoftMaker dictionary and a Hunspell dictionary you can switch between these dictionaries anytime Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Tools gt Options
629. want to embed the object 2 Invoke the Object gt New OLE Object command 3 A dialog box appears From the Object Type list displayed in this window select the type of OLE object that TextMaker should embed in the text 4 When you confirm with OK TextMaker starts the application that is appropri ate to the type of object selected 5 Create the object in the application 6 Exit the application 7 At this point it is possible that the application will ask you if you want to insert the object into the TextMaker document Confirm with Yes The OLE object created in the other application is now embedded in the TextMaker document Inserting as an OLE object frame An OLE object that has been embedded in the text is treated by TextMaker as if it were a character within the text Thus it is bound up within the flow of the text Instead of being embedded an OLE object can be inserted as an OLE object frame that will remain at a fixed position on the page You will find more information about this in section OLE object frames beginning on page 282 240 e OLE objects Manual TextMaker 2016 Acquiring an OLE object from a file If you don t want to create a new OLE object but want to embed as an OLE object a document that already exists in the form of a file created previously in another application you still invoke Object gt New OLE Object command but in this case instead of choosing the option Create New in th
630. wever in this case use the New from text button rather than the New button A character style created this way will behave like any other character style The only difference is that its original character format is based on the selected text Of course you can still change the style s formatting options whenever you like independently from the text Using keyboard shortcuts If you need a format style very frequently you can give it a keyboard shortcut The advantage of doing that is that you can then apply the style very quickly using a single key press To assign a keyboard shortcut to a style switch to the Style tab in the dialog for editing the style There position the text cursor in the Shortcut key edit box and press the desired key combination Note If you press a key combination that is already assigned the current as signment is displayed below the Shortcut key edit box In that case you should press the Backspace key to delete this key combination and then enter another one Otherwise you will overwrite the assignment for another style or even for one of TextMaker s commands We recommend using key combinations that include the keys ctr1 and Shift since these are normally not assigned 122 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Applying character styles To apply a character style do the following 1 Select the segment of text to which you want to apply the style 2 Invoke Format gt Character Style
631. with a password This has been done to prevent unauthorized persons from changing those parts of the form that are not intended to be altered 298 e Forms Manual TextMaker 2016 If a form is protected in this manner an attempt to deactivate Forms mode will result in a prompt for a password You will be able to deactivate Forms mode only by entering the correct password Creating forms To create a form first lay out the document just as you would with any normal document Then insert forms objects at the places where something should be filled in later All further information on creating forms is provided in this section It covers the following topics mu Types of forms objects Inserting forms objects Editing forms objects Preparing an example form See the next pages for details Types of forms objects The following types of forms objects can be used in forms Forms object Description Text fields Text fields are intended for text entries such as Text frames Checkboxes Checkbox frames Manual TextMaker 2016 s 6 name address etc The user who fills out the form can enter whatever text he or she likes in them Like text fields but confined within frames see below Checkboxes are appropriate for yes no entries If the user clicks on a checkbox a check mark is displayed in it If he clicks on it again the check mark is removed Like checkboxes but confined within frames
632. with the Format gt Chapter command This type of background will always be printed See also section Changing the page background page 115 Pictures and OLE objects group box With the default setting Show pictures all the graphics and OLE objects present in the text are displayed on the screen If instead you select the Use placeholders option gray boxes are displayed at the positions of these objects Advantage The responsiveness of the display is im proved when paging through a document with a lot of pictures 548 e Customizing TextMaker Manual TextMaker 2016 Locking group box With these options you can lock all objects on the master page and all guides and thereby protect them from being shifted inadvertently Lock objects on master page If you activate this option objects that have been inserted on the master page can be moved only in the master page view see also section Master pages beginning on page 108 m Lock guides If you activate this option guides can no longer be dragged with the mouse They can be edited only from the Object gt Guides amp Grid dialog see also section Using guides beginning on page 574 By default both options are disabled Format view for group box Note This option is available only in TextMaker for Windows Usually this option should be set to the standard setting Use printer independent formatting The other two options are provided just for compa
633. xample the line s thickness select the desired thickness from the Thickness 1 list If you don t want the footnote separator line to appear at all select the option None from the Line style list 446 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 Document revisions You can add comments to documents and track changes made to them These capabilities are applicable for example when several users make successive revisions to a document m Using comments You can select text anywhere in a document and then attach a comment to it For example if a colleague gives you a document to review you can insert notes like make this section shorter directly into the document and then re turn it to him He can then make the revisions you have recommended in your comments m Tracking changes in a document The Track changes function lets you do even more When it is activated you can make changes to a document delete or add text alter formatting etc as you like However your changes are not simply applied as they would be oth erwise rather they are at first only highlighted in color and saved as proposed changes So if a colleague sends you a document for correction turn on the Track changes function make the desired changes and return the document to your colleague He can then review your proposed changes and separately accept or reject each of them If he accepts a change it is saved
634. xed position on the page A frame does not move when you enter or delete text above it To insert a picture frame for example you do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Picture Frame command 248 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 2 A dialog box appears allowing you to select the picture to be inserted Choose a picture file and confirm with OK 3 The picture frame is inserted If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners The process for inserting other types of frames is similar You will find detailed information about the individual kinds of frames in the sections Text frames Picture frames etc beginning on page 275 Selecting objects Before you can edit an object you must first select it To do this simply click on the desired object A frame will appear around the object to indicate that it is now selected Note This does not work with text fields text frames and other objects that have transparent fills To select such an object you can click on its border if it has one Otherwise you must switch to Object mode see the next section There you can select any kind of object with a simple click of the mouse You cannot modify the normal text while an object is selected only the selected object can be edited When you want to return to the text to continue editing it simply click with the mouse
635. ximum 30 mph An example of the use of footnotes TextMaker numbers footnotes automatically in an ascending sequence If you insert a new footnote in the text or delete an existing footnote the numbering of any following footnotes is automatically adjusted By default TextMaker automatically inserts a separator line between the text and the footnote area If you wish you can specify a custom format for this line or even disable it In this section you will learn everything you need to know about footnotes The following topics are covered Inserting and editing footnotes m Changing the formatting of footnotes Footnote options Read the following pages for detailed information Inserting and editing footnotes With TextMaker you can add footnotes to a text segment very easily Place the cursor right behind that text segment invoke the Insert gt Footnote gt Insert Footnote command and type the footnote text The rest numbering formatting and placement of the footnote is done automatically for you 440 o Working with large documents Manual TextMaker 2016 In details you proceed as follows 1 4 Position the text cursor immediately after the word or phrase to which you want to append the footnote Invoke the Insert gt Footnote command A sub menu opens Select the Insert Footnote command from the sub menu Hint There is also a keyboard shortcut for this command the key combina tion ctr Jat E
636. xisting links in the current document When you select a link from the list the name and type of the source file to which the link refers are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box The dialog s buttons allow you to perform the following functions Button Function Update Now Updates the OLE object Use this button if the source file has been modified by another program and the changes are not visible in the TextMaker document Open Source Starts the application associated with the OLE object allowing you to edit the object in the application Tip Double clicking on the object has the same effect 242 e OLE objects Manual TextMaker 2016 Change Source Lets you select a different file as the source for the OLE object Break Link Cuts the link to the source file As a result the object is embedded permanently in the TextMaker document Chang es to the source file no longer have any effect on the docu ment However the object can still be edited by double clicking on it Changing position and size of an OLE object An OLE object inserted with the Object gt New OLE Object command is treated by TextMaker like a character within the text When you want to change the position of such an object all you need to do is cut it and paste it at another place using the familiar Edit menu commands The size of an OLE object can be changed in either of two ways Dragging the boundary lines Click on the OLE object to selec
637. xt dehnt ospe dott w Won amp kegat rdia fodba lamn ipani dobrita x gent lapion zzri celest cages cds cobre be in loci By doing this you have created three sections a single column section at the beginning of the document a double column section in the middle and another single column section at the end If you decide you want the middle section to be formatted in three columns instead of two you can reformat it simply by moving the text cursor to a position any where within the middle section and then invoking Format gt Section Under Apply to select Current section then change the number of columns to 3 The double column section is then reformatted in three columns Entering a section break You can use the Insert gt Break gt Section break command to divide a section into two sections In this way a document can be divided into additional sections and each section can be formatted with a different number of columns Page breaks before sections By default TextMaker does not insert a page break between two sections and it allows the text to flow without interruption from one section to the next However if you want to ensure that a given section will always start on a new page you can position the text cursor within this section invoke the Format gt Section command and check the Page break option in the dialog box Manual TextMaker 2016 Multi column page layouts e 147 Searching a
638. xt segment where you inserted it Accordingly such fields are often used in the headers or footers of books and other large documents in order to display the main heading of the current chapter Manual TextMaker 2016 Working with large documents e 437 Inserting a style reference field To insert a style reference field into the text proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the place in the text where the style reference field is to be inserted 2 Invoke the Insert gt Field command 3 In the left list select the entry Style Reference 4 In the right list select the style to be searched for 5 Click on the Insert button TextMaker now inserts the style reference field into the text The field then automatically searches for text formatted with the specified para graph style It first searches backwards towards the beginning of the document If nothing is found in this direction it also searches forwards towards the end of the document As soon as text formatted in the given style is found the field displays that text Thus if you had chosen e g the paragraph style Heading 1 the field displays the main heading of the text segment where it was inserted Given that all headings in the document have been formatted with the paragraph style Heading 1 If no matching text is found the field displays an error message like Style refer ence no matching text found In that case make sure you have s
639. xt wrapping around frames 256 260 TextArt objects drawing 286 289 properties 290 TextMaker file format 505 506 TextMaker for DOS file format 505 507 keyboard mapping 569 TextMaker Professional 15 16 Thesaurus language selection 318 use 331 Thesaurus Tools menu 331 Tile Horizontally Window menu 519 Tile Vertically Window menu 519 Time 161 see Print time Time last changed 161 163 Title bar 23 TMBAK files 496 499 Tmw dbf 341 342 TOC 418 TODAY function 396 398 Toolbars 25 Toolbars View menu 560 Tools gt Automatic Hyphenation 328 330 535 537 Tools gt Berlitz 332 333 Tools gt Bibliography Bibliography Settings 428 429 430 Generate Bibliography 431 432 Insert Bibliography Field 429 Tools gt Changes Next Change 455 456 Options 456 Previous Change 455 Review All Changes 455 456 Show Changes 455 456 Track Changes 454 455 Tools gt Check Spelling 321 Tools gt Comments 447 Automatically Show Comments Pane 450 451 452 Manual TextMaker 2016 Delete Comment 449 Edit Comment 449 Insert Comment 448 Next Comment 451 Options 451 Previous Comment 451 Tools gt Create Database 363 Tools gt Customize Keyboard Mappings 568 Toolbars 564 Tools gt Edit Database 340 Tools gt Edit Script 515 Tools gt Edit User Dictionaries 327 Tools gt Generate Table of Contents 418 419 432 Tools gt Generate Table of Figures 424 432 Tools gt Index Add Index Entry
640. xtMaker s automatic suppression of empty spaces and lines may not be desirable To prevent such suppression use protected space characters in place of normal space characters You can insert them with the key combination Ctr1 Shifta Space An example your form letter contains the following text segment FIRSTNAME lt protected space character gt NAME Here the space character is printed even if FIRSTNAME is empty Moreover the line is not suppressed even if both fields are empty 378 eo Form letters and form faxes Manual TextMaker 2016 Calculations in the text With TextMaker you can easily perform calculations in your documents m You can insert calculations directly into the text the results are displayed and printed m You can even use variables in calculations so you can obtain partial results and use these in further calculations m You can use both database fields and the contents of objects in calculations For example Table1 A1 represents the content of cell A1 in table Table1 You perform calculations with the Insert gt Calculation command The dialog box that appears when you invoke this command facilitates the entry of formulas it contains lists of all variables database fields functions and operators available What makes the calculation capabilities especially useful is the fact that they allow the contents of database fields to be included in the calculations Writing an in voi
641. xtMaker will then ask you if you want to remove the link Picture frames A picture frame differs from a picture that is inserted directly into the text see the chapter Pictures beginning on page 215 in the following way Picture frames like all other types of frames occupy a fixed position on the page Thus they do not move when you add or remove text above the frame In this section you will find detailed information on working with picture frames The following topics are covered Inserting picture frames m Changing the properties of picture frames See the next pages for details Inserting picture frames To insert a picture frame proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Object gt New Picture Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively click on the Tal icon in the Object toolbar 2 A dialog box appears allowing you to select the picture that you want to be displayed in the frame Choose a picture file and confirm with OK 3 The picture frame is inserted If necessary you can change its position by dragging it with your mouse To adjust its size drag one of the handles on its corners Manual TextMaker 2016 Frames and drawings e 279 No special action is required to insert a picture frame on top of existing body text the text is automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the frame Dialog options The options in the dialog box for this command are as foll
642. y you can modify paragraph styles whenever you like 132 e Styles Manual TextMaker 2016 Important Changing a paragraph style automatically changes the formatting of all paragraphs to which that style is applied However this automatic reformat ting is limited for any paragraphs to which manual paragraph formatting has also been applied see the next section To edit a paragraph style proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the style to be modified from the list 3 Click on Edit 4 Make the desired changes in the style 5 Click on OK 6 Exit the dialog box with Close The style is modified according to your edits Choosing which styles to show in the list By default the dialog mentioned above lists only styles that are in use or have been modified by the user If you want it to display all styles available choose All styles in the Show option This will display all predefined styles as well Updating a style to match existing text The Update from text button in the dialog can be used to update a style to match the currently selected text As a result the chosen style will be changed in a way that it uses exactly the same formatting options as that text Proceed as follows 1 Set up the paragraph format indents line spacing alignment etc of one or more paragraphs to your liking 2 Place the text cursor inside one of these paragraphs or select the paragraphs either will do
643. y the following settings m Layout On this tab you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See section Object properties Layout tab beginning on page 256 Format For changing the size of the object See section Object properties Format tab beginning on page 262 Filling For changing the filling of the object Not supported by all OLE applica tions See section Object properties Filling tab beginning on page 263 m Lines For adding border lines See section Object properties Lines tab beginning on page 265 m Shadow For adding a shadow See section Object properties Shadow tab beginning on page 266 m Effects For adding various types of effects See section Object properties Effects tab beginning on page 268 m Properties For modifying common object settings See section Object proper ties Properties tab beginning on page 269 284 e Frames and drawings Manual TextMaker 2016 For OLE objects there is an additional tab with further options Picture tab On the Picture tab you can change settings that affect the graphical representation of the OLE object Note Depending on the application associated with the OLE object some of the options may be not supported Options available Variants In this list a number of pre defined variations of the object are presented for example different col
644. you can make use of the expanded options to specify the posi tion Position The Position options allow you to specify how the object is to be aligned Option Effect Top Bottom Centered The object is positioned from the top If the offset is 2 in for example the top of the object will be positioned 2 in from the top edge of the page top page margin etc The object is positioned from the bottom If the offset is 2 in for example the bottom of the object will be positioned 2 in from the bottom of the page bottom page margin etc The object is positioned from the center For example if the offset is O in the object is centered on the page If the offset is 2 in the center of the object is positioned 2 in below the center of the page etc Relative to With the Relative to options you specify the document element that should serve as a reference for the Offset Option Effect Page Page borders Paragraph Top margin Bottom margin etc The offset is relative to the page more precisely to the page edges The page margins are not taken into account The offset is relative to the page margins If you in crease or decrease the margins the object will move accordingly The offset is relative to the position of the paragraph to which it is anchored Note When you select this option the object moves with the paragraph If you insert a new line of text above the paragraph the obje
645. you like by simply repeating step 4 Manual TextMaker 2016 Paragraph formatting 93 Of course you can always modify the line settings step 3 before you apply the line step 4 6 When done confirm with OK For more information on each of the options in this dialog see below Changing or removing existing border lines You can change the style thickness or color of existing border lines anytime and of course you can also remove border lines To do so invoke the Format gt Bor ders dialog again and proceed as follows Modifying To modify the appearance of a line first choose the desired settings style thickness color Then click on the line of interest in the preview or on its button in order to apply the line there m Removing To remove a border line click on it in the preview or on its button twice Clicking once applies a line to a border clicking once more removes it again Hint The None button displayed above the preview removes all lines at once Dialog options In detail the dialog box for border lines contains the following options Line style Determines the kind of line to be drawn single double dashed etc Thickness Determines the width of the line m Color Here you can change the colors of the line You can use the colors presented or colors that you compose yourself see section Document properties Colors tab beginning on page 550 94 e Paragraph formatting Manua
646. you save a document This copy contains the previous i e last saved version of the document It is saved as a file with the name extension BAK stored in the same folder as the document For example when you save the document LETTER TMD the existing LET TER TMD file is first renamed LETTER BAK and then the edited document is saved under the name LETTER TMD This option is identical to the Create backup files option in previous versions of SoftMaker Office m Advanced backup With this option multiple generations of backup copies are kept for each document All of these copies are stored in a special Backup folder Tip When this option is selected also the File gt Revert to Previous Version command becomes available It provides a comfortable means of returning to a previous version of the current document see below Additional options Folder for backup files Here you can change the location of the Backup folder in which all backup copies are stored Number of backup files per document Here you can specify the maximum number of backup copies generations to be kept for each document How to use the File gt Return to Previous Version command When you have the selected the Advanced Backup option see above all backup copies are stored in a special Backup folder This folder is maintained automatical Manual TextMaker 2016 Document management e 497 ly by the application It is not recommended to move o
647. ype group box 5 Confirm with OK Dialog options The Bullets amp Simple numbering tab in the Format gt Bullets and Numbering dialog box allows you to make the following settings for bullets m Type Here you can specify either a Bullet or Numbering for the paragraph So for bullets you select the Bullet option For more information about numberings see the section Simple enumerations beginning on page 172 If you set the Type to None any existing bulleting or numbering is removed You can transform a bulleted list into a numbered list any time you like by changing the Type to Numbering Naturally you can also do the opposite Default and Custom Here you can select the bullet to be used Predefined bullets are presented in the Default row The bullets presented in the Custom row can be edited to create user defined bullets see below Color default bullets only You can select a different color for the bullet from the Color dropdown list The default colors presented in this list can always be supplemented with colors you compose yourself see section Document properties Colors tab begin ning on page 550 Tip If you set the color to Auto TextMaker will automatically set the color of the bullet to the color assigned to the paragraph at its right m Size default bullets only Here you can change the size in points of the bullet as required Tip If you select the option Auto Tex
648. zing keyboard Shortcuts eee ecceeceseceseceseceseceecaeecaeeeseseeeeeneeneees 568 Activating a keyboard mapping 0 eee ee eeceeesceeeeeseceecesecsecsaecseeeneeens 569 Creating a new keyboard Mapping eee ee eeeeeeceeeceeecesecesecsneceeeaeeens 570 Renaming or deleting a keyboard mapping ee ee cess cese cee esse eeeeee 570 Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping eeeeeeseceseceee tees ee eeeee 571 Resetting the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping ee cece este ceeeeeeeeeeeee 573 USB the grid senan eeen re E aE ari esas 573 USING BULGES 5 E S EE 574 Installing additional dictionaries eee eeeecesecesecsseceseceeecaeeeseseeeeeeeeeeees 577 Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Windows eeeeeeeeeeeee 578 Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Android ceeeeeeeeeeeee 578 Installing additional SoftMaker dictionaries Linux eeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 579 Installing Hunspell dictionaries eee eee eeceeecesecesecesecesecsaecseeeneeens 579 Choosing a different dictionary for a language eee eee eee cree ereeeee 580 Keyboard shortcuts 581 Keyboard shortcuts for menu commands 1 00 0 eee eee cseecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenerees 581 Keyboard shortcuts for editing text oe eee cece cesecnsecseeceecaeeeseeeeeeneeeeeens 584 Index 587 xiv e Contents Manual TextMaker 2016 Welcome Welcome to TextMaker You have purchased a word processor that combines user friendliness with powerful

Manual TextMaker 2016

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents